Minimising peat excavation is crucial to avoid carbon emissions, protect biodiversity and ensure downstream water quality. Building on peatlands inevitably results in the excavation and disturbance of peat. To inform how best to balance the benefits of renewable energy projects with the requirement to protect and restore peatland habitats, there is a need to gather evidence on the impacts and opportunities regarding the reuse of excavated peat. 

This project investigates the opportunities, impacts, and challenges associated with the reuse of excavated peat from windfarm construction sites. From a  review of published evidence, stakeholder discussions and site visits to peatland wind farms, the researchers have proposed identified three main issues and made three recommendations. 

Issues  

Issue 1: Avoidance of peat excavation: As a critical first step to protect peatland, biodiversity, and maintain water cycle connectivity, peat excavation must be minimised. 

Issue 2: Preparation and planning issues: Site surveys often lack the requisite detail to effectively avoid deep peat areas during construction leading to problems with removal of greater volumes of peat than expected that require reuse.  

Issue 3: Carbon storage: Accurate carbon calculations are needed to fully understand the impact of the wind farm. However, this study found that more peat is often excavated than planned, highlighting the need for greater accuracy in carbon excavation measurements.  

Recommendations 

Recommendation 1: The development of guidance for site planning and peat reuse hierarchy and principles. The guidance should aim to avoid or minimise peat excavation wherever possible and identify locally relevant reuse options. And use of hierarchy and guiding pronicples of peat reuse should aim to maximise the positive environmental outcomes.  

Recommendation 2: Create an environmental outcomes framework to ensure a balanced approach to peat reuse. The framework should prioritise minimising carbon loss, promoting positive biodiversity outcomes and ensuring downstream water quality. 

Recommendation 3: Enhance monitoring of environmental outcomes from reuse of peat to improve and inform the reuse hierarchy and implementation of best practice techniques. This should include:  

  • Monitoring accurate peat excavation volumes at the end of construction to build a dataset to be used within the sector for more accurate carbon calculations and reuse planning.  
  • Regular monitoring of wetness of the peat, carbon fluxes and vegetation surveys to understand the broader environmental impact of peat reuse.  
  • Greater data sharing and collaboration between energy companies and the academic community to refine the reuse hierarchy and best practice in the field. 

For further information, please read the report.

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783. 

Research completed: January 2025

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6333

Executive summary

Minimising peat excavation is crucial in order to avoid carbon emissions, protect biodiversity and ensure downstream water quality. Built development on peatlands results in the excavation and disturbance of peat. In order to ensure evidence-based planning and consenting decisions there is a need to gather evidence on the impacts and opportunities regarding the reuse of excavated peat. This will help to inform how best to balance the benefits of renewable energy with the need to protect and restore peatland habitats, ensuring sustainable development practices.

This project investigates the opportunities, impacts, and challenges associated with the reuse of excavated peat from windfarm construction sites. It provides a greater understanding of the current knowledge concerning wind farm development on peatland, peat and peaty soils across Scotland. We propose a hierarchy of peat reuse options based on environmental impact and offer recommendations for data collection and monitoring to enhance the evidence base.

The research combined a review of published evidence with stakeholder engagement and site visits.

Findings

We found very little academic research specifically investigating best practice for the reuse of peat on windfarms. We therefore used stakeholder discussions and site visits to understand the current situation, what is occurring at different sites within Scotland, and likely environmental costs and benefits of different reuse options.

Key issues

Avoidance of peat excavation: Minimising peat excavation is crucial. As a critical first step of the mitigation hierarchy, different stakeholders agree the need to limit volumes to protect peatland, biodiversity, and maintain hydrological connectivity.

Preparation and planning issues: Site surveys often lack the requisite detail to effectively avoid deep peat areas during construction. It also leads to problems with planning how to reuse greater volumes of peat than expected. Additional training for construction operatives would enable them to minimise peat disturbance and maintain the excavated peat’s structure.

Carbon storage: Accurate carbon calculations are needed to fully understand the impact of the wind farm. However, this study found that more peat is often excavated than planned, highlighting the need for greater accuracy in carbon excavation measurements. Monitoring the condition of reused peat is also necessary to enable better understanding of carbon storage and other ecosystem services.

There are a range of construction activities that result in the excavation of peat, such as the construction and maintenance of roads and tracks, compounds and substations, crane pads and turbine blade laydown areas, cabling, drainage ditches and borrow pits. The main reuse methods include borrowpit reinstatement, restoration activities and landscaping. These reuse options may have varying environmental outcomes (Table 1), consideration for which needs to be part of the planning process when constructing a wind farm and planning the reuse of excavated peat within the project.

Recommendations

Recommendation 1: Guidance on excavation peat reuse

Because detailed evidence to confirm the different environmental outcomes is not available, we recommend a simple hierarchy of peat reuse options accompanied by additional guidance and requirements, which are essential for maximising environmental outcomes. We recommend this comprises:

  • Recommendation 1a: Preparation and planning steps:
    • Avoid / minimise peat excavation wherever possible and
    • Appraise site circumstances and locally relevant potential reuse options
  • Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of peat reuse
  • Recommendation 1c: Peat reuse implementation principles: to guide the site-specific choice of methods and implementation to maximise environmental outcomes.

The hierarchy is not useable as a standalone guide – it must be accompanied by the additional components – as shown in Figure 1 below.

Figure 1 Guidance for Excavated Peat Reuse

 

Recommendation 2: Environmental outcomes framework

To ensure the multiple potential environmental benefits of peat reuse are considered, avoiding a single-issue focus.

To ensure a balanced approach to peat reuse, we recommend targeting the following environmental outcomes:

  • Minimising carbon loss: Reducing carbon emissions from excavated peat.
  • Positive biodiversity outcomes: Achieving biodiversity goals at both local and national levels.
  • Ensuring downstream water quality: Minimising sediment and nutrient load in water bodies.

Recommendation 3: Enhanced monitoring of environmental outcomes from reuse of peat

Enhanced research and monitoring are required to improve and inform the reuse hierarchy and implementation of best practice techniques going forward:

  • Post-construction assessment: Providing accurate peat excavation volumes at the end of construction to build a dataset to be used within the sector for more accurate carbon calculations and reuse planning.
  • Post-construction monitoring: Regular monitoring of wetness of the peat, carbon fluxes and vegetation surveys to understand the broader environmental impact of peat reuse.
  • Data sharing and collaboration: Encouraging greater data sharing and collaboration between energy companies and the academic community to refine the reuse hierarchy and best practice in the field.

Next steps and future research

These results highlight our current understanding of peat reuse methods occurring in wind farm construction in Scotland. We have highlighted which environmental issues are critical and how the reuse of peat can maintain the habitat, allowing for environmentally conscious construction techniques to take precedence.

However, a clear conclusion from the information gained during this process is that planning prior to construction is key, as well as ensuring that stakeholders work together to achieve best practice.

After these main outcomes from the hierarchy, the attention needs to focus on delivering site specific reuse. It also became apparent that although there is a lot of knowledge within the peatland and wind farm sectors, there have been limited studies collecting data to inform best practice. This needs to be encouraged to understand current research gaps and advise on the right management methods to reduce peatland degradation in the long term.

Table 1: Synthesis of reuse options and simplified overview of potential environmental outcomes (Note: this table summarises potential outcomes indicated by research during this study, but evidence is limited and site-by-site circumstances vary significantly so currently this differentiation on environmental grounds cannot be fully reflected in the recommended ‘hierarchy of peat reuse’.)

Method of reuse

Carbon store

Hydrology connectivity

Availability

Comment

Borrow pit reinstatement

++

Low risk of carbon loss

Low chance of carbon sequestration (carbon increase) in the long term

+

Only if well planned, with impermeable layers and outflows built in

+++

Large storage potential, should have capacity for all excavated peat, however where there is more (or less) peat than planned may lead to issues

Borrow pits have potential to provide an environmentally robust reuse option, however only if best practice is followed and there are contingencies in place if changes in planned volumes occur

Around turbine foundations and crane pad verges

High risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion

When constructed these areas will automatically have drainage channels cut. The reuse of peat here will likely be impacted by this drainage

+

Small volume

Use to encourage vegetation re-growth around construction areas. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape

Side of road/ track or “landscaping”

Risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion, however if vegetation regrowth occurs this is less likely

Addition of peat should connect the reused peat with wider environment to maintain hydrology, however this depends on flow patterns and drainage channels across roads

+

Small volume

If vegetation regrowth occurs and there is limited bare peat this has potential to become part of the wider landscape

Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects

+++

Low risk of carbon loss, has potential to build carbon (dependent on restoration / reuse project)

+++

If well planned, should have hydrological connectivity with landscape

+

Small volume

Usually these projects are highly monitored to assess progress – useful for data gathering in the short term alongside the benefits of using excavated peat in areas that may have been degraded previously

 

 

Glossary

Acrotelm

The upper of two layers in peatland system. Acrotelmic peat consist of fresh or newly decomposed peat forming vegetation and is generally quite fibrous This layer possesses some tensile strength and depending on the height of the water table can be anoxic.

Arisings

Excavated material that is created during excavation and construction activities.

Blanket Bog

A type of peatland that is relatively rare globally, however, commonly found in Scotland, due to its cool, wet climate. Blanket bogs are characterised by a peat depth of 0.5 to 3m, situated on flat or gentle slopes and have poor drainage (see ‘Raised Bog’ below as alternative type).

Borrow pit

In windfarm development, an excavation site (or quarry) where materials like soil, gravel, or rock are dug up for use in the construction. These materials are typically used for building access roads, turbine foundations, and other infrastructure.

Catotelm

The lower of two layers in a peatland system. Catotelmic peat consist of waterlogged, highly decomposed dense organic material with low tensile strength. This layer is highly amorphous and tends to disrupt completely on excavation causing difficulty with handling and storage.

Dissolved organic carbon

Organic carbon compounds that can pass through a filter with a maximum pore size of 0.7 micrometres.

EU Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC)

A European directive for the protection and conservation of natural habitats and of wild fauna and flora which has been transposed into Scottish legislation through the Habitats regulations, amended in 2021 post EU exit. https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/1992/43/oj/eng

Peat

Peat is an organic material that forms in cool, waterlogged conditions. It consists of partially decomposed organic matter, primarily plant material and no mineral fraction. Over time, the accumulation of this organic material creates a peat and peaty soil that are rich in carbon.

Peat soil

Also referred as organic soil, in Scotland it is defined as soil with a surface peat layer with more than 60% organic matter and of at least 50cm thickness.

Peaty soil

Organo-mineral soil which have a shallow peat layer at the surface (less than 50cm thickness) over mineral layers.

Peatland

Peatland is defined by the presence of peat soil or peaty soil types. This means that “peat-forming” vegetation is growing and actively forming peat, or it has been grown and formed peat at some point in the past. It is a type of wetland ecosystem where peat material accumulates. These areas are characterized by waterlogged conditions that slow down the decomposition of organic matter, leading to the formation of peat. Peatlands have a specific type of vegetation, are rich in biodiversity and play a crucial role in carbon storage. Peatlands can include blanket bog, upland raised bog, lowland raised bog and fens.

Peatland Management Plan

A Peatland Management Plan used in development projects on peat typically includes several key components to ensure the sustainable use and conservation of peatland ecosystems. The plan describes baseline peat conditions, detail on excavation and reuse volumes and potential impact, how the peat will be handled, stored, or reused once extracted. This is an integral part of consent conditions.

Piled foundations

Deep foundations that use long, thin columns (piles) driven or drilled into the ground to support wind turbine structures. These foundations are essential for ensuring stability, especially in areas with weak or variable soil conditions and high-water tables. Also reduce the volume of peat needed to be excavated.

Priority peatland habitat

Peatland habitats can be divided into four broad classes (blanket bog, upland raised bog, lowland raised bog and fen), depending on the types of plants that formed the peat. Priority peatland habitats are sub-sets of these broad habitats which have been recognised under the Scottish Biodiversity Framework as being important to protect for their conservation and biodiversity value.

Raised Bog

A type of wetland characterized by a dome-shaped surface of peat, formed by the accumulation of partially decayed plant matter, which rises above the surrounding groundwater levels and is primarily fed by rainfall rather than groundwater.

Reinstatement

Using peat and/or peatland vegetation that has been removed or excavated during the construction of a development, often surrounding infrastructure. This form of peat use involves protecting excavated peat, and returning it to where it was taken from, in its original order (acrotelm overlying catotelm). This should aim to reinstate the hydrology of the returned material to support peatland function following best practice, although full return of function is very difficult to achieve.

Restoration

Carrying out interventions which in combination with natural processes restores the hydrological function, coverage and condition of peatland habitat vegetation, resulting in a peatland that is actively forming peat and hence sequestering carbon. Further detail will be stated in the forthcoming Scotland’s Peatland Standard.

Revegetation

Using excavated peat and/or vegetation in the surrounding construction infrastructure or for landscaping. This form of peat use will often result in revegetation but may not result in functioning peatland. Nevertheless, it can have a role in protecting the surrounding peatland conserving carbon and biodiversity providing that best practice is followed.

Abbreviations

CO2

Carbon dioxide

DOC

Dissolved organic carbon

ECoW

Ecological Clerk of Works

GHG

Greenhouse Gas

IUCN

The International Union for Conservation of Nature

ha

Hectares

HRA

Habitats Regulations Appraisal

km

Kilometres

kWh

Kilowatt-hour

m

meters

MW

Megawatt

NPF4

National Planning Framework

PEAG

The Scottish Government’s Peatland Expert Advisory Group

PMP

Peatland Management Plan

POC

Particulate organic carbon

REA

Rapid evidence assessment

SEPA

Scottish Environment Protection Agency

WMLR

Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations

Introduction

Aims and scope

This project explored opportunities, impacts and challenges for the reuse of excavated peat from windfarm development sites. It is intended to inform application of National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), regarding the development of wind farms on peatland, peat and peaty soils. It aimed to provide recommendations for a hierarchy of peat reuse options based on environmental impact along with recommendations for data collection and monitoring to continually improve and update the evidence base.

The project focused on gathering evidence of impacts and opportunities for excavated peat reuse on-site but also considered potential for positive off-site opportunities. Evidence of environmental costs and benefits in terms of emissions, peatland function, habitat, biodiversity, hydrology, stability and structure in relation to reuse practices was evaluated.

Defining ‘reuse of peat’ for this report

This report was commissioned to understand the reuse of peat on wind farm sites during the construction process. We recognise there are differing definitions of “reuse”.

Throughout the study we adopted the definition of “reuse” of peat as:

the use of peat and/or peatland vegetation that has been excavated during the construction of a wind farm.

In this context, the “reuse” of peat can involve reinstatement, revegetation or restoration processes both onsite and offsite, during the construction of a wind farm.

Research methods

A combination of research methods were used:

  • A Rapid Evidence Assessment to gather and evaluate the academic literature and other relevant studies.
  • Desk-based evaluation of existing wind farm developments on peatland in Scotland to understand current practices.
  • Site visits to active and completed wind farm developments on peatland to observe examples of reuse practices in situ.
  • Stakeholder engagement, via discussions during site visits, individual research interviews and a workshop to complement desk-research.

It was anticipated that there was limited literature available – in the absence of this, the site visits and stakeholder engagement were critical to the project. Full details of methods are provided in the Appendices.

Background

Scotland is committed to reaching net zero by 2045, how we use and manage our land is vital to achieving this, including the use of land to produce renewable energy. Balancing the benefits from renewable energy with land-based emissions and nature and biodiversity goals is vital, particularly where wind farms intersect with sensitive habitats, like peatland and on carbon-rich soils.

Globally, peatlands are the largest terrestrial carbon store estimated to hold 660 gigatonnes of carbon and 10% of non-glacial freshwater, however, only 17% of these ecosystems are protected (Austin et al., 2025). Globally, 20% of all blanket bogs are located within the UK and Ireland[1]. In Scotland alone, blanket bogs cover around 1.8 million hectares, which is 23% of the land area (Ferretto et al., 2019). Situating new wind farms in the right location is crucial. Although wind farm developments are expected to save carbon emissions by offsetting fossil energy sources (Renou-Wilson and Farrell, 2009), where wind farms are situated on peatlands, there is a risk of land-based carbon emissions, negating the reduction associated with offsetting fossil energy sources. The quality of the peatland habitat is an important factor, as areas that are already degraded and emitting carbon, could be improved through restoration of the whole environment. When applications are made for wind farm construction there are often enhancement conditions attached to these new developments leading to restoration, but some restoration may have been necessary without the wind farm construction occurring. Peatland condition categories[2] range from pristine, near natural, modified, drained and actively eroding in relation to GHG emissions and restoration potential. Historically, Scotland’s peatlands have not been protected across the whole habitat, with afforestation being prioritised up until recently. Wind farm construction in these areas, is likely to lead to environmental improvements, with stakeholders working together to reduce peatland degradation and ambitious programmes of peatland restoration being undertaken.


[1] https://www.wwt.org.uk/discover-wetlands/wetlands/peat-bogs

[2] https://www.nature.scot/sites/default/files/2023-02/Guidance-Peatland-Action-Peatland-Condition-Assessment-Guide-A1916874.pdf

Research findings

Availability of literature

Overall, the literature searches presented over fifty academic studies and governmental reports, which provided useful information related to the impact of landscape management on peatland as well as some interactions between peatland and wind farm developments. However, there were no empirical studies monitoring changes in reused peat on windfarm developments over time. This is a major research gap. Understanding how the reuse of peat may change the peat itself had to be extrapolated from studies measuring changes within laboratories or evaluations of the landscape scale after a number of years since wind farm construction had occurred. Studies did consider the impact of peat excavation on the environment, hydrology and risks of erosion or the degradation of the peatland habitat. The literature did present a large number of studies focusing on the restoration of peatland habitats, however, these were not readily extrapolatable to the current study on reuse of peat, as the parameters related to restoration are substantially different. A large number of the papers and reports were focused on the Scottish environment which suggests that Scotland is leading the way in this area of research.

Summary of stakeholder engagement achieved

We obtained contributions from 31 individuals during our stakeholder engagement (for a more in-depth synopsis of stakeholder engagement findings see Appendix). Stakeholders highlighted what they viewed as the positive features of some reuse options, such as where the water flows in borrow pits (one method of peat reuse) have been managed to keep the water table near the surface. Stakeholders we spoke to were aware of the gaps in evidence and lack of specific studies and so based their views on their own observations or monitoring on sites they were involved with. Overall stakeholders agreed that a number of factors need to be considered carefully to have any chance of achieving optimal environmental outcomes from reuse of peat on windfarm sites – simply putting peat in a convenient location on site would not be beneficial as peat would dry out, erode or lose its structure and functioning. Key considerations were – what was the condition of peat prior to excavation, the need to plan how to minimise disturbance, handling, drying and transport of peat after excavation, consideration of the water levels and flows, vegetation cover and the stability of reused peat in situ.

Summary of site research conducted

During five site visits across varied locations in Scotland, a range of different peat reuse practices were observed including:

  • different approaches to infilling borrow pits,
  • use in landscaping (for example alongside tracks or to cover cables),
  • infill of other site features including historical peat cuttings,
  • incorporation of peat into peatland restoration.

Across sites the condition of peat prior to excavation and reuse varied, as did the nature of reuse even where the same general type of reuse was used, for example borrow pit size, shape, fill level, structure, hydrology and vegetation varied across sites where this practice was used. For more information related to site visits see the Appendix.

Summary of literature and stakeholder research findings

In Scotland, peatlands store over 2,735 million tonnes of carbon covering approximately two million hectares (Smith et al., 2007), equating to around 25% of Scotland’s land area. These peatlands are often considered good candidates for onshore wind farms due to the windy and exposed environments they are located in and because they are often considered poor (or unprofitable) for other land uses, like forestry and farming activities.

The main construction activities which result in substantial disturbance for a wind farm development are track construction for maintenance and access roads, trenches for cabling, quarried aggregate extraction (borrow pits) and turbine foundation excavation. This large-scale disturbance can affect peat stability, degradation (such as habitat condition, plant assemblages, carbon storage, etc), as well as the hydrology of the habitat. Other disturbances are related to building infrastructure to support the wind farm development like crane pad constructions, temporary and permanent compounds, as well as substations to join the electricity generated to the grid. Estimates of the direct disturbance to the peatland habitat per wind turbine vary greatly but have been reported to be between 0.2 to 1 hectare per turbine, with the turbines within a wind farm usually taking up less than 10% of the wind farm area (Sander et al., 2024). However, if this area is on deep peatland, there will be greater environmental impact, than on shallow peat or mineral soils.

Larger turbines, which are more widely spaced (typically on a 300-500 m grid, with the distance between turbines around five times rotor diameter), capture energy on a much smaller spatial ‘footprint’ than smaller ones on wind farms (Renou-Wilson and Farrell, 2009). However, this is also site-dependent and varies if repowering occurs, as repowering may use the same footprint as the previous turbines, or it could locate the turbines at a new area within the development, thus increasing the environmental impact.

Construction of a wind farm requires a significant array of associated infrastructure to be installed, this infrastructure may have impacts on the surrounding peatland either through the removal of peat from that habitat, removal and replacement of peat in less suitable locations or reducing the quality of the environment within the area the peat was moved to, compression, flooding, drainage, erosion or mass movement of the peat (Lindsay, 2018). Active peatlands are hydrologically linked and naturally stabilised therefore if hydrologically disrupted, the stability can be lost (Wawrzyczek et al., 2018). An unstable habitat can lead to wider environmental problems, with issues greater than just carbon loss, for example peat slides.

Peat and windfarms in Scotland

Peat is an amorphous organic deposit, considered to be the largest terrestrial carbon store. Peat is highly compressible and porous consisting of up to 90% water by volume. Active peat-forming mire has also been found to be effective in delaying storm run-off, reducing soil erosion and retaining inorganic nutrients when it is undrained (Bragg, 2002).

Across Europe it has been calculated that 25% of peatlands are degraded (Tanneberger et al., 2021). Under the EU Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC), there are 36 European regions with designated blanket bogs and of these, 12 have wind farm developments, including 644 wind turbines, 253 km of vehicular access tracks and an affected area of ~208 hectares, mainly in Ireland and Scotland where the extent of peatland is also higher (Chico et al., 2023). However, when this is compared to the Scottish soil maps, the extent of wind farm developments in Scotland on peatland is even higher, with 1,063 wind turbines and 635 km of vehicular access tracks on peatland in Scotland alone according to national inventory data (Chico et al., 2023).

Currently, 48% of wind farms in Scotland have already been built on peat[1] with this number likely to increase in the future. Wind farm developments can have an impact on the peatland habitats and emissions, during construction, operation, and decommissioning stages. This reduces the wind farms’ ability to reach the goal of net zero. Using a carbon calculator[2] to assess the carbon saving of wind farm developments compared to carbon lost through construction on Scottish peatland provides guidance on a wind farm’s carbon footprint. However, due to the heterogeneity of peatlands and the lack of detail at the required scale when completing peatland surveys pre-planning, it has been found that the amount of peat excavated is often more than the amounts used within the carbon calculations.


[1] John Muir Trust – Scotland’s peatland policy update.

[2] https://www.gov.scot/publications/carbon-calculator-for-wind-farms-on-scottish-peatlands-factsheet/

Current practices: excavation

Both in discussion with stakeholders and within the literature, the instability of peat deposits was highlighted, with small movements leading to slope terracing, slumps or the collapse of peat banks – these events are relatively common. Furthermore, disturbed peat can lose more than 50% of its strength compared to undisturbed peat and, in many cases, behaves as a viscous material that will readily flow, particularly when affected by high rainfall (Jennings and Kane, 2015). These inherent properties of peat carry risk and need to be considered during the wind farm construction process as the destabilisation of peat mass through drainage or excavation operations could lead to an increase in landslides / bog flow events (Dykes, 2022).

From discussions with stakeholders, it is clear that the exact volume of peat to be excavated can differ from estimates calculated in the EIA at application stage. This is usually due to a combination of initially unknown factors prior to the construction process – the exact depth, viscosity and bulk density of the peat material that needs to be excavated. Calculations are usually based on predefined excavation requirements for the size of the turbine alongside average peat depths for the area provided by preliminary site surveys, using an interpolated model of a peat depth probe survey. However, the depth of peat can also vary significantly over time, with changes in the peatland hydrology, leading to peat shrinkage occurring during drought conditions (Morton and Heinemeyer, 2019). Thus the timing of peat surveys may affect peat excavation calculations, as well as the scale of the survey and heterogeneity of the habitat. Table 2 describes common reasons for excavation as part of the construction process and how they differ in approach.

Table 2. Common reasons for excavation on site and how they differ in approach when applied to peat and peatland.

Excavation types

Approach

Construction and maintenance of roads and tracks

Significant lengths of tracks need to be created linking wind turbines and wind farm infrastructure. The main methods that can be implemented are either cut and fill or to introduce floating roads. These roads will impact the drainage of the surrounding peatland by blocking or modifying flow and if floating the peat below can also be compressed, exacerbating drainage issues.

Construction of crane pads

Crane Pads are usually located adjacent to the turbine foundations to facilitate turbine components being lifted during turbine erection and future maintenance or repairs. Depending on the load, crane pads are usually unpaved, however, compacted with layers of gravel. For some installations, the turbine foundation is used as a crane pad after initial construction.

Turbine blade laydown areas

A designated space near the turbine foundation where large components are stored before installation. These are often temporary excavations and reinstated after construction.

Cabling

Usually installed along tracks so typically does not require additional excavation, although may require a small amount of disturbance and/or influence the scheduling of any reinstatement following tracks.

Turbine base

The digging of the foundations of turbine bases generates large volumes of peat that need to be reused. They also introduce alkaline concrete into the environment which may impact the pH of the surrounding habitat and may require drainage installation to protect the foundation and avoid uplift.

Compounds and substations

Temporary compounds provide facilities for workers and equipment. Substations are usually permanent installations, often with steel frames and cladding, crucial for power collection and transmission. The peat needs to be removed, before a hardstanding area is laid, using gravel. These areas also need to be linked to the access roads early in the construction process.

Drainage ditches

Drainage is necessary around wind turbine foundations and wind farm infrastructure to maintain integrity and is usually a permanent feature of the windfarm. Often this leads to a lowering of water levels associated with drainage around infrastructure. Drainage may impact a much wider area than the drain margin and as well as lowering water levels surface subsidence may also occur.

Borrow pit

The volume of peat excavated depends on the depth at which usable aggregate materials are found. The quantity and quality of aggregate in the borrow pit can be hard to judge before the pit is opened so the volume of excavated peat may be higher or lower than anticipated.

Roads and tracks

Construction and maintenance roads and tracks are the most extensive direct impact of a wind farm on peatland as the roads need to allow access to every turbine, plus all the other infrastructure buildings but could also provide access to areas for restoration and enhancement activities. Initially, roads were just cuttings made on shallower peat down to the mineral base. However, this meant that the roads were lower than the surrounding peatland and frequently led to drainage issues.

Construction methods have adapted from just cuttings to the ‘cut and fill’ method (where the peat is dug out until the mineral subsoil is reached and backfilling the trench with aggregate until the road is around the same level as the surrounding bog surface (Lindsay, 2018)) or the preferred method of floating roads (using a geotextile mesh on top of deep peat). Floating roads have limited peat removal as a geotextile mesh is laid on top of the peat, with aggregate poured on top. Another geogrid may then be added with more aggregate before the final ‘running surface’ is laid (Lindsay, 2018).

Stakeholders described how the design of the road network through a wind farm is largely driven by the placement of the turbines (often on ridges which may be where the deepest peat is located) and following the contours of slope (increasing the distances of the road network within the peatland habitat). Tracks also need to bear large weights, for example, the cranes used for wind turbine construction can weigh up to 200 tonnes (this also has implications for the construction of crane pads). A study showed the orientation of the road in relation to the flow of water within a peatland had a large impact (Elmes et al., 2022) and led to flow obstruction and changes to the overall hydrology when running perpendicular to the flow in comparison to parallel. However, this sort of nuanced planning is rarely discussed as part of the construction process. Infrastructure like work compounds and substations also require access roads (with drainage). Thus, the size of the area of peat that is disturbed by the development may be greater than first considered.

Drainage

It was highlighted by stakeholders – and during the site visits – that drainage is usually the first construction activity occurring when developing wind farm infrastructure and is often necessary around the turbine bases and accompanying roads and tracks to reduce the risk of surface flooding. Drainage ditches are also excavated around wind farm foundations to improve the stabilisation of the turbine foundations and to protect machinery. This process of draining peatlands is known to be detrimental, causing subsidence through oxidation of the peat (Williams-Mounsey et al., 2021) and carbon loss. However, peat further away from the drainage ditch (> 1m) will only lose 20% of its previous moisture content, with the main effect of peatland drainage leading to removal of surface water rather than deep water-table drawdown (Lindsay, 2014). Drying of the peat may also lead to cracking, which may lead to rainwater penetrating the base of the peat and lubricate the interface between the peat and the mineral subbase (Lindsay, 2018).

Excavation works

Other large-scale disturbances of the peat are through excavation works. This can be for granular material used during construction (taken from borrow pits); excavation of the wind turbine foundations (although piled foundations can reduce the overall negative impact); and trenches for laying cabling/pipework, leading to substantial quantities of peat that may need to be stored prior to reuse. Piled foundations are usually built over deep peat, rather than excavating large quantities of peat; long, thin columns (piles) are driven or drilled into the ground to support wind turbine structures. These foundations reduce the volume of peat needed to be excavated whilst ensuring stability of the structure. Turbine towers experience large forces and must be placed on a solid foundation embedded within the underlying mineral subsoil or bedrock (Lindsay, 2018). Stakeholders said that often large quantities of peat may be deposited on nearby surfaces temporarily, if trucks aren’t continuously available to receive the excavated material, or dependent on the stage of the construction process. However, it is best practice to only move the peat once (to maintain structure and water content) thus, if the requisite planning is in place, a reuse strategy can be implemented where excavated material is moved to its final location in one step.

Stockpiling peat occurs where peat has been excavated and may need to be temporarily stored prior to reuse due to logistical constraints. As well as becoming a potential source of GHG emissions due to its exposure to aerobic conditions, when peat is stored, changes have been observed within its hydrochemistry, leading to it becoming less acidic and less nutrient-rich (Detrey, 2022). Over time, dewatering also occurs, which alters the hydrophysical properties (porosity) of the peat, these are key for sustaining critical peatland ecohydrological functionality (Lehan et al., 2022).

Ground preparation for stablishing crane pads and turbine blade laydown areas often requires excavating peat to create a stable foundation, leading to the removal of substantial peat volumes, with similar issues as discussed related to other excavation works. This will expand the area of impact further away from the turbine, with underlying changes to the hydrology, potential for release of GHG emissions, vegetation changes and degradation of peatland (Wawrzyczek et al., 2018). Some of these areas are temporary. For example, at some sites visited, areas which had previously been turbine blade laydown areas had peat reinstated and vegetation was able to naturally regenerate. However, this only occurs if it is part of the plan created by the developers, as some laydown areas will remain as areas with stable foundations which are available for future use.

Current practices: use of excavated peat – reuse practices

Excavated peat needs to be moved from the excavation site and is often initially stockpiled until an appropriate time for reuse. The time peat is stockpiled can vary substantially and will be impacted by where it was excavated from, the volume, and timing of the excavation related to overall construction of wind farm site. Lehan, et al., (2022) undertook a restoration study, to assess the impact of time on the hydrophysical properties of peat blocks that were stockpiled for 3, 7, 11, and 14 months. In this study, stockpiling peat was differentially impacted dependent on whether it was shallower or deeper peats, where limited impact from stockpiling was observed in the shallower peats, regardless of stockpiling time; however, in the deeper peats as stockpiling time increased there was a decrease in microporosity as well as mobile porosity (drainable porosity) (Lehan et al., 2022). It may be necessary to rewet the peat or aim to keep it wet whilst stockpiled.

Peat that has started to dry out will be less likely to function when reused. When the surface of the peat starts to dry out development of a hydrophobic layer may occur which causes irreversible changes to the ability of peat to be fully rewetted and reduces the infiltration capacity of the peat (Evans et al., 1999), increasing the desiccation of the peat overall and exacerbating the issue over time. There could also be a similar issue occurring around drainage channels, changing the overall hydrology of the habitat. There are a number of different potential reuse practices that occur on site, with varying quantities of peat, depth of peat and aims (Table 3).

Table 3. Generalised overview of current and potential future reuse practices for excavated peat

Reuse practice – onsite

Approach

Borrow pit reinstatement


Borrow pit reinstatement is one of the main sites for the reuse of peat. Guidance from SEPA highlights the WMLR[1] paragraph 9(1)b restriction that spreading on land subject to man-made development including quarry restoration should not exceed up to a maximum of 2 metres depth of material.

[1] https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2011/228/contents


Around turbine foundations and crane pad verges

Use to reinstate the natural habitat and to encourage vegetation re-growth. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape.

Side of road/ track or “landscaping”

This often occurs as a way of managing levels within the wind farm area, particularly where tracks have been constructed as floating and sometimes will become higher than the surrounding peatland. Vegetation at the side of the road and in the deposited material is not often considered and it is assumed natural regeneration will occur.

Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects

This is not standard practice and has to date only occurred as part of research trials in areas directly adjacent to wind farm construction sites, where peat is used as a substrate for other restoration work. Often these sites are already partially disturbed due to the construction process or historically (through forestry, man-made drainage or cuttings).

Examples from stakeholder discussions:

  • used as a substrate to fill drainage ditches as part of wider restoration efforts within previously forested sites
  • used as a substrate in the construction of dams to slow water down and hold within the landscape
  • used to infill sites of historical peat cuttings (between turbines)
  • hag infill in small areas within a degraded peat landscape
  • Incorporating a layer of excavated peat in formerly forested sites undergoing restoration

Offsite use

Literature review referred to some potential ways to reuse peat off-site, but we found no evidence these are practiced in Scotland. All stakeholders stated that offsite reuse of peat does not occur. Suggestions have been made that peat could be used offsite, but these are largely hypothetical.

When excavating peat, it is imperative that the different layers are kept separate (acrotelm, catotelm) and not mixed with the underlying mineral substrate. This is because of the different properties of these layers and mixing will degrade the peat and reduce its function. Although peat excavation during wind farm construction is likely to occur, large excavations of peat should be avoided. Peatland management plans are mandatory when submitting planning applications for wind farm developments on peaty soils (as part of Policy 5 of the NPF4 framework). These plans provide a draft outline of the volume of peat to be excavated and the reuse activities that will be performed as part of the development. The reuse of peat is unlikely to have wider environmental benefits in areas that are not already disturbed by the wind farm construction or considered degraded; depositing excavated peat on undisturbed vegetation is likely to be detrimental.

To prevent the loss of carbon and the increase in GHG emissions which would occur from the degrading peat, it is essential that a considerable time is spent planning prior to the excavation process – reducing the distance the peat is moved, keeping the times the peat is moved to a minimum and understanding the volumes of peat involved. From discussions with a number of stakeholders it was suggested that, although the level of planning and motivations of the energy companies to reuse peat without degrading it is high, it is often dependent on the capabilities and understanding of the operators doing the work. A number of training courses have been organised for the construction sector specifically to improve this. However, these courses are voluntary. Training the construction sector in the importance of peatlands, restoration techniques and sensitivity during construction, will enable greater preservation of this valuable resource. In almost all discussions with stakeholders the reuse of peat occurred onsite, there were discussions regarding offsite use, but these were more abstract in terms of what was possible, rather than what was occurring. The reasoning given that the majority of reuse is on site is because the SEPA guidance[1] states that unless the excavated peat is used for construction purposes in its natural state on the site from where it is excavated, it will be subject to regulatory control and considered waste.


[1] https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/287064/wst-g-052-developments-on-peat-and-off-site-uses-of-waste-peat.pdf

Overall, although the terminology is the same between different wind farm construction sites – the reuse of peat within borrowpits, landscaping or restoration, it is always site specific. There may be commonalities between the sites, for example, the need to maintain hydrological connectivity, and the importance of peatland vegetation. There will also be significant differences related to volume of peat excavated, previous habitat conditions and use, weather conditions and water table level, knowledge and preparedness of the contractors. Within 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4 we present case studies representing recent site visits.

Quantities of peat excavated during wind farm construction

Reviewing a number of reports, for example the “Good Practice during Wind Farm Construction” (NatureScot), “Research and guidance on restoration and decommissioning of onshore wind farms” (NatureScot), “Developments on peatland: guidance on the assessment of peat volumes, reuse of excavated peat and the minimisation of waste” (SEPA[1]), “Developments on Peat and Off-site uses of waste peat” (SEPA), as well as habitat management plans for specific wind farms, all state the importance of collecting relevant and detailed site investigation data at an early stage of the application process to enable a full understanding of the site character and to inform a more accurate design process. This is in full agreement with the academic literature (e.g. Jorat et al., 2024) and discussions with stakeholders. During the planning process the amount of peat that needs to be excavated and how it will be reused is identified (see Table 3 for an example of the average areas involved in excavations). However, due to the heterogeneity of the environment and the lack of granularity of peat depth survey’s there is some ambiguity related to total peat volumes until excavation has started.


[1] Scottish Renewables, Scottish Environment Protection Agency. 2012. Guidance on the Assessment of Peat Volumes, Reuse of Excavated Peat and the Minimisation of Waste

 

Table 4. Area of turbines adapted from Albanito et al., 2022, also includes calculation of the average volume of peat per turbine taken from reviewed peatland management plans of operational wind farms in Scotland

 

Wind farm capacity (megawatts, MW)

Input

<10 MW

>10 to <50 MW

>50 MW

Average length of turbine foundations (m)

10

15

22.18

Average width of turbine foundations (m)

10

15

22.18

Average surface area of turbine foundation (m2)

100

225

492

Average depth of excavated peat (m)

1.455

1.365

1.350

Average volume of turbine foundations (m3)

145.5

307.13

664.14

Length of access track (or floating road) (m)

418

6513

32490

Width of access track (or floating road) (m)

5.66

5.66

5.66

Average surface area of access track (m2)

2366

36,864

183,893

Floating road depth (m)*

0.53

  

Average volume of floating road (m3)*

1254

  

Length of hard standing (m)*

37.99

  

Width of hard standing (m)*

32.29

  

Average surface area of hard standing (m2)*

1226.7

  

Extend to drainage around drainage features at site (m)*

60

  
    

Average volume** of peat per turbine (m3) anticipated to be excavated (includes road network and cabling linking turbines to grid)

8060 (± 1464)

Average volume* per wind farm (m3)

328,446 (± 59,650)

*Independent of wind farm capacity (MW)

**Average taken from reviewed peatland management plans of operational wind farms in Scotland.

Case studies – Borrow pit reinstatement

To successfully reinstate peat within borrow pit excavations, it is important to consider the borrow pit location, hydrological connectivity, depth, vegetation cover, and to preserve the layering of the peat (Figure 2). It is best practice to reinstate the borrow pit profile to a comparative level to the surrounding landscape, with gentle slopes that blend into the landscape, it’s design should maintain hydrological connectivity with the wider environment whilst also holding water within the peat soil. Often “cells” are created within the borrow pit to enable easier reinstatement, these cells are sometimes lined with clay to reduce the permeability through to the underlying parent material. This is to enhance the hydrological connectivity of the reinstated borrow pit and aims to keep the area wet. However, an outflow is also needed so that the area doesn’t become permanently waterlogged (Figure d). It is assumed that natural regeneration of peatland vegetation will occur, therefore seeding is not usually part of the PMP, however if seeding were to occur this would usually be two years after construction as part of the planning conditions process.

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

A person walking through a field

Description automatically generated

f)

Figure 2. Examples of borrow pits a) newly completed (< 1 year); b) in the process of being in-filled, one cell completed – cell wall construction (light coloured) and peat infill (dark coloured); c) 15-year old borrow pit with examples of functional peatland vegetation (from natural revegetation); d) 15-year old borrow pit that was not designed with drainage, has led to waterlogging (arrow indicates ponding); e) 10-year old borrow pit, quite dry, with more of an acidic grassland habitat; f) newly completed (< 1 year) situated on a slope, quite shallow peat.

Case studies – roadside verges / landscaping

Peat deposited alongside roadside verges often occurs more in terms of landscaping rather than for preservation of the peat (and carbon within it) (Figure 3). However, the volumes are relatively small compared to borrow pit reinstatement. If the peat does not become integrated with the surrounding hydrology, it will likely dry out and decompose over time, releasing CO2 into the environment and possibly erode away.

a)

A stream running through a field

Description automatically generated

b)

A stream of water in a field

Description automatically generated

c)

d)

  

Figure 3. Example of peat reused along roadside as part of landscaping process, a) drainage and indication of below ground cabling visible, vegetated peat reused for this infill; b) drainage channels and depth of floating road visible (newly constructed < 1 year), c) newly constructed (<1 year) landscaping, mixing of peat and mineral soil visible; d) Established peat at edge of floating road (15 years after construction), has maintained level and has peatland vegetation growing on it through natural revegetation. (Photographic permissions granted)

Case studies – incorporation within restoration projects

The reuse of peat is not considered for peatland restoration in the majority of cases. However, there are some examples where excavated peat has been used as part of the restoration process but this has only been permitted as an experimental approach. This is because once the peat is excavated (in the quantities it is being removed for wind farm construction), it has often lost structure and hydrological connectivity, and left as a stockpile until reinstatement begins (which varies from site to site).

Thus, the excavated peat has likely started to degrade, using this for restoration is unlikely to improve the habitat to the same level restoration with non-degraded peat would do. However, on some sites there are opportunities for reuse that could enable restoration if the appropriate planning and coordination between experts occurs. An example can be seen in Figure 4 (a and b). Key to the success of this kind of trial is planning how to implement it, for example a) efforts were made to move the peat only once – from excavation to reuse site; b) the layers of peat were kept separate and maintained across translocation; c) training was provided to the contractors involved in this reuse and restoration project. At a different site, excavated peat was used to infill peat cuttings that had occurred previously, however this infill can still be seen 10 years later (Figure 44c – differences in vegetation).

Although there are differences still visible in vegetation, the process for infilling used in situ vegetation. When reinstating the peat within the cuttings, the existing vegetation was stripped off and placed aside, the cuttings were then filled with acrotelmic peat generated from the excavation of nearby turbine bases. The vegetation was then replaced to reinstate the area and stabilise the peat. Although this may not have restored the peatland habitat to equivalent to undisturbed areas, as differences in vegetation are still visible. As the degradation was separate to wind farm construction, comparisons need to be made with how the environment was prior to wind farm construction, rather than comparison to pristine peatlands. Understanding whether the reuse of peat has been successful in maintaining a functioning peatland or at least preventing the loss of peat (and carbon) is very important, vegetation and water table monitoring occurs on some sites regularly to assess this (Figure 44d).

a) Two men in a field with a wind turbine

Description automatically generated

b) A close-up of a grass field

Description automatically generated

c)

d)

  

Figure 4. Examples of incorporation in restoration projects – a) Restoration trial (as part of the forest to bog project), where excavated peat was deposited at the side of a constructed track. However, to enhance restoration, prior to peat addition, vegetation was removed and the site ‘smoothed’, before the excavated peat was layered on top (to a depth of 150 mm or 300 mm dependent on trial site), after which the vegetation was put back on top of the reused peat. B) Zoomed in photo of trial site in a) peat vegetation covering trial site, with very little bare peat. C) Landscape restoration through the infill of furrows – here infill is within peat cuttings (but similar infill also occurs within the furrows of former forested sites). D) Dip well monitoring of water levels to assess success of peat reuse. (Photographic permissions granted)

Offsite use of excavated peat

Throughout this research it was discussed with stakeholders whether excavated peat could be used offsite from the wind farm construction; as to date only one paper was found. Balode et al., (2024) discussed various off-site novel uses for peat within the energy sector, building materials and additives, as well as agriculture and the wider environment (Figure 5); however, the paper does not focus solely on reuse and hence these uses are unlikely to occur within wind farm construction industry as the quantities involved in reuse are not going to warrant the creation of a comprehensive supply chain.

It is important to note that throughout the stakeholder consultation, it was repeatedly stated that reuse of peat off-site did not generally occur. Mainly this is due to two reasons, firstly classification – if the peat was taken off-site, it would be categorised as waste, which would likely entail a cost; secondly the necessary volumes of peat and the logistics of transportation would make it too costly to the project. If the reuse of peat offsite from wind farm construction was to be encouraged than new SEPA guidance and recommendations would need to be developed.

Applsci 14 02260 g005

Figure 5. Novel applications of peat from Balode et al., (2024).

Environmental outcomes of peat reuse 

The results of the literature review indicates that all anthropogenic activities within a peatland will impact the fate of nutrients. The fluctuating water table, local geochemistry and hydrology are the main drivers of a peatlands’ groundwater chemistry and discharge (Monteverde et al., 2022). Wind farm construction can increase the fluvial macronutrient loading of catchment streams (Heal et al., 2020), however, forest felling has been shown to lead to greater dissolved organic carbon (DOC) within felled areas compared to wind farm catchments (Zheng et al., 2018). It is important to note that often wind farms are developed on felled forest sites that were previously peatland, e.g. Whitelees and Camster, however it has been calculated that nearly 14 million trees have been cut down as part of wind farm construction projects over the last 20 years (2000 – 2020)[1]. Thus, academic studies comparing habitats as if they are discrete categories like a felled forest compared to a wind farm development need to include previous land use as part of their analysis. In other words, undisturbed peatland to forestry to felled forest and windfarm may produce different results compared to an undisturbed peatland to wind farm, but if only considering the final use they would be classed as having the same management factors influencing them. It is also unclear whether the environmental perturbations are additive and would likely occur if the area hadn’t previously been changed? Also the timing of monitoring is important, for example a newly constructed wind farm showed 5 g m2 losses in dissolved organic carbon (compared to control samples) over an 18-month period (Grieve and Gilvear, 2008) but it is unclear if losses reduce over time – this is a research gap. Is there an initial flush that quickly dissipates? Or are those losses continuous without signs of improvement. Grieve and Gilvear (2008) believe this 5 g m2 loss represents between 25% and 50% of annual carbon sequestration in peatlands in central Scotland, so it is quite substantial.


[1] https://www.heraldscotland.com/news/18270734.14m-trees-cut-scotland-make-way-wind-farms

The structure and hydrology of removed and replaced peat will not resemble that of the undisturbed peat and likely undergo further degradation through settlement and oxidation (Lindsay, 2018). Excavated peat is often used to blend the transition from undisturbed areas to those which are part of the construction. The disturbance to the peat results in negative impact to the habitat (Jorat et al., 2024), however using excavated peat to link undisturbed areas with disturbed areas will encourage vegetation regrowth in keeping with the surrounding landscape and may stablise the disturbed peat. Error! Reference source not found. provides an overview of the potential environmental outcomes for some of these reuse options.

Understanding how each reuse option impacts the wider environment will inform the hierarchy. Repowering of wind farms, upgrading the turbines and technology used within a wind farm site once it has reached the end of use-limit, is one method of reducing disturbance on peatland. However, this still requires extensive planning, as the newer turbines are often larger, needing different spacing between turbines and larger foundations. Approximately 30% more land surface area will be disturbed for repowering using a new rather than reengineered foundation (Waldron et al., 2018). If the surrounding peatland has not recovered from the previous development, this could lead to greater degradation than using new locations.

It is unsurprising that wind farm construction leads to wide-scale changes to the peatland habitat, which are known to be sensitive habitats with unique attributes related to their hydrology and carbon richness. Within this report we have been focused solely on the impact of wind farms on the excavation of peat and its reuse, however once in situ wind farms may still have an impact on the surrounding peatland. For example, a study by Moravec et al., (2018) showed that wind turbines can affect ground surface temperatures (which has the potential to change soil hydrology); and these changes varied with proximity to wind turbine (Armstrong et al., 2016). These impacts may also last for the lifetime of the wind farm, a large-scale review of the impacts of pipeline construction on soil and crops found that pipelines caused soil degradation for years and decades following installation and that soil compaction and soil horizon mixing detrimentally impacted soil function (Brehm and Culman, 2022).

Table 5: Synthesis of reuse options and simplified overview of potential environmental outcomes (Note: this table summarises potential outcomes indicated by research during this study, but evidence is limited and site-by-site circumstances vary significantly so currently this differentiation on environmental grounds cannot be fully reflected in the recommended ‘hierarchy of peat reuse’.)

Method of reuse

Carbon store

Hydrology connectivity

Availability

Comment

Borrow pit reinstatement

++

Low risk of carbon loss

Low chance of carbon sequestration (carbon increase) in the long term

+

Only if well planned, with impermeable layers and outflows built in

+++

Large storage potential, should have capacity for all excavated peat, however where there is more (or less) peat than planned may lead to issues

Borrow pits have potential to provide an environmentally robust reuse option, however only if best practice is followed and there are contingencies in place if changes in planned volumes occur

Around turbine foundations and crane pad verges

High risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion

When constructed these areas will automatically have drainage channels cut. The reuse of peat here will likely be impacted by this drainage

+

Small volume

Use to encourage vegetation re-growth around construction areas. Often used as a way of merging the built infrastructure with the surrounding landscape

Side of road/ track or “landscaping”

Risk of carbon loss through peat drying out and erosion, however if vegetation regrowth occurs this is less likely

Addition of peat should connect the reused peat with the wider environment to maintain hydrology, however, depends on flow patterns and drainage channels across roads

+

Small volume

If vegetation regrowth occurs and there is limited bare peat this has potential to become part of wider landscape

Incorporation of peat in restoration / reinstatement projects

+++

Low risk of carbon loss, has potential to build carbon (dependent on restoration / reuse project)

+++

If well planned, should have hydrological connectivity with landscape

+

Small volume

Usually these projects are highly monitored to assess progress – useful for data gathering in the short term alongside the benefits of using excavated peat in areas that may have been degraded previously

Limitations of data

Through the rapid evidence assessment (REA) we did not consider peatland restoration methods as part of the scope, however there are some strategies that go beyond restoration practices and should be a consideration as part of the reuse of peat. For example, rewetting peatland, drain blocking, revegetation, and fire management (Balode et al., 2024). Although there is academic research on the impact of peatland degradation, how wind farms can reduce reliance on fossil fuels and the social acceptance of wind farms within the environment, there is a lack of published research directly quantifying the impact of wind farms on peatlands, or providing evidence of best practice. Reliance on grey literature and stakeholder discussions is necessary to cover this research gap. For example, where novel reuse methods have been used, the industry has led monitoring of those sites, collected data and written these up as internal reports, which are not obviously available for the wider industry and academia to use. However, “standard practice” is rarely reviewed in academia nor comprehensive data collected, thus it is very difficult to make recommendations on what works best through standard literature reviews. Grey literature may be written with bias, there may be a lack of replication within the data, and it will not have been peer reviewed and is thus less reliable as a data source.

Often there is limited detail within peat management plans and planning applications for wind farms. For example, it is assumed that all excavated material will be peat; differences between peat layers (acrotelm and catotelm) are not distinguished and there is no reference to the vegetation layer. Depending on volumes, the only indication of reuse is stated as backfilling around turbine bases and landscaping around access tracks. As well as the aforementioned issues with the reuse of excavated peat, one important consideration that is often not discussed is that the different layers of peat excavated (acrotelm and catotelm) have different physical properties. Whilst the reuse options discussed above may be appropriate for acrotelm peat, they are unlikely to be suitable for catotelmic peat (generally below 1m depth peat)[1].


[1] https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/287064/wst-g-052-developments-on-peat-and-off-site-uses-of-waste-peat.pdf

Knowledge and evidence gaps

There is a lack of understanding related to the outcome of peat reuse – is it to restore peatland bog function, or is it to try to reduce losses of carbon from the excavated peat? Or is it to do something with the excavated peat that will minimally impact the wider environment? The likelihood is that the overall outcome will be somewhere between these points.

Although there is a significant amount of academic research on the impact of wind farms on peatland, there were clear gaps related to what should be deemed ‘best practice’. For example, there is no published work on the measurement of peatland parameters as part of the reinstatement of borrow pits on wind farms – how can best practice be defined when there is no indication of something working in practice, or a clear understanding of what ‘success’ looks like in this context? There have also not been any in-depth assessments of carbon loss after excavation and reuse – discussions were held in relation to loss of carbon as the peat dried out, but there is a lack of direct studies focusing on this over time. This information is also absent from the grey literature. There was a lot of discussion with stakeholders regarding what they believe works best from a real-world perspective (rather than lab based academic studies), but this still lacked underlying reported evidence, and was only discussed in terms of past experience of what worked (to reuse the peat available, and perceived that it remained within the field rather than eroding) and what hasn’t worked, remaining largely unmeasured and therefore unproven. Interestingly, where a wind farm had used a novel method of reuse, there was a monitoring plan set up by the energy company and evidence was gathered to justify this method. Highlighting how energy companies can lead the way in providing evidence of good practice.

Generally, there was a lack of monitoring occurring, both in terms of whether the construction process adheres to what has been set out in the PMPs but also to ascertain whether the approach has worked (and thus could be referred back to and repeated elsewhere). There is also a disconnect between the desired outcomes compared to the aims of the wind farm operators. For the wind farm developers, there is a need to balance aspects such as effectiveness and safety within the construction process (i.e. the need for drainage), with restoration, when that part of the construction process is complete. Removing drainage if it is no longer necessary within the wind farm infrastructure would enable an area to return to a more natural peatland habitat, although dialogue is required to ensure a shared understanding of how this might be defined.

Legislation and advisory documents change over time, for example “Scotland’s Peatland Standard”[1] (SPS) is currently being developed. This document will provide technical information and guidance to promote peatland protection. It will define the minimum for sustainable management and restoration requirements that Scottish Government expects all peatland owners, managers and contactors to follow. Thus, in future could potentially fill some of these knowledge gaps discussed.


[1] https://www.nature.scot/climate-change/nature-based-solutions/nature-based-solutions-practice/peatland-action/peatland-action-how-do-i-restore-and-manage-my-peatland-0

Recommendations

We have developed the hierarchy below for reuse of peat through the literature review, stakeholder discussions and site visits presented within this report. We considered the role and nature of a potential hierarchy for peat reuse methods during this project, considering:

  • What needs to be included in a hierarchy and in which order.
  • What additional guidance or principles would help guide an environmentally beneficial approach to peat reuse.
  • Highlighting the research gaps at this time that need to be addressed to better inform a hierarchy of peat reuse methods.

Based on the findings of this study we have three recommendations:

Recommendation 1: Guidance on excavation peat reuse

1a: Planning and preparation steps
1b: A draft hierarchy of reuse methods
1c: Peat reuse and implementation principles

Recommendation 2: Environmental outcomes framework to ensure the multiple potential environmental benefits of peat reuse are considered, avoiding a single-issue focus.

Recommendation 3: Enhanced monitoring of environmental outcomes from reuse of peat – these investigations need to be targeted to address the specific research gaps highlighted in our study, and also better routine monitoring of site reuse implementation and environmental outcomes.

Our recommendations come from learnings acquired during this study. Through a rapid evidence assessment, an understanding was gained of the current research occurring on peatlands and wind farm developments, alongside site visits to see what was occurring in the field and a series of stakeholder discussions and workshops to fill in the gaps where reports or data were lacking. An area of clear agreement across stakeholders, both in terms of construction and also the conservation sector, is to minimise the amount of peat excavated. Avoidance of peat excavation can mean different things to different stakeholders, for example:

  • Is avoidance about minimising the volume of peat excavated? (reduction of waste and minimising cost) – Yes
  • Is avoidance about minimising the areas of carbon-rich soil impacted by excavation? (limited footprint of impact) – Yes
  • Is avoidance about minimising the loss of area of peatland in pristine / good conditions? (protected biodiversity) – Yes
  • Is avoidance about minimising loss of hydrological connectivity across on-site/off-site peatland and the wider functions of larger peat bodies? (ecosystem services) – Yes

Depending on the perspective of the stakeholder they may agree or disagree with some of the above statements, however they are overlapping in terms of reducing the impact of wind farm construction across peatlands. Avoidance is the essential first step in the hierarchy of reuse.

At times the timeline between site acquirement, site surveys, planning approval, and construction company deployment, leads to issues related to preparation and planning. Discussion with stakeholders highlighted that often the site surveys presented as part of the planning applications may not be at the detailed scale necessary to identify areas with the deepest peat (that should be avoided) at the construction stage. The construction contractors would like to avoid the areas with the deepest peat (due to costs and time, as well as to minimise the amount of peat disturbed) but are limited by what has previously been set out within the planning application. The condition of the existing peatland across the landscape prior to wind farm construction may not have been fully assessed, thus if the peat is already degraded the starting point for the reuse of peat will be lower and has the potential to degrade faster when disturbed.

Understanding the hydrological connectivity of the landscape will enable appropriate placement of drainage, this links closely to site condition – if there are already drier areas within the peatland, they may become drier over time with increased drainage. In some instances it is possible to reduce drainage after construction, if the areas being drained are reinstated with peat, however this is a consideration that should be made at the planning stage. Greater training needs to be provided for the construction operatives, both in terms of implementation of activities, but also to understand why it is important; as key to maintaining the quality of the peat during reuse, is minimising disturbance and maintaining the peat structure from the outset.

The importance of peatland for carbon storage is widely discussed both within the literature and by stakeholders, however, a key disconnection between the planning process and the completion of windfarm construction is the accuracy of the carbon calculations – it was widely discussed that in the majority of developments more peat is excavated than was planned. The actual amount of excavated peat is not used to recalculate the carbon loss and thus the overall impact of the wind farm development is not fully assessed. It also means the contractors inevitably have more peat excavated than was planned for reuse, thus the options for reuse of this peat may lack adequate planning for how to reuse appropriately. It is a pity contractors aren’t required to report how much peat has been excavated during the construction process, as this could improve the accuracy of estimates over time, but currently this data is not available or monitored. The condition of the peat that is reused is rarely monitored (at excavation or afterwards), therefore it is unclear whether this peat will continue storing the carbon it contains or whether carbon will be released into the atmosphere. Academic studies collecting empirical data on the release of carbon from disturbed peat are rare, and do not occur at a field scale or if they do these assessments usually occur in relation to agricultural disturbance rather than windfarm construction and are not wholly applicable. Where the peat was excavated from is also an important consideration for reuse – if it is taken from a borrow pit excavation this lends itself to borrow pit reinstatement, however if it is removed for cabling and road installation than returning the peat to this area (referred to as landscaping) may be a better option.

Recommendation 1: Guidance for Peat Reuse Options

Because detailed evidence to confirm the different environmental outcomes is not available, our recommendation is for a simple hierarchy of peat reuse options accompanied by some additional guidance and requirements which are essential for maximising environmental outcomes:

  • Recommendation 1a: Preparation and Planning Steps:
  • Avoiding / minimising peat excavation and
  • Appraise site circumstances and locally relevant potential reuse options
  • Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of Peat Reuse
  • Recommendation 1c: Peat Reuse Implementation Principles: to guide the site-specific choice of methods and implementation to maximise environmental outcomes.

The hierarchy is not useable as a standalone guide – it must be accompanied by the additional components – as shown in

.

Figure 6: Guidance for Excavated Peat Reuse

 

Recommendation 1a: Preparation and planning steps

Is critical to conduct investigations to inform preparation and planning in order to maximise environmental outcomes – including first taking action to avoid peat extraction. Our recommended preparation and planning steps are set out in Table 6.

Table 6: Preparation and planning steps to accompany the hierarchy of peat reuse

Step 1: Avoidance


As per NPF4, avoidance of peat excavation is always the priority, in agreement with the NPF4 mitigation hierarchy. As part of the avoidance strategy, a “restorability assessment” should also be included – this should determine the condition of any peat that is due to be excavated and makes an assessment of the potential for reinstating the peat in that location. Taking into account the peatland condition, where it is located within the wider landscape, accessibility and how easy it may be to restore degradation in the future. As part of the avoidance strategy, as well as macro-level site decisions (e.g. develop on peat or not), micro-level decisions on site and in project designing and contracting should be considered to reduce the volume of peat excavated and/or impacted. For example, ensuring peat depth assessments are accurate and are used to guide any micro-siting[1] decisions.

[1] Micro-siting is where small adjustments to the wind farm lay out are made to avoid / minimise damage to peat (or other sensitive environments) on site.


Step 2: Preparation and planning: Appraise site and potential reuse outcomes

Preparation is critical for identifying the most beneficial options available on site and their feasibility. What is the depth of peat across the site? What has the peat been categorised as? If it is not in good condition, does it have potential for restoration? Has it been modified? Or drained? Aligning the details submitted within the application process (EIA) with further surveys, identifying depth and condition of peat at the exact locations for the tracks, turbines, general infrastructure and proposed reuse locations.

Planning, with the desired outcome in mind, is crucial to the successful reuse of peat. Knowing the volumes of peat to be excavated and from where on the site. Knowing the depth of peat and the thickness of each layer (acrotelm and catotelm). Planning where the borrow pit and stockpile need to be located. Planning peat movements to minimise disturbance. Contacting other stakeholders that may be able to enhance reuse of peat activities.

Prior land use:

Understanding what the starting land condition is. Has the land been used for other activities prior to wind farm planning? For example, many wind farms are being built on previous forest sites; some may have been used for grazing or are semi-natural habitats? These previous activities will impact drainage across the site, some areas may be drier or need to have the drained area restored, stump flipping may need to occur, and also natural regeneration of forest may affect the vegetative composition.

Peat condition and depth:

If the peat is in “good” condition prior to wind farm construction, this may negate some of the energy savings of renewable energy generation, as some studies have suggested that the carbon saved from the wind farm development won’t offset the damage to the environment. However, there are very few areas of pristine peatland in Scotland, and it is more likely to be a mosaic of conditions across the landscape – which may need to be considered regarding the progress of construction. The depth of peat in the area is also important, as deeper peats have different properties in terms of acrotelm, catotelm and underlying parent material. Very shallow peats are also a concern as they are more liable to mixing of soil and peat layers.

Reusability of peat at start of construction

The condition of peat prior to excavation will have an impact on its reusability. If the surrounding peatland is degraded, reused peat is unlikely to improve the conditions in the surrounding area (unlike peat extracted for restoration purposes). Inevitably, there will always be some degradation as peat is excavated (whether that’s through a loss of carbon or changes in porosity, hydrology, or vegetation coverage); thus minimising the amount of peat excavated will protect the environment. However, the counter point is that if the peat excavated is in very poor condition to begin with, it may not be able to be reused, and perhaps should not be excavated?

Site specific opportunities for reuse:

For all wind farms (and construction sites), the geographic limits for development activities are set (the development envelope). If there are areas where the reuse of peat would be more appropriate that is outside this area, than the reuse cannot occur there. Consideration should also be given to the site layout and options for reuse destinations – what is being constructed first and where. For example, the floating roads are often the first part of the infrastructure constructed to allow access to all areas. Where are the water courses and flows within the site, what is the connectivity with the wider landscape and habitats e.g. Is there an overlap with prior landuse or adjacent restoration work? Is the order of excavation and reuse appropriate to minimise carbon loss?

Agree desired outcome for use of excavated peat:

Setting a feasible intention (e.g. habitat to aim for) considering the site conditions and opportunities at the outset.

Recommendation 1b: Hierarchy of reuse

The rational for the hierarchy of reuse set out in Table 7 reflects the available evidence for environmental outcomes of peat reuse. The main options all have potential to deliver positive environmental outcomes in comparison to the secondary options or landfilling but there is insufficient evidence to rank the main options further. Their feasibility and environmental outcomes will depend upon the site context and the way they are implemented.

The table provides a supplement to the available information on good practices for use and handling of soil and peat. The evidence of environmental outcomes of reuse options has many gaps currently. Where there is evidence, it cannot always be confidently applied to specific sites and circumstances. Therefore, these principles / considerations are taking the precautionary principal approach and should be used as stepping stones reflecting the consensus amongst technical experts about things which are important to consider in the absence of a complete evidence base.

Table 7: Underlying rationale and details related to hierarchy of reuse of peat

(1) Main re-use options

Borrow pit reinstatement or infill

Borrow pit reinstatement involves putting excavated peat into a borrow pit at the end of the period of use. Potential desired outcomes can vary and should be informed by the planning steps.

Key priorities: Aim for a functioning bog, then consider other locally valuable habitats. Management / design needs to prioritise setting up the reinstated borrow pit appropriately for desired outcomes e.g. including an impermeable layer at the bottom of the pit; water outlet to hydrologically link the borrow pit to the rest of the peatland habitat; layered in a similar way to how it was excavated (including a vegetation layer). Aim to only move peat once if possible. Otherwise, if the peat that is removed from the borrow pit will be returned to the borrow pit it will need to be stockpiled prior to reuse. Reinstating the surface vegetation appropriately should enable recolonisation of the surface layer which will aid the development of a functioning bog habitat and increase biodiversity.

Rationale:

  • Capable of taking high volume, of which a significant portion may be from the original site as a result of the borrow pit excavation.
  • Whilst our study did not find peer reviewed studies that confirmed the environmental outcomes of borrow pit reinstatement, observations and comments from stakeholders, and their in-progress monitoring suggests some good environmental outcomes (including maintaining water levels and peatland vegetation), when borrow pit reinstatement is completed properly following the above key priorities.
  • Further research is needed to confirm these environmental outcomes – we have seen this is occurring at some sites, it would be beneficial to the sector if these results were published.

Other reinstatement

There are other areas impacted by wind farm developments that could be consider for reinstatement – for example areas that have been used for building compounds, crane pads, temporary access tracks etc

Reinstatement involves the reuse of peat to blend the natural habitat with the infrastructure disturbance as a way to encourage vegetation re-growth.

Key priorities: Maintaining hydrological connectivity between the reuse of peat and the landscape in situ. High risk of the peat drying out leading to erosion. To reduce this risk it is important to follow the peatland restoration technical compendium and future requirements of the forthcoming Scotland Peatland Standard.

Restoration

Restoration involves the reuse of excavated peat by incorporating it into areas of peatland on site that have previously been degraded through anthropogenic activities – for example forestry or peat-cuttings directly accessible from the development site. This can offset (compensate) for some of the residual impact of the development or for enhancing peatland conditions in support of the reinstatement of functional peatland. A number of discussions with stakeholders presented examples of this type of restoration occurring on wind farm developments. Although the results are unpublished, the results show promise as a way of delivering enhanced environmental benefits as part of the construction process.

Key priorities: Design must be site specific aiming for functioning peatland or other locally valuable habitat. After a thorough site survey, areas that are degraded peat should be identified and considered part of the reuse process. For long term success of this reuse method there needs to be collaboration between peatland restoration experts alongside the construction sector and use of the peatland restoration technical compendium alongside the Scotland Peatland Standard.

Rationale:

  • If this method of reuse of excavated peat was to occur, it would initially only be in areas within the wind farm development site identified as potential areas for restoration.
  • Reusing peat in these areas, although takes more planning and time (including assessing peat slide risks), is likely to be beneficial, particularly if it enables restoration which would not be possible in the absence of available peat.
  • Reinstating peat where peat has been historically located has a greater likelihood of returning peat to a functioning level than reusing peat in areas that were not peatland previously.
  • Peer reviewed studies were not available to confirm environmental outcomes of peat in restoration but observations and comments from stakeholders, and their in-progress monitoring suggests potential for good environmental outcomes, although only if well designed – more research is needed to understand effective methods and environmental outcomes.

Landscaping (road verges, embankment slopes etc)

Landscaping involves reinstatement of peat above cabling and alongside floating roads and embankments. Often the excavated peat is from where the cable is to be laid and will be returned to where it was extracted from, however alongside roads and embankments may be from other areas.

Key priorities: Care needs to be taken to maintain peat layering and planning related to hydrology needs to occur (as the peat above the cable risks being hydrologically isolated if situated between the floating road and drainage channels). Floating roads are often higher than the surrounding habitat, as aggregate and geotextile mesh has been put down as part of the construction process, this creates an island effect. It is important to consider the vegetation when reusing peat as part of the landscaping process. It is crucial to not reinstate peat on top of vegetation, this may mean that vegetation needs to be lifted away to reuse peat prior to returning the vegetation to the area.

Rationale:

  • Reusing peat along these road verges can improve the landscape, by changing the levels between the road and the wider landscape reducing the risk of island effects, but only if the hydrology and placement is considered, will it have the potential to reduce degradation.
  • It may be the only practical option in some circumstances as blending the zones between the infrastructure and wider environment may reduce the degradation spreading into the undisturbed peatland (through reducing the risk of the peat drying out and erosion occurring).
  • Reinstating excavated peat along the roadside will stabilise the surface and reduce the sediment runoff which could damage the wider environment.
  • Reusing excavated peat along roadsides gives the natural vegetation a chance to recolonise and restore these areas close to the wind farm development. Vegetation reduces the risk of erosion and further degradation.

Secondary options (2,3)

There is limited interest in reusing peat offsite and for the majority of construction projects it does not appear to occur. Questions were asked of stakeholders to assess if excavated peat could be reused within the horticulture sector, whisky industry or other aspects of the construction or energy sector. In all instances the answer was a definitive no, there is no evidence for the reuse of peat offsite in these sectors as part of wind farm construction, it does not occur. This is likely due to the volumes of peat involved and the sporadic nature of the supply chain, also as the Scottish Government has committed to phasing out the use of peat in horticulture this is unlikely to gain momentum as a viable option.

There are instances where an area has lost peat previously due to land use activities and offers an opportunity for excavated peat to be reused as part of restoration. An example from the stakeholder consultation was where the reuse of peat from a wind farm construction was used to reinstate an area of mining that had occurred nearby. It is important to note that if onsite reuse cannot occur all endeavours should be made to undertake these secondary options prior to the last option of landfill which should be avoided.

(2) Offsite

(known use)

This reuse occurs on a case-by-case basis and usually occurs where the land ownership or construction operators are linked. For it to occur more frequently, greater planning and preparation needs to be implemented prior to excavation and transport.

(3) Offsite

(unknown use)

Where peat has been extracted and there was no reuse plan in place for it, this could lead to unknown use offsite. This reuse is very unlikely to occur but when it does it is usually in small quantities e.g. for novel trials of reuse options. This is because once peat leaves the site it will be considered waste and is also costly to transport.

(4) Last resort option

Landfill

This should be considered a “last resort” option, and all other options should be prioritised before this.

Recommendation 1c: Peat Reuse Implementation Principles

The effectiveness and likely outcomes of different methods of peat reuse is heavily dependent on-site specific context, feasibility of achieving the desired outcome, and the detailed design of the method (such as borrow pit infill design). Thus, any hierarchy needs to be flexible, but decisions should be guided by a set of principles to maximise environmental outcomes. These include:

  • Aiming for functioning peatland (as close to natural functioning as possible because full natural functioning is likely to be unachievable in most cases), or other valuable habitat if not possible.
  • Maintaining / reinstating vegetation
  • Maintaining / reinstating water flows / hydrological functioning, whilst ensuring site stability and safety.
  • Minimising peat movement
  • Maintain peat structure (layers) where possible.

See Table 8 below for more detail.

Putting these into practice is facilitated by the preparation steps set out in Recommendation 1a above. For example greater detail could be requested prior to planning consent, because most peatland management plans lack depth and site-specific details. Requiring this information prior to the start of the construction process will increase the likelihood that planning, and preparation will be undertaken to the necessary extent to improve the outcomes of peat reuse. This would move the onus from contractor and place it with the energy company / landowner that ‘owns’ the consent and is responsible for full legal compliance. Greater detail within the PMPs would also provide a more accurate understanding of the true quantities of peat to be excavated, by including a requirement under the consent for accurate recording and in turn enhance the reuse strategy to be implemented. This could also provide future developments with more accurate calculations to use within their planning applications and PMPs. However, it is beyond the scope of this research to identify where responsibility lies for receiving and reviewing such additional material.

It was clear through the stakeholder consultation that there are a number of very knowledgeable groups working within the sector (Appendix B, including environmental government organisations, wind farm contractors, energy companies, environmental consultants from the private sector, as well as academics and conservation organisations). Capturing this knowledge to ensure recommendations for best practice are supported by what is practical will improve the wind farm construction process in the future.

Table 8: Peat reuse implementation principles – further explanation

Peat reuse implementation principles

Hydrological connectivity

Mapping out the connectivity of the site, will enable better drainage planning, targeted to ensure site stability / safety and support the desired peat reuse goal e.g., desired habitat. It will also enable more successful reuse of the peat if it is kept wet and can connect into the hydrology of the surrounding land at the location of reuse.

Minimise peat handling and disturbance

If enough planning has occurred, it may be possible to only need to move the peat once – from where it is excavated to the site of reuse. This also avoids storage of excavated peat, which generally leads to undesirable changes in peat properties, e.g. loss of water, bulk density increase, carbon loss, damage to microbial populations

Separation of peat layers

When excavating peat, the success of reuse will be increased if the different peat layers are kept separate (acrotelm, catotelm, and underlying mineral soil) as they have very different properties.

Maintain wetness of stockpiles

Stockpiling of excavated peat should be avoided where possible. If necessary to stockpile peat, stockpiles should be watered when necessary to maintain wetness. If the surface of peat dries out, a hydrophobic layer may form. This reduces the overall infiltration rate of the peat blocks and may lead to further desiccation and other negative impacts, as noted above under ‘Minimise disturbance and avoid storage/stockpiling’.

Recommendation 2: Environmental outcomes framework

Multiple environmental outcomes should be targeted through peat reuse. To avoid excessive focus on one environmental measure of success, we recommend the following environmental outcomes should be considered when deciding on which peat reuse option to implement on site. These environmental outcomes should be monitored to assess success (see Table 9 for rationale):

  • Minimising carbon loss from excavated peat
  • Positive biodiversity outcomes reflecting local and national goals
  • Ensuring downstream water quality (sediment / nutrient load)

Following on from Recommendation 1 and the hierarchy of reuse options, environmental outcomes framework indicates the priority environmental outcomes for peat reuse. These should be considered by the consenting authority as part of the planning process, in conjunction with the EIA process and developers should be considering these in their development plans. We recommend the consenting authority to check that the applicant has fully considered these areas within the planning proposal as part of their strategy for reuse. The environmental outcomes framework should also guide subsequent monitoring and evaluation, during and after construction. Clarity on what environmental outcomes could potentially be achieved from peat reuse can support all parties to deliver better environmental outcomes.

Table 9: Rationale for Environmental Outcomes Framework for Peat Reuse

Outcome

Rationale for inclusion in the Framework

Minimising carbon loss from excavated peat

Carbon can be lost as the peat is disturbed primarily through hydrological changes and erosion – these two processes are interlinked, as erosion is more likely when peat starts to dry out. Leading to the loss of particulate organic carbon (POC) which is more easily transported by wind or water erosion. As the peat dries out and is exposed to oxygen, aerobic decomposition of the organic matter starts to occur, releasing the stored carbon as CO2. As carbon is lost subsidence of the peatland may also occur, this has knock-on concerns for the wider environment and safety and stability of the wind farm. Where the excavated peat has been left bare of vegetation carbon loss and erosion are also a greater risk.

Positive biodiversity outcomes reflecting local and national goals

Enabling the regrowth of peatland vegetation (particularly indicative peatland species like sphagnum mosses) helps rebuild peat structure and enhances carbon sequestration potential, but it also improves the wider biodiversity within the environment. However, studies focusing on peatland restoration have shown that vegetation is slow to recover and even ten years after restoration the vegetation present can still be dissimilar to pristine peatlands (Kareksela et al., 2015). Thus greater consideration is necessary related to vegetation regrowth to maximise its potential. Within our recommendations we have advised on best practice for the reuse of peat, however action should also be taken to maintain vegetative cover alongside this reuse. Whether this is through moving the vegetation layer as part of the reinstatement of reused peat, seeding the reused peat, or if there is existing vegetation in the area planned for peat reuse, stripping this off and placing aside, so that the vegetation can be replaced once the reused peat is reinstated in the area and stabilise the peat.

Ensuring downstream water quality (sediment / nutrient load)

Excavated peat can lead to increases in dissolved organic carbon (DOC) within water systems leading to changes in downstream water quality, as well as increased sediment loads. This can be through the physical disturbance of the construction process increasing water erosion and DOC leaching. Drainage can cause hydrological alterations and redirect water flows, mobilising sediments (POC) and DOC leading to increased carbon losses and peatland erosion (Grieve & Gilvear, 2008).

Recommendation 3: Improved research and monitoring

In discussion with stakeholders, some monitoring is occurring post wind farm construction for peat reuse, usually by the landowner or energy company, however as discussed previously this monitoring is not mandatory and usually focuses on novel uses, or where the reuse appears to have been successful. We recommend:

  • Monitoring of environmental outcomes of peat reuse for the life of the windfarm, EIAs often require follow up monitoring in relation to biodiversity post-construction, however Peatland Management Plans (PMPs) do not. We recommend greater considerations is given to PMPs as part of follow up monitoring to include:
  • Monitoring of peat levels, and wetness around the wind farm, irrespective of reuse option, this should occur to identify areas that may be drying out due to drainage, or where too much waterlogging may be occurring because of the changes in hydrology caused by the construction process.
  • Monitoring of vegetation cover and types, for example through vegetation surveys are used as indications of functioning peatlands, but other measures (like DOC within the water catchment or carbon fluxes) could provide a more nuanced understanding of the impact reuse is having on the wider environment.
  • Greater sharing of this data and collaboration with the academic community, would also enable further distinctions of best practice to occur. We recommend a formal advisory relationship to form between developers and the research community facilitated by Scottish Government, so that data sharing can occur and consenting authorities have access to better knowledge of effective peat reuse being undertaken. Data that has historically been collected but has not been reported on could be shared initially to assess how a collaborative data sharing process may work. The current lack of data sharing and credible longitudinal studies was noticeable at the site visits for wind farms that had been commissioned 10+ years previously – key details had been lost with job changes / retirement that could have benefitted the wind farm sector as a whole, with improved understanding of what is now visibly working and what hasn’t worked so well.

Research gaps

There are many research gaps that have been highlighted throughout this study. These could be addressed through the following actions:

  • The exact volume of peat excavated across a wind farm development is not known at completion of construction → We recommend asking the contractors to update records at the end of construction. Building on this we recommend a study to assess the differences between the amount of peat stated to be extracted prior to the wind farm development commencing compared to the wind farm after construction has finished. This could also be used to improve the accuracy of the carbon calculator providing a more accurate picture of the true carbon losses after completion of construction.
  • Understanding how the carbon content changes within the peat volume over time for all reuse options → We recommend monitoring projects focusing on carbon loss and GHG emissions
  • Seeing how the full GHG balance for infilled borrow pits changes dependent on size and age of the borrowpit → We recommend that monitoring of infilled borrow pits including size and volume, and hydro connectivity needs to occur at regular intervals
  • The environmental outcomes of borrow pits have not been fully assessed → We recommend collecting monitoring data of the regeneration of plants and biodiversity over time will enable this.
  • Reviewing available printed information on best practice (and standard practice) → Likely this is very limited and may involve contacting energy companies to access internal data and reports. We recommend greater collaboration between the energy companies and academia, with a greater amount of data sharing. Funding opportunities are usually the best way to encourage engagement between different stakeholders.
  • The level of revegetation on peat that had previously been excavated appears to be reliant on natural recolonisation, how well this occurs is not thoroughly understood. → We recommend monitoring how plants recolonise the excavated peat that has been reused which would enable a better understanding of best practice. From discussions with stakeholders there is limited reseeding occurring and it is largely left to natural revegetation. However, this is more likely to occur if the surface plants are maintained (removing the in situ plants, redistributing the reused peat and returning the plants on top should enhance recolonisation rates).

Conclusions

These results highlight our current understanding of peat reuse methods occurring in wind farm construction in Scotland. We have identified the critical environmental issues and how the reuse of peat can maintain the habitat, allowing for environmentally conscious construction techniques to take precedence.

However, the overriding synthesis of the information gained during this process is that planning prior to construction is key, as well as ensuring that stakeholders work together to achieve best practice. Avoidance of excavation of deep peat is the first priority. Next, acknowledging that once peat is excavated full consideration of how best to reuse it (ideally only moving it once and keeping the different layers separate, while aiming to keep the peat wet and/or maintaining hydrological connectivity) are crucial.

After these main outcomes from the hierarchy, attention needs to focus on delivering site specific reuse. It also became apparent that although there is a lot of knowledge within the peatland and wind farm sector, there has been limited studies collecting data to inform best practice. This needs to be encouraged to understand current research gaps and advise on the right management methods to reduce peatland degradation in the long term.

References

Albanito, F., Roberts, S., Shepherd, A., Hastings, A., 2022. Quantifying the land-based opportunity carbon costs of onshore wind farms. Journal of Cleaner Production 363, 132480.

Armstrong, A., Burton, R.R., Lee, S.E., Mobbs, S., Ostle, N., Smith, V., Waldron, S., Whitaker, J., 2016. Ground-level climate at a peatland wind farm in Scotland is affected by wind turbine operation. Environmental Research Letters 11, 044024.

Austin, K.G., Elsen, P.R., Coronado, E.N.H., DeGemmis, A., Gallego-Sala, A.V., Harris, L., Kretser, H.E., Melton, J.R., Murdiyarso, D., Sasmito, S.D., Swails, E., Wijaya, A., Winton, R.S., Zarin, D., 2025. Mismatch Between Global Importance of Peatlands and the Extent of Their Protection. Conservation Letters 18, e13080.

Balode, L., Bumbiere, K., Sosars, V., Valters, K., Blumberga, D., 2024. Pros and Cons of Strategies to Reduce Greenhouse Gas Emissions from Peatlands: Review of Possibilities, Applied Sciences.

Bragg, O.M., 2002. Hydrology of peat-forming wetlands in Scotland. Science of the Total Environment 294, 111-129.

Brehm, T., Culman, S., 2022. Pipeline installation effects on soils and plants: A review and quantitative synthesis. Agrosystems, Geosciences & Environment 5, e20312.

Chico, G., Clewer, T., Midgley, N.G., Gallego-Anex, P., Ramil-Rego, P., Ferreiro, J., Whayman, E., Goeckeritz, S., Stanton, T., 2023. The extent of wind farm infrastructures on recognised European blanket bogs. Scientific Reports 13, 3919.

Detrey, I., 2022. Bog in a Box: Is long term peat storage for future restoration viable? University of the Highlands and Islands, UHI.

Dykes, A.P., 2022. Landslide investigations during pandemic restrictions: initial assessment of recent peat landslides in Ireland. Landslides 19, 515-525.

Elmes, M.C., Petrone, R.M., Volik, O., Price, J.S., 2022. Changes to the hydrology of a boreal fen following the placement of an access road and below ground pipeline. Journal of Hydrology: Regional Studies 40, 101031.

Evans, M.G., Burt, T.P., Holden, J., Adamson, J.K., 1999. Runoff generation and water table fluctuations in blanket peat: evidence from UK data spanning the dry summer of 1995. Journal of Hydrology 221, 141-160.

Ferretto, A., Brooker, R., Aitkenhead, M., Matthews, R., Smith, P., 2019. Potential carbon loss from Scottish peatlands under climate change. Regional Environmental Change 19, 2101-2111.

Grieve, I.C., Gilvear, D., 2008. Effects of wind farm construction on concentrations and fluxes of dissolved organic carbon and suspended sediment from peat catchments at Braes of Doune, central Scotland. Mires and Peat 4.

Heal, K., Phin, A., Waldron, S., Flowers, H., Bruneau, P., Coupar, A., Cundill, A., 2020. Wind farm development on peatlands increases fluvial macronutrient loading. Ambio 49, 442-459.

Jennings, P., Kane, G., 2015. Geotechnical engineering for wind farms on peatland sites, Geotechnical Engineering for Infrastructure and Development, pp. 595-600.

Jorat, M.E., Minto, A., Tierney, I., Gilmour, D., 2024. Future Carbon-Neutral Societies: Minimising Construction Impact on Groundwater-Dependent Wetlands and Peatlands, Sustainability.

Kareksela, S., Haapalehto, T., Juutinen, R., Matilainen, R., Tahvanainen, T., Kotiaho, J.S., 2015. Fighting carbon loss of degraded peatlands by jump-starting ecosystem functioning with ecological restoration. Science of the Total Environment 537, 268-276.

Lehan, K., McCarter, C.P.R., Moore, P.A., Waddington, J.M., 2022. Effect of stockpiling time on donor-peat hydrophysical properties: Implications for peatland restoration. Ecological Engineering 182, 106701.

Lindsay, R., 2014. Impacts of artifical drainage on peatlands. IUCN UK Committee Peatland Programme. Briefing Note Number 3.

Lindsay, R., 2018. Peatlands and Wind farms: Conflicting Carbon Targets and Environmental Impacts, In: Finlayson, C.M., Milton, G.R., Prentice, R.C., Davidson, N.C. (Eds.), The Wetland Book: II: Distribution, Description, and Conservation. Springer Netherlands, Dordrecht, pp. 413-425.

Monteverde, S., Healy, M.G., O’Leary, D., Daly, E., Callery, O., 2022. Management and rehabilitation of peatlands: The role of water chemistry, hydrology, policy, and emerging monitoring methods to ensure informed decision making. Ecological Informatics 69, 101638.

Moravec, D., Barták, V., Puš, V., Wild, J., 2018. Wind turbine impact on near-ground air temperature. Renewable Energy 123, 627-633.

Morton, P.A., Heinemeyer, A., 2019. Bog breathing: the extent of peat shrinkage and expansion on blanket bogs in relation to water table, heather management and dominant vegetation and its implications for carbon stock assessments. Wetlands Ecology and Management 27, 467-482.

Natural England, 2013. Natural England Evidence Reviews: guidance on the development process and methods (NEER001). Natural England.

Renou-Wilson, F., Farrell, C., 2009. Peatland vulnerability to energy-related developments from climate change policy in Ireland: the case of wind farms. Mires and Peat 4.

Sander, L., Jung, C., Schindler, D., 2024. Global Review on Environmental Impacts of Onshore Wind Energy in the Field of Tension between Human Societies and Natural Systems, Energies.

Scottish Environment Protection Agency, 2017. Developments on peatland: guidance on the assessment of peat volumes, reuse of excavated peat and the minimisation of waste. SEPA Guidance, WST-G-052, version 1, available from https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/287064/wst-g-052-developments-on-peat-and-off-site-uses-of-waste-peat.pdf

Scottish Natural Heritage, 2013. Research and guidance on restoration and decommissioning of onshore wind farms. NatureScot Commission Report No 591, available at https://www.nature.scot/doc/naturescot-commissioned-report-591-research-and-guidance-restoration-and-decommissioning-onshore

Scottish Renewables, Scottish Natural Heritage, Scottish Environment Protection Agency, Forestry Commission Scotland and Historic Environment Scotland, 2015. Good Practice during Wind Farm Construction, version 3, available from https://www.nature.scot/doc/good-practice-during-wind-farm-construction

Smith, J., Nayak, D.R., Smith, P., 2014. Wind farms on undegraded peatlands are unlikely to reduce future carbon emissions. Energy Policy 66, 585-591.

Smith, P., Smith, J., Flynn, H., Killham, K., Rangel-Castro, I., Foereid, B., Aitkenhead, M., Chapman, S., Towers, W., Bell, J., Lumsdon, D., Milne, R., Thomson, A., Simmons, I., Skiba, U., Reynolds, B., Evans, C., Frogbrook, Z., Bradley, I., Whitmore, A., Falloon, P., Scottish Executive, Welsh Assembly Government, 2007. ECOSSE: Estimating Carbon in Organic Soils – Sequestration and Emissions: Final Report, Web only.

Tanneberger, F., Moen, A., Barthelmes, A., Lewis, E., Miles, L., Sirin, A., Tegetmeyer, C., Joosten, H., 2021. Mires in Europe—Regional Diversity, Condition and Protection, Diversity.

Waldron, S., Smith, J., Taylor, K., McGinnes, C., Roberts, N., McCallum, D., 2018. Repowering onshore wind farms: a technical and environmental exploration of foundation reuse. Carbon Landscapes and Drainage KE Network-led report. DOI 10.17605/OSF.IO/SCZDE

Wawrzyczek, J., Lindsay, R., Metzger, M.J., Quétier, F., 2018. The ecosystem approach in ecological impact assessment: Lessons learned from wind farm developments on peatlands in Scotland. Environmental Impact Assessment Review 72, 157-165.

Williams-Mounsey, J., Grayson, R., Crowle, A., Holden, J., 2021. A review of the effects of vehicular access roads on peatland ecohydrological processes. Earth-Science Reviews 214, 103528.

Zheng, Y., Waldron, S., Flowers, H., 2018. Fluvial dissolved organic carbon composition varies spatially and seasonally in a small catchment draining a wind farm and felled forestry. Science of the Total Environment 626, 785-794.

Appendix A – Research scope, questions and methods

Research Scope and Questions

To provide a comprehensive overview of the current state of knowledge, identify key knowledge gaps, and highlight areas for future research and policy development in sustainable peatland management within the context of renewable energy infrastructure, particularly in Scotland, this review has centred on the below questions:

Current practices:

  • How are excavated peat management and reuse practices being employed (of relevance for Scottish wind farm developments) both on-site and off-site?

Environmental impacts of current methods:

  • What are the impacts and/or benefits of current peat reuse practices in relation to hydrology and water quality, carbon emissions and storage, biodiversity and habitats?
  • Are there any environmental risks associated with current peat reuse practices, such as increased sediment load, erosion or landscape instability?
  • How do impacts change over time – what timeframes are relevant and are there long-term impacts of peatland disturbance and reuse practices?

Limitations and challenges:

  • What are the technical limitations of using excavated peat on-site?
  • How do regulatory frameworks impact the options for peat reuse?

Best practices:

  • From current available evidence, what peat reuse practices are preferable for minimising GHG emissions and wider negative environmental impacts?
  • How can peat management plans be optimised to maximise environmental benefits and minimise carbon losses?

Development of a reuse hierarchy

  • Hierarchy of Peat Reuse
  • Preparation and Planning Steps
  • Peat Reuse Implementation Principles

Research Methods

The following sections describe the information collation methods and data sources used in this study, these methods have been kept purposefully brief here, for more detail please see the appendices. A project database was compiled in Excel and is supplied separately to this project report.

Rapid Evidence Assessment

The method used for performing the evidence review was based on the Natural England (2013) evidence review methodology to ensure that the approach was transparent, objective and rigorous, allowing for robust evidential conclusions to be drawn from the available information for a full description see Appendix A.

Rapid Evidence Assessment methodology

The method used for performing the evidence review was based on the Natural England (2013) evidence review methodology to ensure that the approach was transparent, objective and rigorous, allowing for robust evidential conclusions to be drawn from the available information.

Scope

This rapid evidence assessment (REA) focused on synthesizing current evidence related to peatland excavation and reuse within the context of wind farm construction and similar large-scale developments. The assessment covered:

  • Current standard practices of peatland excavation and management in development projects.
  • Environmental impacts of peatland disturbance.
  • Opportunities for reuse of excavated peat on-site and off-site, including their environmental benefits and limitations over different timescales
  • Best practices for minimizing peatland disturbance and optimizing peat management plans.

Evidence search approach

The methodology comprises five main steps:

  • Define search strategy including keyword list compilation and define inclusion/exclusion criteria.
  • Searching for evidence and record findings.
  • Title and abstract screen.
  • Evidence extraction.
  • Evidence synthesis and evidence gap identification.

Step 1: Keyword list compilation

To establish a systematic search strategy, a list of key search words, search terms and suitable combinations were developed (included in separately shared document). These search terms were recorded for systematic use by the review team to reduce bias.

Step 2: Identification of information sources

In order to develop a comprehensive and relevant evidence base, appropriate information sources were identified. To reduce the risk of publication bias on the evidence base a range of information sources were used, which enabled access to peer-reviewed literature, grey-literature, and unpublished sources.

For this review Science Direct and Scopus were used to identify peer-reviewed information. Google Scholar and Research Gate provided further access to peer-reviewed information to enhance the literature search. Grey literature was also identified in the search and included industry reports and relevant committee proceedings.

Step 3: Evidence search

To facilitate the repeatability and transparency of the search process evidence searches were carried out as Boolean searches (AND, OR, NOT, etc). For example, using Boolean operators we searched (“excavated peat” OR “peatlands” OR “peat bogs” OR “carbon rich soils”) AND (“reuse” OR “recycling” OR “repurposing” OR “reclamation” OR “displaced” OR “borrow pits”) AND (“wind farms” OR “wind turbines” OR “wind energy” OR “onshore wind” OR “renewable energy”) AND (“sustainability” OR “environmental impact” OR “eco-friendly” OR “carbon footprint” OR “climate change” OR “carbon flux” OR “soil restoration” OR “land rehabilitation” OR “habitat restoration” OR “conservation”). The results of each search were recorded, including the number of search hits and number of relevant records returned, date of search and database used. Any other sources, such as evidence provided by stakeholders or generated through stakeholder engagement meetings were also documented similarly.

Developing and establishing search strings was treated as an iterative process and, as such, search strings were amended or adapted to optimise search relevance particularly where the number of search hits or relevance of records retrieved are excessively large or small.

Step 4: Title and abstract screen

In order to allow for a systematic and repeatable approach to screening whilst minimising individual subjectivity and bias, results of the evidence search were screened by title and abstract against pre-established inclusion and exclusion criteria for the review question(s). Evidence that did not satisfy the inclusion criteria were not taken forward for further analysis. References and key details (search date, search terms, publication name, database source and a DOI) were captured for all selected literature. Duplicates are also removed at this stage.

Step 5: Evidence extraction

To allow for interpretation and evaluation of the available literature evidence. A consistent, systematic approach to extracting evidence was taken for each item in the evidence item. Information was extracted on the basis of the review questions. Collated information included details of the type of study, the situation studied, key outcomes, endpoints and geographical extent (reported in separately shared excel document).

Step 6: Evidence synthesis and evidence gap identification

The compilation of evidence allowed for the type and amount of evidence obtained to be scrutinised and for any key evidence gaps or conversely areas of extensive evidence to be highlighted. This allowed for conclusions to be drawn based on the findings review and further enabled the appraisal of whether the collated evidence was adequate and suitable for addressing the review question. The collated information from the review of the literature is detailed in Supplementary Document 1 (finalisation in process).

Availability of the literature

The Rapid Evidence Assessment methodology used (Appendix A) obtained over 250 articles and reports through a range of keyword searches, in Science Direct and Google Scholar as described above. These were screened based on their title and abstract to identify relevant articles. This resulted in 50 articles and reports that were flagged as relevant for further scrutiny. These articles were then reviewed, and key information was extracted and is included within this report.

Desk-based research into current practices

A list of current wind farms in Scotland was obtained from the renewable energy planning database[12] (October 2024, quarter 3) sorted by energy type, location and whether they were currently operational (Figure 7). A sample of wind farms were chosen (as examples of a range of sizes of wind farms and locations across Scotland), to review the information provided within the peatland management plans, amount of peat to be excavated (if stated within application) and other related environmental planning information where obtained.

Figure 7. The distribution of wind farms across Scotland with peatland also highlighted. A list of current wind farms in Scotland was obtained from the renewable energy planning database[13] (October 2024, quarter 3) sorted by energy type, location and whether they were currently operational these were plotted on to a map of Scotland along with the distribution of peatland taken from Carbon and Peatland 2016 map[14].

Site visits

Five wind farm site visits were undertaken in November 2024 (Figure 3), these included three wind farms in the North-east of Scotland and two wind farms in the South-west of Scotland. These sites were chosen to cover a broad geographic distribution, a range of ages (different amounts of time since construction), and variation in peat depth. Visiting these sites provided a greater understanding of what was happening as part of the wind farm construction process, alongside providing context as to how peatland management plans are implemented and the many possible variations which can occur due to the amount of peat extracted, weather conditions and the inherent habitat quality prior to wind farm construction. These site visits also provided ‘real world’ examples of management practices in use, including (a) borrow pit reinstatement (over varying time periods – currently under construction, recent construction (< 5 years), 5-10 years since reinstatement, 10+ years since reinstatement), and (b) the replacement of peat at the side of the constructed roads (as part of the landscaping process and/or to maintain peat levels across the habitat).

Stakeholder Engagement Methods

During the study stakeholders were engaged for the following reasons:

  • To gain insights into current practices for reuse of peat excavated on wind farms in Scotland.
  • To gather views on the strengths, weaknesses, applicability and environmental outcomes of different reuse methods.
  • To gather suggestions for examples and sites which could provide learning about the two points above.
  • To gain input into the development of recommendations for reuse of excavated peat.

Appendix B Stakeholder engagement

Summary stakeholder engagement approach

Methods of stakeholder engagement:

Several different types of stakeholder engagement were employed in the study to gain further insights into relevant issues, current and potential future peat reuse methods, related considerations and impacts and to help identify sites to visit, get sign-posted to relevant documentation and research resources, and to understand considerations which are being or could be taken into account when decisions about reuse of excavated peat are made. Table 10 provides a brief overview of methods.

Table 10. Overview of stakeholder engagement methods

Dates

Activities

Purpose

Oct-Dec

2025

Research interviews with stakeholders / technical specialists.

Supplement desk-research.

Nov 2025

Site visits to wind farms incorporating local / other stakeholder engagement.

Gain insights into reuse activities on site, local context, site characteristics and how decisions were made.

Dec

2025

Academic / technical specialist online workshop

Supplement desk research, sense-check and refine draft recommendations.

Approach to identifying and selecting stakeholders to engage:

The project sought engagement with a range of different types of stakeholders academics and experts, such as those with a track record of relevant publications (i.e. on topics linked to the use of peat on wind farms in Scotland); practitioners from the energy sector (e.g. Ecological Clark of Works (ECoW) / Ecology officers) with wind farm sites in Scotland and from the construction sector that have been involved in building wind farms in Scotland; Civil Servants (Forestry and Land Scotland, PEAG); and conservation organisations (IUCN UK Peatland Programme). A selection of stakeholders were invited to attend the academic workshop, as well as a series of one-to-one discussions.

This approach to stakeholder engagement enabled the facilitation of site visits along with group discussions.

We identified stakeholders via:

  • Introduction / recommendations from the project steering group – a group of specialists from across relevant Scottish Government Agencies (see Section 8.1.7.3)
  • Desk research / REA – to identify relevant academics
  • ‘Snowballing’ – asking our contacts and contacts via the steering group or other interviewees to recommend relevant technical experts or industry contacts who could provide access or insights about wind farm sites.
  • We have sought a diversity of sites, with reasonable access – but to include a site further North if possible due to variation in vegetation colonisation rates for reuse on site.

When selecting wind farm sites to visit we aimed to achieve a diverse range of sites with reasonable access where we would be able to observe a range of different types and ages of reuse of excavated peat. We chose to include sites in different locations, including some further North due to variation in vegetation colonisation rates which we were advised in earlier stakeholder interviews could likely influence the outcome / progression of reuse methods. We contacted several wind farmer developers / operators – some via introduction and some via publically available contact details and also landowners such as Forestry and Land Scotland. The final selection of sites for visit was based on who was willing to host a visit and practical feasibility in the project timescale and available resources (see Section 9.4). During the visits our hosts often shared wider insights about considerations for reuse of peat and examples from other sites which had worked well or less well – these insights are included in the summary findings here.

When selecting stakeholders to interview we tried to ensure a diverse range of perspectives, but we did not set out to achieve a rigorous sampling approach – we had to take a more pragmatic approach to gather insights from willing participants. The snow-balling approach was valuable in helping us identify people to speak to with relevant scientific and technical knowledge and who could provide insights into what had happened on specific sites. We made a deliberate effort to speak to some stakeholders from outside industry organisations, including academics, non-profit organisations and contractors/technical consultants to achieve some balance in our research. A full list of interviews is in Section 8.1.7.1.

Stakeholder workshop

We held an online workshop for academics and technical specialists on 16th December 2025 from 14:00 to 16:30. In total, 23 people attended (in addition to the Ricardo project team) including academic researchers, non-profit organisations, government agencies, energy company peatland specialists, see Section 8.1.7.2 for the list of attendees.

Workshop aims and objectives:

  • Gather insights from previous research and ongoing studies which may not yet be published, to fill research gaps.
  • Get insights into challenges / complexities which may need to be taken into account as we develop recommendations e.g. considerations for applying research results to different contexts / climates.
  • Discuss, test and refine initial ideas for a hierarchy of excavated peat reuse (or similar simple structured approach which could help guide decisions on peat reuse, depending on what has come from our earlier research.

Whilst the focus of the workshop was to engage academic researchers and technical experts, we also had attendees from industry who were technical specialists with relevant insights to share about their experiences with peat reuse in practice and the day-to-day challenges associated with planning, implementation and evaluation of peat reuse.

Workshop agenda:

Table 11. Workshop agenda

Time

Session

14:00

Introduction: project framing, context and scope; participant introductions.

14:20

Project literature review overview & stakeholder feedback

14:55

Examples of current practices drawn from sites visits / stakeholder interviews: comments, questions, sharing other examples.

15:10

Stakeholder discussion / feedback

15:30

Present initial recommendations / peatland reuse hierarchy

15:40

Stakeholder feedback on recommendations / hierarchy

16:10

Final Polls: Feedback on options for recommendations

16:20

WRAP up and next steps

Findings from the workshop are incorporated into the stakeholder research results below (Section 8.1.6) and results of polls in Figure 8.

Figure 8: Results of word cloud (a) and other polls (b and c) undertaken during stakeholder workshop

a)

b)

c)

 

Method of analysis of stakeholder engagement findings:

Recording: Interviews

Transcripts and detailed notes of each stakeholder interview were recorded during the interviews and edited afterwards as needed to create an accurate record.

Recording: Site visits

During site visits photos and notes were taken relating to the site-specific context, practices and decisions. General learning was also noted, where for example the site host had experience across other sites or reuse practices.

Recording: Workshop

Transcripts and detailed notes were recorded during the workshop, as well as the results of polls and participation in interactive aspects of the workshop.

Analysis

Our project team systematically reviewed notes recorded from each element of the stakeholder engagement to identify comments related to the questions:

  • Current reuse practices
  • Potential future reuse practices
  • Insights about environmental outcomes from peat reuse
  • Other considerations
  • Evidence gaps
  • Priorities and recommendations.

Key findings from stakeholder engagement

Current peat reuse practices

During the workshop and stakeholder interviews a variety of practices were explained, along with associated issues, challenges and likely environmental outcomes or state of knowledge about the outcomes. The approaches are summarised in Table

Table 12. Current peat reuse practices

Current practice

Detail, benefits and issues

Borrow pit reinstatement, revegetation and habitat creation.

During site visits and interviews many examples of peat being put into disused borrow pits were shared. Common practices include:

  • Reinstatement / infill with the layer of peat which was previously on top of the borrow pit – often only part filled and then landscaped on one side to create gentler slope. Depth of infill varies.
  • Additional infill with peat excavated from elsewhere on site, sometimes designed with water outflow to mimic natural water flow.
  • Creating structured cells within borrow pits to maintain structure / control water flows with the aim of keeping peat wet / creating functioning peat bog or similar habitat.

Other practice examples included:

  • Allowing peatland heath type vegetation to develop in borrow pits without infilling any excavated peat (presumably when there was not excess peat).
  • Piping out peaty slurry from turbine bases into borrow pits.

Issues flagged included:

  • Water flows after infill – best practice is unclear, and design is unclear.
  • Peat depth – variable depths were filled, unclear whether all comply with current guidance[15].
  • Expense of constructing cells.

Insights shared about environmental outcomes:

  • Some examples seemed to have peatland vegetation indicator species and high-water tables
  • Often on slopes in landscaped borrow pits drier habitats develop.
  • Mixed success in maintaining / re-establishing vegetation cover meaning peat is sometimes left bare. More pronounce in northerly locations with slower vegetation colonisation.

Roadside verge reinstatement or revegetation.

A very common practice – excavated peat is stored alongside the road after construction, typically until after cables have also been laid, and then peat is reinstated. Sometimes:

  • Efforts are made to maintain structure and place turves on top for later reuse.
  • Wider verges are created / landscaped to hold more excavated peat from elsewhere on site.
  • Reseed to improve vegetation cover – although not common practice.

Issues flagged included:

  • Likelihood of peat drying out whilst store on roadside.
  • Significant risk of mixing soils and changing nutrient balance.
  • Significant risk of wind / water erosion during storage.
  • Convenience prioritised over effectiveness

Insights shared about environmental outcomes:

  • Mostly viewed as something unlikely to return to functioning peat bog due to peat storage, handling, contamination and proximity to road which will affect drainage.
  • Carbon may be lost during storage.
  • Revegetation, including wet heath type vegetation, was feasible or they knew of examples.
  • When vegetated can be beneficial to prevent silt / clay fines washing off into the wider landscape.

Infill historical peat cuttings

Not common but is used sometimes where peat cuttings are on site. Limited information was provided – unclear whether turves were placed on top or natural revegetation happened.

Example of storage in peat cuttings before use in incorporation into a restoration project was also cited.

Issues flagged included:

  • Only possible where peat cuttings exist – declining availability.

Insights into environmental outcomes:

  • Wet heath / acid grassland appeared to have developed on one site – although no vegetation survey data was available to confirm this.
  • Hydrological functioning / GHG emissions unclear – not data / other insights shared.
  • Reuse of peat where it had historically been located

Incorporate excavated peat into peatland restoration projects (pilot projects)

During two site visits and in other conversations examples of pilot projects to incorporate excavated peat into peatland restoration. Methods included:

  • Adding a layer of peat under existing turves / filling landscape furrows on former forested site.
  • Infilling bare sections of peat between hags, on degraded / eroded natural peatland areas.

Issues flagged included:

  • This is an experimental practice and not routinely permitted.
  • Access to suitable sites: access for earth works vehicles is difficult, making it hard to do larger areas away from tracks, without creating new access tracks.
  • Soil mixing is hard to avoid which can change nutrient balance in the peat and influence end result.
  • Designs aim to manage water to support peat formation whilst also ensuring safety / stability – different views were shared about how this should be done and appropriateness of approaches on site.

Insights shared about environmental outcomes:

  • Success of vegetation recovery/formation of active peat bog appears mixed so far, although long term observations and measurements are not available to enable evaluation.
  • GHG emissions fluxes are unclear – no monitoring data available.

Drainage related practices

Multiple stakeholders shared views and experiences on the role of drainage on site currently and typical practices. Current practices vary:

  • Infilling: some drainage ditches created during construction are infilled, and some aren’t. Those which are, are filled with arisings from the ditch creation, which would have been stored alongside for the duration of construction, mostly likely with limited management e.g. wetting.
  • Construction methods:
  • ‘rock-filling’ above ground level in road construction to maintain water flows (floating road example)[16];
  • Angled flumes and other practices to separate silty or polluted drainage water to avoid wider pollution / silt spreading.

Issues flagged included:

  • Possible excessive / unnecessary drainage on some sites, having a detrimental effect on peatland habitats on site.
  • The importance of maintaining some ditches / drainage to ensure site stability and safety.

Insights shared about environmental outcomes:

  • Stakeholders felt that excessive drainage may hinder chances of successful recovery / recreation of peatland habitat re
  • Drainage important to maintain integrity of construction process – do not want to risk a peat slide
  • Scope for some of the temporary works drains to be infilled (usually with the arisings from the ditch itself) – however this is often not done (and doesn’t provide scope for vast quantities of peat reuse).

Peat handling & storage practices

Typical practice examples:

  • Roadside piles – various heights, various levels of attention to maintaining structure and wetness, varied timescales.
  • Efforts to minimise handling / transport often cited.

Insights shared about environmental outcomes:

  • Carbon lost when peat oxidises – often results when it dries out or is subject to erosion.
  • Carbon emissions from fuel use for transport around site (or off-site if that were to happen).

Off-site reuse of peat

No stakeholders cited any examples of peat being reused off-site – many had years of experience in the sector and had never known this to happen.

Other feedback provided by stakeholders on current practices included:

  • Variable ‘aims’ of reuse currently – ranging from developers who are trying to create functioning peatland on previously degraded land through to examples where people suggested there was no clear intention beyond finding a place to put the excess peat.
  • Compliance with guidance: multiple stakeholders shared a view / example that guidance is not always followed particularly in relation to peat infill depths and handling practices – reasons were unclear, although separately a skills gap was mentioned.
  • Quality of PMPs: varied – some followed fairly standard practice without consideration of the uniqueness of the site, whilst some were more nuanced / based on more detailed analysis of possibilities and potential outcomes
  • Enforcement / monitoring of PMPs: enforcement / monitoring during constructure can be inconsistent – sometimes very good collaboration and active consideration of effective approaches to achieve good environmental outcomes and sometimes poor / ineffective. Monitoring after construction and commissioning is not common practice, except were linked to habitat management plans which have a formal requirement for monitoring over the life of the site.
  • Influence of contracting process and responsibilities: separate contracts for different parts of the windfarm design and construction are commonly let which can make it difficult to develop and maintain a coherent plan for peat management through from planning permission through to final build and ongoing management. The wind turbine specification can also dictate excavation e.g. to achieve desired gradient for installation, but with more site surveys and consideration between developer, turbine supplier and site works contractor there may be potential to develop techniques which require less excavation.
  • Important of site selection / micro-siting: the flexibility to move turbines, based on more detailed site surveys of peat is important to reduce peat excavation.
  • Reuse of peat is well policed – must be in line with SEPA Reuse Guidance and therefore industry stakeholders follow this approach without feeling able to vary from this.

Potential future reuse practices

Practice

Details, benefits and issues

Deliberately targeting specific end habitat e.g. in borrow pits

Stakeholders suggested that it may be feasible to design reuse more intentionally with target end-habitat in mind e.g. designing the borrow-pit structure and planning peat excavation and handling specifically with the aim of targeting a valuable habitat – peat bog recreation if feasible or if not, another locally suitable and ideally wet habitat type. There was uncertainty about how to ensure success and what outcome was feasible on a site-by-site basis given the variability between sites in terms of prior land condition, surrounding context and land scape and land ‘capability’ for habitats.

Further use in restoration

  • Some stakeholders felt the incorporation of excavated peat into restoration projects had potential to achieve good environmental outcomes – examples highlighted were infill in degraded and eroded peatlands including hag infill, incorporation in former forested / forest bog landscapes – various methods being piloted.
  • Some apparent success of vegetation recovery on pilot examples was flagged, but stakeholders acknowledged that the environmental outcome were unclear.
  • Some stakeholder flagged potential concerns about the effectiveness of this approach due to:
  • Difficulty establishing vegetation on slopes
  • Potential challenges with water flows, depending on locations and hydrology.
  • Impact of damage during the restoration process and skills needed in planning, preparation and handling to achieve a good outcome.
  • Site stability / drainage – general agreement on its importance but different views on how to achieve / balance with other priorities leading to some concern about how to approach more experimental methods.

Infill of drainage ditches (where safety/stability allows)

Stakeholders flagged that, whilst it is important for site safety and stability to ensure suitable drainage is maintained, there could be opportunities to infil more drainage ditches or increase overall wetness on site to benefit existing peatland habitats on site or increase the likelihood of successful peatland habitat forming where peat reuse has aimed for this outcome.

Off-site uses

We asked whether uses such as agriculture/horticulture whiskey industry use would be feasible or environmentally beneficial in any circumstance or whether they knew of any other examples.

No stakeholders felt that off-site use was a good idea due to:

  • Costs
  • likely loss of peat structure / liquification during transport
  • environmental impacts of transport
  • likelihood that carbon would be lost from peat in the new use – lack of control over this.

Insights about environmental outcomes from peat reuse

Examples and comments on positive environmental outcomes:

  • Peat / vegetation recovery in restoration / hag infill – appears successful (in short-term) on flatter ground.
  • Softer trackside verges – vegetation and less slope – can prevent silt migrating into bogs.
  • Typical vegetation recovery: acid grassland mix initially, then (5-10yrs later) heathers / heath, and then hopefully wetter ones will progress to bog.

Examples and comments on negative environmental outcomes:

  • Most peat reused on wind farms turns into non-peatland habitat – it doesn’t function as peatland because hydrological conductivity is lost. At best going to form an upland wet heath, more likely to be an acid grassland.
  • If non-functioning peatland carbon will not be saved within the system Need to keep the carbon gaining and building within the system.
  • With poor water management silt is migrating into wet bogs.
  • Contamination of nutrient poor peatbog with mineral sources changes nutrient balance and therefore makes peatbog hard to achieve in reuse/restoration – flushed peat or fen more likely. Several stakeholders flagged that it can be challenging to prevent mineral contamination – storage and handling care is needed, and isn’t always feasible in practice.

Other comments on environmental outcomes:

  • Potential measurement approaches:
  • GI stage, peat probing / wetness, catchment mapping, qualitative sample (no one does this despite guidance), Van Post Scale (peat character).
  • Dip wells – across sites.
  • Water index via satellite imagery linked to Sentinal programme.
  • Pressure loggers – data recording for three months.
  • Options for assessing carbon; current government calculator, in house planning tools; revised carbon calculated – potential for different assumptions about loss of carbon on excavated peat.
  • Important to balance carbon / biodiversity outcomes. Some stakeholders flagged this in general and also one highlighted the challenge of balancing this in the context of deciding whether to rewet peat during storage – if abstraction from river is required this could have negative consequences for river habitat.
  • Several flagged nervousness about assuming reused and restored peat delivers the same environmental outcomes as natural peatlands.

Other considerations for excavated peat reuse

Drainage installation, maintenance and infill: stakeholders agreed that ensuring the right amount of drainage during construction and afterwards is important, but did not all agree on how well this is currently being achieved and whether it is possible provide clearer guidance on this.

Peat handling & storage: many stakeholders flagged the need to minimise movement and handling of peat, aim to keep peat local, minimise handling / travel distance. Use of large diggers and trucks makes this hard. Issues included:

  • Need to keep the peat moist: actively or passively
  • Need to maintain layers / structure and avoid contamination with mineral soils / aggregate as this will change the nutrient profile and functional structure of the peat.
  • Peat can liquify in trucks if handled.
  • Cost for moving peat
  • Some flagged that temporary storage in ‘groins’ between road junctions is often preferred as there is more space to work there, whilst other advocated designated storage areas. What is practical will vary site to site.

‘Land-made-available’ limitation: land envelope can restrict end destination of any peat reuse ‘on site’ – instances where sensible areas for ‘peat reuse’ are outside the envelope.

Site data availability: planning the peat re-use in advance would be good but often don’t get chance to plan until actually on site and work starts – trees often obscure lidar data.

Excavation timing: contractors don’t get much choice/penalties for delays – timing will influence ability to keep peat wet, keep structure etc.

Evidence gaps

Stakeholders flagged the following issues and gaps in evidence:

  • Limited monitoring of implementation and outcomes of Peatland Management Plans (PMPs). Monitoring isn’t required for PMPs in the same way as for Habitat Management Plans (which are monitored for the life of the wind farm), and therefore limited data is available on prior land condition, peat reuse/management methods, and environmental outcomes.
  • Approach and quality of assessments and monitoring could be better. Current over reliance on the presence or absence of specific vegetation as an indicator was highlighted – finding a species at a specific location in a large site doesn’t represent the entire site. Better quality peatland condition assessments are needed, ideally landscape based incorporating species, hydrology and other factors rather than quadrat based. This would provide better data for planning reuse / management and a better baseline for impact monitoring, particularly important as construction is often on degraded peat.
  • Lack of longitudinal studies into environmental outcomes of peat reuse/management approaches. People cited specific gaps such as study of behaviour and environmental outcomes of peat drying at the side of the road after reinstatement; impacts of storage techniques such as surface roughing to help water infiltration vs allowing crust to form; GHG emissions following disturbance and reinstatement.
  • General gap in terms of the understanding of peatland and peat behaviour in the context of wind farm construction. This includes peatland hydrology and how this is affected by disruption, how peat behaves in storage, the impact of movement on peat quality and potential for reestablishment in new destination
  • Evidence of the validity of measures such as water table and indicator species as indictors of GHG emissions / ‘functioning peat bog’ for reinstated / restored peatlands. Stakeholders flagged there is no research on peatland excavation and then reuse, hence need to establish the relationship with vegetation, hydrology.
  • Limited literature on remote sensing for wind farm monitoring.
  • Lack of clear guidance on some aspects of engineering and site management e.g. balancing drainage and wetness, storage practices.
  • Lack of research to show whether implementation of best practice is feasible. NPF4 Policy 5 states that ideally carbon rich soils are actively sequestering carbon, and this should be the aim of the PMP. There is a need for research to show if this is possible – this relates to points above about behaviour of peat after disturbance / validity of indicators.

Priorities and recommendations

In general stakeholders were reluctant to give detailed feedback on which methods of peat reuse on site should be a priority because of variability of site circumstances (e.g. land capability, condition) and the lack of concrete research to provide evidence of the environment outcomes which could be anticipated.

Some key comments and points on priorities were:

  • Revegetation and minimising bare peat is key to avoid negative cycle of drying and/or erosion: to help success it is important to have follow up surveys and action if issues are identified.
  • Need to minimise extraction of peat.
  • Advice must allow for flexibility and be nuanced due to the diversity of peatlands.
  • Suggested hierarchy:
  • Avoid;
  • Reinstate in location contiguous to other peatland where carbon can be retained and retain hydrology and long-term species composition will be at least consistent with species within the species disturbed.
  • Re-use off site to the same effect.
  • Alternative suggestion: two different hierarchies, one with the aim of functioning peatland, and one for the aim of using peat in a way that would result it being used for another purpose e.g. wet heath, dry heath.
  • Essential component is maintaining connectivity of the re-use areas with the hydrology and its immediate area, but also looking further at the wider hydrological unit. This also includes connectivity with the peatland restoration areas that will be undertaken on the site.
  • Guidance documents can be perfect, however, on the ground can be challenging e.g. to ensure hydrological connectivity – potential need for incentive to go for the best outcome and need to involve different parties to achieve this.

List of stakeholder discussion interviews and workshop attendees

Interviewees

Susan Nicol

Forestry and Land Scotland

Andy Gillan

RJ Mcleod

Mark Mulqueeny

SSE

Derek Healy

Duncan Mackay and Sons

James Allison

Scottish Power

Emma Taylor

SEPA

Roxane Anderson

University of Highlands and Islands

Gill Steel

Ironside Farrar

Siue Allen

Ironside Farrar

Malcolm Crosby

Forestry and Land Scotland

Richard Clarke

Forestry and Land Scotland

Sue White

Shetland Community Trust

David McGinty

SSE Renewables

Workshop attendees

Name

Organisation

Role

Andy Mills

OWC Ltd

Geomorphologist writing many PMP’s

Andy Gillan

RJ McLeod Contractors

Construction projects on peatlands

Irene Tierney

IMTECO Ltd

Ecologist writing many PMP’s

Emma Hinchliffe

IUCN UK Peatland Programme

Director

Cerian Baldwin

PeatlandACTION

Technical director involved in development, Scottish Peatland Standard and reviewing PMPs and EIAs in relation to peat

Alan Cundill

SEPA

Senior Specialist Scientist interested in reuse/management of peat

Claire Campbell

SEPA

Senior Specialist Scientist and reviewing PMP’s

Jessica Fìor-Berry

IUCN UK Peatland Programme

Peatland Programme policy lead

Karen Rentoul

NatureScot

Policy advice manager for uplands and also peatlands

Rachel Short

ScottishPower Renewables

Senior ecology manager responsible for design, construction and operation of wind farms, many on peatlands

Fiona Donaldson

SEPA

Waste policy unit interested in management of excavated peat

Grace Gubbins

NatureScot

Involved in the development of the biodiversity metric for the planning system, also supporting peatland expert advisory group

Roxane Andersen

University of Highlands and Islands

Peatland scientist, also sit on peatland expert advisory group

Chris Marshall

SLR Consulting

Peatland lead dealing with many PMP’s

Susan Nicol

Forestry and Land Scotland

Land managers leasing land for wind farms

Kirsten Lees

University of Derby

Peatland restoration with focus on carbon

Ainoa Pravia

Forest Research

Ecologist (for peatlands)

Iain Detrey

EA

Peatland adviser (for England)

Nicholle Bell

University of Edinburgh

Peatland restoration, and alternative reuse options

Kerry Dinsmore

SG

Principal science advisor on peatlands, also on steering committee

 

Project steering group

Ben Dipper (Scottish Government)

Kerry Dinsmore (Scottish Government)

Patricia Bruneau (Nature Scot)

Scottish Government policy team representatives

Appendix C Wind Farm Site Research (site visits & desk research)

Wind farm planning document review

This section reviews the desk-based research describing existing wind farms management plans including data on numbers of wind farms across Scotland on peat soils.

Wind farm site visit summary

This section combines the results of the desk-based research describing existing wind farm management plans alongside the information gathered during the site visits. We aimed to visit a diverse range of sites with reasonable access where we would be able to observe a range of different types and ages of reuse of excavated peat. We chose to include sites in different locations, the north-east and south-west of Scotland. In both areas we visited a newly constructed wind farm, alongside older wind farms within the same locality. This provided examples with different vegetation colonisation rates which could influence the success of reuse methods. We contacted several wind farmer developers / operators, the final selection of sites for visit was based on who was willing to host a visit and practical feasibility in the project timescale and available resources.

Desk-based findings

We reviewed the planning information prior to site visits. This included information on when the work was completed / site commissioned to generate energy, the number of turbines that had been built (both initially and in phased extensions), land ownership and whether other stakeholder were involved in the process (e.g. wildlife rangers based on site, ECoW’s).

Sample site selection

Site selection was undertaken taking into account key variables to ensure that a representative sample of wind farms across Scotland was obtained. Primarily, this included considering a range of development site sizes and locations across Scotland, while ensuring that wind farms were both operational and included relevant Peat Management Plans (PMPs). To note, the number of wind turbines was used as a proxy for development size, while the requirement for developments to have PMPs significantly reduced availability of case studies (even though this is an NPF4 requirement).

Peatland management plans

The key limitations in the approach concerned the accuracy of the data held within the PMPs, for which accessing documents with the requisite information (peat depths and volumes) was the first challenge. In those PMPs that were available, the peat volumes were based on peat survey depths, which are extrapolated across sites via peat probe information, meaning that there is a degree of uncertainty between distinct probe points. There is therefore a high degree of mathematical assumption based on converting peat depth extrapolations to volumes via combining this data with site stripping boundaries. Utilising survey information also assumes competence of all surveyors, despite peat surveys (and peat identification more generally) being a highly specialist skill that geo-environmentalists, geotechnical specialists and even soil scientists would not necessarily have experience of. In addition, peat volumes included in PMPs can change during the construction phase, such as where design is updated, or due to poor implementation of PMP measures. This means that volumes at project inception are often unlikely to be the same once wind farms are conducted, given the dynamic nature of the construction phase and typically iterative design approaches.

Overview of key finding from site visits

Key highlights are included in the main section 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4. A number of borrow pits were visited at each of the sites – these varied in effectivity, levels of monitoring and time since reinstatement. Landscaping examples where peat had been put down along the roadside were clearly visible in the newly constructed wind farms, in the older wind farms this was less obvious, in some cases the peat had become part of the surrounding peatland, however the likelihood was that in some areas it had been lost to the wider environment through erosion. Novel restoration reuse was seen, this was experimental and not common practice. No peat was taken off-site for reuse elsewhere.

Limitations of site visits

Although we were very grateful to the stakeholders for taking the time to show us the wind farms and distil their knowledge of the process, it was clear that this view was only able to provide a snapshot in time analysis of what had occurred at that site. Also depending on time from commissioning, some key details related to the reuse of peat were lost (e.g. exact volumes of peat used within infill of peat excavations, how borrow pit reinstatements were originally designed). Thus, it is harder to identify best practice and what has worked and what hasn’t if the methodology is unreported. The site visits could have been impacted by the weather conditions on the day (e.g. low cloud and drizzle for the final site visit), this made note taking and photographing examples harder and some of the finer details may not be visible in the photographs.

 

How to cite this publication:

Crotty, F., Dowson, F., Schofield, K., Barker, M., Ginns, B., David, T., Herold, L. (2025) ‘Reuse of excavated peat on wind farm development sites’, ClimateXChange. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6333

© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by Ricardo on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate as at the date of the report, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk


  1. https://www.wwt.org.uk/discover-wetlands/wetlands/peat-bogs



  2. https://www.nature.scot/sites/default/files/2023-02/Guidance-Peatland-Action-Peatland-Condition-Assessment-Guide-A1916874.pdf



  3. John Muir Trust – Scotland’s peatland policy update.



  4. https://www.gov.scot/publications/carbon-calculator-for-wind-farms-on-scottish-peatlands-factsheet/



  5. https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2011/228/contents



  6. https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/287064/wst-g-052-developments-on-peat-and-off-site-uses-of-waste-peat.pdf



  7. Scottish Renewables, Scottish Environment Protection Agency. 2012. Guidance on the Assessment of Peat Volumes, Reuse of Excavated Peat and the Minimisation of Waste



  8. https://www.heraldscotland.com/news/18270734.14m-trees-cut-scotland-make-way-wind-farms



  9. https://www.sepa.org.uk/media/287064/wst-g-052-developments-on-peat-and-off-site-uses-of-waste-peat.pdf



  10. https://www.nature.scot/climate-change/nature-based-solutions/nature-based-solutions-practice/peatland-action/peatland-action-how-do-i-restore-and-manage-my-peatland-0



  11. Micro-siting is where small adjustments to the wind farm lay out are made to avoid / minimise damage to peat (or other sensitive environments) on site.



  12. Renewable Energy Planning Database: quarterly extract – GOV.UK



  13. Renewable Energy Planning Database: quarterly extract – GOV.UK



  14. https://www.data.gov.uk/dataset/ed1922b7-1136-442c-af4d-a36ebad8839f/carbon-and-peatland-2016-map-wind-farm-spatial-framework



  15. It was unclear whether stakeholder was referring to current or previous guidance.



  16. A method described to us where rocks are piled, rather than smaller aggregate to create a more porous substrate allowing for greater water flow.


The Climate Change Committee’s 2023 Report to the Scottish Parliament called for stronger action on food system emissions. Policy interventions need to address the environmental impacts of food production and consumption while ensuring dietary improvements and economic sustainability.  

This report assesses Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape, identifying areas for policy development and providing recommendations to support the Scottish Government’s climate, public health and food security goals going forward.  

The study combined desk-based research, stakeholder engagement and categorisation using a PESTLE (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental) framework. 

Summary of findings

Scotland’s complex diet and climate policy landscape includes several emerging developments and opportunities, yet challenges persist. These challenges typically reflect areas that would benefit from policy coordination and development.  

  • Political alignment and coordination: Scottish Government has taken steps to articulate sustainable food ambitions through legislation such as the Good Food Nation Act. Fragmentation across different policy fields (health, agriculture, environment, economy) limits integrated food system transformation. Coordination between local, devolved, and UK governments remains limited, leading to conflicting priorities. The absence of clear emissions targets for food production constrains alignment with net-zero ambitions. 
  • Economic levers and constraints: Investments in local food initiatives and growing interest in sustainable supply chains signal progress. Fiscal policies have the effect of benefiting high-emission food production over sustainable alternatives. Financial barriers constrain local authorities, small producers, and community groups in adopting agroecological approaches. The cost of sustainable food options continues to limit access and dietary change. 
  • Social attitudes and engagement: Public interest in sustainable diets is increasing, and some awareness campaigns have gained traction. Cultural traditions, cost concerns, and inconsistent messaging shape public resistance to reducing red meat consumption. Food insecurity remains a barrier to sustainable diet access for lower-income households. Greater public engagement is needed to build trust and understanding of dietary policy aims. 
  • Technological tools and innovation: Advances in precision agriculture and digital tools offer potential for more sustainable production. Lack of a standardised food emissions-tracking system limits evidence-based policymaking for reducing environmental impact. Rural areas often lack the digital infrastructure to adopt new technologies. Inadequate sustainability labelling limits informed consumer choice. 
  • Legal frameworks: The Good Food Nation Act provides a foundation for coordinated food policy development. The evidence suggests a lack of strong enforcement mechanisms to drive change. Regulation of food marketing, labelling, and ultra-processed foods is limited. Devolved and UK-wide inconsistencies create legal misalignment across food, health, and trade policy. 
  • Environmental integration: Scotland has made progress in climate policy and land stewardship through initiatives like the Land Use Strategy. There are challenges in balancing different land use functions such as forestry, agriculture, and biodiversity protection. Climate adaptation strategies for agriculture need to be better developed, due to increasing climate risks. The ecological role of grazing land in biodiversity and carbon sequestration is underutilised in policy planning. 

For further information, please read the report.

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783. 

Research completed: March 2025

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6180

Executive summary

The Climate Change Committee’s 2023 Report to the Scottish Parliament called for stronger action on food system emissions. Policy interventions need to address the environmental impacts of food production and consumption while ensuring dietary improvements and economic sustainability.

This report assesses Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape, identifying areas for policy development and providing recommendations to support the Scottish Government’s climate, public health and food security goals going forward.

The study combined desk-based research, stakeholder engagement and categorisation using a PESTLE (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental) framework.

Key findings

Scotland’s complex diet and climate policy landscape includes several emerging developments and opportunities, yet challenges persist. These challenges typically reflect areas that would benefit from policy coordination and development.

  • Political alignment and coordination: Scottish Government has taken steps to articulate sustainable food ambitions through legislation such as the Good Food Nation Act. Fragmentation across different policy fields (health, agriculture, environment, economy) limits integrated food system transformation. Coordination between local, devolved, and UK governments remains limited, leading to conflicting priorities. The absence of clear emissions targets for food production constrains alignment with net-zero ambitions.
  • Economic levers and constraints: Investments in local food initiatives and growing interest in sustainable supply chains signal progress. Fiscal policies have the effect of benefiting high-emission food production over sustainable alternatives. Financial barriers constrain local authorities, small producers, and community groups in adopting agroecological approaches. The cost of sustainable food options continues to limit access and dietary change.
  • Social attitudes and engagement: Public interest in sustainable diets is increasing, and some awareness campaigns have gained traction. Cultural traditions, cost concerns, and inconsistent messaging shape public resistance to reducing red meat consumption. Food insecurity remains a barrier to sustainable diet access for lower-income households. Greater public engagement is needed to build trust and understanding of dietary policy aims.
  • Technological tools and innovation: Advances in precision agriculture and digital tools offer potential for more sustainable production. Lack of a standardised food emissions-tracking system limits evidence-based policymaking for reducing environmental impact. Rural areas often lack the digital infrastructure to adopt new technologies. Inadequate sustainability labelling limits informed consumer choice.
  • Legal frameworks: The Good Food Nation Act provides a foundation for coordinated food policy development. The evidence suggests a lack of strong enforcement mechanisms to drive change. Regulation of food marketing, labelling, and ultra-processed foods is limited. Devolved and UK-wide inconsistencies create legal misalignment across food, health, and trade policy.
  • Environmental integration: Scotland has made progress in climate policy and land stewardship through initiatives like the Land Use Strategy. There are challenges in balancing different land use functions such as forestry, agriculture, and biodiversity protection. Climate adaptation strategies for agriculture need to be better developed, due to increasing climate risks. The ecological role of grazing land in biodiversity and carbon sequestration is underutilised in policy planning.

Opportunities for action and policy implications

A summary of key opportunities for action is presented in the table below. A fuller articulation of these opportunities, with supporting detail, is included in Section 6, Conclusions and policy implications.

Building a resilient and sustainable Scottish food system

Key insights and policy pathways

Political

  • Promote more coordinated governance approaches to food policy.
  • Enhance cross-sector collaboration to support integrated food system policy.
  • Consider mechanisms to improve accountability across the food system.

Economic

  • Align agricultural support with sustainability goals.
  • Explore ways to enhance financial support for sustainable food systems.
  • Explore the effectiveness of fiscal policies for dietary shifts.

Social

  • Address food affordability and accessibility.
  • Foster inclusive public engagement and food education.
  • Support culturally sensitive dietary transitions.

Technological

  • Promote development of standardised emissions data for food products.
  • Enhance digital food labelling to support sustainability and consumer awareness.

Legal

  • Review opportunities to strengthen food regulations.
  • Support better alignment between devolved and UK-wide food policies.
  • Support increased transparency in food supply chains.

Environmental

  • Promote climate adaptation planning within food and land-use policy.
  • Balance food security with biodiversity needs.
  • Explore opportunities to align land-use policies with sustainability objectives.

 

 

Glossary and abbreviations table 

Agroecology

A sustainable farming approach that applies ecological principles to agriculture and prioritises local knowledge, biodiversity, and low-input systems.

Carbon sequestration

The process of capturing and storing atmospheric carbon dioxide, often through natural systems like forests and soils.

Climate Change Committee (CCC)

The Climate Change Committee is an independent, statutory body established under the UK’s Climate Change Act 2008. Its primary role is to advise the UK Government and devolved administrations on emissions targets and to report to Parliament on progress in reducing greenhouse gas emissions and preparing for climate change. ​

Food for Life (Scotland)

Food for Life Scotland is a programme operated by the Soil Association, funded by the Scottish Government, with the mission to make good food the easy choice for all. The initiative focuses on harnessing the power of public food to positively impact health, the environment, and the local economy.

Food sovereignty

The right of people, communities, and countries to define their own food systems, including the production, distribution, and consumption of food.

Food system transformation

A fundamental shift in the way food is produced, distributed, and consumed to improve sustainability, health, and equity.

Fortification

The process of adding essential vitamins and minerals (such as iron, iodine, vitamin D, or folic acid) to food to improve its nutritional quality and prevent or correct dietary deficiencies in a population. Common examples include the fortification of flour with folic acid or milk with vitamin D.

Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act

The Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act 2022 establishes a framework for Scotland mandating the creation of national and local Good Food Nation Plans, aiming to ensure that food-related policies contribute to various aspects of well-being, including health, economic development, and environmental sustainability.

Just Transition

A policy framework to ensure that the shift to a low-carbon economy is fair and inclusive, protecting workers and communities.

Net-zero

Achieving a balance between greenhouse gas emissions produced and those removed from the atmosphere.

PESTLE analysis

A strategic framework used to identify and analyse Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental factors for understanding the broader context for decision-making.

Precision Livestock Farming (PLF)

Precision Livestock Farming refers to the application of advanced technologies and data-driven methods to monitor and manage individual animals within a herd. PLF aims to enhance animal health, welfare, productivity, and environmental sustainability.

Plant based

A diet or product primarily made from plants (e.g., vegetables, fruits, grains, legumes, nuts, and seeds). While not always strictly vegan or vegetarian, plant-based diets typically minimise or avoid animal products.

Plant based meat alternatives (PBMAs)

Food products designed to mimic the taste, texture, and appearance of conventional meat but are made from plant-based ingredients.

Procurement

The strategic process by which organisations acquire goods, services, or works from external sources to fulfil their operational needs. This process encompasses a series of steps designed to ensure that acquisitions are made in a timely, cost-effective, and quality-assured manner.

Reformulation

The process of altering the ingredients of food or drink products to improve their nutritional profile; for example, by reducing salt, sugar, or saturated fat, while maintaining taste and consumer acceptability.

Regenerative agriculture

A system of farming practices that aims to restore and enhance soil health, biodiversity, water cycles, and ecosystem resilience while producing food.

Scope 3 emissions

Refers to accounting for the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that occur across a retailer’s value chain, such as those from the production of goods they sell, transportation, packaging, and consumer use and disposal. Including Scope 3 emissions provides a more comprehensive picture of a retailer’s wider environmental impact beyond their direct operations.

Scottish Dietary Goals (SDGs)

A set of nutritional targets established by the Scottish Government to improve the overall health of the population by promoting healthier eating habits. These goals outline the recommended intake levels for various nutrients and food groups, aiming to reduce the prevalence of diet-related conditions such as obesity, heart disease, and type 2 diabetes.

Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029 (SNAP3)

The Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029 (SNAP3) is Scotland’s strategic framework aimed at enhancing the nation’s resilience to the impacts of climate change over a five-year period. SNAP3 outlines a comprehensive approach to adaptation, ensuring that Scotland’s communities, economy, and environment are prepared for current and future climate challenges.​

Semi-structured interview

A qualitative data collection method that uses a flexible interview guide with open-ended questions. It allows the interviewer to explore specific topics in depth while also adapting questions based on participants’ responses.

Stakeholder mapping

A strategic process used to identify, analyse, and visualise individuals or groups (stakeholders) who have an interest in or are affected by a project, organisation, or policy. This technique helps to understand stakeholders’ influence, interests, and relationships, facilitating effective communication and engagement strategies.

Supply chain

The network of organisations, people, activities, information, and resources involved in the creation and delivery of a product or service from the supplier to the end customer.

Sustainable diet

A diet that promotes health and well-being while reducing environmental impact and supporting food system resilience.

Systematic literature review

A structured and comprehensive method for identifying, evaluating, and synthesising all relevant research on a specific topic using transparent and replicable procedures.

Third Sector

The part of an economy or society comprising non-governmental and non-profit organisations, such as charities, community groups, voluntary organisations, social enterprises, and cooperatives.

Ultra-processed food

Industrially formulated foods that typically contain additives and minimal whole ingredients; often linked to poor health outcomes.

Urban agriculture

The practice of growing, processing, and distributing food within or around cities and towns (e.g., community gardens, rooftop farms, vertical farming, backyard gardening, and small-scale livestock or aquaculture). It can support local food systems, access to fresh produce, and community engagement, climate resilience, and urban greening.

Vertical farming

A method of growing crops in vertically stacked layers, often in controlled indoor environments. This allows year-round production and is commonly used in urban areas to reduce food miles and increase local food resilience.

Zoonotic disease

A disease that can be transmitted between animals and humans. These diseases can be caused by viruses, bacteria, parasites, or fungi, and can spread through direct contact, food, water, or vectors like mosquitoes. Zoonotic diseases are a key concern in public health, agriculture, and environmental management due to their potential for outbreaks and global spread.

Table 1: Glossary and abbreviations used in the report

Introduction

How can Scotland balance climate goals, public health, and economic resilience in food policy?

Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape is shaped by multiple, often competing priorities, making policy development and implementation particularly complex. Scotland’s net-zero ambitions don’t sit in isolation and delivery is influenced by UK Government food policy and wider cross-border complexities. Any approach must align with, Scotland-specific advice such as Recommendation R2024-003 from the Climate Change Committee’s (CCC) 2023 Report to the Scottish Parliament, which calls for stronger action on food system emissions (CCC, 2023). The CCC’s carbon budget for Scotland is due to be published in May 2025, and the CCC has highlighted that agriculture is projected to become the second-highest emitting sector by 2040. Efforts to reduce the environmental impact of food consumption need to be balanced with public health goals, economic considerations, and social acceptability. While the Scottish Government plans to introduce measures such as restricting unhealthy food promotion and encouraging sustainable agricultural practices, significant barriers remain. Public resistance to dietary change, particularly reductions in red meat consumption, reflects deep-seated cultural attitudes and concerns about choice, affordability and accessibility. Furthermore, promoting lower meat diets could lead to economic contraction in agriculture-related sectors, especially the red meat sector (Allan, Comerford & McGregor, 2019). If food system transitions are to be just, they must ensure that rural economies and farming communities remain viable while meeting climate targets, requiring sensitive and adaptive policy solutions.

Another layer of complexity arises from policy fragmentation and governance challenges. Responsibilities for food, health, environment, and agriculture are divided across multiple sectors and levels of government, including devolved and UK-wide authorities, leading to inconsistencies in strategy and implementation. Furthermore, the socio-economic impacts of dietary policy shifts, including how changes affect low-income households or food supply chains, are not yet fully understood due to limited data and evaluation frameworks. Addressing these challenges will require a holistic approach that integrates cross-sectoral collaboration, rigorous evidence, and stakeholder engagement to navigate trade-offs and identify the most feasible pathways for change.

Aims of the project

This report addresses two primary aims:

  • Analysis of a mixed-method evidence base for diet and climate policy in Scotland using a structured PESTLE framework.
  • Identification of evidence gaps and the proposal of actionable recommendations to inform future policy development.

These two aims seek to support the Scottish Government in developing policies aligned with climate targets, while also advancing a just transition that considers the nutritional needs of communities, and the livelihoods of people employed in the food system.

Methodology

Research design

This research adopted a mixed-method design to analyse the intersection of diet and climate policy in Scotland. It combined desk-based research, stakeholder engagement, and thematic categorisation using a PESTLE framework (Political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, and Environmental dimensions).

Research approach and evidence sources

The study integrated three core sources of evidence:

  • Literature review: A systematic review of academic, grey, and policy literature, including documents from the Scottish Government, Climate Change Committee, Food Standards Scotland, and international case studies. Further detail on the literature review method can be found in Appendices C and D.
  • Stakeholder engagement: 14 semi-structured interviews with stakeholders from government, academia, and civil society provided insight into governance challenges, socio-economic impacts, and practical barriers to policy implementation. Further detail on the method can be found in Appendix E.
  • Workshops: Three stakeholder workshops (one in-person, two online)[1] were conducted to validate findings, prioritise areas for further policy development, and co-develop recommendations. These involved scenario planning and structured group discussion. Workshop protocols and details of participating stakeholders are displayed in Appendix F.

Ethics and data management

The research followed ethical guidelines from the University of Bath and ClimateXChange. All participants gave informed consent and were offered anonymity. Data handling adhered to the Scottish Government’s “open as possible, closed as necessary” principle. Triangulation across data sources helped ensure reliability and consistency.

Stakeholder mapping

Stakeholders were identified through desk research and consultations (see Appendix A) and classified into categories including government, academia, third sector, public health, industry, and community groups. A database of 447 stakeholders was compiled (Appendix B).

PESTLE framework

The PESTLE framework guided the thematic analysis of areas for policy development and opportunities, ensuring comprehensive coverage of structural, social, and environmental dimensions. It helped surface interdependencies and evidence gaps across policy domains.

Limitations and future research

Due to time constraints, the analysis could not include quantitative modelling or longitudinal data. While the research drew from diverse sectors, representation from the food industry was more limited. Further research should explore economic modelling of dietary transitions, consumer behaviour dynamics, and legal feasibility of regulatory measures.

Further methodological detail, including workshop protocols and stakeholder lists, is available in the Appendices.

Analysis of diet and climate policy evidence

While the literature, stakeholder meetings, and workshops all highlighted the need for more integrated, cross-sectoral approaches to diet and climate policy, each source also highlighted distinct emphases.

  • The literature focused on systemic analysis and policy gaps, often referring to structural barriers, need for further regulation, and the dominance of voluntary policy mechanisms.
  • The stakeholder meetings added a degree of nuance on political sensitivities, informal policymaking, and institutional fragmentation, often surfacing insights that were missing from the literature, such as the influence of farming identities, lobbying, and inter-departmental misalignment (i.e. the lack of coordination between government departments, such as health, agriculture, and climate, which can lead to contradictory or disconnected policies).
  • The stakeholder workshops, by contrast, reflected the practical and lived experience of policy implementation, giving voice to tensions related to affordability, cultural norms, and supply chain dynamics, and offering grounded ideas for cross-sector collaboration.
  • Taken together, these sources converged on key challenges but revealed gaps in empirical evidence on effective interventions and highlighted the need for more inclusive, community-informed policy processes.

The following sections present an analysis of the issues shaping diet and climate policy, drawing on insights from the literature review, stakeholder meetings, and workshops.

We begin by outlining key areas for policy development, offering a comprehensive view of the diverse factors influencing policy in Scotland. For clarity, each PESTLE dimension is analysed separately, although we recognise that many issues cut across multiple dimensions. In addition to the summaries in Sections 5.1–5.6 of the report, extended analyses and illustrative examples are provided in Appendices G–L.

 

PESTLE Political dimension

The PESTLE Political dimension highlights key political drivers and barriers shaping Scotland’s food system, focusing on governance, policy coherence, and regulatory alignment. Despite ambitious climate and health goals, food policy remains fragmented; characterised by siloed strategies, short-term political cycles, and limited public engagement.

There are clear opportunities to improve alignment between national and local policies, embed measurable targets under the Good Food Nation Act, and integrate food more fully into net-zero strategies. Policy coherence is particularly lacking in areas such as dietary change, where targets, especially for meat reduction, are absent or politically sensitive.

Public procurement and food supply chain resilience require stronger alignment with sustainability priorities. Resistance to livestock reduction, driven by cultural, economic, and political factors, continues to constrain progress. Meanwhile, policy support for plant-based foods, oversight of emissions-intensive agriculture, and trade resilience post-Brexit, remain underdeveloped.

Improving citizen participation and learning from international best practice are also essential to ensure legitimacy and policy effectiveness. Overall, stronger strategic leadership and more integrated, inclusive policymaking are critical to enable a just transition in Scotland’s food system.

For further detail and illustrative examples, see Appendix G.

PESTLE Economic dimension

This section outlines key economic enablers and constraints in Scotland’s transition to a more sustainable and just food system. While the need for climate-compatible diets and resilient supply chains is increasingly recognised, economic policy and market structures remain poorly aligned with sustainability goals.

The analysis highlights persistent gaps in financial incentives for low-carbon agriculture, agroecology, and alternative proteins. Current financial support regimes continue to favour high-emission livestock production, while support for biodiversity and ecosystem services is limited. High upfront costs and infrastructure barriers also constrain farmers’ ability to adopt sustainable practices.

Trade and supply chains add further complexity to the landscape. Import/Export policies risk carbon leakage and should go further to reflect Scotland’s net-zero ambitions. Small producers face limited access to public procurement and mainstream markets, which are dominated by large retailers and multinationals.

A lack of stable, long-term funding also undermines urban agriculture, community food initiatives, and public food provision. Consumer incentives are misaligned; VAT law and pricing structures serve to limit the uptake of plant-based foods, while environmental and health costs remain externalised. Without targeted interventions, dietary shifts might also result in greater reliance on ultra-processed food or alternative animal products, with implications for health.

A clear transition strategy is needed to support rural economies, address workforce shortages, and align financial incentives, trade policies, and consumer support with Scotland’s net-zero goals.

For further evidence and examples, see Appendix H.

PESTLE Social dimension

The next section explores the social factors that influence dietary behaviours, food access, cultural norms, and public engagement with food system sustainability in Scotland. While awareness of sustainable diets is growing, economic inequality, cultural barriers, and information gaps continue to limit equitable access to healthier and more climate-compatible food choices.

The analysis shows that low-income, rural, and marginalised groups face structural challenges to adopting sustainable diets, including affordability, limited access to healthy food options, and digital exclusion. Taxation policies, such as levies on red meat, may also disproportionately affect households with limited economic flexibility unless protections are in place. High energy costs, limited cooking facilities, and restricted access to healthy food outside the home reduce the feasibility of dietary shifts for many communities.

Consumer environments and behaviours present further challenges. Ultra-processed foods dominate many retail and foodservice settings, while alternative proteins remain scarce or poorly understood. Misperceptions, unclear labelling, and cultural or sensory barriers to meat alternatives reduce consumer confidence in plant-based foods. Public institutions, such as schools and hospitals, have been slow to integrate sustainability into procurement and meal provision, missing valuable opportunities to shape norms and access around sustainable food.

Cultural identity, health concerns, and trust also play a critical role in shaping diet. Intergenerational tensions, media confusion, and stigma around plant-based eating reinforce resistance to change. The term “sustainable diet” is understood in multiple ways, and guidance on nutritional adequacy, especially for meat reduction, remains limited. There is also a need to strengthen support for regenerative and culturally inclusive farming practices.

Crucially, the evidence highlights an over-reliance on individual responsibility for dietary change, which overlooks the need for supportive food environments and system-level shifts. Policies that reshape food environments, through procurement, pricing, education, and public messaging, are likely to be more effective and equitable in the longer term. More specifically, focusing on health-based messaging, trusted community voices, and social norm–based approaches would help build broader public support.

In summary, socially informed policies must address structural inequalities, cultural diversity, and behavioural dynamics to ensure a just transition toward sustainable diets. This includes improving affordability and access, embedding sustainability in public food settings, and aligning dietary policies with both climate and public health goals.

Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix I.

 

PESTLE Technological dimension

Technology plays a critical role in shaping the sustainability, efficiency, and resilience of Scotland’s food system. The analysis highlights the lack of a comprehensive monitoring framework to evaluate the impact of dietary shifts on emissions, public health, food security, and biodiversity. Without clear indicators and centralised data systems, it is difficult to assess progress toward climate and health goals or ensure that dietary policies are evidence driven. Metrics for agroecological practices and sustainable diet transitions remain underdeveloped, impeding efforts to support and scale lower-impact farming approaches.

Digital infrastructure limitations, particularly poor rural broadband, continue to restrict the uptake of precision livestock farming and climate-smart technologies. Awareness of these tools remains low among producers, while Government support for adoption is often fragmented. Similarly, industry accountability is weakened by the absence of transparent data reporting and standardised carbon footprinting systems. Inconsistent greenhouse gas accounting methods, a lack of methane tracking at farm level, and the need for sector-specific targets for beef production further undermine emissions mitigation efforts.

Food system resilience also depends on improved technological capacity in supply chains. Current systems do not adequately support food origin tracking, nor do they account for high-emission foods in dietary data, weakening emissions attribution and policy precision. The sustainability impacts of emerging plant-based products remain poorly assessed, and infrastructure gaps limit the scaling of regional food systems and local supply chain technologies.

Digital tools could be used more effectively to promote sustainable consumer choices and increase transparency in food sourcing, animal welfare, and product quality. However, greater investment in infrastructure, digital literacy, and data coordination is required to unlock this potential.

In summary, a more technologically enabled food policy landscape in Scotland will require investment in data infrastructure, tailored emissions metrics, precision agriculture, and digital tools to support both consumer engagement and policy accountability. Doing so will help ensure that Scotland’s net-zero, biodiversity, and health ambitions are underpinned by robust evidence and smart, scalable solutions.

Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix J.

PESTLE Legal dimension

With reference to the role of legal and regulatory frameworks, the PESTLE analysis reveals that Scotland currently lacks targeted legal mechanisms to incentivise low-carbon food production. Regulatory gaps and weak enforcement of environmental standards limit the transition to sustainable agriculture, while power imbalances in the supply chain, favouring large corporations over smaller producers, remain largely unaddressed. The Good Food Nation Act, though an important step forward, does not extend regulatory authority over retailers, large-scale producers, or food manufacturers, limiting its system-wide impact.

Other issues requiring attention exist in consumer protection and information. Weak regulation of unhealthy food marketing, especially in out-of-home settings, undermines public health efforts. The continued reliance on voluntary reformulation agreements with industry, combined with the lack of mandatory carbon footprint labelling, limits consumers’ ability to make informed dietary choices aligned with Scotland’s climate and health goals. Meanwhile, the absence of mandatory nutritional fortification, such as for non-dairy milk products, can impede public health initiatives aimed at addressing nutritional deficiencies.

Legal and governance barriers also slow policy implementation. Complexities in devolved and UK-level responsibilities contribute to policy inconsistency, particularly on dietary and emissions targets. Additionally, legal risks around nutrient adequacy in meat and dairy reduction strategies may discourage more ambitious dietary guidance.

Within agriculture, current carbon audit schemes lack sufficient enforceable emissions targets and are perceived as bureaucratic, offering limited incentives for change. Unclear guidance on carbon markets and inconsistent rules on emissions reporting (including Scope 3 emissions from retailers) reduce transparency and slow investment in climate-smart farming.

In summary, legal reform is needed to strengthen regulatory levers across the food system, extending beyond the public sector to include retailers and industry, enforcing sustainability and nutrition standards, and improving consumer protections. Aligning governance frameworks, reducing administrative burdens, and embedding human rights principles into dietary policy are therefore needed to enable effective system-wide change.

Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix K.

PESTLE Environmental dimension

This final section examines the environmental factors affecting Scotland’s transition to a sustainable food system. The evidence highlights that many community food initiatives and new entrants to agroecological farming face significant barriers, particularly in accessing secure land and financial support. Temporary land use agreements and bureaucratic processes can limit the growth of community food systems, despite existing policy. In some cases, unregulated forestry expansion can risk displacing agricultural land, with limited assessment of net carbon impacts or broader public interest outcomes.

Scotland’s climate mitigation policies in agriculture remain focused on food-based emissions without addressing the wider transformation needed across the food system. Adaptation strategies for extreme weather, water resource management, and soil health are underdeveloped, leaving farmers vulnerable to increasingly unpredictable conditions. Localised environmental impacts of emissions-intensive farming are often overlooked in national-level emissions data, reducing policy responsiveness to regional ecological pressures.

The analysis also highlights the need for a more strategic approach to land use. With the majority of Scottish farmland classed as “Less Favoured”[2] and unsuitable for plant protein production, blanket approaches to livestock reduction may generate trade-offs for biodiversity, carbon sequestration, and rural livelihoods. Well-managed grazing land has shown potential to support biodiversity and store more carbon than forestry in some contexts, yet these contributions are not widely acknowledged in land-use planning.

From a consumption perspective, the environmental footprint of ultra-processed and highly standardised food products remains a concern, as do the resilience risks associated with crop monocultures and supply chain vulnerabilities. There is growing recognition that agricultural technologies, diversification, and the promotion of locally adapted crop varieties can play a role in building resilience, but these approaches require greater policy support and coordination.

In summary, delivering a climate-resilient and environmentally sustainable food system in Scotland will require integrated land-use and adaptation planning, support for agroecological transitions, and a shift toward more diverse and regionally appropriate production systems. Environmental priorities must be balanced with social and economic sustainability to secure long-term food system resilience.

Further detail and evidence examples are available in Appendix L.

Analysis of areas for policy development

We next move on to consider evidence linked to the foregoing PESTLE analysis. The PESTLE analysis of diet and climate areas for policy development in Scotland has revealed several critical evidence gaps that limit progress towards a sustainable, resilient, and equitable food system. This section summarises areas for development, evaluates the feasibility of addressing them through targeted initiatives, and prioritises areas for immediate and long-term action. A summary of identified areas for further policy development, feasibility of addressing issues, scope for collaboration, and suggested priority levels for each PESTLE dimension are set out in Table 4.1.1.1.

Disclaimer: While this report identifies multiple areas for policy development, it is acknowledged that various initiatives and programmes may already be addressing some of these areas to differing extents. The intention is not to overlook ongoing efforts, but to highlight where further action, coordination, or scaling may still be required.

1. Areas for further policy development: Political

A. Key areas:

  • Fragmentation of food policy across government sectors, limiting alignment between climate, health, and agricultural goals.
  • There is scope to improve coordination mechanisms between local, devolved, and UK-wide levels of government.
  • Absence of measurable targets for food-related emissions reductions, including dietary change.
  • There remains scope to strengthen public engagement and participation in the development of food and climate policy.
  • Lack of robust mechanisms to evaluate the effectiveness of food policy interventions.

B. Feasibility options for development:

Phase 1: Foundations[3]:

  • Improve co-ordination of food policy across government by directing more resource to policy teams with this remit in Scottish Government.
  • Strengthen local-national policy integration mechanisms to align national food strategies with regional implementation.
  • The next statutory review of the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act should focus on areas for stronger accountability measures.

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment[4]:

  • Implement a policy impact assessment framework to track progress and identify necessary adjustments.
  • Work towards including clear sustainability and health targets in future Good Food Nation Act plans.
  • Implement a multi-stakeholder advisory body to ensure that industry, civil society, and local government perspectives are included in decision-making.

Phase 3: Structural reform[5]:

  • Embed cross-sectoral policy alignment within Scotland’s legislative framework through new statutory obligations.

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Lead policy development and regulatory reform.
  • Third Sector and Academia: Provide research insights and advocate for evidence-based policymaking.
  • Private Sector: Engage in the development of sustainable business practices and supply chain transparency.

D. Priority level:

  • Addressing governance and coordination gaps will be foundational to all other policy reforms.

2. Areas for further policy development: Economic

A. Key areas for development:

  • Limited evidence on the economic viability and scalability of regenerative and agroecological farming systems in Scotland.
  • Misaligned or insufficient financial incentives to support sustainable production, strengthen local food supply chains, and scale community-led food initiatives.[6]
  • Lack of robust analysis on the potential impacts of fiscal measures—such as red meat taxation or incentives for plant-based foods—on consumer behaviour, equity, and health outcomes.

B. Feasibility options for development:

Phase 1: Foundations:

  • Conduct an economic feasibility study on regenerative farming models and their potential integration into Scotland’s agricultural sector.
  • Strengthen public procurement policies to better support local and sustainable food sourcing.

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:

  • Explore targeted financial incentives to support low-emission and nature-friendly farming approaches.
  • Launch pilot projects to evaluate the impact of sustainable farming financial incentives.
  • Develop fiscal policies (e.g., targeted payments, taxation, or incentives) to shift consumption toward sustainable diets. 
  • Support supply chain infrastructure investments to improve local food distribution and processing.

Phase 3: Structural reform:

  • Develop a comprehensive fiscal policy review to assess the potential impacts of taxation, support, and incentives.
  • Align agricultural support payment structures with climate and health objectives.
  • Establish a long-term funding strategy for sustainable food system transformation.

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Develop fiscal incentives and financial mechanisms to support health and sustainability goals.
  • Third sector and Academia: Assess economic impacts of taxation and financial reforms.
  • Private Sector: Adapt business models to align with financial incentives for sustainability.

D. Priority level:

  • Economic barriers need to be addressed to facilitate sustainable production shifts.

3. Areas for further policy development: Social

A. Key areas for development:

  • Limited data on food affordability and access among low-income and rural communities.
  • Need for more meaningful engagement with diverse communities in shaping food policy and dietary guidance.

B. Feasibility options for development

Phase 1: Foundations:

  • Expand public engagement initiatives, including community-led research into dietary transitions.
  • Expand public engagement initiatives to address affordability and accessibility barriers.
  • Pilot community-led food initiatives targeting low-income areas.

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:

  • Conduct a national food accessibility and affordability survey.
  • Develop participatory policy design mechanisms to enhance local food governance.
  • Strengthen food education campaigns to promote healthier, more sustainable diets.

Phase 3: Structural reform:

  • Embed participatory policy design mechanisms within Scotland’s food governance structures.
  • Ensure that sustainable diets are embedded in national health and education policies.

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Develop and fund inclusive food policies.
  • Third Sector and Academia: Engage in community outreach and public health research.
  • Private sector: Improve food affordability through fair pricing strategies.

D. Priority level:

  • Important for equity and public buy-in but will require gradual integration.

4. Areas for further policy development: Technological

A. Key areas for development:

  • Absence of standardised methods for tracking food system emissions and sustainability impacts.
  • Limited integration of digital food labelling and consumer-facing sustainability information.

B. Feasibility options for development:

Phase 1: Foundations:

  • Support and shape the UK-wide Food Data Transparency Partnership to ensure Scotland’s dietary and sustainability priorities are reflected.[7]

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:

  • Develop a digital food labelling initiative to improve transparency.
  • Expand precision agriculture technologies to improve farm efficiency. 
  • Long-term:
  • Develop a data-driven food system policy framework that integrates real-time monitoring and reporting tools.

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Implement data standardisation policies and invest in rural technology.
  • Third Sector and Academia: Conduct research on food system emissions and digital innovations.
  • Private Sector: Drive technological advancements in food production and retail.

C. Priority level:

  • Essential for evidence-based policymaking and consumer engagement.

5. Areas for further policy development: Legal

A. Key areas for development:

  • Limited enforcement of supply chain transparency and sustainability regulations.
  • Gaps in legal frameworks for food labelling, marketing, and consumer information rights.
  • Uncertainty around the legal and nutritional implications of dietary transition policies.

B. Feasibility options for development:

Phase 1: Foundations:

  • Work with UK regulators[8] to strengthen food labelling frameworks, including clear nutritional and environmental indicators, while exploring Scotland-specific improvements in public-facing food information.
  • Implement supply chain due diligence requirements for major food retailers.

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:

  • Expand mandatory sustainability reporting for businesses in the food sector.
  • Align food regulations to reduce policy inconsistencies.

Phase 3: Structural reform:

  • Establish legal safeguards around dietary policy shifts, ensuring public health is protected.
  • Embed right-to-food principles in Scotland’s food governance framework.

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Strengthen regulatory frameworks and enforcement mechanisms.
  • Third Sector and Academia: Advocate for consumer protections and legal reforms.
  • Private Sector: Ensure compliance with evolving regulations.

D. Priority level:

  • Important for transparency but requires multi-stakeholder cooperation.

6. Areas for further policy development: Environmental

A. Key areas for development:

  • Limited data on the environmental impacts of different livestock systems and land management approaches.
  • Lack of integrated policy guidance to balance food production, biodiversity, and climate priorities.
  • Under-developed integration of climate adaptation planning in agricultural policy and land use decisions.

B. Feasibility options for development:

Phase 1: Foundations:

  • Conduct a livestock emissions and sequestration study to refine policy targets.

Phase 2: Scaling and alignment:

  • Develop a national food system biodiversity framework to guide sustainable land-use decisions.
  • Support the delivery of Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3)[9] commitments on agricultural adaptation, with a focus on extreme weather resilience, soil health, and sustainable land use.
  • Invest in local and diversified crop production to enhance resilience.

Phase 3: Structural reform:

  • Embed climate resilience planning into Scotland’s agricultural and food policies.
  • Establish long-term land use strategies balancing food security and biodiversity conservation. 

C. Areas for collaboration:

  • Government: Develop climate-aligned agricultural policies. 
  • Third Sector and Academia: Oversee biodiversity and climate impact research. 
  • Private Sector: Support sustainable farming practices and emissions reduction initiatives. 

D. Priority level:

  • Important for aligning food production with Scotland’s climate targets.

PESTLE evidence analysis of areas for further policy development

In summary, addressing areas for policy development identified through the evidence review would require a combination of more immediate actions, pilot initiatives, and longer-term policy reforms. Targeting governance and coordination should be prioritised as a foundation upon which to develop emissions tracking, economic incentives for sustainability, and environmental resilience strategies. Based on the analysis of evidence, addressing these areas through targeted research, cross-sector collaboration, and data standardisation would be essential for leveraging meaningful progress on sustainable diet transitions.

Conclusions and policy implications

Diet, climate, and public health intersect in complex ways with food systems, shaping both environmental sustainability and human well-being. Dietary patterns influence greenhouse gas emissions, biodiversity, and resource use, whilst also influencing non-communicable diseases and health risks. A transition to sustainable diets presents an opportunity to improve public health and reduce environmental impact, though significant barriers including affordability and accessibility must be tackled. In Scotland, the transition to sustainable diets is complicated by cultural and economic reliance on established food industries, particularly livestock farming. Whilst high red and processed meat consumption poses health and environmental concerns, economic dependencies, consumer habits, and social norms around food identity and tradition all contribute to resistance to change.

Crucially, policymakers must navigate inevitable trade-offs between economic stability and sustainability. The Scottish red meat sector supports jobs and rural economies, making policies to reduce meat consumption economically sensitive. Furthermore, plant-based diets remain costly due to supply chain and financial support structures, with change carrying the risk of exacerbating social inequalities. Balancing voluntary industry commitments with regulatory measures and fiscal policies is needed to drive change whilst minimising economic disruption.

This report has highlighted the complex connections between diet, climate, and public health in food systems, and the urgent need for integrated policy responses for sustainable diet transitions. The UK’s 7th Carbon Budget (CB7) (Climate Change Committee, 2025) reinforces this urgency, proposing a substantial reduction in livestock numbers and a shift towards more sustainable dietary patterns. Scotland’s food system has the potential to reduce greenhouse gas emissions while improving public health, yet fragmented policies, gaps in governance, and limited economic incentives inhibit meaningful progress. In line with CB7, this report underscores the importance of policy coherence, aligned with public engagement, agricultural and industry support, fiscal measures, and public health initiatives.

Informing next steps for policy development

Whilst significant strides have been made with policies like the Good Food Nation Act (Scottish Government, 2022a), further action is needed to strengthen accountability, set clear sustainability targets, and improve cross-sectoral collaboration. Managing the economic implications of dietary transitions is also crucial to ensuring a just transition—without targeted support, rural inequalities may deepen, and resistance to change may grow. Lessons from other countries have shown that a mix of financial incentives, public procurement reforms, and consumer engagement strategies can drive sustainable dietary shifts while maintaining economic stability.

Such goals require coordinated action across government, agriculture, the food industry, public health, and civil society. A whole-systems approach must ensure sustainability policies are both equitable and inclusive. Priorities could therefore include:

  • Strengthening governance and policy coordination: Develop a cross-sectoral food policy framework aligning climate, health, and agricultural objectives. Enhance local-national coordination for food system implementation. Establish clear emissions reduction targets for food production and dietary transitions and clarify the role of dietary transitions in meeting this target.
  • Improving economic incentives for sustainable food systems: Redirect agricultural support payments towards sustainable and regenerative farming. Explore the role for fiscal policies (e.g. e.g. support payments or taxation) to make sustainable food choices more affordable. Invest in local food infrastructure and supply chains to reduce dependence on imports.
  • Addressing social and cultural barriers to dietary change: Expand public, agricultural, and food system engagement and participation and leverage procurement opportunities to increase awareness and availability of climate-friendly diets. Improve policies regarding food affordability to ensure sustainable diets are accessible to all income groups. Develop culturally sensitive strategies for dietary shifts, considering food traditions.
  • Investing in technology and data monitoring for food system resilience: Support the development of a UK-wide standard for emissions tracking in food production and consumption, recognising the complexity of this task and the need for cross-jurisdictional coordination. Introduce digital food labelling to increase consumer awareness of sustainability impacts.
  • Supporting legal and regulatory measures: Enforce sustainability standards in food production and marketing. Align devolved and UK-wide dietary policies for consistency. Improve public procurement regulations to prioritise sustainable food sourcing.
  • Integrating environmental considerations into food policy: Develop land-use policies balancing food security, biodiversity, and climate goals. Strengthen climate adaptation strategies for Scottish agriculture. Explore the potential role of well-managed grazing land in supporting biodiversity and contributing to carbon sequestration, while recognising that evidence on sequestration benefits remains contested.

Scotland has an opportunity to lead in sustainable food policy by embedding climate and health goals into food system governance. A cross-sectoral, just transition approach is essential to creating a food system that protects the environment, supports local economies, and enhances public health to secure long-term benefits for both people and the planet.

References

Allan, G., Comerford, D. and McGregor, P., 2019. The system-wide impact of healthy eating: Assessing emissions and economic impacts at the regional level. Food Policy, 86, p.101725. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodpol.2019.05.008

Ambler-Edwards, S., Bailey, K.S., Kiff, A., Lang, T., Lee, R., Marsden, T.K., Simons, D.W. and Tibbs, H., 2009. Food futures: Rethinking UK strategy. London: Chatham House. [online] Available at: Food futures: rethinking UK strategy. A Chatham House report -ORCA (Accessed: 25/11/24).

Attorp, A. and Hubbard, C., 2022. Governing the UK agri-food system post-Brexit, in Shucksmith, M. and Bosworth, G. (eds.) Rural governance in the UK. Abingdon: Routledge, pp. 78–98.

Baker, P., Conquest, A. and Moxey, A., 2023. The evidence for private sector drivers for climate action in Scottish agriculture. LUC. [online] Available at: The evidence for private sector drivers in the Scottish agricultural supply chain (Accessed: 17/12/24).

Bauer, J.M., Aarestrup, S.C., Hansen, P.G. and Reisch, L.A., 2022. Nudging more sustainable grocery purchases: Behavioural innovations in a supermarket setting. Technological Forecasting and Social Change, 179, p.121605. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2022.121605

Beckert, M., Smith, P. and Chapman, S., 2016. Of trees and sheep: Trade-offs and synergies in farmland afforestation in the Scottish uplands. In: S. Kratzer and M. Schönhart, eds. Land use competition: Ecological, economic and social perspectives. Cham: Springer, pp.183–192. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-33628-2_11

Bellamy, A.S., Furness, E., Mills, S., Clear, A., Finnigan, S.M., Meador, E., Milne, A.E. and Sharp, R.T., 2023. ‘Promoting dietary changes for achieving health and sustainability targets’, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 7, 1160627. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2023.1160627.

Bhunnoo, R. and Poppy, G.M., 2020. A national approach for transformation of the UK food system. Nature Food, 1(1), pp.6–8. https://doi.org/10.1038/s43016-019-0003-3

Billen, G., Aguilera, E., Einarsson, R., Garnier, J., Gingrich, S., Grizzetti, B., Lassaletta, L., Le Noë, J. and Sanz-Cobena, A., 2021. Reshaping the European agro-food system and closing its nitrogen cycle: The potential of combining dietary change, agroecology, and circularity. One Earth, 4(6), pp.839–850. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.oneear.2021.05.011

Booth, A., 2006. Clear and present questions: Formulating questions for evidence based practice. Library Hi Tech, 24(3), 355-368. https://doi.org/10.1108/07378830610692127

Boyle, N.B., Jenneson, V., Okeke-Ogbuafor, N., Morris, M.A., Stead, S.M., Dye, L., Halford, J.C. and Banwart, S.A., 2024. ‘Connected Food: First steps for an ambitious national food strategy’, Nutrients, 16(19), p. 3371. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu16193371.

Brennan, M., 2023. Food systems transformation in Scotland—The journey to, vision of, and challenges facing the new Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act. Sustainability, 15(19), p.14579. https://doi.org/10.3390/su151914579

Brett, S.N., 2022. Examining the opportunities for agricultural experiences as part of Scottish secondary school pupils’ learning under Curriculum for Excellence. Doctoral dissertation, University of Glasgow. [online] Available at: Examining the opportunities for agricultural experiences as part of Scottish secondary school pupils’ learning under Curriculum for Excellence – Enlighten Theses (Accessed: 14/1/25).

Briggs, H.R., Tallontire, A.M. and Dougill, A.J., 2019. Exploring the contribution of vertical farming to sustainable intensification from the point of view of the innovator and the farmer. Sustainability Research Institute, University of Leeds. [online] Available at: https://sri.leeds.ac.uk/publications/vertical-farming-sustainability (Accessed: 25/1/25).

Brodie, E., 2023. The potential for nature-based solutions in Scottish agriculture. [online] Available at: The Potential for Nature-based Solutions in Scottish Agriculture (Accessed: 25/11/24).

Bryant, C., Couture, A., Ross, E., Clark, A. and Chapman, T., 2024. A review of policy levers to reduce meat production and consumption. Appetite, p.107684. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2024.107684.

Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), 2024. Briefing 31: How Wales can speed up decarbonisation: Insights from transport and mobility, food and agriculture, and the circular and sharing economy. [online] Available at: CAST Briefing 31: How Wales can speed up decarbonisation: Insights from transport and mobility, food and agriculture, and the circular and sharing economy – CAST (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Cleland, E., McBey, D., Darlene, V., McCormick, B.J. and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2025. Still eating like there’s no tomorrow? A qualitative study to revisit attitudes and awareness around sustainable diets after 10 years. Appetite, 206, p.107799. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2024.107799.

Climate Change Committee (CCC) (2025) The Seventh Carbon Budget. Climate Change Committee. [online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/7th-carbon-budget/ (Accessed: 4/3/25).

Climate Change Committee (CCC), 2023. Progress on reducing emissions in Scotland-2023 Report to Parliament. [online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/progress-in-reducing-emissions-in-scotland-2023-report-to-parliament/ (Accessed 21/10/24).

Climate Change Committee (CCC), 2020. The Sixth Carbon Budget: The UK’s path to Net Zero. [online] Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/sixth-carbon-budget/

(Accessed 25/11/24).

Comrie, L., Wilson, C., Nneli, A., Whybrow, S., Chalmers, N., and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2024. Modelling the impact of reductions in meat and dairy consumption on nutrient intakes and disease risk. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/modelling-the-impact-of-reductions-in-meat-and-dairy-consumption-on-nutrient-intakes-and-disease-risk (Accessed: 14/12/24

Cotton, C., Gosschalk, K., Gray, H. and White, E., 2024. Consumer Scotland Net Zero 2024. Consumer Scotland. [online] Available at: [xm24-02-consumers-and-net-zero-net-zero-consumer-survey-yougov-final-report-pdf-version-for-publication.pdf] (Accessed: 14/1/25).

Culliford, A.E., Bradbury, J. and Medici, E.B., 2023. Improving communication of the UK sustainable healthy dietary guidelines—the Eatwell Guide: A rapid review. Sustainability, 15(7), p.6149. https://doi.org/10.3390/su15076149

Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs (Defra), 2024. Assessing carbon displacement risk in the agri-food sector: The development and application of a carbon displacement and wider impacts framework. October 2024. Defra. [online] Available at: ADAS Collaborate on Project Investigating Carbon Displacement (Accessed: 25/11/25).

Dogbe, W., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Russell, W., 2024. An analysis of the current and potential market opportunities for hempseed and fibre: the case of Scotland? Agriculture & Food Security13(1), p.57. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40066-024-00388-6.

Dogbe, W., Wang, Y. and Revoredo-Giha, C., 2024. Nutritional implications of substituting plant-based proteins for meat: Evidence from home scan data. Agricultural and Food Economics, 12(1), p.30. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40100-024-00272-2.

EAT (n.d.) Summary Report of the EAT-Lancet Commission. [online] Available at: https://eatforum.org/eat-lancet-commission/eat-lancet-commission-summary-report/

(Accessed: 2/11/24).

Eating Better, 2022. Sandwiches unwrapped 2022. [online] Available at: eb_sandwichreport_may22_final.pdf (Accessed 24/3/25).

Edwards-Jones, G., 2010. Does eating local food reduce the environmental impact of food production and enhance consumer health? Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 69(4), pp.582–591. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665110002004

Ellis, N.R. and Tschakert, P., 2019. Triple-wins as pathways to transformation? A critical review. Geoforum103, pp.167-170. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.geoforum.2019.04.017

Eory, V., Topp, K., Rees, B., Jones, S., Waxenberg, K., Barnes, A., Smith, P., MacLeod, M. and Wall, E., 2023. A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture. ClimateXChange (CXC). [online] Available at: A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture (Accessed 14/1/25).

Fardet, A. and Rock, E., 2020. Ultra-processed foods and food system sustainability: What are the links? Sustainability12(15), p.6280. https://doi.org/10.3390/su12156280

Nourish Scotland, 2021. Farming for 1.5° final report. [online] Available at: https://www.farming1point5.org/publications [Accessed 17/12/24].

Ferguson, H.J., Bowen, J.M., McNicol, L.C., Bell, J., Duthie, C.A. and Dewhurst, R.J., 2024. The impacts of precision livestock farming tools on the greenhouse gas emissions of an average Scottish dairy farm. Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems8, p.1385672. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2024.1385672

Follett, E., Davis, L., Wilson, C. and Cable, J., 2024. Working for the environment: farmer attitudes towards sustainable farming actions in rural Wales, UK, Environment, Development and Sustainability, pp. 1–20. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10668-024-03764-7.

Food and Drink Federation (FDF), 2020. Product reformulation: Understanding Scottish consumer attitudes. [online] Available at: Research shows consumers are actively seeking healthier food | The Food & Drink Federation (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2024. From food security to food resilience. [online] Available at: From Food Security to Food Resilience – Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (Accessed: 17/12/24).

Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2023. So, what do we really want from food? Citizens are hungry for change: Starting a national conversation about food. [online] Available at: [So, what do we really want from food? – Food, Farming and Countryside Commission] (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Food Standards Agency (FSA), 2022. Alternative proteins consumer survey. [online] Available at: FSA report template (Accessed: 23/1/25).

Food Standards Scotland (FSS) (2024) New research shows existing dietary advice can help us meet climate change mitigation goals. Food Standards Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/news-and-alerts/new-research-shows-existing-dietary-advice-can-help-us-meet-climate-change-mitigation-goals (Accessed: 23/1/25).

Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2023. Consumer attitudes towards the diet and food environment in Scotland. Food Standards Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/consumer-attitudes-towards-the-diet-and-food-environment-in-scotland (Accessed: 17/12/24).

Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021a. Overview of the total food and drink landscape in Scotland 2021. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/overview-of-the-total-food-and-drink-landscape-in-scotland-2021

(Accessed: 25/11/24).

Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021b. The out of home environment in Scotland. Food Standards Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/the-out-of-home-environment-in-scotland (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Foster, J.A. and Poston, A., 2024. Occupant experience of domestic kitchen environments in low-energy social and affordable housing in Scotland. Building Research & Information, 52(7), pp.799–816. https://doi.org/10.1080/09613218.2024.2312504.

Gargano, G., 2021. The bottom-up development model as a governance instrument for the rural areas: The cases of four Local Action Groups (LAGs) in the United Kingdom and in Italy. Sustainability, 13(16), p.9123. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13169123.

Gill, M., Fowler, K. and Scott, E.M., 2024. ‘Bridging the gap between science and food policy: nutrition as a driver of policy drawing on Scotland as a case study’, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, pp. 1–15. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124000267.

Hasnain, S., Green, R., Williams, A., Dangour, A.D., Smith, P. and Hillier, J., 2020. Mapping the UK food system – a report for the UKRI Transforming UK Food Systems Programme. University of Oxford. [online] Available at: https://www.foodsystemresearch.org.uk/publications/mapping-the-uk-food-system (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Hielkema, M.H. and Lund, T.B., 2021. ‘Reducing meat consumption in meat-loving Denmark: Exploring willingness, behavior, barriers and drivers’, Food Quality and Preference, 93, 104257. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.foodqual.2021.104257.

Holmes, E.J., 2018. Brexit, beef, and beans: a sustainable food-system approach for the UK. Master’s thesis, Norwegian University of Life Sciences, Ås. [online] Available at: 249964646.pdf (Accessed: 18/2/25).

Houzer, E. and Scoones, I., 2021. Are livestock always bad for the planet? Rethinking the protein transition and climate change debate. Institute of Development Studies. [online] Available at: https://www.ids.ac.uk/publications/are-livestock-always-bad-for-the-planet-rethinking-the-protein-transition-and-climate-change-debate/ (Accessed: 26/1/24.

Hunt, L., Pettinger, C. and Wagstaff, C., 2023. A critical exploration of the diets of UK disadvantaged communities to inform food systems transformation: A scoping review of qualitative literature using a social practice theory lens. BMC Public Health, 23(1), p.1970. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12889-023-16775-3.

Jaacks, L., Frank, S., Vonderschmidt, A., Stewart, C., Runions, R., Kennedy, J., McNeill, G. and Alexander, P., 2024. Understanding the climate impact of food consumed in Scotland. University of Edinburgh. [online] Available at: https://era.ed.ac.uk/bitstream/handle/1842/41611/CXC-Understanding-the-climate-impact-of-food-consumed-in-Scotland-evidence-assessment-February-2024.pdf?sequence=3&isAllowed=y (Accessed: 27/10/24).

Jenkins, B., Avis, K., Willcocks, J., Martin, G., Wiltshire, J. and Peters, E., 2023. Adapting Scottish agriculture to a changing climate – assessing options for action. Ricardo Energy & Environment. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/adapting-scottish-agriculture-to-a-changing-climate (Accessed: 25/10/24).

Jenkins, B., Herold, L., de Mendonça, M., Loughnan, H., Willcocks, J., David, T., Ginns, B., Rock, L., Wilshire, J., Avis, K., 2024. Breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock. ClimateXChange. [online] Available at: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5569 (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Kemper, J.A., 2020. ‘Motivations, barriers, and strategies for meat reduction at different family lifecycle stages’, Appetite, 150, 104644. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2020.104644.

Kennedy, J., Clark, M., Stewart, C., Runions, R., Vonderschmidt, A., Frank, S., Scarborough, P., Comrie, F., McDonald, A., McNeill, G., Alexander, P. and Jaacks, L., 2025. Impact of reducing meat and dairy consumption on nutrient intake, health, cost of diets and the environment: A simulation among adults in Scotland. Research Square [online] Available at: Impact of reducing meat and dairy consumption on nutrient intake, health, cost of diets and the environment: A simulation among adults in Scotland (Accessed: 3/3/25).

Kmetkova, D., Zverinova, I., Scasny, M. and Máca, V., 2024. Acceptability of meat tax and subsidy removal by meat-eaters: insights from five European countries (No. 2024/42). Charles University Prague, Faculty of Social Sciences, Institute of Economic Studies. [online] Available at: https://ies.fsv.cuni.cz (Accessed: 14/1/25).

Kwasny, T., Dobernig, K. and Riefler, P., 2022. ‘Towards reduced meat consumption: A systematic literature review of intervention effectiveness, 2001–2019’, Appetite, 168, 105739. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2021.105739.

Lambe, F., Weitz, N., Hilgert, A., Kemp-Benedict, E. and Carlsen, H., 2025. Applying the Unlocking a Better Future framework for a just transition in Scotland: Opportunities for the Scottish Government to promote socio-economic transformations needed to help tackle the climate and nature emergencies. Stockholm Environment Institute. [online] Available at: https://www.sei.org/publications/just-transition-scotland-unlocking-a-better-future/ (Accessed: 17/1/25.

Lampkin, N., Shrestha, S., Sellars, A., Baldock, D., Smith, J., Mullender, S., Keenleyside, C., Pearce, B. and Watson, C.A., 2021. Preparing the evidence base for post-Brexit agriculture in Scotland – case studies on alternative payments. Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC) and Institute for European Environmental Policy (IEEP). [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/preparing-the-evidence-base-for-post-brexit-agriculture-in-scotland/ (Accessed: 3/2/25).

Leat, P., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Lamprinopoulou, C., 2011. ‘Scotland’s food and drink policy discussion: Sustainability issues in the food supply chain’, Sustainability, 3(4), pp. 605–631. https://doi.org/10.3390/su3040605.

Lee, A.J., Cullerton, K. and Herron, L.M., 2020. ‘Achieving food system transformation: Insights from a retrospective review of nutrition policy (in) action in high-income countries’, International Journal of Health Policy and Management, 10(12), pp. 766–776. https://doi.org/10.34172/ijhpm.2020.69.

Lozada, L.M. and Karley, A., 2022. The adoption of agroecological principles in Scottish farming and their contribution towards agricultural sustainability and resilience. The James Hutton Institute. [online] Available at: https://www.hutton.ac.uk/research/projects/agroecology-scotland (Accessed: 1/11/24).

Malone, T. and Lusk, J.L., 2017. Taste trumps health and safety: Incorporating consumer perceptions into a discrete choice experiment for meat. Journal of Agricultural and Applied Economics, 49(1), pp.139–157. https://doi.org/10.1017/aae.2016.39.

McAreavey, R., Choudhary, S., Obayi, R., Attorp, A., Barbulescu, R., Martinez Perez, A. and Nayak, R., 2023. The impact of labour shortages on UK food availability and safety. [online] Available at: https://www.food.gov.uk/research/the-impact-of-labour-shortages-on-uk-food-availability-and-safety (Accessed: 14/1/25).

McBey, D., McCormick, B.J.J., Hussain, M. and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2024. ‘Does sociodemographic strata determine local access to plant-based meat alternatives?’, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 83(OCE4), p. E350. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124003723.

McBey, D., Rothenberg, L., Cleland, E., McCormick, B.J. and Macdiarmid, J., 2024. What do young people think about sustainable diets? The Rowett Institute, University of Aberdeen. [online] Available at: https://aura.abdn.ac.uk/bitstream/handle/2164/24312/McBey_etal_What_do_young_VOR.pdf?sequence=1 (Accessed: 20/1/25).

McBey, D., Sánchez, G.M., McCormick, B.J.J., Horgan, G.W. and MacDiarmid, J.I., 2024. Consumer ranked likely effectiveness of interventions to reduce meat consumption, Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 83(OCE4), p. E296. https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665124002963.

McBey, D., Watts, D. and Johnstone, A.M., 2019. Nudging, formulating new products, and the lifecourse: A qualitative assessment of the viability of three methods for reducing Scottish meat consumption for health, ethical, and environmental reasons, Appetite, 142, 104349. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.appet.2019.104349.

McNicol, L.C., Bowen, J.M., Ferguson, H.J., Bell, J., Dewhurst, R.J. and Duthie, C.A., 2024. Adoption of precision livestock farming technologies has the potential to mitigate greenhouse gas emissions from beef production, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 8, 1414858. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2024.1414858.

Meyerricks, S. and White, R.M., 2021. Communities on a threshold: Climate action and wellbeing potentialities in Scotland, Sustainability, 13(13), 7357. https://doi.org/10.3390/su13137357.

Milner, J., Green, R., Dangour, A.D., Haines, A. and Wilkinson, P., 2015. Health effects of adopting low greenhouse gas emission diets in the UK, BMJ Open, 5(4), e007364. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmjopen-2014-007364.

Mitev, A., Portes, J., Osman, M., Codur, A.M., Abraham, C. and Kroll, L., 2023. The implications of behavioural science for effective climate policy: Output 1: Literature review and background report. Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST) and The Behavioural Insights Team. [online] Available at: https://cast.ac.uk/resources/reports/the-implications-of-behavioural-science-for-effective-climate-policy/ (Accessed: 15/10/24).

Myrgiotis, V., Williams, M., Rees, R.M. and Topp, C.F., 2019. Estimating the soil N₂O emission intensity of croplands in northwest Europe. Biogeosciences, 16(8), pp.1641–1655. https://doi.org/10.5194/bg-16-1641-2019.

National Farmers’ Union Scotland (NFUS), n.d. Written evidence from the National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS) (MET0027). Available at: https://committees.parliament.uk/writtenevidence/110519/pdf/ (Accessed: 19/1/25).

Nneli, A., Revoredo-Giha, C. and Dogbe, W., 2023. ‘Could taxes on foods high in fat, sugar and salt (HFSS) improve climate health and nutrition in Scotland?’, Journal of Cleaner Production, 421, 138564. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2023.138564.

Obesity Action Scotland (OAS), 2019. Reformulation. [online] Available at: https://www.obesityactionscotland.org/publications/reformulation/ (Accessed: 2/11/24).

Pechey, R., Reynolds, J.P., Cook, B., Marteau, T.M. and Jebb, S.A., 2022. Acceptability of policies to reduce consumption of red and processed meat: A population-based survey experiment, Journal of Environmental Psychology, 81, 101817. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2022.101817.

Public Health Scotland (PHS), 2024. Action needed to prioritise health in Scotland’s food environment. [online] Available at: https://www.publichealthscotland.scot/news/2024/march/action-needed-to-prioritise-health-in-scotlands-food-environment/ (Accessed: 16/12/24).

Pultar, A., Ferrier, J. & Jahanbakhsh, A., 2024. Transforming industry: Strategic policy insights for Scotland’s industrial decarbonisation. [online] Available at: [https://pure.hw.ac.uk/ws/portalfiles/portal/139634343/IDRIC_Policy_Synthesis_Report_for_Scotland_-_2024.pdf (Accessed: 25/11/24).

Rathnayaka, S.D., Revoredo-Giha, C. and de Roos, B., 2024. Assessing Scotland’s self-sufficiency of major food commodities, Agriculture & Food Security, 13(1), p. 34. https://doi.org/10.1186/s40066-024-00452-3.

Reay, D.S., Warnatzsch, E.A., Craig, E., Dawson, L., George, S., Norman, R. and Ritchie, P., 2020. ‘From farm to fork: growing a Scottish food system that doesn’t cost the planet’, Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 4, 72. https://doi.org/10.3389/fsufs.2020.00072.

Rhymes, J., Stockdale, E. and Napier, B., 2023. The future of UK vegetable production: Technical report. WWF. [online] Available at: https://www.wwf.org.uk/ourreports/future-uk-vegetable-production-technical-report (Accessed: 3/11/24).

Ruani, M.A., Reiss, M.J. and Kalea, A.Z., 2023. Diet-nutrition information seeking, source trustworthiness, and eating behavior changes: An international web-based survey. Nutrients, 15(21), p.4515. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu15214515.

Rubio Ramon, G., 2024. Building animal nations: industrial animal agriculture in the making of Catalonia and Scotland. ERA [online] Available at: https://era.ed.ac.uk/handle/1842/41639 (Accessed: 26/1/25).

SAC Consulting, n.d. The impact of extreme weather events on Scottish agriculture. WWF Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.wwf.org.uk/scotland/reports/impact-of-extreme-weather-on-scottish-agriculture (Accessed: 29/11/24.

Scottish Government, 2024. Local food for everyone: Our journey. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/local-food-for-everyone-our-journey/ (Accessed: 15/12/24).

Scottish Government, 2023. Reducing emissions from agriculture – the role of new farm technologies. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/reducing-emissions-from-agriculture-role-of-new-farm-technologies/ (Accessed: 2/11/24).

Scottish Government, 2022a. National Good Food Nation Plan. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/national-good-food-nation-plan/ (Accessed: 19/10/24).

Scottish Government, 2022b. The next step in delivering our vision for Scotland as a leader in sustainable and regenerative farming. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/next-step-in-delivering-our-vision-for-scotland-as-a-leader-in-sustainable-and-regenerative-farming/ (Accessed: 27/10/24).

Scottish Government, 2013. Revised dietary goals for Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/revised-dietary-goals-for-scotland/ (Accessed: 28/10.24).

Scottish Government, n.d.(a). Agriculture and the environment. [online] Available at: https://www.gov.scot/policies/agriculture-and-the-environment/ (Accessed: 21/10/24).

Scottish Parliament, n.d.(b). Briefing for the Citizen Participation and Public Petitions Committee on Petition PE1963: Phase in meat production ban by 2040. [online] Available at: Briefing for petition PE1963: Phase in meat production ban by 2040 (Accessed 23/1/25).

Shortland, F., Hall, J., Hurley, P., Little, R., Nye, C., Lobley, M. and Rose, D.C., 2023. Landscapes of support for farming mental health: Adaptability in the face of crisis. Sociologia Ruralis, 63, pp.116–140. https://doi.org/10.1111/soru.12399.

Smith, A.M., Duncan, P., Edgar, D. and McColl, J., 2021. Responsible and sustainable farm business: Contextual duality as the moderating influence on entrepreneurial orientation. The International Journal of Entrepreneurship and Innovation, 22(2), pp.88–99. https://doi.org/10.1177/1465750320939779.

Sovacool, B.K., Bazilian, M., Griffiths, S., Kim, J., Foley, A. and Rooney, D., 2021. ‘Decarbonizing the food and beverages industry: A critical and systematic review of developments, sociotechnical systems and policy options’, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 143, 110856. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.rser.2021.110856.

Spiro, A., Hill, Z. and Stanner, S., 2024. Meat and the future of sustainable diets—Challenges and opportunities’, Nutrition Bulletin, 49(4), pp. 572–598. https://doi.org/10.1111/nbu.12685.

Sutherland, L.A., Banks, E., Boyce, A. and Martinat, S., 2023. Establishing an agricultural knowledge and innovation system. The James Hutton Institute. [online] Available at: establishing-an-agriculture-knowledge-and-innovation-system-in-scotland-workshop-report-jan-2023.pdf (Accessed: 17/12/24).

Sutherland, L.A. and Burton, R.J., 2011. Good farmers, good neighbours? The role of cultural capital in social capital development in a Scottish farming community. Sociologia Ruralis, 51(3), pp.238–255. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9523.2011.00536.x.

Thomson, S.G., Moxey, A.P. and Hall, J., 2021. The transition to future (conditional) agricultural support – NFU Scotland’s approach. NFU Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.nfus.org.uk/news/news/conditional-agricultural-support (Accessed: 8/1/25).

Tregear, A., Morgan, E., Spence, L., and Bell, M., 2024. Dietary guidance for healthy and climate friendly diets: A review of international evidence. Food Standards Scotland. [online] Available at: https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/dietary-guidance-for-healthy-and-climate-friendly-diets (Accessed: 20/10/24).

van der Horst, D., Lane, M., Creasy, A., Gillette, K., Soriano-Hernández, P., Jia, H. and Smith, R.S., 2021. Edinburgh and the n-minute neighbourhood concept: an exploratory study. Available at: https://www.research.ed.ac.uk/en/publications/edinburgh-and-the-n-minute-neighbourhood-concept-an-exploratory- (Accessed: 14/1/25).

Vittersø, G., Torjusen, H., Laitala, K., Tocco, B., Biasini, B., Csillag, P., de Labarre, M.D., Lecoeur, J.L., Maj, A., Majewski, E. and Malak-Rawlikowska, A., 2019. Short food supply chains and their contributions to sustainability: Participants’ views and perceptions from 12 European cases’, Sustainability, 11(17), p. 4800. https://doi.org/10.3390/su11174800.

White, J.T. and Bunn, C., 2017. Growing in Glasgow: Innovative practices and emerging policy pathways for urban agriculture, Land Use Policy, 68, pp. 334–344. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.landusepol.2017.07.052.

Wiltshire, J., Freeman, D., Willcocks, J. and Wood, C., 2021. The potential for leguminous crops in Scotland. Ricardo Energy & Environment. [online] Available at: The potential for leguminous crops in Scotland (Accessed: 23/1/25).

Witheridge, J. and Morris, N.J., 2016. An analysis of the effect of public policy on community garden organisations in Edinburgh, Local Environment, 21(2), pp. 202–218. https://doi.org/10.1080/13549839.2014.940357.

Appendix A: Diet & climate policy stakeholder identification and mapping methodology 

Purpose and Scope

The stakeholder mapping exercise aimed to identify and understand the individuals and organisations who influence or are affected by climate and diet policies in Scotland. It was designed to support inclusive, evidence-informed policy review by incorporating a broad range of perspectives.

The mapping focused on ten key policy areas:

  • Agriculture
  • Food systems
  • Public health
  • Carbon emissions
  • Land use and forestry
  • Water use and pollution
  • Economic and social impacts
  • Food security
  • Consumer behaviour and education
  • Urban planning and food infrastructure

Stakeholders were assessed for their relevance to these areas and the potential for involvement in the policy process.

Methods

  • Desk research: Systematic searches of government documents, NGO and advocacy websites, academic literature, and media reports to compile a draft list of stakeholders.
  • Expert consultation: Meetings with policymakers, researchers, and advisors to validate the list and identify additional stakeholders.
  • Categorisation: Stakeholders were grouped by type (e.g., government, academia, NGOs, industry, health, community, media, public).
  • Influence–Interest Mapping: Stakeholders were classified based on their level of influence over, and interest in, diet and climate policy. A rubric guided the assignment of High, Medium, or Low categories for each.

Stakeholder Categories

Stakeholders were grouped into eight high-level categories:

  • Government bodies and regulators (e.g., Scottish Government, SEPA, Food Standards Scotland)
  • Research and academia (e.g., University research centres, think tanks)
  • NGOs and advocacy groups (e.g., Nourish Scotland, Friends of the Earth Scotland)
  • Agriculture and food industry (e.g., NFU Scotland, food producers, retailers)
  • Public health bodies (e.g., NHS Scotland, Public Health Scotland)
  • Community organisations (e.g., local sustainability hubs, rural associations)
  • Media and influencers (e.g., journalists, campaigners)
  • General public and citizen groups (e.g., low-income groups, consumer organisations)

Ongoing Adaptation

Stakeholder positions and influence are dynamic. The mapping process includes continuous review to respond to evolving policy priorities and to adapt engagement strategies accordingly.

Appendix B: Findings from the stakeholder identification and mapping analysis

#

Stakeholder name

Stakeholder primary category

Stakeholder sub-category

1

Defra

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1a) UK Government bodies

2

UK Government

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1a) UK Government bodies

3

UK Parliament

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1a) UK Government bodies

4

HM Revenue and Customs

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1a) UK Government bodies

5

Marine Scotland Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

6

Agriculture and Rural Economy Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

7

Diet and Healthy Weight Team

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

8

Good Food Nation Working Group

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

9

Health & Social Care Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

10

Population Health Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

11

Scottish Government

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

12

Food Security Unit

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

13

Future Environment Division

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

14

Energy and Climate Change Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

15

Scottish Government (SGRPID, Animal health) (dairy production)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

16

Environment and Forestry Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

17

Learning Directorate Support & Wellbeing Unit

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

18

Scottish Labour Party

(1f) Scottish political parties

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

19

Food Standards Agency Scotland (FSAS)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

20

Decoupling Advisory Group

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

21

Resource Efficient Scotland

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

22

Scotland’s Climate Assembly

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

23

Scotland’s Futures Forum

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

24

Just Transition Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

25

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

26

NatureScot (SNH)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

27

Environmental Standards Scotland (ESS)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

28

Environment and Forestry Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

29

Scottish Forestry

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

30

Energy and Climate Change Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

31

Scottish Climate Intelligence Service

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

32

Scotland Farm Advisory Service (FAS)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

33

Adaptation Scotland

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

34

Agriculture and Rural Economy Directorate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

35

Scottish Food Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

36

Ministerial Working Group on Food

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

37

Good Food Nation Working Group

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

38

Environment, Climate Change and Land Reform

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

39

Economic Development and Fair Work

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

40

Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

41

Scottish Government Rural Payments and Inspections Division

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

42

Scottish Natural Heritage

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

43

Scottish Water

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

44

Scottish Enterprise

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

45

Crown Estate

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

46

European Union Network for the Implementation and Enforcement of Environmental Law (IMPEL) (dairy production)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

47

Committee on Climate Change (CCC)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

48

Forestry Commission (FC)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

49

Scottish Science Advisory Council (SSAC)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

50

Science and Advice for Scottish Agriculture (SASA)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

51

Sustainable Development Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

52

Climate Adaptation Team

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

53

SEA Gateway

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

54

Scottish Land Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

55

Health Protection Scotland

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

56

Retail Industry Leadership Group (ILG)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

57

Agri-tourism Monitor Farm Programme

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

58

Education and Skills

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

59

Business Gateway

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

60

Highland and Islands Enterprise

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

61

Transport Authority

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

62

Revenue Scotland (leather sector)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

63

Forestry and Land Scotland

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

64

Historic Environment Scotland

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

65

Crofting Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

66

Scottish Law Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

67

Scottish Fiscal Commission

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

68

Scottish Funding Council (SFC)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

69

Scottish Human Rights Commission (SHRC)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

70

Scottish Council on Global Affairs (SCGA)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

71

Policy Connect

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

72

Advisory Group on Economic Recovery

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1c) Advisory agencies and regulators

73

City of Edinburgh Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

74

Highland Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

75

Scottish Borders Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

76

West Lothian Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

77

Angus Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

78

South Lanarkshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

79

East Ayrshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

80

Argyll and Bute Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

81

Convention of Scottish Local Authorities (CoSLA)

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

82

East Dunbartonshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

83

South Ayrshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

84

Aberdeen City Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

85

Dundee City Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

86

Inverclyde Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

87

East Lothian Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

88

East Renfrewshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

89

Glasgow City Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

90

Orkney Islands Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

91

Shetland Islands Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

92

Stirling Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

93

West Dunbartonshire Council

(1) Government bodies, agencies & regulators

(1d) Local councils

94

Scottish National Party

(1) Scottish political parties

(1e) Scottish Government bodies

95

Scottish Conservative Party

(1) Scottish political parties

(1e) Scottish political parties

96

Scottish Green Party

(1b) Scottish Government bodies

(1f) Scottish political parties

97

University of Edinburgh

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

98

University of Glasgow

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

99

University of Stirling

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

100

University of Dundee

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

101

University of Strathclyde

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

102

University of Aberdeen

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

103

Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC)

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

104

Scottish School of Forestry

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

105

St Andrew’s University

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

106

Royal Veterinary College

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

107

UHI Inverness

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

108

Glasgow Caledonian University

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

109

The Queen’s Nursing Institute Scotland

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

110

Heriot-Watt University

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

111

Royal College of Nursing

(2) Research & academia

(2b) Academic institutions

112

Scottish Environment, Food and Agriculture Research Institutions (SEFARI)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

113

James Hutton Institute

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

114

Sustainability Exchange

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

115

Centre for Ecology and Hydrology (NERC)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

116

University of Edinburgh Climate Change Institute (ECCI)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

117

Forest Research (FC)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

118

Scottish Environment, Food and Agriculture Research Institutions (SEFARI)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

119

Scotland Beyond Net Zero

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

120

Scottish Alliance for Food (SCAF)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

121

Global Academy of Agriculture and Food Security, University of Edinburgh

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

122

Sea Mammal Research Unit (SMRU)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

123

Biomathematics and Statistics Scotland (BioSS)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

124

Centre for Climate Justice, Glasgow Caledonian University

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

125

Rowett Institute

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

126

British Geological Survey

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

127

British Geological Society (BGS)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

128

University of Strathclyde Fraser of Allander Institute (FAI)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

129

Nesta

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

130

Research Innovation Scotland

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

131

David Hume Institute

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

132

What Works Scotland

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

133

Research establishments

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

134

ScotCen Social Research

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

135

Pareto Consulting

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

136

Food Researchers in Edinburgh (FRIED)

(2) Research & academia

(2c) Research centres

137

Royal Society of Edinburgh

(2) Research & academia

(2d) Policy think tanks

138

Institute for Public Policy Research (IPPR) Scotland

(2) Research & academia

(2d) Policy think tanks

139

Green Alliance

(2) Research & academia

(2d) Policy think tanks

140

Reform Scotland

(2) Research & academia

(2d) Policy think tanks

141

Chatham House

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

142

Common Weal

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

143

Future Economy Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

144

Common Wealth

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

145

Food Ethics Council

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

146

Policy Exchange

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

147

Centre Think Tank

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

148

Conservative Environment Network

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

149

Capita

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

150

THEOS

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(2d) Policy think tanks

151

The Badenoch and Strathspey Conservation Group (BSCG)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

152

Friends of the Earth Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

153

Stop Climate Chaos Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

154

Keep Scotland Beautiful

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

155

Creative Carbon Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

156

Scottish Environment LINK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

157

Scottish Wildlife Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

158

Scottish Wild Land Group

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

159

Trees for Life

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

160

RSPB Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

161

Environmental Rights Centre for Scotland (ERCS)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

162

Scottish Countryside Rangers’ Associations

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

163

Action to Protect Rural Scotland (APRS)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

164

The Cairngorms Campaign

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

165

British Trust for Conservation Volunteers (BTCV)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

166

British Trust for Ornithology

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

167

The Scottish Conservation Projects Trust (SCPT)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

168

Plantlife International

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

169

The Wildfowl & Wetlands Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

170

The British Trust for Ornithology (BTO)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

171

Zero Waste Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

172

Zero Waste Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

173

Groundwork Trusts

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

174

The National Biodiversity Network (NBN) Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

175

The Botanical Society of the British Isles (BSBI)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

176

The Conservation Volunteers

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

177

Greenspace Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

178

Net Zero Nation

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

179

Green Action Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

180

Environmental Protection Scotland (EPS)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

181

Uplift UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

182

Labour Climate and Environment Forum (LCEF)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

183

Climate Emergency UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

184

Tipping Point UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

185

Royal Scottish Geographical Society

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

186

Scotland The Big Picture

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

187

Sustainable Thinking Scotland (STS)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

188

Fishery Trusts

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

189

Greener Kirkcaldy

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

190

Sustainable Cupar

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

191

Energy Saving Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

192

Esmee Fairbairn Foundation

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

193

Linlithgow Climate Challenge

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

194

Changeworks

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

195

Scottish Policy Group British Ecological Society

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

196

National Trust for Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

197

Scottish Farming and Wildlife Advisory Group (SCOTFWAG)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

198

John Muir Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

199

Greenpeace UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

200

WRAP

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

201

The Woodland Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

202

The British Ecological Society (BES)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

203

WWF Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

204

Sustainable Scotland Network (SSN)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

205

Sustain

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

206

Peers for the Planet

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

207

Nature Foundation

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

208

Fidra

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

209

FEL Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

210

Sustainable Wellbeing Environment Network

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

211

Party for the Animals

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

212

Marine Conservation Society

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

213

Four Paws UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

214

Scottish Communities Climate Action Network (SSCAN)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

215

Earth In Common

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

216

World Animal Protection

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

217

OneKind

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

218

Open Seas

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3a) Environmental NGOs & advocacy groups

219

Edinburgh Community Food

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

220

Nourish Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

221

Soil Association Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

222

Scottish Food Coalition

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

223

Good Food Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

224

FareShare Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

225

Community Food and Health (Scotland)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

226

Independent Food Aid Network UK (IFAN)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

227

Eating Better

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

228

Nutrition Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

229

Plant-Based Food Alliance

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

230

The Food Foundation

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

231

Glasgow Community Food Network

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

232

Impatience Insiders

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

233

Propagate Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

234

One Planet Food

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

235

Food and Agriculture Stakeholder Taskforce (FAST)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

236

Sustainable Food Places

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

237

Food Standards Agency

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

238

Food For Life Scotland (Soil Association)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

239

British Nutrition Foundation

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

240

British Dietetic Association (BDA)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

241

UK Food Group

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

242

Food Citizens Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

243

Climavore

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

244

Community Supported Agriculture Network UK (CSA)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

245

Trussell

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

246

Food Train

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

247

Independent Food Aid Network

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3b) Food policy NGOs & advocacy groups

248

Young Scot

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Community NGOs and advocacy groups

249

Scottish Women’s Convention

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Community NGOs and advocacy groups

250

Volunteer Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Community NGOs and advocacy groups

251

Engender

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Community NGOs and advocacy groups

252

Obesity Action Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

253

Scottish Obesity Alliance

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

254

Obesity Health Alliance

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

255

Health and Social Care Alliance Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

256

People’s Health Trust

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

257

Voluntary Health Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

258

Centre for Sustainable Healthcare

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

259

Children’s Health Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

260

Royal Environmental Health Institute of Scotland (REHIS)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

261

UK Health Alliance on Climate Change

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

262

Cancer Research UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

263

Scottish Public Health Network (ScotPHN)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3c) Health NGOs and advocacy groups

264

Scottish Youth Parliament (SYP Scot Youth)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

265

Scottish Community Alliance

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

266

Involve UK

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

267

JustRight Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

268

Foundation Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

269

Eco-Congregation Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

270

Edinburgh Communities Climate Action Network (ECCAN)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

271

Faith in Community Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

272

Good Law Project

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

273

Scottish Human Rights Commission

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

274

Another Way

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

275

Planning Democracy

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

276

Scottish Council for Voluntary Organisations (SCVO)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

277

Transform Community Development

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

278

Community Development Lens (CoDeL)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

279

Cyrenians

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

280

Eco Congregation Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

281

Environmental Rights Centre for Scotland (ERC)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

282

Federation of City Farms and Community Gardens Scotland (FEL Scotland)

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

283

Get Growing Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

284

Worker Support Centre

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

285

Unite Scotland

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

286

UK Health Alliance on Climate Change

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

287

Social Farms & Gardens

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

288

Global Justice Now

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

289

Scottish Trade Union Congress

(3) Third Sector & advocacy groups

(3d) Community NGOs & advocacy groups

290

Compassion in World Farming (CIWIF)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

291

Community Land Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

292

Nature Friendly Farming Network (NFFN)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

293

Landworkers’ Alliance

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

294

Rare Breeds Survival Trust (RBST) Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

295

Mossgiel Organic Farm

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

296

Association of Independent Crop Consultants

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

297

Basis Registration Ltd (BASIS

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

298

Scottish Quality Crops

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

299

Tenant Farming Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

300

Scottish Dairy Growth Board

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

301

Scottish DairyHub

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

302

Bovine genetics and reproductive services

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

303

The Scottish Dairy Cattle Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

304

Young Farmers

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

305

Scottish Organic Producers Association (SOPA)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

306

National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

307

The Country Landowners’ Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

308

Scottish Water

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

309

Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

310

Crown Estate Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

311

Royal Highland and Agricultural Society of Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

312

Agricultural Industries Confederation

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

313

Advanced Plant Growth Centre (James Hutton Institute)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

314

Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society (SAOS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

315

ADAS

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

316

Agricultural Industries Confederation

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

317

Agricultural Industries Confederation Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

318

Crop Protection Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

319

Linking Environment and Farming (LEAF)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

320

National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

321

Red Tractor

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

322

Ricardo (Future Farming Resilience Fund)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

323

SRUC/SAC Consulting

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

324

Scottish Land and Estates

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

325

Scottish Rural College

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

326

Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

327

DairyUK

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

328

Farm Quality Assurance Schemes

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

329

Assured Integrated Milk Supplier (AIMS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

330

Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

331

Organic Soil Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

332

Dourie Farming Company Ltd

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

333

Scottish Land & Estates

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

334

Scottish Gamekeepers’ Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

335

South of Scotland Regional Economic Partnership

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

336

Scottish Crofting Federation

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

337

National Association of Agricultural Contractors

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

338

UK Irrigation Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

339

Scottish Tenant Farmers Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

340

Bank of Scotland Business

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

341

Royal Bank of Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

342

Pasture for Life

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4a) Agricultural organisations

343

Scottish Association of Meat Wholesalers

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

344

Scottish Ecological Design Association (SEDA)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

345

Milk Supply Association (MSA)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

346

Social Enterprise Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

347

Scotland Loves Local Campaign

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

348

Scotland the Bread

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

349

Circular Communities Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

350

Campbells Prime Meat

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

351

Packaging Recycling Group Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

352

Scotch Beef

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

353

Food and Drink Federation Scotland (FDF Scotland)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

354

Scotland Food and Drink

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

355

British Meat Processors’ Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

356

Quality Meat Scotland (QMS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

357

Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

358

Marine Stewardship Council (MSC)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

359

RSPCA

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

360

Scotch Whisky Association (SWA)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

361

FoodDrinkEurope

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

362

Food and Drink Leadership Forum

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

363

Scotlean

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

364

UNISON Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

365

Scottish Wholesale Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

366

British Contract Manufacturers and Packers Association

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

367

The Packaging Federation

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

368

Scottish Fair Trade Forum

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

369

Resource Management Association Scotland (RMAS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4b) Food production organisations

370

Consumer Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

371

Bute Produce

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

372

Remake Scotland

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

373

Scottish Grocers’ Federation’s Go Local programme

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

374

European Trade Union Federation of Textiles, Clothing and Leather (leather sector)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

375

Product accreditation (leather sector)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

376

Association of Convenience Stores (ACS)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

377

British Retail Consortium (BRC)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

378

Scottish Retail Consortium

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

379

Global markets (leather sector)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

380

Scottish Grocers’ Federation

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

381

Scottish Trades Union Congress (STUC)

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

382

ASDA Supermarket

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

383

Tesco

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

384

Morrison’s

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

385

Sainsbury’s

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

386

The Refillery Edinburgh

(4) Agriculture & food industry

(4c) Supermarkets and retailers

387

NHS Scotland

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

388

Public Health Scotland

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

389

NHS Borders

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

390

NHS Lothian

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

391

NHS Grampian

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

392

NHS Forth Valley

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

393

Directorate of Health and Social Care

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

394

Ministry of Public Health and Social Care

(5) Public health bodies

(5a) Public health bodies

395

Highlands and Islands Climate Hub

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

396

Fife Communities Climate Action Network (FCCAN)

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

397

North East Scotland Climate Action Resource Hub (NESCAN)

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

398

Transition Black Isle

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

399

Edinburgh Food Social

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

400

Forth Valley Food Futures

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

401

Highland Good Food Partnership

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

402

Climate Hebrides

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

403

Appetite for Angus Food & Drink Network

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

404

Arran’s Food Journey

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

405

Ayrshire Food an’ a that

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

406

Bute Kitchen

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

407

East Lothian Food and Drink

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

408

Eat Drink Hebrides

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

409

Eat SW Scotland

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

410

Food from Argyll

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

411

Food from Fife

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

412

Forth Valley Food and Drink Network

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

413

Great Perthshire

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

414

Lanarkshire Larder

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

415

North East Scotland Food & Drink Network

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

416

Orkney Food and Drink

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

417

A Taste of Shetland

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

418

Glasgow Allotments Forum

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

419

Abundant Borders

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

420

Transition Edinburgh

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

421

Edible Edinburgh

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

422

Transition Stirling

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

423

Moray Food Network

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

424

Falkirk Food Futures

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

425

Dundee Urban Orchard

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

426

Fair Food Aberdeenshire

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

427

Wester Hailes Growing Communities

(6) Community organisations

(6a) Local food networks and sustainability hubs

428

Scottish Rural Action

(6) Community organisations

(6b) Rural community associations

429

Countryside Alliance

(6) Community organisations

(6b) Rural community associations

430

Carbon Brief

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

431

The Grocer

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

432

The Scottish Farmer

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

433

The Scotsman

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

434

The Highland Times

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

435

The National

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

436

Health Food Business Magazine

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

437

Meat Management Magazine

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

438

HealthandCare.Scot

(7) Media & influencers

(7a) Journalists and media outlets

439

Laura Young (‘Less Waste Laura’

(7) Media & influencers

(7b) Influencers & activists

440

Students Organising for Sustainability (SOS-UK)

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

441

Inclusion Scotland

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

442

People and Planet

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

443

The Commitment

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

444

Scotland’s Regeneration Forum (SURF)

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

445

Just Fair

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

446

Poverty Alliance

(8) General public & citizens’ groups

(8a) Vulnerable populations

447

Citizens Advice Scotland

(8) General public and citizen groups

(8b) Consumer rights organisations

Appendix C: Systematic literature review methodology

Two main citation indexes were used to systematically search for articles: Scopus (for published academic literature); and Publish or Perish (for unpublished ‘grey’ literature).

In addition, a set of non-systematically derived articles supplemented the main systematic literature review protocol and more detail can be found below.

For the systematic search protocol, search parameters comprised Title-Abstract-Keyword searches of articles published in English since 2015. Because of the breadth of the topic, no categories were excluded from the search parameters. As Publish or Perish searches Google Scholar records, articles were limited to the first 200 returns by relevance.

The SPICE framework (Booth, 2006) was used to configure the systematic review search string and incorporated the following framework: 

  • Setting: E.g. Scotland’s policy environment and the social, economic, and environmental factors specific to Scotland. 
  • Perspective: E.g. policymakers, public groups, industry stakeholders, and other groups affected by diet and climate policies. 
  • Intervention: E.g. climate-related dietary policy actions, public health initiatives, economic incentives, or educational campaigns. 
  • Comparison: E.g. other regional or international diet and climate policies or scenarios where similar policy interventions are absent. 
  • Evaluation: E.g. outcomes in terms of emissions reductions, public health improvements, economic impacts, or stakeholder engagement effectiveness. 

The Title-Abstract-Keyword citation indexes were searched using the following strings, which were adapted during pilot searches because of limitations to search capabilities across each index and to optimise returns:

Scopus: TITLE-ABS-KEY ((“scot*” OR “united kingdom” OR “wales” OR “england” OR “northern ireland”) AND (“diet*” OR “food”) AND (“climate” OR “carbon” OR “emissions” OR “environment*”) AND (“policy*” OR “regulat*” OR “strateg*” OR “lever*” OR “mechanism*”) AND (“behaviour*” OR “percept*” OR “attitud*” OR “consum*” OR “meat” OR “dairy” OR “vegan” OR “vegetarian” OR “plant-based” OR “nutrition” OR “health” OR “wellbeing” OR “equit*” OR “sustainab*” OR “adaptation” OR “mitigation” OR “resilien*” OR “biodiver*” OR “econom*” OR “cost” OR “agricultur*” OR “produc*” OR “process*” OR “retail*” OR “trade*” OR “import*” OR “export*”))

Publish or Perish: scot* AND diet* OR food AND climate OR carbon OR emissions OR environment* AND policy* OR regulat* OR strateg* OR lever OR mechanism* AND behaviour*

Search results from each index were imported into Zotero where duplicates were removed.

Titles/abstracts were screened for eligibility based on the following criteria:

  • Inclusion criteria:
  • Publication language English
  • Published since 2020
  • Scotland, UK or other devolved policy contexts
  • Relevant to one or more of the five PESTLE dimensions
  • Availability of full text by 31/1/25
  • Exclusion criteria:
  • Publication language not English
  • Published before 2020 or focused on policy contexts prior to 2015
  • Without direct or indirect relevance to Scottish, UK or other devolved policy contexts
  • Without relevance to at least one of the five PESTLE dimensions
  • Conference proceedings
  • Methodological papers and study protocols

Each article was screened and assigned to one of three Zotero folders: Include; Exclude; Unsure. With reference to the latter, at the end of the initial screening these articles were re-examined and re-categorised to the Include or Exclude folder.

  • The following data were extracted from all included articles:
  • Article title
  • Last name of first author
  • Year of publication
  • Article URL
  • Article type (e.g., empirical study, policy document)
  • Study context and Aims/Objectives
  • Results:
  • Key findings
  • Conclusions
  • Areas for policy development

In addition to the systematic literature review, relevant articles from a variety of other sources supplemented the review to ensure a comprehensive and contextually relevant analysis. Articles were identified through:

  • Stakeholder Contributions – During stakeholder one-to-one discussions, participants suggested key reports, policy documents, and research papers that they considered highly relevant to the topic.
  • Citation Searches – Both forward citation searches (identifying newer papers that cited key sources) and reverse citation searches (reviewing references cited within important papers) were conducted to expand the review.
  • General Web Searches – Broader searches using Google were performed to capture relevant grey literature, media reports, and other non-peer-reviewed sources that may not be included in academic databases.
  • Targeted Website Searches – Specific searches were conducted on Scottish Government, NGO, and stakeholder websites to access reports, policy briefings, and unpublished data relevant to the research focus.

 

Appendix D: Systematic literature review flowchart

An image of flow chart that shows the systematic literature review. It reads 1,146 articles importanted. systematic searches 776 (scopus) 200 (publihs or persih) other sources: 170. 12 duplicates removed. 1,134 studies screened. 900 studies excluded. 144 full textes reviewed. 46 studies excluded. 98 studies included.

Appendix E: Stakeholder meeting methodology

Purpose and Overview:

The one-to-one stakeholder meetings[10] were conducted to gather qualitative insights into Scotland’s complex diet and climate policy landscape. These conversations were intended to complement the literature review and stakeholder workshops by eliciting the perspectives of individuals with practical experience and policy insight across relevant sectors of Government (supplemented by Third Sector and Academia).

Stakeholder Identification and Selection

Stakeholders were purposively selected based on their relevance to the intersecting themes of diet and climate policy, including specific expertise or engagement in areas such as emissions reduction, food security, policy development and advocacy, rural and environmental science, public health, environmental policy, agriculture, food production, and food insecurity. The selection process drew on:

  • Expert recommendations from Scottish Government contacts and members of the research steering group.
  • A stakeholder mapping exercise (see Appendices A and B).

Format and Approach

  • A total of 14 semi-structured informal online meetings were conducted.
  • Meetings followed a tailored topic guide to allow flexibility while covering core themes such as governance, policy coherence, barriers to implementation, and perceived gaps in evidence or support.
  • Discussions typically lasted 30–60 minutes and were designed to be conversational, allowing participants to reflect on both strategic and operational aspects of policy and practice.
  • Meetings were not recorded, but the researcher took detailed notes throughout.

Ethical Considerations and Data Management

  • Ethical approval was obtained through the University of Bath.
  • All participants were provided with information on the project and gave informed verbal consent.

Analytical Use

Insights from the stakeholder meeting notes were synthesised alongside the literature review and workshop outputs. They fed directly into the PESTLE analysis, helping to identify areas for policy development, clarify governance issues, and shape recommendations across the political, economic, social, technological, legal, and environmental dimensions.

Semi-structured meeting protocol

The following questions guided the meetings:

1. Understanding their role and work  

  • Can you tell me about your current role and your team’s focus within the Scottish Government?  
  • Does your work intersect with diet policy in Scotland, and what are the key objectives your team is working towards in this area?  

2. Stakeholder relationships and collaboration  

  • Who are the key stakeholders you collaborate with (e.g., other government departments, industry, civil society)? 
  •  Are there any stakeholders or groups whose influence or involvement you feel is missing or underrepresented in this policy area?  
  • How would you describe the strength of your collaboration with other key stakeholders? Are there any gaps or challenges in communication or partnership?  

3. Policy levers for diet change  

  • What policy levers do you believe are most effective for promoting dietary changes that would both improve public health and reduce environmental impact? 
  • In your view, are there particular dietary behaviours or food systems that should be prioritised for change in order to meet Scotland’s climate and health goals?  
  • What challenges do you see in implementing these policies, either from a political, social, or logistical standpoint?  

4. Identifying gaps in existing policy  

  • Do you think there are any gaps in current diet-related policies that hinder progress towards climate goals or healthier diets?  
  • Are there areas where more integration or alignment between climate and health policies could be beneficial?  
  • Where do you see the biggest opportunities for new or improved policies in this space?  

5. Future policy directions and needs  

  • What emerging trends or issues do you think will have the biggest influence on future diet, and climate or health policy in Scotland?  
  • In what ways do you think Scottish diet policy could evolve to address both climate change and public health more effectively? 

Meeting participants

The following table summarises details of meeting participants

# 

Organisation 

Policy Area 

Academia

Diet & Climate 

Third-Sector (Environment)

Emissions 

Scottish Government 

Food Security 

Scottish Government 

Diet 

Scottish Government 

Policy engagement 

Scottish Government 

Rural and environmental science 

Academia

Diet policy perceptions 

UK Government

Diet policy 

Scottish Government 

Health 

10 

Scottish Government 

Environment

11 

UK Government

Agriculture & Environment 

12 

Scottish Government 

Food insecurity 

13 

Third Sector (Health)

Diet & Health 

14 

Scottish Government 

Climate and Diet

Appendix F: Stakeholder workshop protocols 

Workshop Purpose

The workshops aimed to explore stakeholder perspectives on Scotland’s diet and climate policy landscape, identify priority issues and gaps, and generate ideas for practical cross-sector solutions. These sessions supported the development of policy-relevant insights through collaborative, activity-based engagement. Stakeholders were identified based on the mapping exercise and consultations with Scottish Government colleagues to identify a range of interests and influence (including Government, third sector organisations, academics, agriculture and food producers, health, community, and environmental groups).

Workshop Formats

Three stakeholder workshops were delivered:

  • One in-person workshop (full protocol detailed below)
  • Two online workshops, which followed a shortened format with similar core activities

Time

Activity

10:00–10:30am

Arrival and tea/coffee

10:30–10:40am

Welcome and introduction

10:40–11:15am

Activity 1: Priority Mapping

11:15–11:25am

Break

11:25am–12:30pm

Activity 2: Policy Challenge Brainstorm

12:30–1:15pm

Lunch

1:15–2:00pm

Activity 3: Future Diet Scenarios

2:00–2:10pm

Break

2:10–3:00pm

Activity 4: Prioritisation, Feedback and Closing

In-Person Workshop Structure and Schedule

Time

Activity

10:00–10:15am

Introduction and opening remarks

10:15–11:00am

Activity 1: Priority Mapping

11:00–11:10am

Break

11:10–12:00pm

Activity 2: Policy Challenge Brainstorm

12:00–12:10pm

Break

12:10–12:45pm

Activity 3: Consolidating Priorities and Voting

12:45–1:00pm

Wrap-up and next steps

Online Workshop Structure and Schedule[11]

Participant Recruitment
Stakeholders were purposively recruited based on a preceding stakeholder mapping exercise. This mapping exercise identified relevant individuals and organisations across key sectors including Scottish Government, public health, agriculture, environment, food industry, third sector, and academia. The rationale for recruitment was guided by the segmentation of stakeholders within the mapping process, ensuring representation across high-interest and high-influence categories, as well as those with complementary or contrasting perspectives. All workshops included a cross-sector mix to support inclusive dialogue and the development of well-rounded policy insights.

Facilitation and Materials
Workshops were facilitated by a research team using a structured agenda and visual/interactive materials. In-person materials included A0 wall charts, colour-coded sticky notes, printed worksheets, and feedback forms. Online workshops used virtual whiteboards, editable templates, and polling tools to replicate similar participatory methods in a digital environment.

Core Activities (all formats)

  • Activity 1: Priority Mapping
    Stakeholders identified sector-specific priorities, areas for policy development, and coordination needs using a structured mapping exercise. These inputs were categorised visually (in-person) or on a shared document (online) and discussed in plenary.
  • Activity 2: Policy Challenge Brainstorm
    Mixed-sector groups tackled pre-defined policy challenges (e.g., reducing meat consumption, supporting farmers, addressing inequalities). Each group identified key barriers and proposed short-term policy solutions, then shared findings with the wider group.
  • Activity 3: Prioritisation and Feedback
    Stakeholders reviewed the workshop’s emerging priorities and selected the most important using voting dots (in-person) or virtual polling (online). This was followed by group discussion and final reflections.

Additional In-Person Activity

  • Future Diet Scenarios
    Small groups considered hypothetical future policy scenarios for 2040 (e.g., localisation of food systems, technological innovation, policy-led dietary shifts). Discussions explored sector-specific impacts, challenges, opportunities, and future policy needs.

Data Collection and Follow-Up

Participant contributions were captured via workshop artefacts (e.g., sticky notes, templates, whiteboards), discussion summaries, and anonymised feedback forms. An optional follow-up survey was distributed by email. Thematic analysis of all outputs informed policy insights and recommendations.

To support co-production and refine the emerging findings, we incorporated iteration loops for feedback. Formative workshop outputs were shared with participants and relevant stakeholders following the sessions, and feedback was actively invited to validate interpretations, identify omissions, and strengthen final conclusions.

Participating stakeholders

Workshop

Format

Stakeholders

1

In-person

Food Standards Scotland.

  

Nourish Scotland

  

Public Health Scotland

  

Soil Association Scotland

  

Nature Friendly Farming Network

  

Rowett Institute, University of Aberdeen.

  

University of Edinburgh

  

Scottish Government (Tobacco, Gambling, Diet and Healthy Weight Unit).

  

Scottish Government (Policy)

  

CoDeL/Scottish Rural Action

  

Glasgow Allotments Forum

3[12]

Online

Climate Change Committee

  

Quality Meat Scotland

  

Scottish Tenant Farmers’ Association

  

Scottish Government (Diet Policy)

  

University of Edinburgh

  

Four Paws UK

4

Online

Scottish Food Commission

  

Scottish Crofting Federation

  

Public Health Scotland

  

Scottish Communities Climate Action Network

  

Eating Better

  

CLIMAVORE CIC

  

Abundant Borders

Appendix G: Extended Political analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key theme

Area For Policy Development

1. Governance and Structural Issues in Food Policy Coordination

Establish a coordinated and coherent food policy framework

Food policies operate in silos, with opportunities to strengthen cross-sectoral collaboration. Informal policy structures can limit transparency and efficiency.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Effective policy implementation requires cross-departmental collaboration and a holistic approach, addressing both supply and demand aspects of the food system. Currently, policies in Scotland are fragmented, with limited integration across health, agriculture, and environmental sectors.

(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Fragmented governance across Government divisions, leading to disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies

(Stakeholder Meeting 3).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Greater cross ministry coordination between environment, net zero, health and housing needed to all recognise the link between industrial livestock production and emissions.”

(Workshop 4).

Align food policy with national climate targets

Food system policies should better align with net-zero targets by integrating climate action and dietary change into Scotland’s Good Food Nation objectives.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Integrating national food strategies with climate change mitigation is crucial. Highlight Scotland’s leadership in establishing sustainable food policies aligned with net-zero.

(Boyle, Jenneson, Okeke-Ogbuafor et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The focus on reducing meat and dairy emissions creates political sensitivities, with sustainable diets seen as contentious.

(Stakeholder Meeting 14).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Within Scottish Government: Make climate & diet part of a Good Food Nation objective. Include dietary change as one of Scotland’s climate goals. Work for better join up across policy areas, work against narrowness. Make this a priority for multiple departments.”

(Workshop 4).

Promote long-term, systemic approaches in food policy

Short-term political cycles and reactive policymaking impact long-term food system transformation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Short term thinking- panic politics!

Prevents reliable engagement and constant churn

Just in time production and unequal power balance between food producers, wholesalers, and retailers

Framework contracts for catering are constantly tightened while tied into commercial”

(Workshop 1).

Enhance strategic leadership to drive dietary change

A clearer strategic vision could support sustainable dietary change. Industry influence (e.g., food advertising) shapes food choices, and Government could play a stronger role.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

A lack of visible, strategic political leadership to unify and implement health, environment, and food equity changes was highlighted as a major deficit.

(Food Farming & Countryside Commission, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Absence of formal leadership and cross-departmental coordination, leading to fragmented efforts

(Stakeholder Meeting 14).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“A lack of political will and leadership from politicians and the leaders of the wider food movement to take on the opportunities of dietary change, with an over-reliance on the free market to fix food.”

(Workshop 1).

Develop and implement a comprehensive national food strategy

A more holistic, integrated and strategic approach to food and diet across climate, health, and agriculture would strengthen policy coherence.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Food system governance in the UK is multi-layered, involving numerous regulatory bodies and policies across sectors. This fragmentation complicates efforts to address system-wide issues like environmental sustainability and public health

(Hasnain, Green, Williams et al., 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Misalignment between climate, health, and food policies. Current policy frameworks lack coherence, creating conflicting objectives

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“There is a tendency to think about different aspects of food systems links to health, missing thinking about the totality of the links between food and health- through benefits of health from employment, improved air quality, reduced pollution, better nutrition, visibility and access to green spaces, encouragement of physical activity etc. understanding food system the complexities and feedback loops of a complex system ( also consideration of impact of climate change effects locally and globally on food security).”

(Workshop 1).

Improve alignment of food policy across governance levels

Ensuring national and local policies work in tandem would improve implementation and outcomes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

National food policies tend to prioritise large-scale, industrial supply chains, often at the expense of supporting local and regional food systems. This emphasis can marginalise smaller producers, reduce community resilience, and limit opportunities for sustainable, place-based approaches to food production and distribution. Strengthening policy support for local food networks could enhance food security, shorten supply chains, and contribute to environmental and public health goals.

(Witheridge & Morris, 2016).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Local & national level joining up of food policies.”

(Workshop 3).

Strengthen policy coherence between national and local food initiatives

National dietary targets could better account for local food sovereignty and self-sufficiency, ensuring global dietary goals align with Scotland’s food systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Insufficient consideration of how global dietary targets may intersect with local food sovereignty and autonomy.

(EAT, n.d.).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Define clear and measurable targets under the Good Food Nation Act

Establishing measurable goals for emissions, biodiversity, and dietary shifts would provide greater long-term direction.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No specific targets or indicators. The Act does not set clear, measurable targets for emissions reduction, biodiversity conservation, or dietary shifts. Leaves flexibility to future governments, which may slow progress.

(Brennan, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

2. Just Transition and Resilient Food Systems

Ensure a just transition in the food system

Stronger policy support is needed to help farmers, food workers, and consumers transition to sustainable practices while ensuring fairness and inclusivity.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Weak link between food production and Just Transition principles. The document emphasises a Just Transition for farmers and crofters but does not sufficiently address how food system workers, small-scale producers, and consumers will be supported in adapting to more sustainable food systems.

(Scottish Government, 2022b).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Just transition.”

(Workshop 1).

Align public procurement with sustainability and dietary targets

Align procurement policies with environmental and dietary goals across public institutions (e.g. schools, hospitals). Improve coordination between health boards and local authorities. Strengthen oversight and accountability to ensure sustainability outcomes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Public Sector Procurement Oversight. The document does not discuss whether public sector food procurement (e.g., schools, hospitals, government catering) will align with these dietary goals. A mandatory framework for institutional food policies (e.g., requiring plant-forward meals in public settings) is missing.

(Scottish Government, 2013).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Public procurement policies have untapped potential to support local, sustainable food systems while stimulating the green economy.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“There is a gap in current public procurement accessing enough sustainable products.”

(Workshop 1).

Strengthen resilience in food supply chains

Increased investment in infrastructure, including capital support and processing facilities, would improve food system resilience.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No Specific Strategy for Food System Resilience. The Act does not address supply chain vulnerabilities (e.g., extreme weather events, trade disruptions).

(Brennan, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Supply chains-capital support-processing.”

(Workshop 3).

Enhance policy support for local and regional food systems

Policies could better integrate local food production into supply chains, enhancing resilience to global disruptions. Small-scale initiatives play a key role but require stronger policy backing. Strengthening regional coordination between producers, supply chains, and consumers, especially in remote areas, could enhance resilience and sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Barriers to Local Food Growth: Access to land for community growing remains an issue despite policies like the Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015. Infrastructure gaps: Rural and island areas face transport and distribution challenges, making it harder to get food to markets.

(Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“There is a gap of a localised/regional joined up application of sustainable food systems encompassing primary food production, supply chain and consumer. Scottish islands and some other areas around Scotland’s coast are very vulnerable to e.g. food access and affordability. Applying a bespoke sustainable food system would tick a lot of boxes and offer research opportunities and questions still to be asked.”

(Workshop 3).

Invest in infrastructure for sustainable and local meat processing

Expanding access to slaughter facilities, particularly in remote areas, would support local farmers and streamline processing.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Processing capacity is limited: Lack of small abattoirs and local processing facilities hinders small farmers from scaling up.

Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Need to support slaughterhouses due to lack of availability for farmers, especially in remote areas, and issues with accessing facilities, especially on the West Coast. Having slaughter hubs rather than individuals accessing/identifying farms (do paperwork before lorries enter premises.”

(Workshop 3).

Develop a food systems approach tailored to Scotland’s context

Policies should reflect Scotland’s unique rural and cultural contexts, including land-use trade-offs and food traditions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Advocates for transforming the UK food system using a systems-based approach to address interconnected challenges such as unhealthy diets, environmental degradation, and food system inefficiencies. However, it is UK-wide and lacks Scotland-specific insights, such as its distinct agricultural systems (e.g., crofting) or cultural preferences in food. Fails to account for Scotland’s devolved responsibilities in areas like agriculture and environment, which require more tailored solutions.

(Bhunnoo, & Poppy, 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address urban-rural inequities in food security and access

A more integrated approach is needed to address food security challenges in urban areas while supporting rural agricultural priorities.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Urban-Rural Divide: Highlights Scotland’s diversity in land use but does not fully address the challenges of urban food security in comparison to rural production priorities.

(Gill, Fowler & Scott, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Advance implementation of the 10-minute neighbourhood model

Improve planning and spatial access. Connecting communities with local producers and using technology to improve food accessibility could support stronger local food systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Exploratory study on the feasibility of 10-minute neighbourhoods in Edinburgh, noting that food accessibility is a key factor in their successful implementation. The research suggests utilising technology (such as online food hubs and delivery platforms) to connect consumers with local producers.

(van der Horst, Lane, Creasy et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“10 minute neighbourhood-bringing the local food system to see where it’s needed and linking it to local producers.

Creating greater closeness to system

Opportunities for technologies to help with that.”

(Workshop 1).

Integrate urban agriculture into food policy and planning

Urban agriculture could play a greater role in production methods supporting plant-based diets and lowering carbon footprints.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Analysis of the climate impact of food consumed in Scotland, identifying urban agriculture as a crucial strategy for lowering carbon emissions and promoting plant-based diets. The research suggests that increasing urban food production can offset some of Scotland’s imported food emissions, which currently contribute significantly to the nation’s carbon footprint.

(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Develop a national strategy for climate-compatible red meat supply

A clearer plan is needed to ensure red meat supply security amid potential future shortages.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Impact of labour shortages on food availability and safety in the UK, with a focus on Scotland’s red meat sector. The study finds that geographical challenges and post-Brexit labour shortages increase supply risks. The paper calls for contingency planning in Scotland’s red meat processing sector to ensure long-term supply security.

McAreavey, Choudhary, Obayi et al., (2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

3. Aligning Food Policy with Climate, Health, and Nutrition Goals

Align production and consumption policies for a sustainable food system

Current policies emphasise food production over dietary behaviour, missing opportunities to address both sustainability and consumer choices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Food supply chain sustainability is prioritized over dietary sustainability in Scottish policy discussions. They advocate for more emphasis on consumer choices, food accessibility, and reducing food waste.

(Leat, Revoredo-Giha, & Lamprinopoulou, 2011).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Production vs. diet change focus: Policy emphasis on production over dietary behaviour misses opportunities for integrated approaches.

(Stakeholder Meeting 6).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen national nutrition strategies to support dietary change

Policies lack structured plans for ensuring nutritional adequacy in plant-based diets, including fortification of alternatives to meat and dairy.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The report points out that many plant-based alternatives lack fortification with essential nutrients like calcium, vitamin B12, and iodine, identifying a gap in nutritional standards for these substitutes.

Comrie, Wilson, Nneli, et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Poor health outcomes and dietary patterns in Scotland may worsen if red meat reduction strategies do not account for suitable nutritional replacements.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Establish clear and measurable targets for reducing meat consumption

No official population targets exist for reducing meat consumption (e.g., 20% by 2030), limiting policy integration with sustainability and health goals.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Discussion of future food policy challenges in Scotland, emphasizing that the country still does not have official set targets for reducing red meat consumption. The study suggests that integrating dietary changes into net-zero policies could improve policy coherence and sustainability outcomes.

Lambe, Weitz, Hilgert, et al., (2025).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Absence of government policy: Scottish Government doesn’t currently aim to reduce meat by 20% by 2030. Government has cross-cutting national food policy and food plans, but this goal isn’t embedded within these plans. A big missed opportunity – perhaps because diets are perceived as too personal”.

(Workshop 4).

Integrate methane reduction measures into food and agricultural policy

There are no specific methane reduction targets for livestock, creating gaps in investment and emission mitigation strategies. Policies could balance methane reduction with food security and rural livelihoods.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Setting clear methane reduction targets

Scotland currently lacks a specific methane reduction target for livestock, unlike New Zealand, which aims for a 10% reduction by 2030 and 24-47% by 2050.

A formal methane target could drive investment and farmer participation.

(Jenkins, Herold, de Mendonça et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Develop policies to reduce emissions across the entire food supply chain

Greater attention is needed on emissions from food transportation and storage, with investment in supply chain infrastructure.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Highlights the need for investment in Scotland’s supply chain infrastructure to reduce emissions from food transportation and storage. The study suggests that targeted investments in cold chain logistics and sustainable transport can significantly lower carbon footprints in the Scottish food system.

Pultar & Ferrier, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The industry favours low-volume, high-value, resource-intensive convenience foods, and inefficient transportation, reducing sustainability.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Bridge gaps between diet-related and public health policy frameworks

Policies could better integrate dietary guidance with efforts to reduce health inequalities and poverty.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Poor diet as both a cause and consequence of poverty in Scotland, stressing the need for more proactive policy interventions to integrate nutritional guidance with poverty reduction strategies.

Hunt, Pettinger & Wagstaff, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There remains a disconnect between health inequality and poverty-related dietary issues, highlighting the need for more nuanced and targeted policy interventions.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Update dietary guidance to reflect both health and climate priorities

While CCC carbon budgets support the transition to more sustainable and healthier diets in Scotland, they often lack specific guidance on reducing consumption of high-emission foods such as red and processed meats.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

A scenario-based approach to emissions reduction targets in Scottish agriculture emphasises that dietary changes could significantly contribute to emissions reductions, but Scotland lacks specific food-related emissions policies targeting red and processed meats.

Eory, Topp, Rees et al., 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Diet is about balance (rather than individual products being high/low) Climate impact.”

(Workshop 1).

Embed animal welfare considerations within public health and food policy

Animal welfare could be recognised within a sustainable welfare framework, linking it to zoonotic disease risks and food system sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examines Scotland’s Good Food Nation Act, noting that animal welfare policies remain part of a fragmented approach to food system policy. The study suggests that food policy should explicitly include welfare considerations.

(Brennan, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Animal welfare currently considered an ethical issue but not a priority issue vs public health. Lack of connectedness between One Health / One Welfare approach to food and farming systems and the associated zoonotic risk and prevalent emergence from intensive systems e.g. swine flu, bird flu.”

(Workshop 4).

4. Economic and Political Barriers to Food System Change

Develop targeted policies and interventions for high meat consumers

Current policies do not sufficiently target high meat consumers or sub-groups, limiting effectiveness in driving dietary change. There is no clear government policy to encourage or incentivise reduced red and processed meat consumption, and existing strategies lack structured approaches to ensuring nutrient adequacy in plant-based alternatives.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Study indicates that if high consumers of red and processed meat (>70g/day) reduced their intake to the Scottish Dietary Goal (70g/day), a 16% reduction in total meat consumption would be achieved.

This targeted reduction approach could help lower colorectal cancer risks, BMI, cardiovascular disease, and Type 2 diabetes cases.

Policy Gap: There is no clear government policy specifically encouraging or incentivizing reductions among high meat consumers, such as:

Public health campaigns targeting high meat eaters.

Incentives for shifting to plant-based or lower-meat diets.

Differentiated policies for groups at higher health risk from high meat consumption.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There are tensions surrounding blanket meat reduction policies, with a focus on targeting high consumers of meat to achieve incremental emissions reductions being seen as more effective.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lack of tailored approach targeting red meat over-consumers in Scotland.”

(Workshop 1).

Shape future dietary patterns through integrated policy and public engagement

Without stronger Government intervention, major food manufacturers and retailers may dominate with unhealthy and unsustainable options. Policies do not directly address the reduction of ultra-processed foods linked to poor health and environmental harm.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Climate-focused food-based dietary guidelines in other countries advocate for reduced consumption of UPFs due to their high environmental impact. The Scottish dietary guidelines do not yet emphasise avoiding these foods to the same degree, which could be an area for development

(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Absence of formal leadership and cross-departmental coordination, leading to fragmented efforts.

(Stakeholder Meeting 3).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Bear in mind that diets are changing – the status quo will drive a worsening of diets.

If government are absent, then big food industry players will fill the vacuum with unhealthy / unsustainable food.”

(Workshop 4).

Support the development of the plant-based food sector

Business opportunities for plant-based products could be strengthened by ensuring consistency in agricultural and horticultural policies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

need to review possible solutions that will replace and improve on the Common Agricultural Policy, in terms of environmental goods for both the industry and wider society. They recommend stabilising policy incentives to ensure better support for sustainable food production.

(Lampkin, Shrestha, Sellars et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Support for the market that focuses on plant-based food – to drive business opportunities.

Government consistency on the Agricultural and Horticultural Development board (industry advocacy?) – DEFRA co-ordinated.”

(Workshop 3).

Build the economic case for food system transformation

The financial unsustainability of the current food system remains under-examined as a driver for policy change, with climate and health arguments alone proving insufficient.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Highlights ways Scotland can reform its food economy to become more self-sufficient and resilient. It offers insights into where investments and support may be needed to enhance domestic pro‑ duction and promote a resilient and sustainable food system Their study suggests that policy shifts should prioritize local food production and reduce reliance on imports.

(Rathnayaka, Revoredo-Giha & de Roos, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Health economics view on the cost of our current dysfunction! Can we convince people by showing them that it’s not financially feasible to continue as we are (whether at local authority or national level) where just climate or health outcomes have perhaps not convinced.”

(Workshop 4).

Balance regulation with industry compliance and capacity to adapt

Reliance on voluntary industry commitments rather than enforceable regulations limits the effectiveness of climate and food system policies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Inadequate Governance:

Few policies include clear accountability structures or measurable goals for implementation and evaluation.

Many approaches rely on voluntary industry compliance, reflecting neoliberal frameworks that prioritise individual responsibility over systemic change.

(Lee, Cullerton & Herron, 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Strong lobbying from agricultural and rural stakeholders affects policy decisions on livestock emissions.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Manage post-Brexit trade policy to protect food standards and sustainability

Policy challenges arise from post-Brexit trade disruptions and economic uncertainties, requiring stronger food system resilience.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Discusses how Brexit has disrupted food governance in Scotland, leading to policy uncertainty in sustainable agriculture and food security. They highlight that Scotland needs a more independent policy framework to maintain sustainability goals post-Brexit.

(Attorp & Hubbard, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Balancing trade tensions, concerns as a fallout from e.g., Brexit.”

(Workshop 1).

5. The Role of Technology, Trade, and Environmental Considerations in Food Policy

Strengthen regulation and oversight of intensive agricultural practices

A clearer policy framework is needed to address the environmental and animal welfare impacts of intensive farming.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Argues that Scotland’s reliance on intensive farming practices negatively impacts biodiversity, soil health, and emissions. The report recommends strengthening agricultural policies to incorporate nature-based solutions and reduce chemical dependency in intensive farming.

(Brodie, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Scottish Government policies must be more joined up with a clear goal to reduce the amount of meat and dairy produced in industrial farming systems.”

(Workshop 1).

Reevaluate the role of food miles in sustainability metrics

The contribution of food miles to total emissions is often overstated, highlighting the need for a more holistic sustainability discussion.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Analysis of the impact of food miles and carbon footprint, showing that overemphasizing local production can exaggerate its sustainability benefits while ignoring production efficiency and food system integration.

(Vittersø, Torjusen, Laitala et al., 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Food miles as an unhelpful concept due to its disproportionately small impact (equal to or less than 5% of total emissions).”

(Workshop 1).

Assess the environmental and social sustainability of emerging food technologies

Emerging production methods (e.g., vertical farming) require evaluation of energy use, labour, and environmental impact to ensure long-term sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Analyses energy use, labour demand, and environmental sustainability in Scottish vertical farming. They highlight high energy costs due to artificial lighting and climate control but note potential labour efficiency gains.

(Briggs, Tallontire & Dougill, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Vertical farms/greenhouse tomatoes- what are environmental impacts of production?

Depends on production methods-and extent to which energy and labour is required.”

(Workshop 1).

Leverage product reformulation to support health and sustainability

Reformulating processed food products over time can reduce environmental impacts and improve health.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Analyses the potential of reducing processed meat in Scottish food systems through reformulation strategies. They highlight environmental benefits, including lower greenhouse gas emissions, and health co-benefits.

(Spiro, Hill, & Stanner, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Incremental reformulation of processed food products can contribute to sustainability goals by reducing resource use and environmental impacts over time.

(Stakeholder Meeting 14).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Encourage reformulation of processed foods and move consumers towards wholefoods.”

(Workshop 1).

Fully integrate environmental sustainability into economic frameworks for food policy

Economic and social considerations often take precedence over environmental sustainability in food, agriculture, and public health strategies. Greater policy focus is needed on agroecology to support low-input farming models.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Lack of Integration into Agricultural Policy: Scotland’s agricultural subsidies still favour high-input conventional farming, with no clear financial support for agroecology. No explicit policy targets for agroecology within Scotland’s Land Use Strategy or Climate Action Plan.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

6. Evidence, Modelling, and Policy Implementation Issues

Enhance coherence across food-related policies and strategies

Stronger integration of research evidence and interlinked policy areas is needed to improve decision-making and coordination across food systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Need for coordinated, holistic policy approaches: The report notes that effective policy implementation requires cross-departmental collaboration and a holistic approach, addressing both supply and demand aspects of the food system. Currently, policies in Scotland are fragmented, with limited integration across health, agriculture, and environmental sectors.

(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Limited use of evidence in policymaking

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Bureaucracy-Business/Retail/Economics tape etc causing delays from evidence to policy.”

(Workshop 3).

Improve modelling of food systems and emissions pathways

Existing models do not fully capture the link between livestock production, dietary change, and emissions, leading to flawed policy assumptions. More precise emissions accounting is needed, recognising farming’s role in carbon sequestration.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Argues that current emissions models oversimplify the role of livestock production by not accounting for regional variations, land-use differences, and dietary shifts. They claim policy assumptions based on these models often lead to misleading conclusions about sustainable diets and livestock impact.

(Houzer & Scoones, 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Always use net not gross emissions when modelling the environmental impact of meat. Farming is one of the few industries that sequesters carbon.“

(Workshop 1).

Strengthen the role of evidence in food policy development

Policymakers sometimes prioritise political feasibility over scientific recommendations, limiting evidence-based dietary policy development.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Policymakers sometimes lack awareness of dietary evidence or prioritise political feasibility over scientific recommendations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 10).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Knowledge-evidence-people.”

(Workshop 1).

Identify and address barriers to effective policy implementation

Regulatory and economic constraints slow the translation of research into policy action, affecting food business and retail sector participation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Bureaucracy-Business/Retail/Economics tape etc causing delays from evidence to policy.”

(Workshop 1).

Boost research and innovation support for sustainable food systems

Greater investment in sustainable food technology research and industry collaboration is needed to support emissions reduction, dietary shifts, and agricultural innovation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Scotland must enhance investment in food research and technology to support the shift toward sustainable diets. The study emphasises integrating food technology research with industry-led sustainability initiatives.

Bellamy, Furness, Mills et al., 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There is limited emphasis on emerging technologies such as precision agriculture, alternative proteins, and sustainable farming practices, which could significantly reduce environmental impacts.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Industry Research- small scale workshops and population interventions.”

(Workshop 4).

Shift policy focus from food supply to average consumption patterns

Policies based on average meat consumption may overlook disparities in consumption patterns across different population groups.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examines variations in meat consumption patterns across different socioeconomic groups in Scotland. The study finds that lower-income groups have limited access to plant-based alternatives, which affects dietary shifts. Policies addressing sustainability should consider economic disparities in meat consumption trends.

(McBey, McCormick, & Hussain, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Current policies tend to focus on average consumption metrics, which may not adequately address disparities in meat consumption patterns.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Improve data collection and metrics for agroecological practices

The lack of monitoring on agricultural practices limits the development of evidence-based policies supporting agroecological change.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Highlights gaps in monitoring agroecological practices in Scotland, particularly in assessing improving rural livelihoods through social

and economic outcomes (as well as environmental outcomes). The study calls for better data collection and policy support to enhance agroecological implementation.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lack of data. Need to look at what is the actual impact of farming on climate in Scotland – what are the negatives we currently have and then learning from best practise to bring others on that journey. using real Scottish data to drive change. it should go wider than GHGs. it’s about biodiversity, habitat and plant protection and ecosystem, water use and flood management, soil quality, animal welfare etc.

baselining standards – over 170 farms there are some that are already at net zero, or close.”

(Workshop 3).

Address knowledge gaps in red meat production and consumption

Policy must better account for the diversity in red meat production systems and improve public understanding of meat reduction strategies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Taking a nuanced approach to what has been called “red meat production” here: a farm with 1000 cattle fed on supplements and held indoors is not the same as a croft, a micro diary, or an integrated agroforestry system with 20 cows. Whilst some forms of red meat production will perfectly align with climate and nature restoration targets and score high on all these elements others will not.”

(Workshop 3).

Understand and overcome barriers to reducing meat consumption

Research is needed to identify the challenges consumers face when shifting away from meat consumption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Barriers included food neophobia, identity incongruence, habitual behaviour and practical difficulties. Strategies should focus on meat reduction, not exclusion, as completely removing meat from the diet was unpopular. As barriers and drivers differed with stage, we call for specialized campaigns. Consumers not intending to reduce meat intake could potentially be persuaded by climate awareness campaigns, and by promotion of small adaptations to familiar meals. Consumers intending to reduce meat intake may be prompted to do so by health awareness campaigns, changes to the choice architecture and increased availability of meatless meals.

(Hielkema & Lund, 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Research on why meat consumption changes are so hard for consumers.”

(Workshop 3).

Strengthen understanding of local food yields and market potential

Addressing the lack of data on community food production, informal markets, and small-scale retail contributions is necessary for better policy decisions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“What do we know about yield from community production versus supermarkets?

Western Isles (Eriskay; Berneray) has 3 Co-ops and 5 independents- egg sales likely down because of local informal markets.”

(Workshop 1).

Integrate food culture and heritage into policy design and evaluation

More effective ways to measure and incorporate food culture into policy are needed, as current frameworks lack clear metrics.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Food culture not a “SMART” target.

These concepts aren’t measurable and risk being overlooked by more measurable items.”

(Workshop 1).

Embed climate and sustainability audits into food policy frameworks

A stronger link between climate impact assessments and food taxation policies could improve sustainability outcomes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Climate audit based on production; food tax-importing food from other countries.”

(Workshop 1).

Scale up support for agricultural innovation at farm and system levels

A clearer strategy for financing and scaling precision and regenerative farming would accelerate climate-smart practices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No clear mechanism for scaling up climate-smart technologies. The text highlights the importance of innovation (e.g., precision farming, regenerative agriculture) but lacks detail on:

How new technologies will be funded and adopted at scale. Which technologies will be prioritized for investment. How knowledge transfer will be ensured across different farm sizes and regions. Policy Gap: The government lacks a clear investment and implementation strategy for scaling up climate-smart agriculture technologies. Policy Need: Establish a national climate-smart agriculture fund and technology adoption grants for farmers.

(Scottish Government, n.d.a).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

7. Policy resistance and political sensitivities

Develop strategies to manage resistance to livestock reduction policies

Ministers and industry stakeholders resist policies targeting livestock reduction due to economic concerns and public sensitivities. Addressing political tensions and developing strategies to gain support for dietary shifts remains a challenge.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Ministers and stakeholders resist policies due to economic concerns and public sensitivity.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Red meat industry is one of the most profitable industries in Scotland-tensions, how do we sell this to Government to implement?”

(Workshop 1).

Political reluctance to introduce directive diet policy regulations

Concerns about public acceptability have made policymakers cautious about introducing more directive dietary regulations.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Political reluctance to enforce “Nanny-State” (sic) measures. Concerns over public backlash make policymakers hesitant to impose strict dietary regulations

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen policy framing to improve public and stakeholder acceptance

The way policies are framed affects public and political acceptance, with resistance often tied to perceived losses.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Discusses meat reduction policy framing more generally. Fewer than half this UK-representative sample supported meat reduction policies.

Framing measures as benefitting health vs. the environment did not change support.

Policies targeting meat were less supported than policies targeting unhealthy food.

Many respondents had no decided views about the acceptability of policies on meat.

(Pechey, Reynolds, Cook et al., 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Gains vs. losses framing influences policy acceptance: How policies are framed influences their acceptance, with resistance often linked to perceived losses.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Ensure fairness and equity in dietary policy design

Universal approaches may not account for cultural and socioeconomic diversity. Gradual adjustments to the food environment may ease resistance.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There are tensions surrounding blanket meat reduction policies, with a focus on targeting high consumers of meat to achieve incremental emissions reductions being seen as more effective.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Not a blanket approach-gradually edit the food environment.”

(Workshop 1).

Create integrated policies linking agriculture, public health, and emissions reduction

Farmers may view their primary role as focused on food production, creating resistance to dietary and environmental policies. Stronger integration between agriculture, health, and climate policy is needed.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Farmers often do not consider public health issues within their scope, influencing resistance to health-driven dietary policies.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Linking farmers and public health bodies e.g., local authorities.”

(Workshop 4).

Address ideological resistance to reducing red and processed meat consumption

Deep-rooted cultural norms and traditions contribute to differing perspectives on dietary change, particularly in rural communities.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Cultural reluctance to consume plant-based foods and reduce meat consumption will slow progress and likely negatively feedback to changes in the food environment. There are positive findings as well, the increased declared willingness to change and the recent uptick in media coverage suggest that the transition to sustainable diets could accelerate, but whether it will happen in time will be a matter of enhanced interaction between policymakers, the media, and public.

(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Strong cultural attachments to traditional diets, particularly in rural communities, create barriers to dietary change.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Overcome cultural and historical barriers to agricultural transition

Farming is deeply embedded in Scottish identity, with many farmers viewing themselves as stewards of the land. Historical events such as the Highland Clearances continue to shape land use patterns and influence perceptions of food and farming policy today

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Explores how animal agriculture (salmon farming) is deeply embedded in Scottish cultural identity, emphasising its historical, economic, and symbolic significance.

(Rubio Ramon, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Farming is deeply embedded in cultural identity, often viewed as a birthright.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Resolve conflicts between climate policy and current farming priorities

Farmers primarily focus on food production and traditional practices, often leading to conflicts with environmental policies aimed at sustainability and emissions reduction.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Farmer attitudes towards sustainable farming actions in rural Wales: Key barriers included time and cost to implement sustainable farming actions, availability of long-term financial valuation for ecosystem services, occurrence of extreme weather events, and presence of tenanted land.

(Follett, Davis, Wilson et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There is an ongoing tension between environmental policies focused on sustainability and emissions reduction, and farmers’ primary focus on food production and maintaining traditional agricultural practices.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address the practical and political challenges of fiscal measures (e.g., taxes, payments)

Discussions on taxation policies, such as a red meat tax, remain controversial due to concerns over fairness, public acceptability, and potential economic impacts on vulnerable populations.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Discussions around implementing fiscal measures, such as a red meat tax, have emerged as potential levers for influencing dietary change. While some fiscal levers, such as taxes on red meat, are being debated, their design requires careful attention to fairness, public acceptability, and economic implications.

(Stakeholder Meeting 5).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Unpopularity of taxes on any foods.”

(Workshop 1).

Embrace and integrate diverse stakeholder perspectives in policy development

Scottish Government and policymakers should engage constructively with disagreement and differing evidence bases among stakeholders.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Conveners (e.g. Scottish Government) need to get more comfortable with disagreement, different evidence bases among stakeholders.”

(Workshop 4).

8: Public involvement in sustainable food policy

Strengthen citizen engagement in food policy development

Public consultation mechanisms, including in the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act, provide limited opportunities for meaningful citizen participation beyond advisory input, particularly among younger people. Existing public engagement structures in food and farming policy are weak, reducing community influence in decision-making.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Limited youth inclusion in policy discussions: Limited institutional mechanisms exist to incorporate youth perspectives into food and climate policy discussions, despite high climate awareness among younger populations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance local empowerment and participation in food system governance

Addressing the disconnect between policy and practice by streamlining local empowerment mechanisms, improving access to timely funding, and learning from crofting practices to support sustainable food systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Disconnect between areas and policy – big issue. The mechanism to provide the leavers for local empowerment is tedious and complicated. Must be simplified and shortened in terms of time. Need access to funding straight away when opportunities arise. This would avoid silos and increase connectivity e.g. land reform policy.

Need community to take on land and community need funding to do so. There is something about learning from crofting practices in the context of a sustainable food system. Some challenges are related to the free market and the crofting regulation, the right to buy and the lack of regulation.”

(Workshop 4).

9. Scotland in the global policy landscape

Incorporate global best practices into Scottish food policy

Further examining successful international policies could offer valuable insights for Scotland’s approach to meat reduction and sustainable diets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Analysis of successful policies aimed at reducing meat consumption in Denmark, Sweden, Germany, the Netherlands, and the UK. Key findings: Meat taxes and subsidy removals were effective in reducing meat consumption without major public resistance. Public acceptability increased when revenues from meat taxes were reinvested into sustainable food systems.

Combining fiscal measures with consumer awareness campaigns led to more effective dietary shifts.

(Kmetkova, Zverinova, Scasny et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Appendix H: Extended Economic analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key Theme

Area For Policy Development

1: Financial Incentives and Risk Mitigation for Sustainable Food Production

Strengthen financial incentives for low-carbon food production

Policies lack regulatory and financial mechanisms to support low-carbon food production, scale up innovative technologies, and integrate climate adaptation strategies. Current financial support favours emissions-intensive farming, and financial relief programs for extreme weather risks are absent.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No explicit agroecology support in agricultural payments

The Scottish farm payment system does not prioritise agroecological transitions.

Unlike the EU’s Farm-to-Fork Strategy, Scotland lacks clear pesticide reduction, soil health improvement, or biodiversity restoration targets linked to financial incentives.

(Lozada, & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

 

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Not regenerative food production happening. Take Edinburgh – there is Lauriston community farm – a 100acre site.  It would take 200 of these farms to produce enough food for population of Edinburgh…Identify key sites for more food production and increase awareness of the risks to our food sector.   Increase resources put towards the issue.”

(Workshop 1).

Compensate farmers for delivering ecosystem services

Financial incentives for biodiversity and climate protection remain underdeveloped, limiting green investment and market development.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examines how financial incentives for biodiversity and climate protection in Scotland remain inadequate, limiting farmer participation in sustainability initiatives. Financial incentives under the CAP have been insufficient to encourage widespread adoption of biodiversity-supporting measures.

Farmers prioritize economic viability over environmental incentives, leading to low engagement in voluntary sustainability schemes. Scotland lags behind other EU countries, such as Austria and the Netherlands, in providing effective support and financial rewards for climate-friendly farming.

(Brown, Kovacs, Zinngrebe et al, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Need to pay producers and farmers for the non-food products they produce – no financial incentive to help protect biodiversity and climate.

does seem to be demand for this, biodiversity net gain, or green investment

the financial model doesn’t work yet for

woodland carbon code is not accessible for commercial projects anymore

there was a boom for carbon measure bio net gain, but no longer, markets have not developed yet certainly in Scotland.”

(Workshop 3).

Scale up the use of alternative proteins in animal feed

Microbial proteins, insect- and hemp-based animal feeds lack commercial scaling support, restricting their ability to replace imported soy and improve sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited support for scaling alternative protein animal feeds. Microbial proteins and insect-based feeds remain niche due to insufficient commercial scaling to reduce reliance on imported soy and enhance sustainable feed alternatives.

(Scottish Government, 2023).

Many countries across Europe and Asia have updated their legal frameworks to capitalise on the significant benefits that industrial hemp offers. In contrast, development of the hemp sector in Scotland has been slow, largely due to restrictive regulations. Industrial hemp can sequester more carbon dioxide than many conventional crops, enhance soil biodiversity, remove toxins through phytoremediation, and act as a natural insecticide and pesticide. It is also a valuable source of protein, dietary fibre, essential micronutrients, and bioactive phytochemicals.

(Dogbe, Revoredo-Giha & Russell, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Support farmers in transitioning to agroecological and climate-resilient practices

Farmers face financial and technical challenges in transitioning to sustainable agricultural systems. High upfront costs prevent the adoption of key technologies such as biochar application and precision livestock farming tools.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Slow adoption of low-emission farming practices:

Farmers face high upfront costs for adopting new technologies, such as animal sensors and biochar application. Targeted financial incentives or support could improve uptake.

(Scottish Government, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Promote economic and agricultural equity across the food system

Addressing the regressive nature of food taxes by redirecting financial resources toward more sustainable farming practices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Implementing both tax policies and using the resulting revenue to subsidise consumers—particularly low-income households—can create a more equitable and less regressive public policy approach. By redistributing income through targeted payments or support schemes, this strategy helps mitigate the financial burden on vulnerable groups while still incentivising healthier and more sustainable food choices.

(Nneli, Dogbe & Revoredo-Giha, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Taxes are regressive-redirect subsidies to more sustainable farming.”

(Workshop 1).

Address perceptions surrounding the economic viability of sustainable farming choices

Enduring perception that beef farming is more profitable than vegetable crop production, influencing farmer choices and limiting opportunities for community wealth-building.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“For farmers: cows are more profitable than cabbage, so beef farming might be better for (e.g.) community wealth building.”

(Workshop 4).

Reform agricultural financial support to align with sustainability goals

Current financial support continues to prioritise high-emission livestock farming, without clear incentives for climate-friendly production or crop diversification.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Scotland’s agricultural subsidies continue to favour high-emission livestock farming, with no clear mechanisms in the Good Food Nation Act to incentivise climate-friendly farming, diversify toward low-carbon crops, or enhance carbon footprint labelling for consumers.

(Brennan, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Assess and recognise the economic value of grazing land

Despite Scotland’s extensive grazing land, concerns remain about the economic efficiency of meat production relative to its high cost.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Economic value of grazing land: Despite abundant grazing land in Scotland and the UK, the relatively high cost of meat raises concerns about economic efficiency.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Manage the rural economic impacts of reducing livestock numbers

Reducing livestock farming without strategic policy support could threaten the financial stability of meat producers and contribute to rural depopulation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Impact of livestock reduction on rural communities: Livestock reduction policies may exacerbate rural depopulation due to economic reliance on agriculture.

(Stakeholder Meeting 6).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address price dynamics in meat and dairy markets

Higher red meat prices can sometimes drive increased production, complicating efforts to lower consumption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Price dynamics and production response: Increases in red meat prices can lead to higher production levels, complicating efforts to reduce consumption.

(Stakeholder Meeting 14).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Improve the affordability and accessibility of meat and dairy alternatives

High prices for plant-based alternatives, driven by supermarket pricing and financial support structures, limit consumer accessibility.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Price is a major factor preventing Scottish consumers from switching to plant-based meat.

Subsidising plant-based alternatives or taxing meat products were ranked as potential solutions.

(McBey, Sánchez, McCormick et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Higher markup on plant-based food in retail: Plant-based foods often carry a premium price, limiting affordability for many consumers.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“We assess that there is currently a price-premium on especially convenience alternatives to meat and dairy. This has many reasons, but people are clear that it will need to be addressed.”

(Workshop 3).

2. Trade and Supply Chain Misalignment with Climate Goals

Align trade and supply chains with climate goals

Scotland’s food trade policies do not fully integrate net-zero ambitions, increasing the risk of offshoring environmental impacts. Expanding sustainable supply chains requires investment in skills, infrastructure, and collaborative mechanisms.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Export Dependencies: Highlights risks of offshoring emissions by reducing local production but offers limited strategies for linking domestic production to dietary transitions.

(Thomson, Moxey & Hall, 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Food imports and emissions: Import reliance complicates carbon accounting and weakens domestic economic resilience.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Offsetting/Offshoring of emissions.”

(Workshop 1).

Address procurement barriers for local and small-scale producers

Large multinational suppliers dominate public contracts, limiting opportunities for local and sustainable food producers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Current public procurement policies favour large multinational suppliers, making it difficult for local producers to compete for contracts. This limits market access for regional food systems and reduces opportunities to support sustainable, locally sourced food.

(Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen livestock supply chain infrastructure

Transport, distribution, and processing capacity shortages, including a lack of small abattoirs, create challenges for small-scale farmers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Rural and island regions face transport and distribution challenges, making it less efficient to get food to markets. Processing capacity is limited: Lack of small abattoirs and local processing facilities hinders small farmers from scaling up.

(Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Encourage consumer support for domestic agriculture

Strengthening links between primary producers and public-sector buyers can improve market access and resilience.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Links between primary producers and public sector…Opportunities for local producers to supply public sector.”

(Workshop 1).

Enhance school meals by funding local and sustainable procurement

Initiatives like Food for Life have the potential to improve the quality and sustainability of school food. However, uptake is often limited by financial constraints at the local authority level, where budgets are already stretched and competing priorities make it difficult to invest in more sustainable food procurement.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Using school dinners for quality

Much better now in terms of options.

E.g., food for life in East Ayrshire- but financial pressures has been hammered.

Transferring circa £10 million from agriculture budget to school food budget to support local procurement policies.”

(Workshop 1).

Balance business influence in food policy decisions

Food policy decision-making often prioritises business interests over sustainability and inclusivity. The limited integration of industry sustainability commitments weakens efforts to reduce food system emissions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Decision-making processes privilege the business sector, sidelining civil society concerns and limiting democratic participation in food policy development

(Food Farming & Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Challenges in engaging food retailers: Difficulty in engaging with retailers and industry stakeholders hinders sustainable food practices.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“The role of the food industry: their involvement in research, funding of research… Industrial lobbying is strong.”

(Workshop 4).

Expand market access for agroecological and small-scale producers

Small-scale agroecological producers face challenges accessing mainstream markets dominated by large retailers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited financial incentives:

Most environmental incentive schemes do not explicitly support agroecological transitions.

Many agroecological farmers self-fund their practices, creating financial vulnerability.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Linking producers and consumers: Policies and markets often fail to effectively connect producers with consumers, limiting market efficiency.

(Stakeholder Meeting 3).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Minimise emissions from imported food products

Policies targeting dietary change may drive increased food imports, undermining local sustainability. In general, meat from countries with high deforestation or intensive farming may have a higher footprint than Scottish-produced meat.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

This case study applied a carbon displacement framework to hypothetical carbon policies affecting UK beef production. It found that financial pressure to cut emissions could force some UK producers out of business, potentially leading to increased beef imports from countries with higher emissions, thereby raising global emissions. While modest emission reductions are possible through cost-effective practices, deeper cuts would likely require greater financial and technical support. The findings suggest further analysis of UK beef production is needed.

(Department for Food, Rural and Environmental Affairs (Defra), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Consumption-focused policies risk increasing imports rather than reducing global emissions. Policies targeting consumption may inadvertently increase imports, undermining local sustainability.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Balance demand-side and supply-side strategies in food policy

Over-reliance on demand-side measures without sufficient supply-side interventions limits systemic change in sustainable food systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Overemphasis on demand-side strategies: Insufficient focus on supply-side measures weakens the resilience of sustainable food systems.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Balance domestic food standards with pressures from import competition

High food standards increase production costs, but low-cost imports undermine sustainability efforts. Trade strategy should prevent lower-welfare imports from undercutting UK farmers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Cost of produce will increase with greater standards and requirements, and then we see imports coming in that are favoured for being cheap, not just meat but cereals too. when supply chains get too long, its harder to see where its coming from… e.g. horse meat scandal

need shorter supply chain and more locally produced food.”

(Workshop 3).

Address the impacts of resource-intensive food production

The food industry prioritises high-value convenience foods with inefficient transportation systems, reducing sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Resource-intensive convenience food production: The industry favours low-volume, high-value, resource-intensive convenience foods, and inefficient transportation, reducing sustainability.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance food system resilience to global and domestic shocks

Structural vulnerabilities in food imports, land control, and export distribution impact local food security and community wealth-building.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Chatham House report – Choke points identified in red/amber/green rating. Current barrier is imported food. It seems we have enough land to address our vulnerability, but the control of the land is an issue. This includes food for animals and fertilizers and exported goods not going to local areas which might not contribute to community wealth building.”

(Workshop 4).

Manage carbon leakage risks in livestock trade and production

Carbon taxes on livestock risk increasing imports and causing carbon leakage without complementary trade adjustments.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is a significant risk of carbon leakage resulting from import substitution, where domestic efforts to reduce emissions in meat production may inadvertently lead to increased imports from countries with more carbon-intensive farming practices. Currently, there is no clear mitigation strategy in place to address this issue, which could undermine national climate targets and shift environmental impacts abroad rather than reducing them overall.

(Scottish Parliament, n.d.b).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Promote sustainable practices in supermarket and retail food supply

Since most food decisions are made in supermarkets, responsible retail practices are crucial for shifting consumer demand toward sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Sustainability-oriented retailers can use innovative behavioural tools to promote healthier and climate-friendlier foods (such as vegetables) while meeting the “triple bottom line”. A real-life supermarket trial in Denmark tested if multi-layered nudges can increase the purchase of fruit and vegetables. The intervention led to small increases in sales. These findings showcase the possibility that supermarkets, in principle, have agency and ability to nudge consumers towards more sustainable diets.

(Bauer, Aarestrup, Hansen, et al., 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Supermarkets are where vast majority of decisions are made so we need to get that side of retail right.”

(Workshop 3).

Develop sustainable supply chain partnerships

Strengthening collaborations for key crops and improving processing infrastructure can enhance food system sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Supply chains for human consumption- SAOS-Bere Barley; processing facilities-peas and beans.”

(Workshop 1).

Align market demand with sustainable food choices

Consumer preferences, such as demand for sweeter apples, shape market dynamics and need to be considered in food system planning.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Found that of the three perceptions measured, consumers derive the most utility out of how they perceive a product’s taste, rather than how healthy or safe they believe the product to be.

(Malone & Lusk, 2017).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Demand-market wants sweeter apples.”

(Workshop 1).

3. Funding Gaps for Food Systems

Ensure stable funding for urban agriculture

Urban agriculture development is constrained by unstable, short-term funding, limiting its potential contribution to sustainable diets and climate goals.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Urban agriculture (UA) currently relies heavily on short-term or temporary funding streams, which can limit its capacity to scale and sustain operations. This lack of stable, long-term investment undermines its potential to contribute meaningfully to long-term dietary change, local food security, and climate resilience. A more consistent and strategic funding approach is needed to unlock the full benefits of UA as part of a sustainable food system.

(White & Bunn, 2017).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Secure long-term food budgets in public institutions

Dedicated, ring-fenced funding is needed for food provision in schools and hospitals to support quality and sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Promoting plant-based menus through procurement: Public procurement policies offer significant opportunities to promote plant-based menus in public institutions such as schools, hospitals, and government offices. Effectively leveraging these regulations could support sustainability goals and encourage healthier dietary habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Budget and funding

Food budgets not ring fenced in schools/hospitals”

(Workshop 1).

Strengthen support for community-based food initiatives and the third sector

Long-term funding is needed to sustain community-led food programs, address health inequalities, and support vulnerable groups. Over-reliance on overstretched third-sector organisations risks undermining their role in strengthening local food networks.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lack of long-term funding for community/voluntary organisations.”

(Workshop 1).

Subsidise public dining to promote health and community wellbeing

Affordable, healthy meals outside the home can encourage better eating habits, inspire home cooking, and foster social dining spaces.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Lack of nutritional and environmental standards for out-of-home food: There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Education – aspects of bringing nutritious food into schools as well as teaching children about healthy foods

Public diners – we subsidise everything else! So why do we not subsidise food. Work with culture around eating out of the home to provide healthy and affordable meals for everyone. May support inspiring people re cooking at home, as well as providing a social space.”

(Workshop 4).

4. Consumer-Focused Fiscal Policies and Incentives

Address VAT disparities for plant-based foods

Some plant-based meat alternatives (processed or prepared products such as hot takeaway food) are subject to VAT. Extending VAT exemptions could encourage meat reduction.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Some plant-based meat alternatives are not VAT-exempt. This disparity in fiscal treatment creates a financial barrier to choosing more sustainable and lower-emission protein sources. Extending VAT exemptions or other financial incentives to plant-based meat alternatives could encourage greater consumer uptake, support dietary shifts aligned with climate and health goals, and promote market growth in the plant-based sector.

(Kennedy, Clark, Stewart et al., 2025).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Reduce economic dependence on alcohol and processed food sectors

Scotland’s food system is heavily reliant on the economic contributions of alcoholic beverages and processed foods, raising concerns about long-term sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Food systems are linked to economic opportunities for people in Scotland – but our food industry is heavily tied to alcoholic drinks and processed foods.”

(Workshop 4).

Internalise environmental and health costs within the food system

The current food system externalises costs like healthcare burdens from poor diets and environmental degradation onto society, rather than incorporating them into economic policies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Externalisation of costs: The current food system externalises many economic costs, such as healthcare expenses linked to poor diets and environmental degradation costs, which are not adequately accounted for in economic policies.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Manage dietary shifts resulting from red meat reduction policies

Reducing red meat consumption may lead to increased demand for white meat and dairy, with potentially conflicting environmental and health outcomes. Negative perceptions of plant-based alternatives could also limit dietary shifts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Substitution of red meat and perceptions of plant-based alternatives: Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Prevent over-reliance on ultra-processed foods in sustainable diet transitions

Moving away from fresh meat could increase reliance on ultra-processed alternatives, posing health and sustainability concerns.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“There’s a risk that moving away from fresh meat means to a turn to ultra-processed food.”

(Workshop 4).

Balance growth in the plant-based sector with sustainability objectives

There is a risk that increased plant-based food demand could lead to more industrial production while factory farming persists.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Increasing demand for plant-based diets in the UK, including Scotland, may drive industrialized food production rather than promoting sustainable agriculture.

As plant-based food demand rises, major food corporations may scale up industrial production, leading to more monoculture farming and intensification.

(Rhymes, Stockdale & Napier, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Risk that promoting plant-based food leads to an increase in industrial production of plant-based foods alongside continued factory farming.”

(Workshop 4).

5. Structural and Social Barriers in Agricultural transition

Assess the viability of agroecological farming models

Limited research on the financial and social sustainability of agroecology prevents evidence-based policymaking.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is currently no comprehensive cost-benefit analysis comparing agroecological farming with conventional agricultural systems in the Scottish context. This lack of evidence limits policymakers’ and producers’ ability to make informed decisions about transitioning to more sustainable practices. In particular, there is a need for robust financial models that capture the long-term economic, environmental, and social resilience benefits of agroecology, including reduced input costs, improved soil health, biodiversity gains, and greater climate adaptability. Addressing this evidence gap is essential for supporting policy development and encouraging wider adoption of agroecological approaches.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen support for rural and agricultural workers

Inadequate policies limit rural workers’ access to land, resources, and affordable housing, creating barriers to sustainable food system employment.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Current policies fall short in addressing structural barriers faced by rural agricultural workers, particularly in relation to secure access to land, essential resources, and affordable housing. These challenges limit opportunities for participation in sustainable food production and contribute to rural inequality. To support a just transition in the food system, policies must more effectively promote equitable access and create enabling conditions for rural livelihoods, especially for new entrants and marginalised communities.

(Centre for Climate and Social Transformations (CAST), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Develop economic transition strategies for the livestock sector

A clear economic transition strategy is needed to support industries affected by reduced red meat and dairy consumption. Triple Win economic models could help guide policy by capturing co-benefits across community wellbeing, public health, and cost savings.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Triple win economic models are frameworks or strategies designed to deliver simultaneous benefits (or “wins”) across three key domains—usually economic, environmental, and social outcomes. These models are particularly popular in sustainability, public policy, and development sectors.

(Ellis & Tschakert, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“There is a gap in the development of triple win economic modelling which policy and decision makers can rely on and inform how the money best should be spent. An example is a study made in England on “broken pavements”, the cost claims by people, the cost avoidance of the council not being held accountable against the claims against the total cost implication for NHS i.e. NHS had to pick up the cost because of people hurt by damaged pavement. Community growing and the cost avoidance of seeking health care services is missing.”

(Workshop 1)

Support new entrants to farming and food production

Rising land costs and financial barriers make it difficult for new farmers to secure land and adopt sustainable practices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited financial incentives:

Most environmental incentive schemes do not explicitly support agroecological transitions.

Many agroecological farmers self-fund their practices, creating financial vulnerability.

Access to land tenure and financial support is a major barrier for new entrants, despite them being more likely to adopt agroecology.

Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Land ownership and affordability issues: Competition and rising land costs are pricing out farmers, limiting opportunities for sustainable agricultural transitions.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Build a resilient and skilled workforce across the food sector

To address labour shortages in the food sector, policies should improve migration pathways, expand skills development, and offer incentives to attract and retain workers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Workforce strategies, skills development and incentives to overcome labour shortages and create attractive career opportunities.”

(Workshop 1).

Appendix I: Extended Social analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key Theme

Area For Policy Development

1. Food Access and Affordability Inequalities

Ensure equitable access to sustainable and healthy diets

Lower-income, rural, and marginalised groups face financial and logistical barriers to adopting sustainable diets. Existing policies and financial support do not adequately ensure food affordability, while tax-based approaches like red meat levies lack protections for vulnerable households.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Public awareness of sustainable diets and their environmental impacts has increased over the past decade, but this growth is uneven across socioeconomic groups. Higher-deprivation (HD) groups face greater barriers, including availability and access, cost concerns and scepticism about health and environmental benefits, limiting their willingness to adopt sustainable dietary practices.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021a).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Low-income and rural communities face higher food costs, limited access to affordable healthy food, and reduced resilience to economic shocks.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Food insecurity also discussed – cost of healthy food as a barrier, and food banks often do not allow a healthy diet.”

(Workshop 4, Group 2).

Enhance inclusion and participation in local food systems

Food systems should be designed to accommodate diverse needs, including time constraints, geographic location, and preferred access points.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Suggests attending to a range of consumer-related changes:

Medium-term actions: The nature of consumer demand and its capacity to adjust

to social and cultural expectations in the light of market

realities and policy priorities.

The national, devolved, regional, local dimensions of food

and its role as a determinant of identity.

The desired consumer outcomes including the nature of a

sustainable diet.

The role of regulation, ‘consumer choice editing’ and

marketing in shaping consumer choice

A description of the EU/UK’s ‘sustainable consumer diet’.

The development of communication and education

strategies to engage the public on key food issues.

(Ambler-Edwards, Bailey, Kiff et al., 2009).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Consumers may not feel fully in control of their dietary choices due to economic, social, and cultural constraints.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“How do people want to interact with this system? Time poor, etc. Geography, Creating the spaces that people want to access the food they need at their location.”

(Workshop 1).

Increase the availability of affordable, healthy food options outside the home

Policies insufficiently address affordability and accessibility of healthier out-of-home food choices, disproportionately affecting lower-income consumers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is a persistent gap in policy and practice regarding the affordability and accessibility of healthier food options in out-of-home (OOH) settings, such as restaurants, cafés, takeaways, and workplace canteens. While public health initiatives emphasise the importance of nutritious diets, current policies often fall short in ensuring that healthier choices are both financially viable and widely available across different socioeconomic groups.

Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Improve access to cooking facilities, skills, and food literacy

Households with limited cooking equipment, high energy costs, or inadequate storage face difficulties in preparing sustainable meals.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The study investigates how residents in energy-efficient, affordable housing in Scotland experience their kitchen environments. With a national push toward low-carbon housing, the paper explores whether energy-efficient designs support or constrain occupants in their daily cooking and living practices. Architectural Design, Building Services & Energy Use, fixtures and storage affected diet and had social and psychological impacts.

(Foster & Poston, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Households with limited access to proper cooking equipment, affordable energy, or sufficient food storage options face challenges in preparing healthy, sustainable meals.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Appeal:

Social and cultural barriers/appeal of healthy food

Including skills and knowledge and time poor

Less links with food production and consumption

Place of food in society (value not just cost).”

(Workshop 1).

Address the psychological, cultural, and economic barriers influencing food choices

Financial stress, mental health challenges, and economic insecurity impact the ability to make sustainable food choices, with food often serving as a coping mechanism.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The study identified links between kitchen environments and unintended consequences of their design on occupants. These included architectural issues such as draughts, limited natural light, noisy or ineffective ventilation systems, non-opening kitchen windows, and difficulties in placing appliances. Not all findings were exclusive to low-energy homes, highlighting the need for targeted research to explore these issues further. A deeper understanding is required to assess whether tenants’ adaptive behaviours may influence their diet and affect their respiratory, physical, and mental health.

(Foster & Poston, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Mental health, stress, and economic precarity influence people’s ability to make sustainable food choices, with food often used as a coping mechanism in challenging circumstances.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

2. Availability of Healthier and Sustainable Food Options

Expand access to alternative proteins in mainstream food environments

The availability of meat-free options remains low in common food products, with only 12% of ready-to-eat sandwiches in the UK being meat-free.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The food service sector is leading change by rapidly expanding meat-free sandwich options—34% of its range is now meat-free, with half of those being plant-based. In contrast, major food retailers are falling behind, with some even reducing their meat-free offerings since 2019. Notably, alternative proteins as fillings have risen by 620% since 2019, reflecting increased investment in this area. Among the big supermarkets, Sainsbury’s has improved its plant-based range, while Tesco, Morrisons, and Asda have scaled back. Vegetarian sandwiches have seen a 22% drop across retailer ranges. Overall, meat and cheese still dominate, and most high salt or fat sandwiches contain meat, limiting healthy and sustainable choices. Despite growth, plant-based sandwiches remain the most expensive, making them less accessible—especially during a cost-of-living crisis.

(Eating Better, 2022).

The availability of meat-free alternatives, especially for popular items like sandwiches, remains low, with only 12% of ready-to-eat sandwiches in the UK being meat-free.

(Stewart, Runions, McNeill, et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lead by example: public sector organisations and institutions to move to offering balanced, plant-based diets. this would make it more of a norm.”

(Workshop 4).

Address urban food swamps and improve access to healthy food

Many urban areas suffer from an overconcentration of fast food and ultra-processed options, requiring targeted policy interventions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Geographical and socioeconomic inequalities limit access to healthy and sustainable food, leading to “food deserts.”

(Mitev, Portes, Osman et al., 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Urban areas face “food swamps,” characterised by the prevalence of fast food and ultra-processed foods, which require targeted interventions.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Planning to support healthier environments

Support local food and production initiatives e.g., to support those in urban areas and food deserts

Opportunities- GFN and implementing local plans including procurement.”

(Workshop 1).

Improve consumer information and transparency through food labelling

Consumers lack clear sustainability information on takeaway and restaurant food, limiting informed choices. Honest food labelling should ensure transparency on welfare standards, environmental impact, and product origins.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Consumers often feel uninformed about the sustainability of food choices when dining out or ordering takeaways, limiting their ability to make environmentally conscious decisions.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021a).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Awareness campaigns should address how consumer choices are manipulated by food marketing strategies.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Reduce the consumption of ultra-processed foods

Despite high levels of ultra-processed food consumption in the UK, policies do not promote shifts toward minimally processed, locally sourced foods.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The report highlights that the UK has high levels of ultra-processed food consumption. There is an opportunity for policies that encourage dietary shifts towards minimally processed locally sourced foods through public awareness campaigns and incentives.

Hasnain et al (2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Ultra-processed foods, such as those offered by large fast-food chains (e.g., Domino’s Pizza), are often inconsistent with the principles of a sustainable food culture due to their high environmental footprint.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Overcome negative perceptions of plant-based meat alternatives

Concerns over food standards post-Brexit and perceptions of plant-based meat alternatives (PBMAs) as ultra-processed discourage consumer adoption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Public perception will be challenging, fear of Frankenfood.”

(Workshop 1).

Integrate sustainable food practices into social and public environments

While schools promote healthy meals, there is little policy support for sustainable food options in fast food outlets and other social settings.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Support for social contexts: Encourage sustainable food options in fast food outlets and social settings, addressing the cultural importance of such spaces for young people.

(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

There is a lack of comprehensive regulations governing the nutritional and environmental standards of food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaway services. This regulatory gap limits the effectiveness of policy interventions aimed at fostering healthier and more sustainable dietary habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Local planning systems – don’t currently have levers to determine what food outlets are available in a local area.”

(Workshop 4).

Address sensory and aesthetic barriers to alternative protein adoption

The taste, texture, and unfamiliarity of plant-based foods, along with the “disgust factor” of lab-grown meat and edible insects, limit their acceptance.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The appeal of plant-based diets is often hindered by unfamiliar flavours, textures, and food neophobia, making them less enticing for some consumers. Additionally, perceived sensory drawbacks and the “disgust factor” present major obstacles to the acceptance of novel protein sources such as edible insects and lab-grown meat, limiting their mainstream adoption.

(Food Standards Agency (FSA), 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

3. Cultural, Health, and Equity Considerations

Ensure cultural equity in dietary policy

Policies promoting meat reduction must consider cultural dietary practices, such as Halal diets, to ensure equitable food access.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The intersection of cultural dietary practices (e.g., Halal diets in Glasgow) with meat reduction policies raises equity considerations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Risk of culturally appropriate food.”

(Workshop 1).

Assess health impacts of meat reduction and provide targeted guidance

The Scottish Dietary Goals include a general recommendation to limit red and processed meat intake to 70g per day, but they do not offer specific or targeted guidance for individuals who consume high levels of meat.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Scottish Dietary Goals do not include specific guidelines to support high consumers of red and processed meat in transitioning to healthier, lower-emission diets, limiting the effectiveness of dietary and sustainability interventions. There is a need for guidelines that help high consumers of red and processed meat transition toward healthier, lower-emission diets, which are currently missing from Scottish Dietary Goals.

(Comrie et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Poor health outcomes and dietary patterns in Scotland may worsen if red meat reduction strategies do not account for suitable nutritional replacements.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Price, affordability, and accessibility of food that is recommended in the dietary goals. People rely on ultraprocessed food to plug the gap in their diets due to affordability of healthier or more sustainable items such as locally grown fruit, veg, or meat.

From an education perspective, people know what they should be doing, but it is not possible to do this for many people – need to stop focusing on information, and instead focus on improving provision. We are worsening inequalities by asking people to buy more fruit and vegetables but not making this available equally to them.”

(Workshop 4).

Expand the focus of dietary policy beyond individual health

Policy approaches should move beyond solely focusing on meat reduction messaging and instead integrate messaging that promotes increased consumption of fibre, fruit, and vegetables. Given the limited success of standalone meat reduction campaigns, a more holistic and positive framing may be more effective.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Focus seems to be on meat reduction when it could be on fibre/ F+V increase.”

(Workshop 3).

Overcome misperceptions and structural barriers to healthier eating

Many Scots mistakenly believe they meet dietary guidelines, while strong taste preferences create resistance to reformulated foods. Early education and culturally sensitive messaging are needed.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Many Scottish adults believe their diet meets guidelines, but in reality, most do not.

70% of people consuming high-salt foods (e.g., ready meals, processed meats) believe they are eating within or below the recommended limits.

66% of people consuming confectionery and biscuits frequently think they are within sugar guidelines.

Awareness of unhealthy consumption remains a key issue, suggesting that consumer education and product reformulation could play a crucial role in closing this gap.

(Food and Drink Federation Scotland (FDF), 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Address misconceptions around healthy diets – raise awareness that current dietary patterns (on average, across the country) are unhealthy, and that a meat reduction would in fact be healthy for many people. This should also present plant-based foods as a sustainable option, not just a trend / fad.

This could start with early years and be incorporated into the curriculum. It should take account of varied cultures and traditions, and acknowledge how massively the Scottish population has changed.”

(Workshop 4).

Build public trust in agriculture and dietary recommendations

Greater transparency and engagement are needed to rebuild consumer trust in agricultural institutions. Conflicting media narratives have fuelled public distrust in dietary recommendations.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Significant issue in policies aimed at rebuilding trust in agricultural institutions through transparency and community engagement, particularly in the context of transitioning from meat and dairy to plant-based agriculture. Meat as the Default: Many Scots see meat as an essential part of a meal, making plant-based alternatives feel unnatural.

Scepticism About Health Claims: People distrust health recommendations due to conflicting messages in the media.

Limited Awareness of Environmental Impact: Most consumers do not link meat consumption to climate change.

Price and Convenience: Many participants perceived plant-based options as expensive, inconvenient, or unfamiliar.

(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Media narratives can contribute to the negative depictions of farmers, influencing public perceptions and stakeholder relationships.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Public perception will be challenging, fear of Frankenfood.”

(Workshop 1).

Address the social stigma associated with plant-based diets

The perception of plant-based diets as elitist or judgmental discourages dietary shifts, requiring reframing to improve acceptance.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Found that some participants expressed frustration with what they viewed as urban-centric or moralising narratives around veganism, which they felt overlooked the realities of Scottish rural and farming communities. For example, one participant criticised “vegan warriors” who aggressively promote veganism without understanding rural food systems, labelling such activism as unhelpful and antagonistic​.

(Brett, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Social stigma affects dietary shifts, with plant-based diets sometimes perceived as elitist or judgmental.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“The terms “plant-based” and “vegan” as negative connotations-threats to identity of farmers.”

(Workshop 1).

Shape media narratives around farmers and sustainable diets

Media portrayals can contribute to negative depictions of farmers, influencing public perceptions and policy debates.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Discusses how Scottish farmers are judged by urban-centric standards, where cultural capital is eroded by media-fuelled stereotypes (e.g., greedy landowners, climate change deniers). Explores how these portrayals undermine rural social cohesion and farmer legitimacy.

(Sutherland & Burton, 2011).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Media narratives can contribute to the villainisation of farmers, influencing public perceptions and stakeholder relationships.

(Stakeholder Meeting 6).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Clarify the definition of “plant-based” in policy and markets

The term “plant-based” carries different meanings for different stakeholders, creating confusion in communication and labelling.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Found that meat substitutes were interpreted differently in terms of nutrition, cost, convenience, etc.

(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Plant-based-what does it mean? Something different to everyone.”

(Workshop 1).

Improve knowledge and support for regenerative agricultural practices

Raising awareness and providing policy support for regenerative farming practices can improve adoption and sustainability outcomes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Leadership, coherence and commitment to align policy implementation and delivery with the Scottish Government’s vision, targets, and ambitions for agriculture, nature recovery, net zero vision and a Just Transition, and to avoid a reinvention – or worse, a watering down, of the status quo (i.e., the CAP), and outline 17 steps towards regenerative agriculture

(Brodie, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Insufficient subsidies and grants to support diversification into sustainable agriculture.

(Stakeholder Meeting 6).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Few examples available of successful regenerative practices.”

(Workshop 4).

Strengthen dialogue and cooperation among producers

Improving communication and collaboration among agricultural producers can support coordinated and sustainable food production.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Building trust and engagement with the farming, crofting, and land management sector — including its representative bodies and media — is essential for increasing the uptake of nature-based solutions (NbS).

Recommendations for the Scottish Government:

Clearly communicate what is expected from the sector under the Agricultural Reform Programme (ARP), and by when. Current uncertainty is contributing to inertia and resistance to change.

Frame communications around the business benefits of adopting NbS — such as improving resilience to economic and climate-related shocks, supporting food production, and boosting profitability. Messaging should directly counter sector narratives that portray NbS as peripheral or burdensome. Share compelling, real-world examples of farmers and land managers who have successfully embedded NbS into their core operations, and promote these stories through sector media outlets like The Scottish Farmer and Landward.

Ensure that individuals with direct experience in farming, crofting, and land management are actively involved in the design and testing of ARP policy. Their input is vital to ensure credibility, practicality, and sector buy-in.

(Brodie, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Scotland’s agricultural vision emphasizes sustainable and regenerative farming practices, aiming to improve land management, enhance biodiversity, and promote long-term environmental viability.

(Stakeholder Meeting 14).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Dialogue between producers-agriculture cooperation.”

(Workshop 3).

Restore cultural connections to food and farming traditions

Addressing the legacy of industrial food production by fostering appreciation for food origins, sustainability, and health impacts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Explores the strong consumer attachment to locally produced food in Scotland, highlighting how this loyalty is often associated with perceptions of sustainability, trust, and quality. It notes that local origin is frequently seen as a proxy for environmentally responsible and healthier food choices, even when this may not always reflect the full environmental impact.

Recommends enhancing consumer education to improve understanding of food origin, sustainability credentials, and health claims. This includes raising awareness about how production methods, supply chains, and labelling affect environmental and health outcomes—helping consumers make more informed, evidence-based choices.

(Leat, Revoredo-Giha & Lamprinopoulou, 2011).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Consumers often lack awareness of food provenance, challenging narratives around food sovereignty.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Improve relationship with food. Industrial farming/food production to overcome hunger in late 19th/early 20th centuries has altered how we understand and interact with food. Need to improve relationship with food, bringing back cultural elements and also an appreciation of where food comes from, how it is grown/processed, and how it affects our planet and our health.”

(Workshop 4).

Promote sustainable meat reduction in culturally significant meals

Policies overlook opportunities to encourage lower meat intake in culturally significant meals, while social traditions make plant-based alternatives feel unfamiliar or unnatural.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

This study conducted focus groups across Scotland to assess attitudes toward reducing meat in familiar dishes.

Explored acceptance of plant-based alternatives to staple meat-based meals.

Participants expressed mixed reactions, with older and rural Scots more resistant to replacing meat in “staple” meals.

(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Strong cultural attachments to traditional diets, particularly in rural communities, create barriers to dietary change.

(Stakeholder Meeting 3).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Traditions, habits, and culture: Cultural traditions around ways of living – needing food to fuel a physical working day. A meat industry has grown around that – the fish industry hasn’t grown in the same way / as strong. These traditions, which have started in childhood, when people see food being produced, carry those habits into school and beyond.”

(Workshop 4).

Enhance cultural sensitivity in policy design and public messaging

Campaigns should consider cultural, regional, and social differences to avoid alienating certain groups.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Existing studies on barriers to, and enablers for, reducing meat consumption largely focus on the general population or students. Found that social norms, fear of stigmatisation and availability and price of meat and meat alternatives appear to be key factors. These differ significantly between subgroups within the population, influenced by factors such as age, gender, culture and socio-economic status.

(Spiro, Hill & Stanner, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The intersection of cultural dietary practices (e.g., Halal diets in Glasgow) with meat reduction policies raises equity considerations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Support farmer-to-farmer knowledge exchange and peer learning

Expanding opportunities for sustainability-focused peer learning and knowledge sharing among farmers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Transformation in agricultural land management is critical to achieving Scottish Government’s aims of mitigating climate change, addressing the biodiversity crisis, and achieving a just transition for land and agriculture. Providing advice and collaborative learning opportunities through the Farm Advisory Service (FAS) is the key mechanism to deliver behaviour change in the agricultural sector. The Scottish Government is seeking to better integrate the FAS into an agricultural knowledge and innovation system (AKIS) for Scotland. AKIS is a system of innovation which links organisations, institutions, incentives and funding. This research comprises an evidence review and options appraisal for an agricultural knowledge and innovation system (AKIS) for Scotland.

(Sutherland, Banks, Boyce et al., 2023). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address generational tensions in dietary transitions

In Scotland, younger generations tend to be more climate-conscious in their attitudes toward diet, with greater openness to reducing meat consumption and considering environmental impacts. However, actual behaviour may not always align with these intentions. Resistance from older family and community norms can also create barriers to change.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

A 2024 survey by Consumer Scotland found that 85% of individuals aged 16-24 expressed concern about climate change, compared to 76% of the general population. This heightened awareness among younger Scots is influencing their dietary choices. For instance, a 2023 report by Food Standards Scotland revealed that 45% of 16-24-year-olds reported reducing their meat or fish consumption, a higher proportion than in older age groups. Additionally, the same report noted that 30% of individuals over 65 years would not consider eating less meat or fish, indicating a generational difference in attitudes towards meat consumption.

(Cotton, Gosschalk, Gray et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Younger generations tend to be more environmentally conscious in their dietary choices, often favouring sustainable and plant-based options. However, their efforts to adopt climate-friendly eating habits frequently encounter resistance rooted in longstanding traditions, cultural expectations, and dietary norms upheld by older family members and the broader community. These intergenerational tensions can pose significant barriers to meaningful change.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Carbon labelling on foods – WHO suggests young people more likely to change their diet because of climate concerns than health concerns – I think this links with young people’s climate anxiety etc.”

(Workshop 4).

Improve access to mental health support for farmers

Financial stress, environmental uncertainties, and policy changes contribute to high mental health burdens among farmers, requiring targeted interventions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Poor mental health is an increasing concern within the farming sector. This article examines the adaptability of “landscapes of support” — a term used to describe the range of mental health support available to farmers, including services provided by government bodies, non-profits, and community organisations. Focusing on the UK, the study draws on a literature review, interviews with 22 support providers, surveys of 93 support actors and 207 farmers, and a concluding workshop. The findings reveal that while many organisations adapted during the COVID-19 pandemic by using digital tools and expanding media outreach, they also faced significant barriers, including funding shortfalls, limited training, staff burnout, and poor rural connectivity. The article identifies opportunities to strengthen these support systems to ensure they are more resilient in the face of future crises.

(Shortland, Hall, Hurley et al., 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

4. Digital and Seasonal Food

Address digital inequalities in food access

Rural and lower-income consumers face barriers to accessing food delivery technologies, creating disparities in digital food system participation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Policy interventions must account for unequal access to digital tools and platforms, particularly among rural populations and lower-income households. These groups may face barriers such as limited broadband connectivity, lack of digital literacy, or affordability issues, which restrict their ability to engage with online food systems, including grocery delivery, meal planning apps, or sustainability-focused platforms. Addressing these disparities is essential to ensure equitable participation in emerging food technologies and digital food environments.

(Scottish Government, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Digital tools (e.g., benefit calculators) depend on reliable internet access and digital literacy, potentially excluding vulnerable populations with poor dietary outcomes.

(Stakeholder Meeting 12).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Ensure equity in seasonal diet transitions

A shift toward seasonal diets should not exacerbate existing social and economic disparities in food access.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Local produce often needs long-term storage (e.g. apples, onions, potatoes, cabbage) to remain available year-round.

Storage leads to nutrient degradation, especially for vitamin C and antioxidants.

Frozen local foods preserve better but require energy-intensive processing (e.g., blanching), which can also reduce nutrients like B vitamins.

No studies yet published have considered the overall health benefits of eating a wholly local diet compared to a similar diet produced non-locally.

(Edwards-Jones, 2010).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Shift towards seasonality, but this could amplify existing inequalities.”

(Workshop 1).

5: Consumer Education and Behavioural Change

Enhance consumer education on sustainable diets

Without targeted behavioural support, most people in Scotland struggle to align their diets with the Eatwell Guide, limiting progress toward CCC targets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The research finds that most people in Scotland do not follow the Eatwell Guide, making meat and dairy an important source of nutrients.

This suggests that simply recommending dietary shifts without supporting consumer behavior change will be ineffective.

Policy Gap: Absence of strong public awareness campaigns to help consumers transition to healthier, more sustainable diets, such as:

Educational initiatives on how to replace meat and dairy with nutrient-rich plant-based foods.

Supermarket incentives or labeling schemes to highlight healthier, climate-friendly food choices.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Meat consumption trends in Scotland suggest an increase, highlighting the challenge of shifting dietary habits toward sustainability.

(Stakeholder Meeting 6).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Dietary guidance- Eatwell Plate- if we followed it emissions would be reduced e.g., high volume of red meat eaters

Which metrics are we using e.g., chicken (low carbon?)

People don’t pay attention to dietary guidance.”

(Workshop 1).

Clarify nutritional guidance for dietary transitions

Policies fail to provide comprehensive public education on suitable dietary substitutions and the potential risks of reducing meat and dairy consumption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Micronutrient Risks: The report highlights that reducing meat and dairy consumption can lead to decreased intakes of certain key nutrients (e.g., calcium, iron, vitamin B12), especially without careful substitutions. Groups with existing low nutrient intakes are at heightened risk under scenarios of reduced meat and dairy intake. Policies to enhance public understanding of appropriate dietary substitutions and potential nutrient risks associated with reduced meat and dairy are limited, suggesting an opportunity for educational initiatives.

(Comrie et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The recommended 70g per day of red meat is often seen as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum limit, affecting efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen consumer connections to sustainable and local food systems

A disconnect between modern food habits and local food traditions reduces demand for low-carbon, locally produced foods.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Better and bolder communication is needed to overcome a disconnect between what people buy and how they consume food and the production processes that have negative environmental impacts. Issues around food production and land use, and the links to food consumption need to be addressed.

(Centre for Climate Change and Social Transformations (CAST), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

disconnection between people, nature, and food systems weakens public engagement with sustainable diets.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Local and community action around education and reconnecting to the land. Promoting interconnectedness between producers and consumers.

This will look different depending on the setting – urban and rural environments will look different in the nature available to them and how they connect with nature.

Requires input from local authorities, education institutions, local business/producers/suppliers to work together.”

(Workshop 4).

Define and communicate what constitutes a ‘sustainable diet’

The term “sustainable diet” is interpreted in varying ways, from affordability to environmental impact, complicating policy communication and engagement.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Public understanding of what constitutes a “sustainable diet” is often diverse and inconsistent. For some, the concept is primarily linked to environmental impact, such as reducing carbon emissions or minimizing food waste. For others, it may be more closely associated with affordability, food security, or simply ensuring access to enough food to meet basic nutritional needs. This variation in interpretation highlights the need for clearer public communication and education around the multiple dimensions of sustainable diets—including environmental, economic, cultural, and health-related factors—to build a shared understanding and support informed decision-making.

(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Improve dietary messaging for young people

Adolescents are aware of environmental issues but lack understanding of the impact of meat consumption. Stronger educational initiatives and trusted voices are needed to clarify dietary choices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Adolescents were generally knowledgeable about the basic principles of sustainable diets but lacked familiarity with the term itself.

Environmental impacts of food, such as packaging and transportation (food miles), were more commonly understood than the broader sustainability of diets, such as reducing meat consumption.

Many young people prioritized other environmental actions, such as reducing plastic waste and air travel, over dietary changes.

(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Limited institutional mechanisms exist to incorporate youth perspectives into food and climate policy discussions, despite high climate awareness among younger populations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Messaging – who are the trusted messages? Social media – young people and protein, influencers – do we need to recruit these people?”

(Workshop 3).

Raise public awareness of the links between diet and climate change

Many consumers do not associate meat consumption with climate change, reducing engagement with sustainable dietary changes. Clear communication is needed about the pathway to net zero and the role of diets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Research found that many consumers lack awareness of the connection between meat consumption and climate change. Meat is often viewed primarily through the lens of taste, tradition, or nutrition, with little consideration given to its environmental footprint. As a result, the role of meat production in contributing to greenhouse gas emissions, land use, and biodiversity loss is not widely understood. This highlights the need for targeted public education campaigns to bridge the knowledge gap and promote more climate-conscious dietary choices.

(McBey, Watts & Johnstone, 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“We advocate strongly for the government to be very clear what the most impactful household choices are that people can take to reduce emissions and being clear that an average reduction of meat and dairy consumption is part of it.”

(Workshop 3).

Address misconceptions about alternative proteins

Widespread misconceptions about lab-grown meat and edible insects hinder their public acceptance as sustainable protein options.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Consumer Confidence in Safety and Regulation
A significant number of consumers express hesitation toward novel food products—particularly lab-grown meat and edible insects—due to concerns about their safety and how they are regulated.
Recommended policy response: Strengthen regulatory frameworks, enhance transparency in production processes, and improve public communication to build trust and reassure consumers about the safety of these emerging food technologies.

Cultural Acceptance and Public Perception
Deep-seated cultural attitudes and the “disgust factor” continue to pose major barriers to the acceptance of edible insects and lab-grown meat. Addressing these perceptions through culturally sensitive education and engagement is key to improving public receptivity.

(Food Standards Agency Scotland (FSAS), 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Red meat reduction policies may unintentionally drive demand toward other meat products, such as white meat, due to negative perceptions of the healthiness of plant-based alternatives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Provide practical support for individuals undergoing dietary change

While policies encourage sustainable diets, they do not provide practical tools like meal plans, recipes, or visual guides to aid consumer transitions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Recommends creating accessible tools—such as recipes, meal plans, visual guides, and infographics—to help translate dietary guidelines into practical, everyday actions. These resources can support individuals in making informed, sustainable food choices by demonstrating how to implement the guidelines in realistic and appealing ways.

(Culliford, Bradbury & Medici, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Use health-focused messaging to promote sustainable dietary change

Policies focus on environmental messaging, but emphasising health benefits could be a more effective motivator for dietary shifts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Integrate sustainability into education and school food programmes:

Revise school curricula to incorporate up-to-date evidence on sustainable diets, emphasising the connections between food choices, climate action, and health outcomes. Complement this by implementing sustainable and nutritious school meal programs that model environmentally responsible eating habits, helping to normalize healthy, climate-friendly diets from an early age.

(McBey, Rothenberg, Cleland et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Co-benefits of policy alignment: Opportunities exist to align health and sustainability goals, particularly through meat reduction strategies

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“To ensure that an average reduction in meat and dairy consumption is compatible with healthy diets and ideally ensure positive impacts on health and nutrition.“

(Stakeholder Workshop 4).

Tackle misinformation about diet and climate impacts

Many people doubt that reducing meat consumption is an effective climate action, believing other behaviours (e.g., reducing plastic use) are more impactful. Improved communication and avoiding oversimplification are needed.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Increased awareness: Over the last decade, public awareness of sustainable diets and their environmental impacts has grown. However, this increase is uneven across different socioeconomic groups.

Persistent barriers: Despite increased awareness, barriers to reducing meat consumption—such as cultural norms, cost, and scepticism about meat alternatives—persist.

Dietary change resistance: Many still perceive actions like reducing meat consumption as less impactful compared to other actions (e.g., reducing plastic use).

(Cleland, McBey, Darlene et al., 2025).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Misinformation in terms of the public health impacts of changing diets. Communication needs to be clearer. Nuance around processing being seen as unhealthy and organic as healthy.”

(Workshop 3).

Reframe public understanding of protein needs

Public understanding of protein needs is often skewed, reinforcing resistance to reducing meat consumption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Across all stages of the family lifecycle, continued meat consumption was frequently justified by the belief that individuals require nutrients found in meat, such as iron and protein. These nutritional reflections were typically not grounded in scientific evidence but were instead based on ingrained beliefs shaped by social upbringing, rather than informed by alternative or external sources of information.

(Kemper, 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Overemphasis on protein requirements contributes to resistance against reducing meat consumption.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen consumer awareness of food provenance

Many consumers are unaware of where their food comes from, weakening narratives around food sovereignty and local sourcing.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Consumers often lack awareness of food provenance, challenging narratives around food sovereignty.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Empower consumers to make sustainable food choices

Providing consumers with the right information and tools can support the adoption of more sustainable eating habits.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Encouraging consumers to make informed dietary choices can enhance their ability to adopt sustainable eating habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Strengthen proactive public engagement in dietary change efforts

Providing early, transparent information to shape public discourse and build informed support for food system changes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Reviews research on how providing information about the impact of meat consumption and the benefits of meat substitutes positively affects respondents in China and the US. This information increases their intentions to support meat reduction policies, including more costly measures like a meat tax.

(Bryant, Couture, Ross, et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Inoculation-plant information ahead of public debate.”

(Workshop 1).

Strengthen public health and policy support for sustainable dietary shifts

Public health campaigns and food policies lack coordinated efforts to actively promote widespread transitions to sustainable diets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Policy Coordination:

Highlights regional land use planning but provides limited discussion on integrating dietary policy into broader climate and health strategies.

(Reay, Warnatzsch, Craig, et al., 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Misalignment between climate, health, and food policies. Current policy frameworks lack coherence, creating conflicting objectives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Balance individual responsibility with systemic food system change

Policies often overemphasise personal responsibility for diet change, while systemic food environment shifts are more effective and less stigmatising.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Challenges the overemphasis on individual behaviour change as the primary solution to sustainability and public health issues. Instead, it advocates for a shift toward structural and policy-driven approaches that facilitate collective action and address the root causes embedded in social, economic, and environmental systems. By focusing on systemic transformation, such as changes in food infrastructure, regulation, and institutional practices, this approach underscores the need for environments that enable and sustain more equitable and widespread change beyond individual responsibility.

(Meyerricks & White, 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Policies often overemphasize individual responsibility for dietary choices, while structural food environment changes are more effective and less stigmatizing.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Current resilience strategies rely on individuals to be able to prepare themselves, rather than creating a robust food system within Scotland.”

(Workshop 1).

Encourage social norm-based approaches to dietary change

Policies do not leverage peer influence to normalise reduced meat consumption and encourage widespread dietary shifts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Reviews interventions aimed at reducing meat consumption, categorising them into personal, socio-cultural, and external factors. Personal interventions include educational campaigns, emotionally framed messages, and skill-building (e.g., vegetarian cooking courses). Socio-cultural factors involve changing social norms and addressing cultural resistance to plant-based diets. Opportunities for promoting social norms around sustainable diets through public campaigns and community programmes.

(Kwasny, Dobernig & Riefler, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Gender norms influence dietary choices, with meat consumption often associated with masculinity, creating barriers to plant-based diets.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Need to make climate-friendly diets the norm?

Need long term changes.”

(Workshop 1).

Improve understanding of the long-term impacts of dietary shifts

Most studies focus on short-term dietary changes without exploring the effectiveness of multi-pronged interventions over time.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Explores the nutritional and behavioural implications of substituting plant-based proteins for animal proteins in Scotland, using household purchase data.

Identifies price sensitivity as a driver of dietary change but does not address long-term behavioural adoption or resistance.

(Dogbe, Wang & Revoredo-Giha, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address the prioritisation of cost and convenience over sustainability in food choices

Sustainability concerns are often secondary to cost and convenience when consumers make food choices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examined the effects of decreasing meat and dairy intake on nutrient consumption and disease risk among Scottish adults. Although many individuals express genuine concern for sustainability and environmental impact, these values are often compromised by practical considerations, particularly cost and convenience. In everyday decision-making, affordability and ease of access tend to take precedence, revealing a gap between environmental awareness and actionable behaviour. This highlights the need for policies and systems that make sustainable choices more accessible, affordable, and integrated into daily life.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Inability to pay for things- poverty in working population

Hard to get to nutrition when you have long term challenge

Need for equipment for prep; time-knowledge-cost

No freedom of choice in these circumstances

Good food is very inaccessible to those with nothing (not home and skills).”

(Workshop 1).

Normalise reduced meat consumption in everyday diets

The recommended limit of 70g per day for red and processed meat in Scotland is often misinterpreted as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum, which can undermine efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

It is important to emphasise that the UK recommendation of a maximum of 70g/day on average is a recommendation for individuals, not a population average, and a wide range of intakes for red and processed meat has been reported, for example, a range of 0–208g/day in men aged 19–64 years.

(Spiro, Hill & Stanner, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

The recommended 70g per day of red meat is often seen as a dietary requirement rather than a maximum limit, affecting efforts to normalise lower meat consumption.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“We also find that people are often not very clear about health benefits of a reduction especially in red meat consumption and the role of protein etc…. This is further confused by the NHS recommendation of 70g red meat, which can be misunderstood as a required minimum, rather than a maximum.”

(Workshop 3).

Assess the effectiveness of dietary behaviour change campaigns

Large-scale dietary campaigns often fail to drive change, with community-based, trusted sources being more impactful.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examined how often people seek, trust, and rely on 22 different sources of diet and nutrition information when making dietary changes. While sources like health websites, internet searches, and diet books were most frequently consulted, participants reported the highest trust in nutrition scientists, professionals, and scientific journals. This highlights a disconnect between popularity and trustworthiness. Trust, more than frequency of use, was a stronger predictor of influence on dietary change. Sources deemed less trustworthy were less likely to be relied upon, and seeking information alone didn’t always lead to effective dietary shifts. These patterns varied across sources.

(Ruani, Reiss & Kalea, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Blanket dietary change campaigns are often ineffective and challenging to evaluate. For greater impact, information should come from trusted, community-based sources.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Evaluate the relative impacts of different behavioural interventions on food choices

Strategies like calorie labelling have shown limited effectiveness in driving significant dietary change.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There are currently no plans to introduce a mandatory eco-labelling scheme, nor is the government set to endorse any existing or new framework. This decision reflects the limited evidence to date that eco-labels significantly influence consumer or business behaviour at the point of sale (Defra, 2024). Nonetheless, similar to the role nutrition labelling has played, eco-labelling could potentially encourage some level of product reformulation by manufacturers.

(Spiro, Hill, & Stanner, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Behavioural interventions like calorie labelling have limited impact on dietary habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Shape food environments to promote healthier and more sustainable choices

Addressing the knowledge-action gap through nudging strategies and food system interventions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Behavioural nudges, such as making vegetarian options the default choice on menus, have been shown to significantly reduce meat consumption, with studies reporting reductions ranging from 20% to as high as 85%. These strategies work by subtly reshaping consumer choice environments, making plant-based selections more accessible and socially normative without restricting individual freedom.

(Mitev, Portes, Osman et al., 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Food environments, choice, nudging?…“Knowledge-action gap.”

(Workshop 3).

Promote sustainable everyday eating habits

Promote practical, habitual dietary shifts that are sustainable and health-supportive over the long term.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Encouraging consumers to make informed dietary choices can enhance their ability to adopt sustainable eating habits.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Healthy “enough” (vis-à-vis everyday diets).”

“Habits of eating.”

(Workshop 1).

Rethink policy approaches to dietary change

Shifting from fear-based, top-down behaviour change strategies to more effective and inclusive policy tools.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Examines the comparative evolution of rural development policies and Local Action Groups (LAGs) within a multi-level governance (MLG) framework. It focuses on two UK cases (Argyll and the Islands in Scotland; Coast, Wolds, Wetlands and Waterways in England) and two Italian cases (Delta 2000 in Emilia-Romagna; Capo Santa Maria di Leuca in Puglia).

Findings highlight how LAGs’ mechanisms, outcomes, and partnerships vary, but consistently demonstrate that while EU funding and policy frameworks provide critical support, it is the bottom-up leadership of local actors that most significantly drives success in rural development initiatives.

(Gargano, 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“The tools and language of policy

Behaviour change is top-down using fear”

(Workshop 1).

 

Appendix J: Extended Technological analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key Theme

Area For Policy Development

1: Data Gaps and Infrastructure for Policy Monitoring

Develop a comprehensive monitoring framework for sustainable diets

There is no structured system to track the effects of dietary shifts on emissions, health, food security, biodiversity, and sustainability, limiting policy effectiveness.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Lack of Clear Enforcement Mechanisms for Emission Reductions

The 30% agricultural emissions reduction target (by 2032) is ambitious, but the text does not specify:

How reductions will be enforced (e.g., penalties for non-compliance vs. voluntary incentives).

Sector-specific targets for beef, sheep, dairy, and arable farming.

How progress will be measured and verified beyond voluntary reporting.

Policy Gap: Scotland lacks a detailed, binding framework for ensuring compliance with emission reductions in agriculture.

Policy Need: Develop a carbon budgeting system for farms with clear compliance measures, incentives, and accountability mechanisms.

Scottish Government, n.d.).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lack of data. Need to look at what is the actual impact of farming on climate in Scotland – what are the negatives we currently have and then learning from best practise to bring others on that journey. using real Scottish data to drive change. it should go wider than GHGs. its about biodiversity, habitat and plant protection and ecosystem, water use and flood management, soil quality, animal welfare etc.

baselining standards – over 170 farms there are some that are already at net zero, or close.”

(Workshop 3).

Establish a standardised data infrastructure to support policy integration

The lack of a unified system to collect, share, and analyse food system data hinders the integration of climate, health, and sustainability goals into policy decisions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Emissions Estimation Uncertainty: The report notes significant variability in greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions estimates for food consumed in Scotland, partly due to differences in accounting for land use change and specific food consumption patterns. Improved data accuracy, especially for children and region-specific consumption, could strengthen policy targeting emissions from specific food groups.

Data Gaps in Food Production Origins: The report identifies a need for detailed information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland. This information is essential for accurately attributing emissions, particularly as some Scottish produce is processed outside Scotland before being reimported for local consumption. Policy could address this by improving traceability in food supply chains

Integration of Post-Retail Emissions: Only some models account for emissions from consumer actions, such as energy used in cooking or food waste. Policy could incentivize behaviours that reduce these post-retail emissions, such as promoting energy-efficient cooking practices and reducing food waste at home.

(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Data for policy tracking: Robust data systems are needed to inform policy decisions and track their effectiveness over time.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Within Scottish Government:

Make climate & diet part of a Good Food Nation objective.

Include dietary change as one of Scotland’s climate goals.

Work for better join up across policy areas, work against narrowness. Make this a priority for multiple departments.”

(Workshop 4).

Set clear targets and indicators for sustainable diet policies

The absence of effective metrics makes it difficult to evaluate the impact of policies on health, emissions reduction, and food system sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No Specific Emissions Targets for Dairy Farming

Scotland has national climate targets but lacks dairy-specific GHG reduction goals.

Policy intervention: Develop dairy sector-specific emissions reduction targets tied to efficiency improvements.

Infrastructure and Data Challenges

Limited data collection on methane emissions at the farm level makes tracking improvements difficult.

Policy intervention: Expand research funding and create national livestock emissions databases.

(Ferguson, Bowen, McNicol et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Measuring dietary change: Identifying effective metrics to measure progress in dietary change is a key challenge.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance monitoring and metrics for agroecological practices

The absence of clear indicators for assessing agroecology’s environmental, economic, and social performance limits its policy integration, while the lack of systematic data collection prevents evidence-based policymaking for sustainable farming transitions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited Research on the Economic Viability of Agroecology

No comprehensive cost-benefit analysis of agroecological farming vs. conventional farming in Scotland.

Need for financial models that demonstrate the long-term resilience benefits of agroecology.

Set Clear Targets for Sustainable Diets and Agriculture

Introduce climate-aligned dietary guidelines, including reduced red meat and dairy consumption.

Support horticulture expansion to increase domestic fruit, vegetable, and pulse production.

Align agroecology with Scotland’s Circular Economy and Net-Zero strategies

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Lots of local producers-just not captured in the figures.

Recognising the informal sectors e.g., farm shops, allotments.”

(Workshop 1).

Improve industry accountability through transparent data reporting

The absence of clear industry accountability frameworks hinders progress toward aligning food production and retail practices with dietary and sustainability targets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Data and Accountability:

The need for robust, accessible data and transparent mechanisms to hold stakeholders accountable is underdeveloped in policy.

(Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Data for policy tracking: Robust data systems are needed to inform policy decisions and track their effectiveness over time.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Develop robust metrics for tracking dietary change and emissions reduction

The absence of standardised indicators makes it difficult to assess the climate impact of dietary shifts and monitor progress toward emissions reduction goals.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Variability in Emissions Estimates Across food based dietary guidelines (FBDGs):

Highlights the wide range of emissions reductions attributed to different dietary guidelines, which vary due to methodological differences across models. This variability can make it challenging to establish standardized or widely accepted climate benchmarks within FBDGs, which may complicate Scotland’s efforts to adopt clear, evidence-based climate targets.

(Tregear, Morgan, Spence et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Measuring dietary change: Identifying effective metrics to measure progress in dietary change is a key challenge.

(Stakeholder Meeting 2).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Expand broadband access to enable precision agriculture

Poor broadband connectivity in rural areas restricts the adoption of connected animal sensors and precision farming technologies, reducing agricultural efficiency.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Connectivity and Infrastructure Barriers to Digital Agriculture:

Many rural areas lack broadband access, preventing the adoption of connected animal sensors and precision agriculture.

Investment in rural digital infrastructure is essential.

(Scottish Government, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

2: Agricultural Emissions and Climate Reporting

Improve agricultural emissions reporting and accountability

Existing reporting mechanisms do not adequately integrate climate-smart farming technologies, reducing accountability and hindering emissions tracking.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Monitoring and Accountability:

Annual progress reporting on agricultural emissions reductions must be strengthened.

Policies should integrate climate-smart farming technology adoption into monitoring frameworks.

(Scottish Government, n.d.)

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Establish a standardised carbon footprinting and emissions tracking system

The inconsistent use of carbon calculators and the absence of methane emissions data at the farm level, combined with inconsistent GHG emissions calculation methods, make it difficult to assess and mitigate agricultural emissions effectively.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Developing a standardised carbon footprinting tool

Farmers currently use multiple, inconsistent carbon calculators.

Recommendation: Create a universal farm carbon calculator, integrated with existing farm software and databases.

Nourish Scotland (2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

 

Reassess methane accounting methods and livestock emissions data

Methane calculations should be reviewed due to methane’s short atmospheric half-life. There is also a need to ensure fair assessments of emissions from lamb and beef production, particularly in extensive grazing systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Need to review data that exists e.g. lamb emission data – lamb is just below beef in terms of emissions, which is unusual as they are the most extensively reared. Environmental impact takes into account amount of land you are using and in NZ where herd size is bigger but they are confined to smaller areas and use hard feed, and somehow they are more emission friendly? it seems Scotland is penalised for highland roaming. i think we need to get a new calculation for this.”

(Workshop 3).

Define specific emissions reduction goals for beef production

While Scotland has national emissions targets, it lacks sector-specific goals for beef production, a major contributor to agricultural emissions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

No Sector-Specific GHG Reduction Targets for Beef Farming

While Scotland has national emissions targets, no specific reduction goals exist for beef production.

Policy intervention: Develop beef-sector-specific climate goals, aligning with methane reduction strategies.

(McNicol, Bowen, Ferguson et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Develop a centralised database for methane efficiency traits in livestock

Unlike Ireland’s cattle breeding data system, Scotland lacks an integrated tool to track genetic progress in methane reduction, limiting breeding efficiency. [13]

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Scotland lacks a centralised database for methane traits in livestock, like the Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF). Integration with existing breeding tools like ScotEID and EGENES is needed to track genetic progress, alongside cross-country collaboration to enhance data sharing and breeding efficiency

(Jenkins, Herold, de Mendonça et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Increase farmer awareness and uptake of precision livestock farming (PLF) technologies

Many farmers do not view PLF tools as effective for reducing greenhouse gas emissions, limiting their adoption despite proven environmental benefits.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Many farmers do not perceive PLF tools as effective greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction strategies, despite their proven benefits, limiting adoption. Policy intervention: Increase extension services, training programs, and peer-to-peer learning initiatives.

(Ferguson, Bowen, McNicol et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance technological capacity for supply chain resilience against climate disruptions

The potential of technology to improve the resilience of food supply chains against climate-related disruptions remains underutilised.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Technology for Supply Chain Resilience: The potential of emerging and existing technologies to strengthen the resilience of food supply chains in the face of climate-related disruptions remains significantly underexplored and underutilised. Digital tools, data analytics, automation, and innovations offer opportunities to improve monitoring, forecasting, and responsiveness across the supply chain. However, their application in building climate resilience is still limited, and greater attention is needed to scale up these solutions and integrate them into policy and practice.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

3. Food Consumption and Emissions Attribution Issues

Improve food consumption data accuracy for policy evaluation

High-emission foods like meat and dairy are often underreported in dietary assessments, limiting the accuracy of policy evaluations.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Recognising underreporting issues, especially for high-emission foods like meat and dairy, could guide improvements in dietary assessment methods Underreporting in Food Consumption Data: Recognizing underreporting issues, especially for high-emission foods like meat and dairy, could guide improvements in dietary assessment methods. Policies might encourage better data collection and reporting to ensure more accurate emissions assessments and tailored dietary interventions.

(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance food origin tracking for accurate emissions attribution

The absence of comprehensive tracking for imported and processed Scottish foods makes it difficult to develop precise climate policies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Need for comprehensive information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland to improve emissions accounting. The absence of detailed data, particularly for Scottish produce that is processed abroad and reimported, hinders accurate emissions attribution and the development of effective climate policies.

(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Scottish solutions and data are needed to tackle climate change in Scotland. We need national data and should stop using international data for GHGE and water use for our modelling.”

(Workshop 1).

Increase the granularity of Scotland’s net-zero emissions data

Scotland’s emissions tracking system focuses on high-level data without accounting for regional variations, reducing policy precision.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Need for comprehensive information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland to improve emissions accounting. The absence of detailed data, particularly for Scottish produce that is processed abroad and reimported, hinders accurate emissions attribution and the development of effective climate policies Data Gaps in Food Production Origins: The report identifies a need for detailed information on the origins of foods consumed in Scotland. This information is essential for accurately attributing emissions, particularly as some Scottish produce is processed outside Scotland before being reimported for local consumption. Policy could address this by improving traceability in food supply chains.

(Jaacks, Frank, Vonderschmidt et al., 2024). 

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Assess the sustainability impacts of plant-based alternatives

Clear methodologies are required to compare the sustainability of plant-based meat alternatives with traditional meat products.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Assessing Sustainability of Plant-Based Alternatives: Robust and transparent methodologies are urgently needed to assess the sustainability of plant-based meat alternatives in comparison to conventional meat products. Current assessment approaches often vary widely in scope and metrics, making it difficult to draw consistent conclusions about environmental, nutritional, and socio-economic impacts. Developing standardised frameworks would enable clearer comparisons, guide consumers and policymakers, and support innovation in the alternative protein sector.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Use digital tools to promote local, ethical, and sustainable food choices

Encourage consumers to connect with local suppliers and assess animal welfare and product quality through observable online rating systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Use digital shopping to encourage people to find and use local suppliers of animal produce and check welfare/quality – like a Tripadvisor score.”

(Workshop 1).

Expand infrastructure and technical support for local food systems

There is inadequate policy support for expanding infrastructure and providing technical assistance to scale up local and regional food production.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is currently a lack of dedicated funding mechanisms or targeted incentives to support the scaling up of low-carbon technologies within food production and processing. This gap limits the widespread adoption of innovations that could significantly reduce greenhouse gas emissions across the sector. Without strategic investment and policy support, many promising technologies remain at the pilot or early adoption stage, limiting their potential to contribute to national climate goals and a more sustainable food system.

(Sovacool, Bazilian, Griffiths et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Appendix K: Extended Legal analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key Theme

Area For Policy Development

1. Regulatory Gaps in Sustainable Food Systems and Supply Chains

Strengthen regulation and incentives for low-carbon food production

There are no targeted resources, tax benefits, or regulatory measures to encourage low-carbon food production, limiting sustainability efforts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Lack of specific policies to incentivise low-carbon food production or regulate high-emission food products. The absence of targeted subsidies, tax benefits, or regulatory measures limits the transition to more sustainable food systems and weakens efforts to reduce the environmental impact of food production and consumption.

 

(Milner, Green, Dangour et al. (2015).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance the polluter-pays principle and support for sustainable farming

Inadequate enforcement of environmental accountability and limited financial support for farmers transitioning to sustainable practices slow climate-resilient food system reforms.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Enforcement of the polluter-pays principle[14] remains inadequate, with limited financial incentives and regulatory measures to ensure industry accountability. Additionally, there is insufficient support for farmers transitioning to environmentally sustainable practices, limiting progress toward a more climate-resilient food system.

(Food Farming & Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Ensure fair and transparent supply chains

Weak regulations allow power imbalances between large corporations and small producers to persist, reinforcing supply chain inequalities and environmental harm. Regulating supply chains avoids the barrier of relying on voluntary behaviour change.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Regulatory gaps constrain efforts to ensure fairness and transparency in supply chains, particularly in addressing power imbalances between large corporations and small producers. Weak enforcement of fair practices within the food supply chain sustains inequalities and contributes to environmental harm.

(Food, Farming and Countryside Commission (FFCC), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Expand the reach of the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act

The GFN Act primarily governs public sector food policies but lacks mechanisms to regulate supermarkets, food manufacturers, and large-scale agricultural producers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited Leverage Over the Private Sector:

The GFN Act focuses primarily on public sector food policy but does not impose obligations on supermarkets, food manufacturers, or large-scale agricultural producers.

Without mandatory private sector participation, major food system emissions and supply chain issues may remain unaddressed.

(Brennan, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Clarify the role of carbon markets in agriculture

Farmers struggle to engage in carbon markets due to unclear regulations, unstable pricing, and a lack of standardised methodologies.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Scottish farmers have limited engagement with carbon markets due to a lack of standardised methodologies, clear regulations, and stable pricing mechanisms. This uncertainty prevents broader participation, reducing opportunities for farmers to benefit financially from carbon sequestration efforts and limiting the agricultural sector’s contribution to climate mitigation.

(Baker, Conquest & Moxey, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Enhance retailer accountability in a sustainable food system

Retailers are not required to report Scope 3 emissions from the products they buy and sell, limiting accountability for sustainability impacts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Regulatory Influence and Future Expectations:
i. Some firms voluntarily disclose their emissions through the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi).
ii. While there is currently no legal requirement to reduce Scope 3 emissions, emerging policy signals indicate that more stringent regulations are likely in the future.

(Baker, Conquest & Moxey, 2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Support local and regenerative food production

Local food systems face barriers such as limited land and sea access and complex licensing requirements that disadvantage smaller producers.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

“Access to land, access to seas, complex licensing systems that play into the hands of multinational corporations who have the means and expertise to complete these.”

(Workshop 1).

2: Regulation of Food Marketing, Composition, and Consumer Information

Strengthen regulation of unhealthy food promotions

Weak marketing rules allow unhealthy food advertising that worsens health inequalities. Stronger regulation and fiscal measures are needed to shift sales toward healthier, sustainable options.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Impact of food promotions on diet:

Unhealthy foods are heavily promoted, influencing consumer choices and increasing the purchase of unhealthy items.

Children in lower-income areas are more exposed to unhealthy food marketing and have higher childhood obesity rates.

Cost-of-living pressures have made nutritious food less affordable, worsening dietary inequalities. Weak oversight of marketing and promotional strategies for less healthy food options allows widespread exposure, particularly in vulnerable communities. This lack of regulation risks exacerbating health inequalities by reinforcing dietary patterns linked to poor health outcomes.

(Public Health Scotland (PHS), 2024).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Establish nutritional and environmental standards for out-of-home food

The absence of comprehensive regulations for food sold in restaurants, cafes, and takeaways weakens policy efforts to promote healthier and more sustainable dietary habits. There is also a lack of sufficient planning levers to regulate food outlets.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Sustainability Measures:

There is a lack of policies addressing the environmental impacts of takeaway packaging and food delivery systems.

Nutritional Standards for Out-of-Home (OOH) Foods

Regulation of high-calorie, high-salt, and high-sugar foods sold out-of-home remains limited.

Promotion Regulation

Oversight of promotions for less healthy food options—particularly in quick service restaurants (QSRs)—is weak.

Equity in Access

Current policies do not adequately ensure that healthier OOH food options are affordable and accessible for lower-income communities.

(Food Standards Scotland (FSS), 2021b).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Mandate reformulation requirements for unhealthy foods

The reliance on voluntary industry commitments for food reformulation weakens public health efforts, as there are no legal obligations for reducing unhealthy ingredients.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The UK and Scottish Governments rely on voluntary industry measures for food reformulation, with no legal obligation for companies to reduce unhealthy ingredients. This weakens efforts to improve public health and reduce diet-related diseases, leaving progress dependent on inconsistent voluntary compliance. Lack of mandatory reformulation:

The UK and Scottish Governments support mandatory reformulation only if voluntary efforts fail.

Currently, there is no legal requirement for companies to reformulate unhealthy foods.

(Obesity Action Scotland (OAS), 2019).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Implement carbon footprint labelling for food

There are currently no mandatory requirements for carbon footprint labelling on food products, which limits consumers’ ability to make informed, low-emission dietary choices.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Regulation and Accountability
a. Despite growing emphasis on emissions reduction, there are no mandatory requirements for carbon footprint labelling on food products, limiting consumers’ ability to make informed low-emission choices.
b. Regulatory mechanisms to ensure business compliance with carbon labelling, food waste reduction, and sustainable practices remain weak.

(Climate Change Committee, 2020).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Ensure the right to adequate nutrition

Dietary policies must uphold human rights by ensuring all populations, particularly marginalised communities, have equitable access to nutritious food.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Ensuring the right to adequate nutrition: Issues surrounding the right to adequate nutrition, particularly for marginalized communities, have been highlighted. Dietary policies must align with human rights obligations to ensure equitable access to nutritious food for all populations.

(Stakeholder Meeting 4).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Address gaps in food standards, including non-dairy milk fortification

The absence of mandatory fortification for non-dairy milk alternatives raises concerns about potential nutritional inadequacies for populations relying on these products as dairy substitutes.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Gaps in food standards, including non-dairy milk fortification: There are gaps in regulatory frameworks related to food standards, including the lack of mandatory fortification for non-dairy milk alternatives. This may contribute to nutritional inadequacies among populations that rely on these products as dairy substitutes.

(Stakeholder Meeting 13).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

3: Legal and Governance Barriers to Policy Implementation

Align devolved and UK dietary policies

Legal complexities in the division of powers create difficulties in developing cohesive dietary and climate policies across the UK, leading to inconsistencies between devolved administrations and the UK Government.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Challenges in aligning devolved and UK dietary policies: Aligning diet and climate policies between devolved administrations (e.g., Scotland) and the UK Government presents legal challenges. The division of powers complicates the development of cohesive dietary policies, resulting in inconsistent approaches across the UK.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Manage legal risks from dietary shifts

There are concerns that dietary guidelines encouraging reduced meat and dairy consumption could lead to nutrient deficiencies, creating potential legal risks if public health is adversely affected.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Legal risks from unintended nutritional deficiencies: Stakeholders have raised concerns about potential legal risks if dietary guidelines inadvertently lead to health issues, such as nutrient deficiencies. This is particularly relevant with blanket recommendations to reduce meat and dairy consumption without considering adequate nutritional alternatives.

(Stakeholder Meeting 9).

Supporting evidence: Workshops

4: Administrative and Market Challenges in Sustainable Agriculture

Evaluate the effectiveness of carbon audits in agriculture

While carbon audits for farmers are encouraged, they lack enforceable targets or evidence of significant emissions reductions, making them more bureaucratic than effective.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited Impact of Carbon Audits:

There is no clear evidence that carbon audits have led to significant emission reductions in Scottish agriculture.

Administrative Burden and Costs:

Farmers must provide carbon data to multiple buyers, leading to high reporting demands.

Uncertainty About Market-Based Carbon Incentives:

Voluntary carbon credit markets are underdeveloped, leading to hesitation from farmers.

(Baker, Conquest & Moxey (2023).

Supporting evidence:

Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Workshops

Appendix L: Extended Environmental analysis: Areas for further policy development and supporting evidence 

Key Theme

Area For Policy Development

1. Land Use, Tenure, and Access for Sustainable Agriculture

Improve land tenure security for community food systems

Temporary land use agreements create instability for community gardens, while bureaucratic hurdles, insecure tenure, and limited land availability continue to restrict community food-growing efforts, despite the Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015.[15]

Supporting evidence: Literature review

While the importance of secure land access for community gardens is acknowledged, the prevalence of temporary land use arrangements creates instability, limiting long-term planning and the sustainability of community-based food initiatives.

(Meyerricks, & White, 2021).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Need community to take on land and community need funding to do so. There is something about learning from crofting practices in the context of a sustainable food system. Some challenges are related to the free market and the crofting regulation, the right to buy and the lack of regulation.”

(Workshop 4).

Support new agroecological farmers with land and financial access

New farmers struggle to secure land and financial resources, limiting the transition to sustainable farming systems.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Limited access to secure land tenure and financial support remains a significant barrier for new entrants into farming, even though this group is often more open to adopting agroecological and sustainable practices. Addressing these access issues is essential to enable a new generation of climate-conscious farmers.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Land ownership and affordability issues: Competition and rising land costs are pricing out farmers, limiting opportunities for sustainable agricultural transitions.

(Stakeholder Meeting 1).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Strengthen strategic oversight for land use change

Unregulated forestry expansion risks displacing agricultural land without a public interest test or requirements for net carbon sequestration assessment.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Market-driven forestry expansion poses a risk of displacing agricultural land without adequate strategic oversight. There is currently no requirement for a “public interest test” to assess the impact of afforestation on farming, nor a mandate for large forestry projects to demonstrate long-term net carbon sequestration, limiting sustainable land use planning and balance between agriculture and forestry.

(Scottish Government, 2024).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“The ARCZero[16] pilot in Northern Ireland showed that well managed grazing land stores more carbon in the soil and promotes more biodiversity than forestry. SG should account for this when planning future goals for land use.”

(Workshop 3).

Develop alternative land use strategies for rough grazing areas

There is no clear plan for repurposing Scotland’s vast rough grazing areas, limiting sustainable land management and biodiversity conservation. Livestock farming remains the only viable option for some land.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is no clear plan for repurposing the 60% of Scotland’s rough grazing land that may not be suitable for crop production. The absence of strategic land use policies limits opportunities for sustainable land management, climate mitigation, and biodiversity conservation.

(Kennedy, Clark, Stewart et al., 2025).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Reducing livestock farming=farming concerns and biodiversity concerns-livestock farming only viable thing for certain land.”

(Workshop 1).

Recognise the role of grazing land in carbon sequestration and biodiversity

Well-managed grazing land can sequester more carbon and support greater biodiversity than forestry, which should be considered in Scotland’s land-use planning.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Afforestation projects are viewed as potentially effective measures for carbon sequestration and therefore climate change mitigation. Much of the land in temperate regions suitable for afforestation is used for agriculture and consequently afforestation of farmland is frequently proposed. Landowners are commonly reluctant to sacrifice fertile land for purposes other than food and feed production. In Scotland’s uplands, grazed pastures are a common land use that could be put under pressure by demands for woodland planting. This chapter explores how farm woodland planting for carbon sequestration and biofuel production affects livestock output. The concepts presented show that there is great potential for integrating agriculture and forestry to achieve environmental benefits without compromising productivity.

(Beckert, Smith & Chapman, 2016).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“The ARCZero pilot in Northern Ireland showed that well managed grazing land stores more carbon in the soil and promotes more biodiversity than forestry. SG should account for this when planning future goals for land use.”

(Workshop 3).

Balance livestock reduction with land use trade-offs

With more than 85% of Scottish farmland classified as ‘Less Favoured Area’ (LFA) and often unsuitable for plant protein cultivation, reducing livestock could disrupt feed crop markets and impact farm incomes. Addressing mixed messages on CO₂ impacts of extensively grazed grasslands versus forestry is needed while ensuring food production resilience in a changing climate.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Afforestation is widely regarded as a promising strategy for carbon sequestration and climate change mitigation. However, much of the land suitable for afforestation in temperate regions is already used for agriculture, leading to frequent proposals for planting trees on farmland. Landowners are often hesitant to give up productive land traditionally used for food and feed. In Scotland’s uplands, where grazed pasture is common, there is particular concern about the impact of woodland expansion on livestock farming. This article examines how woodland planting for carbon sequestration and biofuel production can influence livestock output. It highlights the significant potential for integrating forestry and agriculture in ways that deliver environmental benefits without reducing overall productivity.

(Beckert, Smith & Chapman, 2016).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Don’t forget >85% of Scottish farmland is ‘less favoured’ so mostly cannot be used to grow plant proteins. Also poor quality crops are sold for animal feed. A reduction in livestock will impact this market and reduce farm incomes.”

(Workshop 3).

Acknowledge biophysical limitations on agriculture

Natural constraints determine what crops can be grown in different regions, influencing food production and sustainability.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

In Scotland, natural constraints such as climate, soil quality, altitude, and water availability significantly shape agricultural decisions—especially regarding what crops can be grown and where. These physical limitations, in combination with socio-economic and policy considerations, influence both food production capacity and agricultural sustainability. This article reviews how regional climate and infrastructure influence where legumes can be grown, considering their role in sustainable agriculture.

(Wiltshire, Freeman, Willcocks et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Biophysical constraints on what can be grown. Lobby groups preserving industries. Reputation of Scottish food producers.”

(Workshop 1).

2. Areas for Policy Development in Agricultural Climate Mitigation and Adaptation

Expand agricultural climate policies beyond food emissions

Current policies measure emissions from specific foods but fail to consider how broader agricultural and food system changes could drive more effective climate mitigation.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Current assessments highlight emissions from specific foods but fail to consider the broader impact of systemic shifts in agricultural practices and food system transformations, limiting opportunities for comprehensive climate mitigation strategies.

(Nneli, Revoredo-Giha & Dogbe, 2023).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Avoid rebound effects in precision livestock farming (PLF) efficiency gains

Productivity improvements from PLF could inadvertently lead to higher total emissions if herd expansion offsets efficiency gains.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

There is a risk that productivity gains from Precision Livestock Farming (PLF) could lead to an overall increase in total emissions, as improved efficiency per unit could be offset by herd expansion. 

(McNicol, Bowen, Ferguson et al., 2024).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Strengthen policy responses to climate risks in agriculture

Policies fail to address the financial impact of extreme weather on farming, lack strategies for water conservation, and fail to enforce improved soil management.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Current policies fail to sufficiently address the financial impacts of extreme weather on agriculture, particularly within the beef sector. Water scarcity risks remain unmanaged due to the lack of strategies for rainwater capture and groundwater conservation. Furthermore, despite increasing concerns about soil degradation, there are no clear policy requirements for improved soil management.

SAC Consulting, n.d.).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Fragmented governance across Government divisions, leading to disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies: Disjointed approaches to diet, climate, and health policies due to lack of coordinated structures.

(Stakeholder Meeting 3).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Integrate grazing land’s role in biodiversity and carbon capture

Policies fail to recognise the role of sustainable grazing systems in enhancing biodiversity and carbon sequestration.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Current policies do not fully acknowledge or integrate the potential role of grazing systems in supporting biodiversity and carbon sequestration. The absence of clear guidelines or incentives limits opportunities to enhance sustainable grazing practices that contribute to environmental and climate goals

National Farmers Union Scotland (NFUS , n.d.).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Address localised environmental impacts of intensive farming

While overall farming emissions may appear low across systems, specific regions with intensive agricultural activities experience significant localized environmental impacts.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

The use of nitrogen fertilisers in agriculture is a major contributor to nitrous oxide (N₂O) emissions — a potent greenhouse gas. Reducing these emissions poses a significant global challenge, and doing so requires reliable methods for estimating N₂O output across different farming systems. Scientists commonly rely on biogeochemistry (BGC) models to estimate soil-based emissions, but these models can present difficulties: large-scale studies often lack local detail, while small-scale studies may not be widely applicable. In addition, many studies provide limited information on the reliability of their results. This study took a novel approach by focusing on eastern Scotland, a region with well-documented farming practices. Researchers applied a robust BGC model to assess N₂O emissions, nitrate (NO₃) leaching, and nitrogen uptake in crops such as barley, wheat, and oilseed rape. The high-resolution modelling revealed that although eastern Scotland’s intensive cropping systems are efficient, they exhibit elevated N₂O emission intensities per hectare, largely due to the use of synthetic fertilisers.

(Myrgiotis, Williams, Rees et al., 2019).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Localised environmental impacts of emissions-intensive farming: While the overall environmental impact of farming may be low when averaged across systems, localized environmental impacts can be significant, particularly in areas with emissions-intensive agricultural activities.

(Stakeholder Meeting 8).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Balance environmental goals with socioeconomic sustainability

Environmental goals can coexist with job security and the sustainability of fragile communities, but current policy does not always reflect this balance.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

This study explores what it means to be a responsible farm business in today’s world, especially after COVID-19 and Brexit. Being a responsible business involves tackling poverty, inequality, and environmental harm, but different groups—like customers, the media, and global organisations—have different views on what that means.

Farms are part of a complex rural system filled with tensions and contradictions. This research focuses on how farmers can understand and manage these tensions to run more responsible and sustainable businesses.

Using data from one farm and interviews with five others in the same community, the study develops a framework to show how farmers balance competing demands. It looks at how farmers’ entrepreneurial mindset (or Entrepreneurial Orientation, EO) is shaped by experience and changing times.

The study argues that good policies, informed by real-world farming experiences, can support responsible decision-making.

(Smith, Duncan, Edward et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“An acknowledgement that supporting our environment does not need to come at the expense of jobs or supporting fragile communities.”

(Workshop 1).

Understand the complexities of meat production and consumption

Variations in where meat is produced and consumed across the UK and internationally influence territorial emissions differently, shaping the regional impacts of dietary change.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Highlights how territorial specialization in meat production and consumption across Europe creates uneven nitrogen and GHG burdens. Countries like the UK import much of their animal feed and meat, meaning dietary change impacts vary regionally based on local vs outsourced emissions.

(Billen, Aguilera, Einarsson et al., 2021).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Complexities around where especially meat is produced and where it is consumed across the UK and internationally. Changes in diet in different regions will affect territorial emissions differently.”

(Stakeholder Workshop 3).

Rethink agri-tech and livestock systems for sustainability

Climate and environmental protection should focus on transforming food systems and reducing reliance on livestock feed crops like soy, rather than shifting all animals indoors.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

UK livestock systems rely heavily on imported soy. Holmes proposes a shift to legume-supported agroecology, noting this is better for soil, climate, and economic sovereignty.

(Holmes, 2018).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Issues around agri tech and comms being that to protect climate and the environment, we do not need to put all animals indoors, rather than addressing the food systems themselves and the dependence we have on livestock production and the impact of feeding livestock e.g. deforestation to produce soy that only goes to feed livestock.”

(Workshop 3).

Ensure net zero goals align with animal welfare standards

Efforts to intensify food production for climate targets must not compromise animal welfare standards.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Climate change affects agriculture in many different ways. The CCC advises that adaptation efforts should address risks such as flooding, heavier rainfall, and rising temperatures. It also recommends improving the sector’s ability to handle new challenges like shifting pest and disease patterns.

These climate impacts will affect multiple areas of farming. For instance, both crops and livestock will face heat stress and a rise in pests and diseases due to warmer, wetter conditions. Waterlogged soils can reduce crop yields, while livestock may suffer from lower welfare, affecting fertility and production, such as milk yields.

(Jenkins, Avis, Willcocks et al., (2023).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“Animal welfare: Intensifying food production to meet net zero goals could come at the expense of animal welfare.”

(Workshop 4).

3: Environmental Impacts and Food Systems

Address the environmental impact of ultra-processed foods

Ultra-processed foods, including those from large fast-food chains, often have a high environmental footprint and run counter to principles of sustainable food culture.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Global food systems are increasingly unsustainable for human health, the environment, animal welfare, biodiversity, food culture, social equity, and small-scale farmers. While the high consumption of animal-based foods has long been seen as a key contributor to this problem, growing attention is now being paid to the role of ultra-processed foods (UPFs).

This review examines whether concerns about UPFs are valid. It looks at the typical ingredients and additives in UPFs and the farming practices used to produce them. The findings show that UPFs are closely linked to emissions-intensive farming and livestock systems, and they negatively impact nearly every aspect of food system sustainability. This is largely due to the global spread of cheap, highly processed products made from low-cost ingredients.

Although UPFs generally have lower greenhouse gas emissions than conventional meat and dairy, especially those low in animal-based calories, reducing UPF consumption—without replacing it with other energy-dense foods—can still lead to significant environmental benefits.

To improve sustainability, the review recommends cutting back on UPFs and shifting toward minimally processed, seasonal, organic, and locally produced foods.

(Fardet & Rock, 2020).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Environmental impact of ultra-processed foods: Ultra-processed foods, such as those offered by large fast-food chains (e.g., Domino’s Pizza), are often inconsistent with the principles of a sustainable food culture due to their high environmental footprint.

(Stakeholder Meeting 11).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

Strengthen food system resilience against climate and supply risks

Enhancing farm resilience to weather extremes, power disruptions, and crop variability by reconsidering older, more resilient crop varieties, reducing dependence on a limited range of crops, and growing local varieties better suited to conditions. Greater policy focus is needed on planning and adaptation strategies to support farmers facing climate-related disruptions.

Supporting evidence: Literature review

Report on analysis highlighting how much of Scotland’s traditional food culture connected to native plants has been lost, with significant implications for climate resilience. This loss is rooted in historical events such as land enclosure, the Highland Clearances, the dissolution of monasteries, and strict regulation of industries like whisky production, which excluded traditional local ingredients. These processes contributed to the erasure of knowledge and practices around native plants—plants that could play a vital role in adapting to climate change through low-input, locally adapted food systems.

(Lozada & Karley, 2022).

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder meetings

Supporting evidence: Stakeholder workshops

“We need to be more resilient. Even weather concerns > power cuts etc. can have a huge impact on the resilience of a farm. A bad year of weather patterns can completely skew a crop trial, and previous variants that we maybe do not use/grow as much now, could potentially be more resilient. Poultry especially is much more sensitive to zoonotic/disease strains around years ago.”

(Workshop 3).

How to cite this publication:

Nash, N. (2025) Analysing a Complex Policy Landscape: Diet and Climate in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. DOI

© The University of Edinburgh, 252025
Prepared by University of Bath on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.


  1. A second in-person workshop (Workshop 2) was planned in Edinburgh on Friday 24th January but had to be cancelled at the last minute due to disruption from Storm Eowyn.



  2. The ‘Less Favoured Area’ classification refers to areas where farming is naturally more difficult due to factors like poor soil, steep slopes, or challenging climates. See: Less Favoured Area Support Scheme (Scotland) Regulations 2001 (S.S.I. No. 50 of 2001). | FAOLEX



  3. Initial steps that can be taken using existing structures or resources. Includes scoping, piloting, stakeholder engagement, and coordination-building activities.



  4. Actions that require broader collaboration, policy alignment across sectors, or formal programme development. Often builds on earlier pilots or evidence.



  5. Longer-term actions requiring legislative change, significant investment, or systemic redesign. These aim to embed lasting transformation.



  6. Scotland’s Agricultural Reform Programme, particularly through greening payments and conditional support mechanisms (e.g., environmental conditionality), does include some financial incentives intended to encourage more sustainable production.



  7. Food Data Transparency Partnership – GOV.UK



  8. Food labelling is largely governed by UK-wide legislation.



  9. About the Scottish Government’s National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3) – Adaptation Scotland



  10. Meeting 14 involved a group meeting rather than a one-to-one meeting, in which multiple participants contributed to the conversation.



  11. Note: The online workshops omitted the future scenarios activity due to time constraints but retained the same core activities and objectives.



  12. NB: Workshop 2 was cancelled the day before it was due to take place because of Storm Eowyn.



  13. Integrated cattle breeding data systems allow the tracking of genetic traits of livestock over time. This can include feed efficiency and methane emissions. By linking performance data to genetic profiles, these systems support selective breeding for lower-emission animals. Without such a tool, it is more difficult to monitor and accelerate genetic progress toward reducing methane emissions from cattle in a coordinated and efficient way.



  14. An environmental policy principle stating that those who produce pollution should bear the costs of managing it to prevent damage to human health or the environment.



  15. The Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015 is legislation that aims to strengthen the voices of communities in decisions that affect them. It gives communities additional rights and opportunities to influence public service provision, ownership of land and buildings, and participation in local planning and decision-making to improve outcomes. See Community Empowerment (Scotland) Act 2015



  16. The ARCZero project is a farmer-led initiative in Northern Ireland aimed at measuring and managing carbon flows within agricultural systems to achieve net-zero carbon emissions. Comprising seven diverse farms, the project employs advanced techniques such as detailed soil sampling and LiDAR scanning to assess both greenhouse gas emissions and carbon sequestration capacities. By establishing comprehensive carbon balance sheets, ARCZero empowers farmers to implement informed strategies that reduce emissions and enhance carbon storage, contributing to more sustainable and climate-resilient farming practices.


Research completed: March 2025

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6006

Executive summary

Our soils underpin all nature-based systems and are therefore vital for Scotland’s communities and economy. From food security to transport disruption through events such as landslides, the climate resilience value of investing in healthy soils is recognised by the Climate Change Committee as a priority adaptation area for Scotland.

There are many risks threatening Scottish soils across different soil types and land covers. However, unlike air and water, there is no single overarching soil policy providing security and governance for Scottish soils. Soils are spread across multiple policy divisions, which results in a lack of cohesive leadership in tackling threats to soils.

The aim of this route map is to consolidate the challenges of managing soil systems to develop an overarching strategy for delivering improved soil security across Scottish landscapes.

Key points

There is increasing awareness of the important role soils play for our communities, economy and environment in terms of their ability to contribute to climate regulation, flood resilience, food security, support forestry and assist biodiversity. This is reflected in recent policy updates which have outlined objectives that directly relate to improvements in soil health and/or security, such as:

This route map acknowledges the challenges of addressing soil security in a policy context due to the absence of an overarching soil-specific policy. Currently actions to support soils sit across different policies, which focus on different environmental challenges at different scales. Nevertheless, this route map outlines opportunities to gain value and effectiveness through better coordination of existing activities and policy delivery.

Next steps

Objectives

This route map recommends six objectives for Scotland to achieve our vision of ‘thriving soils for Scotland’s communities, economy and environment’:

  1. Lead – Inspire and collaborate to deliver the vision for Scottish soils
  2. Protect – Prevent further damage to soils
  3. Restore – Repair damaged soils
  4. Enhance – Strengthen soils for the future
  5. Evidence – Data, knowledge and wisdom relating to Scottish soils
  6. Mobilise – Communicate, engage and participate towards thriving soils in Scotland

Next steps

We recommend that the delivery of the route map is supported by ensuring the following:

  1. Scottish Government support the vision and common goals through the allocation of a soil policy group to lead and coordinate the delivery of this route map
  2. Baseline Scottish soil status to ascertain a starting point towards ‘thriving’ soils
  3. Collaboratively identify specific cross-sectoral actions to protect, restore and enhance Scottish soils
  4. Mobilise actions into practice through bespoke implementation plans
  5. Monitor progress and review future developments

Glossary

Brownfield

Refers to land that was previously urban/used for industry

Ecosystem services

Ecosystem Services are the direct and indirect contributions ecosystems (known as natural capital) provide for human wellbeing and quality of life. This can be in a practical sense, providing food and water and regulating the climate, as well as cultural aspects such as reducing stress and anxiety. In fact, the vast number of services provided by ecosystems can be categorised into more manageable groups of: provisional; regulating; cultural; and the slightly more ambiguous, supporting services

Eutrophication

The gradual increase in the concentration of nutrients (e.g. nitrogen and phosphorus) in aquatic ecosystem

Flood resilience

Reduce the intensity and/or frequency of flood events and severity

Food security

To have reliable access to a sufficient quantity of affordable and nutritious food

Greenfield

Land that was previously undeveloped

Net zero

A target of completely negating the amount of greenhouse gases produced by human activity, to be achieved by reducing emissions and implementing methods of absorbing carbon dioxide from the atmosphere

Peatlands

Peat is a defined soil type that has at least 50 cm organic horizon. NatureScot use Ramsar Convention’s definition of peatland: “Peatlands are ecosystems with a peat deposit that may currently support vegetation that is peat-forming, may not, or may lack vegetation entirely”. The Soil Survey for Scotland states that peat should have an organic layer or layers that exceed 50 cm deep from the soil surface and an organic matter content of more than 60%

Peaty soils

Also known as organo-mineral soil. Mineral soils with a peaty topsoil which is less that 50cm thick

Soil acidification

Soil acidification is the lowering of soil pH due to an accumulation of hydrogen ions. Soils with a pH of less than 5.5 is considered ‘acidic’

Soil carbon sequestration

Soils are in constant exchange with the atmosphere, they take in carbon (via photosynthesis, root exudates and the addition of organic material) and release carbon (through gas emissions associated with respiration or indirectly via leaching). Where a net gain in carbon exists the soils are considered to be ‘sequestering’ carbon

Soil carbon stock

The mass of carbon stored in the soil organic matter per area

Soil compaction

Soil compaction is a form of physical degradation in which soil biological activity and soil productivity for agricultural and forest cropping are reduced, resulting in environmental consequences away from the immediate area directly affected

Soil contamination

Soil contamination is when soil is polluted, implying the presence of chemicals and materials in soil that have a significant adverse effect on any organisms or soil functions. Soil pollutants include inorganic and organic compounds, some organic wastes and the so-called “chemicals of emerging concern”

Soil degradation

Soil degradation is defined as a change in the soil health status resulting in a diminished capacity of the ecosystem to provide goods and services for its beneficiaries

Soil enhancement

To improve soil health and resilience beyond its current state and the status quo

Soil erosion

The process of soil being gradually damaged and removed by the waves, rain, or wind, or the result of this process

Soil function / functionality

Soil Functions refers to the six key roles that soil plays in an ecosystem, including providing a medium for plant growth, supplying and purifying water, recycling nutrients and organic wastes, serving as a habitat for soil organisms, modifying the atmosphere, and acting as an engineering medium

Soil health

Physical, biological and chemical status of a soil which provide a range of soil functions (e.g. see AHDB Soil health card for Scotland)

Soil management

A collective term describing a range of practices and applications imposed on soils for a range of purposes (e.g. food production, ground preparation, urban developments, conservation etc)

Soil organic matter

Soil organic matter means all living, or once-living, materials within, or added to, the soil. This includes roots developing during the growing season, incorporated crop stubble or added manures and slurries

Soil protection

Refers to activities which contribute to the prevention of degradation of soils

Soil resilience

Soil’s ability to buffer or ‘cope’ with stresses such as extreme weather events and disturbance

Soil restoration

To ‘repair’ soils which have been degraded in some way (e.g. physical, chemical or biological degradation)

Soil risks/risks to soil

Refers to the threats and pressures on soils which may negatively impact on soil health and/or soil function

Soil salinisation

Soil salinization is a term that indicates the phenomenon or process of accumulation of water-soluble salt in the soil

Soil sealing

The covering of soil (generally with an impermeable material) for the purpose of urban development

Soil security

To defend soils from risks, dangers and threat that jeopardise its existence, health and function

Soil structure

The spatial arrangement of soil particles (called aggregates, crumbs, blocks or peds). Soil structure influences soil functions, for example how water moves through it and susceptibility to degradation such as erosion and compaction.

Water storage capacity / water retention

The ability for soils to hold or maintain water

Why we need a “Soil Route Map for Scotland”

We rely on soils for a wide range of primary functions (outlined on Scotland’s Soil Website) as soils underpin all nature-based systems and are therefore core to Scotland’s communities, environment and economy (Figure 1). However, evidence shows that there are several risks associated with poor soil management which threatens the future security of Scottish soils.

The costs associated with inaction are not only related to environmental impacts as these risks cascade to include socio-economic repercussions. Baggaley et al (2024) estimated that compacted soils in Scotland costs land managers up to £49 million annually in yield losses, up to £26 million per year in additional fertiliser use required to operate with compacted soils and up to £76,000 per household from increased flood risk and insurance claims attributed to soil compaction and soil sealing (Appendix A). From food security to transport disruption (e.g. through landslides) the climate resilience value of investing in healthy soils is recognised by the Climate Change Committee as a priority adaptation area for Scotland.

A cartoon of a town

AI-generated content may be incorrect.
Figure 1. The role of soils in our environment (Figure adapted from the 3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan and Adaptation Scotland’s Climate-Ready Places)

Risks to soil health

There are many risks to the health and security of our soil systems. Table 1 shows risks outlined in the Scottish Soil Framework (2009) and more recently in the Environmental Standards Scotland (ESS) report (2024). This highlights that many of the risks identified in the Scottish Soil Framework (2009) are still prevalent and jeopardising the future security of Scotland’s soils and the many functions they provide (Figure 1).

Table 1. Risks to Scottish soils outlined in the Scottish Soil Framework (2009)

Threats to soils ranked across all soil functions at the national scale (1 being the highest risk) and the Environmental Standards Scotland Report (2024), ranking threats as high, medium or low based on a set of criteria.

 

Scottish Soil Framework (2009)

Environmental Standards Scotland Report (2024)

Climate change impacts on soil

1

Loss of organic matter and carbon

2

Medium

Soil sealing

3

Low

Acidification and eutrophication

4

Loss of soil biodiversity

5

High

Soil contamination

6

Medium

Soil erosion and landslide

7

High

Pesticide application

8

Soil compaction

9

High

Salinisation

10

Risks from the inconsistent approaches to data collection and monitoring

High

Risks from carbon sequestration schemes

Medium

Water retention/capacity of soils

Medium

Application of waste to land

Medium

Landfilling of waste soil

Medium

Soilborne diseases and pests

Low

In terms of prioritising these risks, the two publications suggest different rankings, with the Scottish Soil Framework (2009) listing the impacts of climate change, the loss of organic matter (and carbon), soil sealing and soil degradation from acidification and eutrophication as the top four threats to Scottish soils. The ESS report (2024) ranked soil erosion and landslides, soil compaction, the loss of biodiversity and risks associated with inconsistent approaches to data collection and monitoring as being of highest priority. Opinions from a recent stakeholder workshop (Appendix B) identified soil disturbance, erosion and organic matter loss to be the highest priorities within agricultural and forestry sectors, with soil sealing ranking highest in the urban/built environment sector. At the landscape scale, the lack of a soil-specific policy was noted as the highest risk to soils in Scotland.

Soil degradation

Soil degradation (i.e. soils with diminished functionality) has wide reaching impacts, not just on soil properties, but also in terms of soil functionality and the broad ecological services which soils provide, which can also result in wider economic impacts. For example, impacts of soil degradation can include loss of yields, greater fuel use, loss of land, increased greenhouse gas emissions, increased diffuse pollution and degraded water quality, increased flooding events and flooding intensity and loss or damage to cultural and archaeological sites.

Soil degradation is not limited to one soil or land use type; it cuts across landscapes making the protection of soils challenging as there is no single solution. Therefore, due to the broad range of soil and land use types across Scotland (Appendix B), addressing the risks to soils will require a multi-layered, cross-sectoral approach. Despite this, unlike air and water, there is no single overarching soils policy focus with governance of soils being spread across multiple policy divisions This has resulted in a fragmented approach to tackling the threats to soil resources.

In addition to the wide range of policy objectives which impact on soils, the Scottish Government has a long history of investing in research for future policy development and delivery through the Environment, Natural Resources and Agriculture Strategic Research Programme (SRP) and Centres for Expertise (ClimateXChange, CREW and SEFARI). Through the current SRP (2022-2027), approximately £50 million a year is invested to ensure that ‘Scotland maintains its position at the very cutting edge of advances in agriculture, natural resources and the environment’, with the research of soils being vital across SRP themes (see Appendix D). The protection and enhancement of soils is essential for achieving many of Scottish Government’s policy objectives (e.g. net zero, food security, flood resilience, biodiversity and climate adaptation). However, without an overarching vision for Scottish soils and soil-specific policy, it can be challenging to harness such evidence into impactful implementation to better protect Scottish soils.

The Route Map

The aim of the route map is to consolidate the challenges of managing soil systems (see Appendix E) across multiple land uses and policy themes and to develop an overarching strategy for delivering improved soil security across Scottish landscapes. The route map is also intended to indicate – and drive forward – positive actions towards the protection, restoration and enhancement of Scottish soils while delivering objectives across the nature-based policies highlighted. Specific aims of the route map for Scotland include:

  • Review existing soil protection within Scottish policy – to support the development of a route map, current knowledge and public policy-related research is reviewed to ascertain how Scotland’s policy objectives are underpinned by healthy soils and how available knowledge is used in decision making and policy development.
  • Develop a framework for the ‘Soil route map for Scotland’ – set a vision to act as a common goal across policy themes and identify objectives which offer an effective pathway for improving soil security in the future.
  • Implementation considerations of the ‘Soil route map for Scotland’ – explore potential actions that offer opportunities for delivering the route map objectives across existing policy deliverables.

Soil protection in existing Scottish policy and legislation

Currently, in Scotland the legislative landscape for soils is fragmented across multiple policy divisions within Scottish Government and largely aims to protect other environmental areas (such as water and biodiversity) from poor management of soils, rather than soil itself. However, soil security and soils are referenced across environmental acts, policies and strategies, as outlined below.

The Scottish Soil Framework (2009)

The Scottish Soil Framework (2009) is the most comprehensive, soil-specific document, to date, bringing together the wide range of risks to soils as well as activities that contribute to overcoming these risks through 13 positive soil outcomes, which are;

  • Soil organic matter stocks protected and enhanced where appropriate.
  • Soil erosion reduced and where possible remediated.
  • Soil structure maintained.
  • Greenhouse gas emission from soils reduced to optimum balance.
  • Soil biodiversity, as well as above ground biodiversity, protected.
  • Soils making a positive contribution to sustainable flood management.
  • Water quality enhanced through improved soil management.
  • Soil’s productive capacity to produce food, timber and other biomass maintained and enhanced.
  • Soil contamination reduced.
  • Reduced pressure on soils by using brownfield sites in preference to greenfield.
  • Soils with significant historical and cultural features protected.
  • Knowledge and understanding of soils enhanced, evidence base for policy review and development strengthened.
  • Effective coordination of all stakeholders’ roles, responsibilities and actions

A Scottish Soil Framework Progress Report (2013) highlighted developments since the framework’s publication, which highlights a range of activities such as the launch of the Centres of Expertise (2011), the publication of The State of Scotland’s Soil report (2011) and the development of the ‘Scotland’s Soil Website’.

Other key policy documents

A review of where soils are included in a Scottish policy context is outlined in Appendix F. Recent developments in Scottish policies include some focused consideration of soils, such as:

 

  • Scotland’s National Peatland Plan and Peatland ACTION has the vision to see peatlands in a healthy state and widely regarded as resilient by 2030 and the rewards of restoration effort undertaken in previous decades should be evident by 2050 and beyond.
  • The National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4) – the policy intent of NPF4-Policy 5 is “to protect carbon-rich soils, restore peatlands and minimise disturbance to soils from development with policy outcomes of a) valued soils are protected and restored, b) soils, including carbon-rich soils, are sequestering and storing carbon, c) soils are healthy and provide essential ecosystem services for nature, people and our economy.”
  • Scottish Forestry and UK Forestry Standard (UKFS) 5th edition – chapter 8 provides the ‘UKFS Requirements for Forests and Soil’ and ‘UKFS Guidelines on Forests and Soil’ for soil protection, acidification, contamination, compaction, disturbance, erosion fertility and organic matter (carbon) loss.
  • The Vision for Agriculture and Agricultural Reform Programme (Agriculture and Rural Communities Act) – this includes compliance via Good Agricultural and Environmental Conditions (GAECS) in terms of maintaining a minimum soil cover (GAEC 4) to protect soil against erosion after harvest, to protect soil against erosion in certain situations (GAEC 5) and maintaining soil organic matter levels (GAEC 6). In addition to compliance, support has been available since 2022 for soil testing and nutrient management (The National Test Programme, Preparing for Sustainable Farming), which will become a requirement under the Whole Farm Plan introduced to Tier 1 payment requirements, with additional support associated with the introduction of measures contributing to regenerative agricultural practices (including continuous soil cover as outlined in the Agricultural Reform list of measures).
  • The 3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029 – Outlines the importance of soils and the need for further protection as outlined in ‘Nature Connects objective’ for landscape scale approaches “Landscape scale solutions are implemented for sustainable and collaborative land use, including protecting and enhancing Scotland’s soils.”
  • The Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045 provides a range soil specific objectives, (particularly objective 3 for agricultural soils) notably the action to “ensure increased uptake of high diversity, nature-rich, high soil-carbon, low intensity farming methods while sustaining high quality food production”. This includes the action to revise and update Scotland’s Soil Framework and action/implementation plan by 2030; to develop evidence-based Soil Health Indicators (SHIs) that can be considered for inclusion in Whole Farm Plans and forest management plans (and monitoring frameworks to assess change in soil health) as well as improving information and guidance for land managers.

There is a wide range of Scottish policy themes that are linked to soil systems across our landscapes (Appendix F), however the list above demonstrates that the protection of soils is concentrated to only a few policies. It is worth noting that despite soil protection being a key objective in some of these strategies and policies, the degree to which implementation into action occurs is often more difficult to assess. The varied challenges associated with soil management are outlined in Appendix D. The Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045 offers the most recent policy area to set out specific objectives relating to soil protection is which, despite some gaps, has made great strides in collaborative discussion and objective setting in terms of soil health, particularly in the agricultural section. .

Soils are also considered within a range of Scottish regulations as outlined on Scotland’s Soil website, with their relevance to soils highlighted in Appendix F:

Developing a framework for the “Soil Route Map for Scotland”

The vision for the soil route map is “Thriving soils for Scotland’s communities, economy and environment”. This was developed to encompass the 13 outcomes (listed in Section 4) of the Scottish Soils Framework, which is a comprehensive and representative list of essential soil functions and reflects the contribution soils have to Scottish communities and economic stability.

Six objectives to achieve this vision and address the range of soil risks identified (Table 1) are outlined below (see Figure 2). These objectives are considered essential to support a series of proactive actions which offer practical opportunities for positive change towards soil security in Scotland and are further described in Table 2 below. Appendix G provides further description of approaches taken in the route map development.

Figure 2. The six objectives of the Route Map for Scotland

Table 2. Description of the six objectives within the Route Map for Scotland

Objective

Description

LEAD (L)

‘Inspire and collaborate to deliver the vision for Scottish soils’

Provide an overarching vision and evidence-based policy framework to support the various levels of leadership in conducting activities that relate to the protection, restoration and enhancement of Scottish soils, which is mobilised through effective communication, upskilling and engagement.

PROTECT (P)

Prevent further damage to soils’

Ensure soils across Scottish landscapes are safeguarded against further decline in soil health or increase in vulnerability to physical loss from risks outlined in Table 1

RESTORE (R)

‘Repair damaged soils’

Provide evidence-based guidance, policies and where appropriate legal pathways to identify and alleviate degraded soils across different land uses in Scotland.

ENHANCE (En)

‘Strengthen soils for the future’

Recognising change and additional measures to soil improvement above and beyond the status quo, which contribute to future proofing via resilient healthy soils and maximising the potential of our soils for generations to come.

MOBILISE (M)

‘Communicate, engage, participate’

The delivery of the route map will rely heavily on engaged participation, collaboration and effective communication of the objectives and best practices to achieve them through strengthening delivery mechanisms and processes that will enable actions whether that be via legal pathways or otherwise. This includes participation across policy makers, regulators, researchers, land managers, practitioners, local councils, community groups and land use partnerships working collaboratively to foster positive changes for the future.

EVIDENCE (Ev)

‘Data-information-knowledge-wisdom’

Utilising data to underpin interdisciplinary and cross-sectoral evidence-led decision making and monitoring progress. Harnessing local and cultural knowledge and wisdom to identify areas of success and potential opportunities for change.

Potential implementation of the route map

The six key objectives in the route map (Figure 2 and Table 2) provide a framework to address the range of challenges faced by soils and allow flexibility for specific actions within each objective to be applied across temporal and spatial scales. The aim of the route map is to build upon existing progress, to explore opportunities and develop a cohesive (and inclusive) plan which is effectively communicated to drive the delivery of objectives outlined.

The Scottish policy landscape can appear complex as it represents the diverse environmental landscapes of Scotland which are intertwined with our communities and national economy. Therefore, a vital component of successful implementation will be the active engagement and participation across multiple organisations, agencies and industries spanning a range of sectors that represent the cross-sectoral importance of our soils.

The route map proposes a blended approach of strategic policy-led coordination driven by the identified policies which impact on soils (Appendix F) and a risk-led delivery of actions requiring coordination across multiple stakeholders, outlined across the six objectives.

The risks to soils span different land use types providing cross-cutting themes affecting multiple policy areas. A risk-led approach to identifying actions provides an opportunity for policy teams and wider delivery sectors to come together to collaboratively address soil risks which can then be delivered/implemented within existing policy frameworks. As there are specific, place-based risks and pressures associated with soils, it will be important to engage across the range of stakeholders and sectors with soil-related interests, to share experiences and to exchange knowledge towards a better understanding of good soil management specific to that place.

Objective 1 – Leadership (L)

Actions to support the implementation of leadership

L1

Assemble a ‘Soil Policy Team’ within Scottish Government

L2

Update the Scottish Soil Framework

L3

Review the potential of statutory targets to be introduced and potential alignment with EU Soil Monitoring Law and Nature Restoration Law

Action L1: Assemble a ‘Soil Policy Team’ within Scottish Government

This route map highlights that the legislative landscape for soils is particularly fragmented across different policy areas. To better coordinate the delivery of a cross-sectoral route map for Scottish soils, this action proposes the establishment of a soil-focused policy team to lead in the progression of collaboration to effectively implement objectives and achieve the objectives outlined.

Action L2: Update the Scottish Soil Framework.

This route map provides an initial cross-sectoral framework for integrating soil-focused activities across the current suite of environmental protection policies to safeguard Scottish soils (and wider environment) from future challenges. It is recommended that the Scottish Soil Framework (2009) be updated to contribute to policy priorities including those set out in the 3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan 2024-2029, Scotland’s National Peatland Plan, National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), UK Forestry Standard (UKFS) 5th edition, the Vision for Agriculture and Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045 as well as supporting the objectives set out in the recent Natural Environment (Scotland) Bill (2025) and National Flood Resilience Strategy (2024) through soils underpinning nature-based systems (Figure 1) and being central to many nature-based solutions. An updated Scottish Soil Framework will also support progress of the route map objectives and the continuation of the current Soil Policy Working Group (comprising representatives from core Scottish Government policy and analytical services divisions, ClimateXChange, NatureScot, SEPA and Historic Environment Scotland) to allow for regular updates on any developments that influence or impact Scottish soils and to maintain momentum in the delivery of activities relating to soil protection, restoration and enhancement.

Action L3: Review the potential of statutory targets to be introduced and potential alignment with EU Soil Monitoring Law and Nature Restoration Law.

In the ESS report (2024) it was noted that ‘Scotland, formerly a world leader with the Soils Framework, is now falling behind international best practice in this area and should consider mirroring developments in Europe and initiate statutory duties to protect and monitor soils’. It is suggested that statutory duties include mandatory targets for the restoration of drained peatland soil, assessment of contaminated land and soil sealing policy as well as legislative proposals that reflect the proposed EU Soil Monitoring Law and Nature Restoration Law.

Currently, there is no EU-wide soil-specific legislation, however as part of the European Green Deal and EU Biodiversity Strategy 2030 the European Union has developed their EU Soil Strategy for 2030. The Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework (GBF) and International Initiative for the Conservation and Sustainable Use of Soil Biodiversity were adopted at the Convention on Biological Diversity COP 15 meeting in December 2022 to support the restoration, maintenance and enhancement of soil health. Following this, the EU proposed a new Soil Monitoring Law in July 2023 to protect and restore soils and ensure that they are used sustainably.

Targets can provide common goals to work towards and benchmarks for assessing progress. However, these need to be in tune with the overarching vision and objectives and in relation to specific soil characteristics and varied land cover types we have in Scotland. Consideration needs to be given to the implications which target-setting can have to avoid unintended consequences. For example, targets for increased soil carbon contents can be set, however managing soil carbon is complex and involves dynamic biogeochemical processes as part of the global carbon cycle (see Appendix H). The simple message of ‘increasing soil carbon’ may lead to management practices which are conducted in goodwill, but whilst leading to improvements in soil health, may also inadvertently lead to increased greenhouse gas emissions from soils.

A workshop was held to review stakeholder views on soil monitoring in Scotland and the potential of EU alignment (Appendix I). The workshop outputs (Appendix I) outline opportunities for Scotland to produce a more appropriate monitoring platform in relation to Scotland’s unique landscape which would better reflect Scotland’s communities, economy and environment (reflected in Objective 5, Action Ev3). Therefore, Action L3 proposes a two-stage review.

  • A thorough examination of the principles and objectives of the EU Soil Strategy for 2030 and the proposed EU Soil Monitoring Law.
  • An assessment of how these principles and objectives can be best implemented in Scotland. The assessment should consider both the potential for a tailored, bespoke soil protection plan that reflects Scotland’s unique landscape and priorities (as informed by stakeholder engagement) and an evaluation of whether direct alignment with the EU framework would be beneficial and feasible for Scotland. This includes reviewing the range of metrics which may be appropriate to apply as targets within future statutory requirements. Finally, to identify opportunities for Scotland-specific targets offering multiple benefits to soil health with transparency in relation to any trade-offs.

Objective 2 – Protect, Restore and Enhance (PREn)

Identify actions needed to protect (P), restore (R) and enhance (En) soil – Identifying what needs to be achieved in practical soil management.

PREn1

Coordinate task groups for shared best practice

PREn2

Place-based evidence reviews to identify actions needed

The route map suggests a collaborative, cross-sectoral approach to mobilise Scottish soil security through evidence-led leadership, soil protection, soil restoration and soil enhancement for the future. To achieve this collaborative approach, Objective 2 suggests the operation of task groups to come together to share knowledge and best practice to protect, restore and enhance soils in relation to risks identified (Section 3).

Action PREn1: Coordinate task groups for shared best practice

Within each ‘task group’ the aim would be to review what activities currently work well and what else can be done to protect, restore and enhance soils in relation to risks identified (Table 1, Section 3). The groups should be forward-thinking and involve appropriate representatives from across different sectors who work with, or are affected by soils (i.e. landowners, practitioners, local authorities, community groups, policy makers, regulators and researchers etc). It is suggested that the task groups have clear terms of reference to outline core purpose, terms for delivery and effective coordination of all stakeholders’ roles, responsibilities and actions. This offers opportunities for co-delivery across various policy objectives to be explored. For example;

Theme 1: Soil sealing and management of soils in construction and urban development

This task group will aim to protect high value soils from sealing and opportunities to reduce, reuse and recycle soil resources. In addition, the task group will share knowledge on soil ‘value’ across land use, land capability and the provision of ecosystem services (and nature-based solutions). Examples of areas the task group could review;

  • Review of tools used to assess soil ‘value’ to provide further support for informed decision-making in relation to new developments, such as how soils and other assessments (for example, The Land Capability for Agriculture) are used in Environmental Impact Assessments during the land use planning process. There are opportunities to support soil protection (particularly high carbon soils) and offer further guidance on interpreting soil data/information for improved understanding of soil systems and their value across soil types/land use types and associated wider functions, contributing to more informed decision making.
  • Engage with local authorities (e.g. Heads of Planning Scotland) and agencies (e.g. SEPA) to provide support on soil protection, restoration and enhancement (where appropriate) in local development plans and Strategic Environmental Assessments (as outlined by SEPA)
  • Promote and support the reuse of valuable soil during developments as outlined by SEPA and review good practice codes (E.g. SEPA Guidance (2017) ; SR/SEPA guidance (2012) and Construction Code of Practice for the Sustainable Use of Soils on Construction Sites, Defra, UK to reduce soil ‘waste’ and limit the quantity of soil going to landfill.

Theme 2: Erosion, compaction and slope stability (physical integrity of the soil)

Review where current guidance exists for supporting the physical integrity of soils as well as the prevention and restoration of soils affected by, or at risk to soil erosion, compaction or diminished stability. Explore where this guidance can be translated across to other land uses/sectors to enable wider application and support co-delivery across sectors. For example, there is guidance relating to soil structure for agriculture in the ‘Valuing your Soils’ brochure, which may offer transferrable knowledge. In addition, the Centres of Expertise have guidance which offers an initial evidence base to develop this action further, such as;

Theme 3: Application of chemicals (nutrient management and soil contamination)

Explore best practice to protect soils from contamination resulting from the application of chemicals (e.g. pesticides), poor nutrient management (e.g. synthetic fertilisers), wastes applied (e.g. sewage sludge) and emerging contaminants (e.g. PFAS, microplastics, pharmaceuticals within or additional to those in wastes applied). Review strategies for alleviating soils already affected by contamination as well as identifying soils at future risk and in need of further protection. For example, the task group could review guidance and legislation which exists to protect soils from poor nutrient management and contamination to identify pathways to improve awareness and implementation through existing policies such as;

  • Scottish Nitrogen Balance Sheet to reduce excess nitrogen in soil systems which can lead to leached nitrates (affecting waters) and emitted as nitrous oxides (indirect and indirect greenhouse gas emissions). This will be considered in the nutrient management plans to come within the Whole Farm Plan of the Agriculture Reform Program, and nitrogen balance sheet of the Climate Change Plan. How can the implementation of improved nitrogen management be applied more widely across sectors?
  • Diffuse pollution prevention (CREW) offers soil management guidance to minimise negative effects on local watercourses
  • The James Hutton Institute and Fidra have outlined the impacts of unregulated microplastic, organic chemical and pharmaceutical contaminants on soil health (Re-assessment of environmental risks of sewage sludge, 2024), some of which are currently not regulated or included in soil routine soil testing.
  • Environmental Standards Scotland has begun investigatory work on the application and effectiveness of Environmental Protection Act Part 2A. Support local authorities to identify and remediate contaminated soils as part of the Environmental Protection Act, Part 2a

Theme 4: Soils in private sector sustainability plans and corporate responsibility

In recent years there has been growing interest in soil health, soil carbon sequestration potential and the role of soils to support biodiversity and other ecosystem services with respect to sustainability reporting within the private sector. This is a rapidly evolving field as businesses look to evaluate how their business may impact climate and nature as well as identifying risks associated with their business being impacted by adverse climate and nature-related events as outlined in TCFD (Taskforce for climate-related financial disclosures) and TNFD (Taskforce for nature-related financial disclosures). There are a range of emerging tools and guidance available for companies to use which offers opportunities for further guidance in relation to soil management in relation to ecosystem services and how this may link to supply chain resilience, nature-related risks and private investment opportunities for nature restoration and carbon sequestration.

Theme 5: Soil monitoring and metrics

To understand the extent to which soils need protecting and restoring requires, to some extent, the need to monitor soil condition. The ESS report (2024) highlighted the lack of a comprehensive monitoring network in Scotland, resulting in, for example, not knowing whether the number of soil erosion incidences (and magnitude of erosion) is increasing or decreasing. There are a range of approaches to monitoring soils and stakeholders agreed (Appendix I) that to formalise a soil monitoring programme for Scotland, an agreed purpose or set of objectives for the programme going forward is required. This will provide clarity in the specific metrics needed to monitor soil health, risk and resilience in Scotland and inform the development of the soil monitoring framework in terms of establishing baselines, whether targets and benchmarks should be incorporated, the degree to which stratification may be required and how the data could contribute to further research and support evidence-led decision making. This also includes scoping opportunities for the soil monitoring programme to contribute to environmental modelling and amalgamated landscape-scale datasets for wider environmental assessment. Therefore, there is scope to review how best to monitor developments in soil protection, restoration and enhancement across the actions proposed (and appropriate metrics required to do so). This may entail exploring the possibility of a Directive on Soil Monitoring and Resilience to be established as outlined in the ESS report (2024). Initial recommendations in relation to evidencing and monitoring Scottish soils are outlined in Objective 4.

Action PREn2: Place-based evidence reviews to identify actions needed

A core objective of the task groups would be to support the delivery of existing ‘good’ practice and explore potential alignment of these practices across other sectors through place-based, cross-sectoral evidence reviews on appropriate practical measures to protect, restore and enhance soils; as well as exploring mechanisms and pathways to mobilise activities identified. This may include identifying where the underpinning research and practical experiences can be translated to inform task groups on future applications, as well as identifying gaps to explore. For example, there may be gaps or areas for improvement in relation to soil literacy and soil-based skills, which could be addressed so that soils can be better protected, restored and enhanced in the future. Evidence reviews will support mechanisms for decision making and identifying ‘minimum viable product’ that can be deployed to initiate change following the evaluation of impacts (positive and negative) in terms of overall trade-offs.

Objective 3 – Mobilise (M)

Actions to support the identification of how to mobilise and achieve objectives.

M1

Identify existing legal/regulatory avenues for implementing actions for soil protection, restoration and enhancement via implementation plans

M2

Identify existing and new avenues to implement actions for soil protection, restoration and enhancement via landscape-scale implementation plans

Task groups might be put in place to identify pathways for implementation, which use existing avenues in the first instance. The groups could also give insight into new opportunities for the implementation of actions that protect, restore, and enhance soils.

Action M1: Identify existing legal/regulatory avenues for implementing actions for soil protection, restoration and enhancement via implementation plans

Current codes of practice and guidance exist across most sectors. These can be updated with latest evidence providing a streamlined approach to safeguarding soils across sectors. Common language, metrics and messaging will support landscape-scale problem-solving. Therefore, it would be useful to develop and expand good practice guidance across Scottish land uses, to share knowledge and best practice, develop commonalities and ensure alignment across the different sectors, for example:

  • Agricultural codes of practice include GAECS, Whole Farm Plan, Prevention of environmental pollution from agricultural activity guidance (PEPFAA), ‘Valuing Your Soils’ brochure
  • Explore opportunities to include additional measures to GAECS or the Whole Farm Plan such as tests for ‘soil compaction’ and/or ‘soil degradation’ to be performed utilising evidence and guidance that is already available, in order to identify and alleviate soil compaction and wider degradation. This would also enable the development and promotion of clear guidance for practitioners and support the Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045 recommendation that by 2030 farm and forestry machinery contractors are engaged in ensuring appropriate use of equipment, uptake of decision-making tools and training, to minimise and ultimately avoid compaction damage to soils.
  • Review opportunities to harness and better utilise information collated through the Agricultural Reform Programme’s Whole Farm Plan, which includes soil testing alongside carbon and biodiversity audits (and will introduce nutrient plans in 2028). This may include the provision of further advice on how to interpret the information collected into sustainable soil management that supports soil heath and resilience in terms of aligning to the objectives of soil protection, restoration and enhancement. In addition, there may be opportunities for the knowledge gathered from soil testing to be collated in some way, for the purpose of supporting evidence and monitoring (e.g. national soil health status and a Scottish soil monitoring framework) and research (e.g. for national soil mapping, modelling changes and forecasting, better understanding of the interaction between soils and land management practices).
  • The Agricultural Reform Programme Tier 4 offers opportunities for mobilising soil protection, restoration and enhancement measures as it refers to additional, ‘complementary’ activities that support good practices, such as developing new skills, knowledge, training and continued professional development, as well as advisory services and business support (advice, knowledge exchange and linkages to wider land management support from Scottish Government officials and/or public partners) and development of measurement tools.
  • Valuing Your Soils’ brochure was published in 2015 and provided case studies of effective management related to challenges such as managing soil pH, nutrient management, compaction and drainage. The booklet provided peer-to-peer learning in the form of short, clear messages and on-farm examples (case-studies). An update to the ‘Valuing your Soils’ brochure offers a mechanism for communicating and mobilising recommendations related to the route map’s objectives on soil protection, restoration and enhancement in relation to the risks identified and incorporating recent developments across the agricultural reform programme.
  • UK Forestry Standards
  • Review whether there is scope to update and widen woodland management guidance and plans (between 2023 and 2030) to reflect greater emphasis on actions that will improve biodiversity including use of elements from ‘Site Condition Monitoring’ and ‘Woodland Ecological Condition’ monitoring as recommended in the Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045.
  • There is also scope to include ‘soil compaction’ or ‘soil degradation tests’ as outlined above, which will support the development and promotion of clear guidance for practitioners on soil compaction and ensure that by 2030 farm and forestry machinery contractors are engaged in ensuring appropriate use of equipment, uptake of decision-making tools and training, to minimise and ultimately avoid compaction damage to soils – as recommended in the Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045.
  • Peatland Action
  • Review whether there is scope to include some protection or further guidance for ‘peaty soils’ in relation to different land uses (notably planning, agriculture and forestry) to enhance the protection of high carbon soils.
  • Originally proposed in The Scottish Strategic Framework for Biodiversity, the development of the targeting of peatland restoration for cost-effective delivery (i.e. identifying priority restoration projects) including for greater private investment in peatland restoration. It is also noted that there’s a need to “scale delivery of the Peatland Action programme, restoring the condition of peatlands as a key ecosystem in line with net zero targets and supporting the expansion and upskilling of the peatland restoration workforce”.
  • Ensure all peatland restoration projects are completed to the same standards regardless of funding source, including transparency in data collected for defining peatland condition used to calculate baseline emissions.

Action M2: Identify existing and new avenues to implement actions for soil protection, restoration and enhancement via landscape-scale implementation plans

The delivery of actions will need to be coordinated at the landscape-scale and will involve engagement with a range of cross-sectoral stakeholders. To begin this process there are opportunities to engage with existing initiatives, for example Regional Land Use Partnerships, Climate Adaptation Partnerships, Landscape Enterprise Networks and Local Authorities. Developing from M1, action M2 seeks to provide evidence-based opportunities and solutions following the identification of gaps, limitations and barriers to implementation. This will entail reviewing the appropriateness and applicability of solutions across sectors, land cover and soil type (for example where soils are naturally compacted) as well as exploring pathways for effective implementation.

Objective 4 – Monitor (Ev)

Actions to support current and future baselining, monitoring and evidencing Scottish soils

Ev1

Baseline soil ‘status’ across land use types of Scotland.

Ev2

Identify evidence gaps and future improvement options across different land uses

Ev3

Scottish soil monitoring framework

Ev4

Evidence-led recommendations for future soil protection, restoration and enhancement.

To effectively manage our landscapes for improved soil protection and future resilience to risks, there is a need to establish a baseline i.e. what is the current status of our soils.

Several attempts have been made to define a set of metrics to monitor soil physical, biological and chemical properties and wider soil functionality (and ecosystem services). A recent UK workshop on soil monitoring reviewed approaches to soil monitoring across the four nations to evaluate the readiness of soil-assessment-focussed research used within UK policy delivery. The workshop highlighted that despite the challenges of identifying the most appropriate strategy for monitoring such complex systems, “there is great potential value in working to ensure the data collected has a degree of consistency, to support wider targets and understanding of soil heath.” Further research into harmonisation of soil monitoring across the four nations is currently being undertaken to develop this knowledge further.

Action Ev1: Baseline soil ‘status’ across land cover types of Scotland.

The assessment of Scottish soils is currently conducted via a range of mechanisms governed by different policy groups across different land uses (e.g. agriculture, peatland, forestry, planning, construction/development, sport & recreation, protected areas etc). Despite this, there is a general consensus amongst policy makers and academics (Appendix I) that there is a need to progress with the current data and knowledge available to create a baseline of soils in terms of soil health plus its vulnerability to risks and the wider potential impacts on soil function. It is acknowledged that there is already a lot of data available in Scotland and so there is a good base from which to develop baselines and a monitoring framework.

Benchmarking soils are not easy as changes occur at different temporal (and spatial) scales and are so diverse that in turn their value in terms of services they provide, vary significantly across sectors and can be quite subjective. In order to set meaningful targets, and to appropriately benchmark across soil-land use types, a specific soil policy lead (team) should be identified. At present there is no single agreed soil monitoring framework for Scotland and little standardisation or harmonisation of data across different sectors. Therefore, this objective proposes further progression of the Scottish Soil Monitoring Action Plan (2012) which followed the State of Scotland’s Soil Report (2011) as well as developments being made through Scotland’s Strategic Research Programme 2022 to 2027 (Appendix D), Centres for Expertise research (E.g. Monitoring soil health in Scotland by land use category – a scoping study) and National Soil Inventory of Scotland (demonstrated on the Scotland’s Soils website) towards a Scottish Soil Monitoring Framework (which aligns with other UK monitoring schemes where appropriate).

Specifically, this objective calls for some agreement on the most appropriate metrics to baseline soil ‘status’ (an indication of soil health, soil functionality and soil’s vulnerability to risk) and resource a baselining exercise from which changes in soils over time can be assessed.

Action Ev2: Identify evidence gaps and future improvement options across different land uses

This action is to identify evidence gaps with respect to monitoring soil protection, restoration and enhancement across different land uses, as identified by the soil monitoring workshop (Appendix I). For example,

  • Review the extent of current soil monitoring and how it may vary across land use types;
  • Assess the availability and accessibility of data across sectors and identify where improvements can be made;
  • Evaluate methods and metrics used and to study soils and how they may vary across sectors due to the contextual differences in soil functioning and ecosystem services provided. Explore where there are opportunities for some harmonisation to better identify the functions offered by soils at a landscape scale (for example how soils are valued across land uses and better connect land management practices to the potential ecosystem services and nature-based solutions which different soils can provide) and understand the drivers of change in soil management and subsequent soil condition across land uses and sectors;
  • Identify priority issues for soil protection, restoration and possible enhancement across landscapes. This includes vulnerable soil types which areas are at most risk of degradation and potential locations for the greatest opportunities for protection, restoration and/or enhancement of soils.
  • Establish how are ‘degraded’ soils currently defined across land use/soil types and policy themes and to what extent are Scottish soils degraded;
  • Review opportunities to better assess soil health and vulnerability to risks through emerging technologies and novel applications in terms of what they provide/contribute to soil protection, their technical readiness and potential to incorporate/implement into baselining soil protection (e.g. Infra-red, soil acoustics, X-Ray Diffraction, eDNA and microbiome characterisation, LIDAR, AI, etc).

Action Ev3: A Scottish Soil Monitoring Framework

A soil monitoring programme will need clear vision, purpose and objectives to ensure the monitoring programme is transparent, robust, fit for purpose and can be interpreted by wide-ranging audiences. Therefore a ‘task group’ comprising key stakeholders is suggested (see Table 3) to agree objectives and technical content of a monitoring framework as well as terms of reference for the governance and management of a soil monitoring framework. This would develop upon the findings from the ‘Scottish Soil Monitoring Framework’ workshop December 2024 (Appendix I). Other considerations include: deciding on the most appropriate metrics to be included in a monitoring framework, align to policy and reporting needs; encourage data sharing (e.g. personal, research, government and third-party data sources), review what tools/mechanisms/technology are available to assess soils in Scotland and to ensure that any framework is future-proofed. There is also scope to review metrics used across different schemes (e.g. agri-environmental schemes and the measuring, reporting, verification used in carbon schemes) and corporate reporting frameworks (see Table 3) to promote some harmonisation across terminology and approaches used in relation to soils, such as how they are valued and how current soil status and/or soils may change over time are measured and interpreted.

A Scottish soil monitoring framework would directly deliver to the Scottish Biodiversity Strategy objective of “set up monitoring frameworks to assess change in soil health, based on evidence from the Strategic Research Programme (2022-2027)”. The framework will provide evidence to monitor and validate impacts as well as contribute to future evidence-led decision making and inform further research developments.

Action Ev4: Evidence-led recommendations for future soil protection, restoration and enhancement.

Action Ev4 is to review progress towards the objectives set out in the route map. The evaluation of progress should allow for flexibility and adaptability to include future/emerging challenges and pressures which may be environmental (e.g. changing climates and emerging contaminants), industry-related (e.g. market vulnerabilities and/or new environmental reporting requirements) and/or community-based (e.g. workforce needs). Action Ev4 will identify knowledge gaps and opportunities for further information to be collected out with the soil monitoring framework, which would provide valuable insight on the progression to soil security in Scotland. For example, identifying what works and does not work to inform where improvements could be made as well as future research needs across fundamental and applied science. This will enable Scotland to be a leading example in mobilising actions towards thriving soils through effective landscape-scale and cross-sectoral soil protection, restoration and enhancement measures, which support future Scottish communities, the economy and environment.

Conclusions

This route map provides an overview of the range of risks threatening Scotland’s soils and highlights challenges in tackling these risks across different soil types, site characteristics, land use types and a range of cross-cutting policy themes at the landscape scale.

Without co-ordination from an overarching soil policy, it will be difficult to overcome the existing, and future, challenges in deploying actions to specifically target landscape-scale challenges relating to soil security in Scotland.

The route map sets out early thinking about the actions which might be put in place to lead, mobilise and gather evidence, in the first instance. The proposed actions that will protect, restore and enhance soils need to be grounded in the latest evidence, requiring development work by interdisciplinary and cross-sectoral task groups to inform evolving overarching policy.

The 3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan objective NC2 specifically outlines the need to take actions at the landscape scale, in a collaborative way, in order to protect and enhance Scotland’s soils, increasing their resilience to the impacts of climate change, and land use challenges. Therefore, this route map provides an opportunity to build on the existing progress and momentum that has been developed in specific policy areas, to ensure soil protection, restoration and enhancement of all of Scottish soils.

Appendices

Appendix A Socio-economic impacts of soil degradation

Infographic on the assessment of socio-economic impacts of soil degradation on Scotland’s water environment (Baggaley et al 2024)

Healthy soils are important to the Scottish economy improving crop yields, storing water to help limit the impacts of drought and storms, and regulating water flows to rivers and lochs. Degraded soils have both direct and indirect costs to individuals, society and the wider economy. Compacted soils, yield loss estimated at £16-49 million per year. Compacted soils, additional fuel use for field operations £9-26 million per year. Compaction and sealing, increased flood risk and insurance claims £57k-76k per household claim. Soil contamination - loss of land, degraded water and food quality £ not yet able to calculate. By CREW, James Hutton Institute, SRUC, University of Aberdeen and Scottish Government.

Appendix B Soils of Scotland

A national soil map of Scotland, indicating the soil types in different locations, including peaty gleys, peat, peaty podzols, mineral gleys and magnesian soils.

Soils of Scotland, taken from the Scotland’s Soils Web National soil map of Scotland | Scotland’s soils

Appendix C Summary of Workshop 1 outputs – Identifying risks and opportunities for Scottish soils

The workshop aimed to collate stakeholder views and opinions in relation to current issues and opportunities for soil security in Scotland. In particular, to review changes and developments since the publication of the Scottish Soil Framework (2009).

Participants were grouped (where possible ensuring there was a mixture of research & policy representatives and organisation across groups) and asked to engage with two group activities and two individual activities outlined below;

Group Activity 1:

Each group was asked to discuss and note “What do you think are the key risks/threats for soil security and/or soil health in Scottish” and “What do you think are driving these risks?” relating to the specific land use of the session (Agriculture, Forestry, Urban and Integrated landscapes) and feedback to the wider group.

Individual Activity 1:

Following the group discussion and sharing of key risks, threats to soil and their drivers, participants were given 5 stickers each (black for researchers, red for policy/regulator representatives) to vote on the risk they thought is of most priority. Participants could choose to allocate all of their stickers to one specific risk or to spread them out across a range of risks (providing some indication on the weight of concern across the risks identified). Participants were also encouraged to move around the room and review risk/threats identified by other groups when allocating their stickers.

Group Activity 2:

Each group was asked to discuss and note –

  • What policy/regulation is in place (relating to Agricultural soils)? Comments noted on pink post-it notes or directly on the list of policies outlined in the SSF (print out provided)
  • What research, evidence, data, guidance is used to support soils in agriculture? Comments noted on blue post-it notes
  • What do you think are the key gaps, updates and/or opportunities to better protect soil? Comments noted on yellow post-it notes

Discussions were to be specific to the land use session (Agriculture, Forestry, Urban and Integrated landscapes) with the groups feeding back to the wider group of participants

Individual Activity 2:

Following the group discussion and sharing of key gaps and opportunities to better protect soil within agriculture/forests/urban/landscapes in Scotland – participants were again given 5 stickers each (black for researchers, red for policy/regulators) to vote on the gaps and opportunities they thought is of highest priority. Participants could choose to allocate all stickers to one specific gap/opportunity or spread them out across a range of gaps/opportunities (providing some indication on the weighted priority across gaps/opportunities identified). Participants were also encouraged to move around the room and review gaps/opportunities identified by other groups when allocating their stickers.

Information provided by participants was collected and transcribed.

Summary of workshop outputs:

The top 5 risks and threats to Scottish soils voted for by participants across agriculture, forestry, urban and integrated landscapes.

 

Agriculture

Forestry

Urban

Landscape

1

Soil disturbance, erosion & organic matter loss

Soil disturbance, erosion & organic matter loss

Soil sealing & consumption

Lack of soil-specific governance and policy

2

Biodiversity loss

Biodiversity loss

Cumulative effects of climate change

Under valuing soils as an asset/resource

3

Soil contamination & environmental pollution

Climate change (Tree species, pests, weather impacts)

Soil contamination (historic)

Difficulty dealing with spatial heterogeneity

4

Climate change & extreme weather events

Wider impacts (loss of peat)

Soil classification as ‘waste’ going to landfill, limited reuse

Loss of soil function (via compaction, erosion)

5

Lack of collaborative, catchment scale management

Market pressures & demands (driving specific tree species)

Undervaluing soil as an asset

Data available, sharing, accessibility

The top 5 gaps/opportunities voted for by participants relating to ‘securing Scottish soil’ across the four land use sessions.

Rank

Agriculture

Forestry

Urban

Landscape

1

Need for soil governance or policy (joint 1st)

Better data availability & accessibility

Review classification of soil as ‘waste’

Need for soil governance or policy. Mainstream & update SSF

2

Better data availability & accessibility

(joint 1st)

Need for soil governance or policy

Strategic planning for rainwater runoff

Better data availability & accessibility

3

System scale modelling & visualisation tool

Re-design of schemes to better mitigate impacts on soil

Improve enforcement of soil reuse & contamination rules

Integrate soils focus into place-based approaches

4

More peer-to-peer learning

Improve soil literacy, education & training

Assess soil data/information is utilised in planning

Better links across policy areas

5

Improve soils literacy

Include soil assessment in licensing plantations

Biodiversity (above & belowground) in urban soils

Spatial data integration

 

Appendix D Soil research across Scottish Government’s Strategic Research Programme (2022-2027)

Underpinning evidence for informing policy comes from the Scottish government research programme (SRP). Research relevant to soils occurs in all 6 themes in the SRP and Underpinning National Capacity;

  • Theme A: Plant and Animal Health
  • Theme B: Sustainable Food System and Supply
  • Theme C: Human impacts on the Environment
  • Theme D: Natural Resources
  • Theme E: Rural Futures
  • Theme F: BioSS research

It is also a key part of the work within CxC and CREW for example the project on the socio-economic cost of soil degradation funded through CREW and the Soils Fellowship funded through CxC. Soils research highlighted here includes work on understanding how soils function, how changes can be monitored and translation it so it can be used by a range of stakeholders.

The table below gives an outline of how soils underpin SRP themes as well as where there is ongoing direct soil-focused research

Theme

Topic

Link to Scottish soils

A: Plant and Animal Health

A1. Plant Disease

Soil health can influence the prevalence of pests and diseases which may impact plant and animal health. Soils can be a carrier of plant and animal diseases, and soil properties can impact their availability. Soil borne diseases can be a form of soil contamination.

A2. Animal disease

A3. Animal Welfare

B: Sustainable Food System and Supply

B1. Crop improvement

The combination of land management and climate change influences trajectories of soil properties. Long term trials allow the adaptation and mitigation potential, sustainability and trade-offs associated with management practices to be analysed. This includes an exploration of the interactions between management practices and crop cultivars.

B2. Livestock improvement

 Understanding soils in the context of livestock management is important part of understanding feed availability, carbon footprints and how managing livestock is impacted by climate change.

B3. Improving agricultural practice

Soils are vital for sustainable productivity and impact food and drink quality and subsequently human nutrition and overall health.

B4. Food supply and security

B5. Food and drink improvements

Soil contamination including contaminants of emerging concern are held in soils and can be transferred to vegetation and water courses. B5:(Contaminants of emerging concern in the food chain) B6:( Antimicrobial Resistance)

B6. Diet and food safety

Soil contamination including contaminants of emerging concern are held in soils and can be transferred to vegetation and water courses. B5:(Contaminants of emerging concern in the food chain) B6:( Antimicrobial Resistance)

B7. Human Nutrition

 Understanding human nutrition can be linked to the “One Health Concept” but the focus of this work is on human interactions and choices linked to food.

C: Human impacts on the Environment

C2. Agricultural GHGs

Development of options for a monitoring agricultural GHGs within a soil monitoring framework. Interactions between soil health and land management decisions across land covers

C3. Land Use (inc. mapping)

 Soil data and information contributes to wider landscape quality and functioning

C4. Circular Economy (inc. waste)

 Understanding the circular economy can be linked to issues of “waste to land” and “soil as a waste” but there is no specific work on these here.

C5. Large Scale Modelling

Development of options for a soil monitoring framework and the requirements for the incorporation of monitoring data in large scale modelling across landscapes.

C6. Use of Outdoors and Greenspace

Understanding the use and value of our outdoors and greenspace is important part of understanding soils in these areas but the focus of this work is on how these areas are used and viewed by people.

Theme D: Natural Resources

D1. Air Quality

Soil is in constant exchange with the atmosphere. Soil impacts air quality through GHGs. Soil health is impacted by air quality

D2. Water (including flooding)

Nature based solutions – Soil is in constant exchange with the water cycle. Soils can retain water (important for flood resilience), filter and buffer chemicals (important for water quality). Soil leaching and erosion can be problematic for water quality and flood resilience

D3. Soils

Soil health can be impacted by management decisions. Understanding soil functional relationships across different land covers supports improved land management decisions. It also identifies trade-offs and win-win scenarios. Understanding forestry systems, soil health and ecosystem carbon dynamics is important for landscape scale decision making. New technologies and analysis protocols can lead to the ability to rapidly sample soils and also identify changes providing indications of soil contamination. Farmer led soil assessments and data provide tools for on farm decision making. Exploring the potential for real time monitoring and whether this can help inform management in cultivated systems. Peatlands are a unique habitat and understanding GHG fluxes, being able to monitor the interactions between these fluxes, water balance and biodiversity under restoration in a changing climate is important for understanding their impacts on wider ecosystem services such as water quality.

D4. Biodiversity

Soil biodiversity underpins and can be an indicator of soil functions in both semi-natural and cultivated ecosystems. It therefore supports plant communities and underpins our wider biodiversity and natural capital. Understanding links between soil biodiversity, which can be more responsive than other indicators of soil health, soil functions and wider ecosystem services is important for understanding the potential impacts of climate change and setting baselines that better represent soil functions.

D5. Natural Capital

Combining data on climate and soil functions in modelling approaches provides insight into changes in soil vulnerability and risks in a changing climate. Implementation of the LCA in a research platform, enabling it to be updated with new soils and climate data and run with future climate projections to explore consequences on land use.

Theme E: Rural Futures

E1. Rural Economy

Indirect link – soils underpin ecosystem services of rural communities. Healthy soils will contribute to a healthy economy and rural community.

E2. Rural Communities

E3. Land Reform

Theme F: Vision and Impact : Horizon scanning

Development of statistical methods to analyse diverse soils data and inform the design of a monitoring framework. (BIOSS statistical research)

Underpinning National Capacity

 

Soils Data and website

Combining and Managing soils data in Scotland’s soils database increases its power to do policy relevant research. Translation of soils data and making the data available to a wide range of stakeholders. Including the development of apps.

Soils Archive

Management of the soil archive allows for the testing of laboratory protocols and the analysis of samples for new indicators

Appendix E Challenges to landscape-scale soil management

To effectively as well as stakeholder feedback (link to Workshop outputs) highlighted a range of challenges associated with managing soils in a changing climate, which are summarised below

Challenge

Description

Lack of soil focused governance 

No overarching policy to support accountability and leadership to drive soil protection in Scotland

Climate change

Soils play a vital role in climate change adaptation and mitigation. Soils are impacted by variable weather patterns and more frequent extreme weather events (flooding and droughts), which can have knock on effects to soil protection, fertility and productivity, flood resilience, water quality etc.

Diversity of Scottish soils

Scotland’s soils (Appendix B) are diverse, providing a range of specific functions to the wider ecosystem. They include mineral soils which provide fertile land for food production, deep peat storing carbon to depths in excess of 10 meters, soils which are linked to specific land covers and soils where protection is critical to protect wider ecosystem services such as water quality and quantity. However, this variation across soil types, topography, local weather patterns, land capability, land use history and current land use leads to multiple layers of complexity affecting overall soil health and security. This requires the provision of management guidance and a monitoring framework that is fit for purpose across different soil types and land covers.

Multiple demands on Scottish soils

Balancing the multiple demands on soils requires an assessment of the multiple requirements from our land. For example Scottish food security (e.g The production food contributing to Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act (2022)); the production of raw ingredients for wider produce (e.g. whisky production, which requires agricultural soils for barley production but impacts peatlands via peat burning in some malting processes); production of animal feed; soil sealing to support housing developments, infrastructure and urbanisation; platform for achieving forestry targets.

Defining soil ‘value’ across sectors and land uses.

How soils are ‘valued’ varies across land uses and soil types. This leads to variable levels of knowledge, evidence and protection across land uses. Soils have a wide range of properties, and not all soils can deliver the same services. There is scope for decision-making and management to be more place-based in relation to specific value and functions provided by different soils.

Defining, measuring and monitoring soil health, security & resilience

Clearer guidance is required in terms of defining, understanding and measuring various components of soil systems and well as capturing (and understanding) their dynamic nature, such as soil carbon sequestration potential. There is also a need for keeping abreast of UK and wider EU initiatives on defining and monitoring soil health and the indicators that maybe required to align with these.

Linking soil health to functionality

Soil health indicators are context dependant and are not a one size fits all. It is important to understand how ‘soil health’ should be defined and quantified across different soil and land use types where what the soil can deliver (soil functionality) and the ‘value’ of those functions in those areas also vary.

Soil biodiversity

Lack of research relating to the role of soil biodiversity in soil health and protection, particularly in terms of monitoring changes in soil biodiversity, which can often require complex measurements. There is however increasing availability of powerful data analysis techniques that allow more detailed interpretation of this kind of data and along with the availability of archived samples the ability to investigate change.

External (industry) challenges

Markets & supply chains can have direct and indirect influences on our landscapes and soils. With more attention on soil health within corporate nature-related target-setting and reporting, it is important that there are resources available to guide appropriate interpretation and implementation of soil knowledge for future sustainability, environmental net gain, resilient landscapes and carbon management.

Emerging challenges

It is important to consider emerging and future challenges (e.g. new pollutants, increased demands on our soils etc) which may impact soils. For example, ensuring mechanisms exist which support new challenges being identified, monitored and support exists to protect soils from any negative impacts and future degradation.

Soil literacy

As soils support a wide range of ecosystem functions across different sectors, there can be some inconsistencies in relation to how soils are described, understood, valued, evidenced and managed. Improved soil literacy across sectors (e.g. clearer definitions, understanding the dynamic nature of soils, interpreting core soil metrics and potential limitations of soil tests/models) will support informed decision making and land management going forward. It is also important to address any skills gaps that may hinder the delivery of healthy, resilient soils across Scotland.

Appendix F Where soils sit across different policies and legislation

List of policies and their connection to soil protection.

Policy

Are soils mentioned?

Specific action/objective to address soil risks?

Physical (soil loss)

Physical / structural (compaction)

Conservation of OM and C

Soil biology / biodiversity

Chemical / contamination)

General health & protection

Scottish Soil Framework (2009)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Scotland’s National Peatland Plan and Peatland Action;

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

(5th) edition of the UK Forestry Standard (UKFS) (2023)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Agricultural Reform Programme (List of Measures)

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Scottish Biodiversity Strategy and Delivery Plan, 2024

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Scotland’s National Planning Framework 4

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Agricultural Reform Programme (Cross Compliance)

Y

Y

Y

Y

  

Y

Building standards technical handbook 2020: domestic, 2020

Y

 

Y

  

Y

Y

The 3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan (2024)

Y

  

Y

  

Y

Sludge (Use in Agriculture) Regulations, 1989

Y

    

Y

Y

The Action Programme for Nitrate Vulnerable Zones (Scotland) Regulations, 2008

Y

    

Y

Y

Environmental Protection Act 1990 – Part IIA Contaminated Land (2006)

Y

    

Y

Y

The Pollution Prevention and Control (Scotland) Regulations (2012)

Y

    

Y

Y

Statutory Guidance Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations (2011)

Y

    

Y

Y

The Radioactive Contaminated Land (Scotland) (Amendment) Regulations (2007)

Y

    

Y

Y

The Water Environment (Controlled Activities) (Scotland) Regulations (2011)

Y

Y

    

Y

The policies below include reference to soil health more generally:

Environmental Assessment (Scotland) Act 2005

Circular Economy and Waste Route Map to 2030

The Public Gas Transporter Pipe-line Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) Regulations 1999

Climate Change Plan (2018-2032);

Wildlife Management and Muirburn (Scotland) Act 2024

The Offshore Petroleum Production and Pipelines (Environmental Impact Assessment and other Miscellaneous Provisions) (Amendment) Regulations 2017

Forestry and Land Management (Scotland) Act (2018)

The Electricity Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) (Scotland) Regulations 2017

Fitting Landscapes Policy, 2014. Transport Scotland

Scotland’s Forestry Strategy 2019 to 2029

Land Reform (Scotland) Bill, 2024

Town and Country Planning (Scotland) Act 1997

Right Tree in the Right Place (RTRP)

Local Food Strategy, 2024

Local development planning guidance, 2023

Sustainable and Regenerative Farming – next steps: statement (2022)

Bioenergy – draft policy statement: consultation (2024)

Onshore wind: policy statement 2022

Appendix G How the ‘Soil Route Map’ was developed

The route map was developed across three key phases:

Phase 1: What do we already know?

The initial phase involved reviewing current policies, regulations, frameworks and evidence (research) across different land uses to ascertain current knowledge as well as policy and/or legislative support in relation to soil health and security in Scotland. This included a review of The Scottish Soils Framework (2009) in terms of developments in knowledge and actions since its publication.

Phase 2: What are the key challenges for securing Scottish soils in a changing climate? Consolidating evidence, guidance and opinions. The second phase of the project comprises the collation of key messages derived from a stakeholder workshop. These discussions included researchers, policy makers, regulators, and representatives from charities and other governmental agencies.

Phase 3: Opportunities and pathways to implementing soil security in Scotland for ‘The Route map’. The development of the proposed route map comprises an iterative process with phase 3 being the refinement of consolidated evidence from phases 1 and 2, into an easy-to-follow report outlining future opportunities, potential barriers/challenges, research gaps and where additional resources may be required.

Stakeholder Engagement

A key component of the route map development is the input from stakeholders across all areas of land management to contribute to- and provide feedback on- the route map development, which included three sets of workshops:

Workshop 1: Identification of the risks and threats to soils across land covers to review the challenges across different land use sectors (August 2024);

Workshop 2: Discuss the development of a soil monitoring framework for Scotland, potential alignment with the EU Soil Monitoring Law and how a monitoring framework could support the objectives within the soil route map (November 2024);

Workshop 3: Refining the vision and objectives of the Scottish soil route map

Within all phases of the route map development, consideration was given to the specific barriers and opportunities outlined in the Scottish National Adaptation Plan 3, particularly the underpinning research and how this is translated into policies and how these can be implemented to protect soils better in the absence of overarching governance relating specifically to soils in a Scottish policy context.

Appendix H The carbon cycle

The carbon cycle from The British Soil Science Society – Science Note on Soil Carbon. Carbon stocks and flows on land and in the oceans (adapted from Jenkinson, 2010). The numbers in bold are stocks in Gigatonnes (Gt) C: those in italics are flows in Gt C per year. Topsoil and subsoil stocks exclude peatlands. 

Appendix I Workshop outputs – A Scottish Soil Monitoring Framework (SSMF)

The workshop comprised 4 group activities (outlined below) to discuss the development of a Scottish soil monitoring framework (SSMF) with attendees from across Scottish research institutes, Scottish Government, NatureScot, SEPA and Historic Environment Scotland.

Activity 1: What do we want to achieve with a SSMF? Objective setting – What should be monitored? For example;

  • Soil health status – a record of physical, biological, chemical characteristics at a given moment in time and space.
  • Soil vulnerability to risk – climate and weather resilience, contamination and diffuse pollution risks, soil compaction, rate of sealing, vulnerability to physical loss (erosion) and destabilisation (landslides)
  • Soil functionality – for example how soils are contributing to biogeochemical cycling and climate change, water storage, water quality and flood management and supporting ecosystem biodiversity etc.
  • Soils across land use – are the objectives of a SSMF the same across different sectors and land uses? (peatlands, agriculture, forestry, horticulture, urban, recreational and mixed land uses)
  • Should a SSMF review compliance, regulation and licensing
  • How could a SSMF inform the delivery of policy objectives and support future decision making?

Activity 2: Reviewing the proposed EU Soil Law and how it relates to Scottish data – Presentation by Dr Allan Lilly followed by a group discussion

Activity 3: Reviewing options for;

  • Baselining Scottish soils – what for and which metrics would be needed
  • Benchmarking – e.g. Is it appropriate to set targets or benchmarks for Scottish soils? What are the Pros and cons
  • Stratification of landscapes and data – how to stratify monitoring needs across different objectives and across different soil types and land cover/uses?

Activity 4: Group discussion on how we move from theory to action? Is there sufficient knowledge/data to initiate a SSMF?

Summary of workshop outputs:

Visions of a soil monitoring framework

  • To be a leader across the 4 nations of the UK and internationally
  • To have sustainable soils in perpetuity
  • Linking monitoring to decision making and ultimately evidence-based policy
  • A system to be able to respond rapidly to policy questions

Key overarching messages from stakeholders

  • Strengthening Scottish soil monitoring with a bespoke soil monitoring framework (SSMF) could make Scotland a ‘global exemplar’
  • Reviewing the EU Soil Monitoring Law demonstrates opportunities for Scotland to develop a more advanced monitoring framework that is more appropriate and beneficial for Scottish landscapes and land uses.
  • Creating a SSMF that can support and co-deliver across different policy objectives (E.g. Biodiversity strategy, vision for agriculture, flood resilience, SNAP3, NPF4 etc)
  • A bespoke SSMF would build a useable resource that supports and informs future evidence-based policy making and delivery (e.g. climate adaptation and mitigation, food security, flood resilience, water quality and air quality) and further utilises historic government funded data/platforms to provide broad scale conclusions and modelling requirements, as well as directing future research and policy needs.
  • We are not starting from scratch – Scotland already has a lot of data and knowledge to utilise and build upon. A monitoring framework needs to start with the soil properties and strong conceptual understanding of the soil functions.
  • “Let’s get started” – Do what we can with what we have and make improvements over time.

Overall Summary

There was wide support for a soil monitoring framework in Scotland that evidences why and how changes in soils may be occurring, as well as being able to better benchmark progress towards ‘thriving’ soils in Scotland. Stakeholders agreed that there is a significant amount of data already available providing a firm foundation from which to develop a SSMF, but in order to develop this further an overarching objective(s) is needed to inform the design and functionality of a SSMF. Across stakeholders present, there was a strong consistent message that the SSMF needs to be able to answer questions across scales, disciplines, sectors and land uses, as well as not letting financial constraints be a barrier for inaction (particularly when the ultimate costs of soil degradation is taken into account as highlighted by Baggaley et al., 2024). There was significant discussion regarding the types of data that may be required to inform soil health, functionality and security as well as how data could/should be translated to inform decision making i.e. how a SSMF can be designed to facilitates the translation of data into knowledge, action and wisdom. This discussion raised many questions relating to data requirements in terms of identifying appropriate soil metrics which will inform on the current state of soil resources as well as allowing the monitoring of changes in soils over time.

There were a variety of views on the use of a baseline, benchmarks and stratification. There was a view that a baseline of Scottish soils was needed even if it is imperfect. It was clarified that a baseline was just that and that it was not a “Preferred state”. Again, there was much discussion with respect to identifying which metrics/properties should be recorded in a baseline assessment and what is needed in terms of harmonisation of existing data sets to achieve the best possible baseline with the data available. Stakeholders were confident that potentially sufficient data exists to derive one, particularly through the national soil surveys (NSIS1 and NSIS2) and monitoring of forest soils (e.g. Forest soil sustainability, BIOSOIL) but that there is a lack data for soils relating to urban/suburban and recreational soils. However, it was highlighted that NSIS 2 was carried out nearly 20 years ago (2007-2009) and so changes in soil condition may have already occurred.

There was a lot of debate about whether there should be soil targets and benchmarks set. The use of benchmarks to incentivise actions and to better monitor progress was emphasised. Conversely there was concern with respect to identifying suitable benchmarks across different soil types and land uses. This includes the dependency on soil type, land use and management practices and the challenges of what defines a benchmark for multi-functional land uses or how to incorporate potential land use change over time. Stakeholders demonstrated caution with respect to the implementation of benchmarks as it is difficult to predict and manage potential unintended consequences, knock-on effects and trade-offs that target setting could bring. Stakeholders highlighted that there is a risk that benchmarks and targets lead to an oversimplification of soils and therefore the overarching message of holistic soil (and ecosystem) health and resilience may become lost as land managers strive to accomplish specific targets set.

Stakeholders agreed that a SSMF needs to represent all soil and land use types, but that there are challenges relating to how best Scotland’s landscapes should be stratified (e.g. based on soil type, land use (or sector) and/or by management) in the SSMF. It was suggested that a tiered or modular approach may be most suitable to reflect the complexity of Scottish landscapes, allowing for simple actions to be identified from collated data/information (and support adaptive learning over time). The challenge of encapsulating changes in land use and land management within a robust statistical SSMF design was identified at the workshop. Therefore, the potential to stratify or interpretation the SSMF based on soil vulnerability was proposed.

An overarching reaction of the workshop relates to the phrase “perfect is the enemy of good” in terms of there being a consensus that a SSMF is needed/wanted by stakeholders but that current data or knowledge gaps shouldn’t be barriers preventing the development of a SSMF. There was a sense of optimism that an agreement on SSMF objectives, purpose and design (metrics included) can be made to generate a transparent work-in-progress SSMF with its implementation informing future developmental needs. A key factor in implementing a monitoring framework is the presentation of data derived from it and ensuring that information is appropriately and proportionately translated to support the needs across Scottish Government, agencies, researchers, investors and land managers.

References

Agriculture and Horticulture Development Board (AHDB). (2022), Soil Health scorecard approach Sampling protocol and benchmarking tables – Scotland version 1, https://ahdb.org.uk/knowledge-library/the-soil-health-scorecard (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Baggaley NJ, Fraser F, Hallett P, Lilly, A, Jabloun, M, Loades K, Parker T, Rivington M, Sharififar M, Zhang Z, Roberts M. (2024) Assessing the socio-economic impacts of soil degradation on Scotland’s water environment. CRW2022_04. Centre of Expertise for Waters (CREW). ISBN: 978-1-911706-26-7. https://www.crew.ac.uk/publication/socio-economic-impacts-soil-degradation (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Environmental Standards Scotland (2024)The risks to Scotland’s soils: a scoping report https://environmentalstandards.scot/our-work/our-analytical-work/the-risks-to-scotlands-soils-a-scoping-report/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Forestry Commission (2023) The UK Forestry Standard – The Government’s approach to sustainable forestry (5th Edition) ISBN: 978-1-83915-021-0 https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/651670336a423b0014f4c5c0/Revised_UK_Forestry_Standard_-_effective_October_2024.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Hough RL (2024). Using new contaminants information to re-assess environmental risks from sewage sludge. Prepared for Fidra (SCIO and Scottish registered charity no.SC043895). file:///C:/Users/nb40022/AppData/Local/Temp/MicrosoftEdgeDownloads/ea300424-f0a0-4053-a73a-d429479ccbdd/JHI-Fidra-Sludge-Contaminants-Risk-Report_Updated_2025.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Jenkinson DS (2010) Climate change – a brief introduction for scientists and engineers or anyone else who has to do something about it. Rothamsted Research. https://repository.rothamsted.ac.uk/item/8v478/climate-change-a-brief-introduction-for-scientists-and-engineers-or-anyone-else-who-has-to-do-something-about-it (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Land Use for Net Zero (LUNZ) Hub (2024) Approaches to Soil Monitoring across the Four Nations: Workshop on Cross-UK Soil Monitoring and Research https://lunzhub.com/resources/approaches-to-nationwide-soil-monitoring-across-the-uk/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Neilson R, Aitkenhead M, Lilly A, Loades K, (2021) Monitoring soil health in Scotland by land use category – a scoping study ClimateXChange. DOI: https://doi.org/10.7488/era/1293 (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

NatureScot (2015) Scotland’s National Peatland Plan: Working for our future https://www.nature.scot/doc/scotlands-national-peatland-plan-working-our-future (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scotland’s Climate Change committee (2023) Adapting to climate change- Progress in Scotland https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/adapting-to-climate-change-progress-in-scotland/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scotland’s Soils Website (2025) https://soils.environment.gov.scot/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2024) Adaptation Scotland, Climate-Ready Places https://adaptation.scot/take-action/climate-ready-places/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2023) Agricultural Reform List of Measures https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/agricultural-reform-programme/arp-list-of-measures/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2024) Agricultural Reform Route Map https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/agricultural-reform-programme/arp-route-map/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2022) Delivering our Vision for Scottish Agriculture Proposals for a new Agriculture Bill ISBN: 978-1-80435-843-6 (web only) https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/consultation-paper/2022/08/delivering-vision-scottish-agriculture-proposals-new-agriculture-bill/documents/delivering-vision-scottish-agriculture-proposals-new-agriculture-bill/delivering-vision-scottish-agriculture-proposals-new-agriculture-bill/govscot%3Adocument/delivering-vision-scottish-agriculture-proposals-new-agriculture-bill.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2007) Environmental Protection Act 1990: Part IIA Contaminated Land The Radioactive Contaminated Land (Scotland) Regulations 2007 Statutory Guidance ISBN 978 0 7559 7058 2 (Web only) https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/regulation-directive-order/2008/03/radioactive-contaminated-land-scotland-regulations-2007-statutory-guidance/documents/0058314-pdf/0058314-pdf/govscot%3Adocument/0058314.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2006) Environmental Protection Act 1990: Part IIA Contaminated Land Statutory Guidance: Edition 2 May 2006. SE/2006/44. ISBN 0-7559-6097-1 https://www.gov.scot/publications/environmental-protection-act-1990-part-iia-contaminated-land-statutory-guidance/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2018 ) Good Agricultural and Environmental Conditions (GAECs) https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/inspections/all-inspections/cross-compliance/detailed-guidance/good-agricultural-and-environmental-conditions/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2024) Preparing for Sustainable Farming full guidance https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/agricultural-reform-programme/preparing-for-sustainable-farming–psf–full-guidance/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2023) Scotland’s National Planning Framework 4. ISBN: 978-1-80525-482-9 (web only) https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2023/02/national-planning-framework-4/documents/national-planning-framework-4-revised-draft/national-planning-framework-4-revised-draft/govscot%3Adocument/national-planning-framework-4.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2024) Scottish Biodiversity Strategy to 2045 Tackling the Nature Emergency in Scotland ISBN: 978-1-83601-150-7 (web only) https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2024/11/scottish-biodiversity-strategy-2045/documents/scottish-biodiversity-strategy-2045-tackling-nature-emergency-scotland/scottish-biodiversity-strategy-2045-tackling-nature-emergency-scotland/govscot%3Adocument/scottish-biodiversity-strategy-2045-tackling-nature-emergency-scotland.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2024) Scottish National Adaptation Plan (Version3: 2024 – 2029) Actions today, for a climate resilient future, ISBN: 978-1-83601-729-5 (web only) https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2024/09/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-2024-2029-2/documents/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-2024-2029/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-2024-2029/govscot%3Adocument/scottish-national-adaptation-plan-2024-2029.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2009) The Scottish Soil Framework, ISBN: 978-0-7559-9013-9 https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-soil-framework/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2013) The Scottish Soil Framework – Progress report https://soils.environment.gov.scot/media/1018/115131209_scottish_soil_framework_-ssf-_progress_report.pdf (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

Scottish Government (2025) Whole Farm Plan full guidance https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/all-schemes/whole-farm-plan/ (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2008) The Action Programme for Nitrate Vulnerable Zones (Scotland) Regulations 2008 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2008/298/contents/made (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (1994) The Conservation (Natural Habitats, &c.) Regulations 1994 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/1994/2716/contents (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2005) The Contaminated Land (Scotland) Regulations 2005 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2005/658/contents/made (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2012) The Pollution Prevention and Control (Scotland) Regulations 2012 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2012/360/contents (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (1989) The Sludge (Use in Agriculture) Regulations 1989 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/1989/1263/contents/made (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2015) The Sludge (Use in Agriculture) Regulations 1989 -Changes to Legislation Results https://www.legislation.gov.uk/changes/affected/uksi/1989/1263 (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2011) The Waste Management Licensing (Scotland) Regulations 2011 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/sdsi/2011/9780111012147/contents (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

UK Government (2011) The Water Environment (Controlled Activities) (Scotland) Regulations 2011 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2011/209/contents/made (Accessed: 9th May 2025)

How to cite this publication:

Buckingham, S., and Baggaley, N. (2025) ‘Securing soils in a changing climate: A soil route map for Scotland’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/6006

© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by SAC Consulting on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange

Edinburgh Climate Change Institute

High School Yards

Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

Soils underpin all nature-based systems and are therefore vital for Scotland’s communities and economy. From food security to transport disruption through events such as landslides, the climate resilience value of investing in healthy soils is recognised by the Climate Change Committee as a priority adaptation area for Scotland.

There are many risks threatening Scottish soils across different soil types and land covers. However, unlike air and water, there is no single overarching soil policy providing security and governance for Scottish soils. Soils are spread across multiple policy divisions, which results in a lack of cohesive leadership in tackling threats to soils.

The aim of this route map is to consolidate the challenges of managing soil systems to develop an overarching strategy for delivering improved soil security across Scottish landscapes.

Key points

There is increasing awareness of the important role soils play for our communities, economy and environment in terms of their ability to contribute to climate regulation, flood resilience, food security, support forestry and assist biodiversity. This is reflected in recent policy updates which have outlined objectives that directly relate to improvements in soil health and/or security, such as:

This route map acknowledges the challenges of addressing soil security in a policy context due to the absence of an overarching soil-specific policy. Currently actions to support soils sit across different policies, which focus on different environmental challenges at different scales. Nevertheless, this route map outlines opportunities to gain value and effectiveness through better coordination of existing activities and policy delivery.

Next steps

Objectives  

This route map recommends six objectives for Scotland to achieve our vision of ‘thriving soils for Scotland’s communities, economy and environment’: 

  1. Lead – Inspire and collaborate to deliver the vision for Scottish soils 
  1. Protect – Prevent further damage to soils 
  1. Restore – Repair damaged soils 
  1. Enhance – Strengthen soils for the future 
  1. Evidence – Data, knowledge and wisdom relating to Scottish soils 
  1. Mobilise – Communicate, engage and participate towards thriving soils in Scotland 

For further information, including recommendations, please read the report.

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783. 

Image credit: Helga from Pixabay

Podcast and blog


Dr Sarah Buckingham gives an overview of the project and findings in episode 15 of our podcast: Evidence for climate policy in Scotland

A blog post summarising the podcast interview is also available on our website: Project snapshot: A soil route map for Scotland

Research completed January 2025

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5570

Executive summary

Aims

Degraded peatlands are one of the largest sources of greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland. The Scottish Government has a budget of £250m to spend towards peatland restoration efforts through the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme up to 2030.

This research explored the evidence for peatland restoration costs in Scotland and examined emerging trends. It also investigated opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services. We reviewed existing literature and analysed cost data compiled by SRUC from the PA programme projects supported by NatureScot funding between 2018 and 2023. We also carried out interviews with contractors. Data from other PA delivery partners post 2021 was not examined in this project phase due to time constraints.

Key findings

  • Observed peatland restoration costs per hectare vary significantly. This reflects a range of influencing factors, including:
    • project-specific factors (e.g. site characteristics, project length)
    • contractor-specific factors (e.g. firm size and history)
    • background commercial conditions (e.g. inflation, funding availability, tendering processes)
    • site location, baseline condition and environmental designation status.
  • Approximately half of the variation in unit costs between sites could not be explained by the statistical analysis, often due to noise in the data, for example:
    • Differences in data recording on restoration processes, project characteristics and costs across projects within the study period
    • Wider economic factors such as regional variations in labour and material costs, poor transport networks and local competition for scarce resources (see the recent SRUC Rural and Islands Insights report for evidence of this at a local scale)
    • Limited local competition due to barriers to entry to the market.
  • There is some evidence for economies of scale i.e. larger projects have lower unit costs. The extent of such economies of scales is difficult to determine due to other differences across projects.
  • Statistically speaking, costs of restoration have not changed over time. The absence of such an observed time trend in restoration unit costs may simplify the use of unit costs as predicted by the model to future years.
  • Interview data highlighted the impact of other factors, confirming the influence of complexities and uncertainties, both real and perceived, in the tendering process. These include:
    • perceived uncertainty in long-term commitment to government support for peatland restoration
    • challenging tendering processes
    • environmental and market conditions that add risk to a business engaged in restoration.
  • This is largely independent of site characteristics but impairs value for money directly by increasing the overhead costs of tendering, and indirectly by constraining the pool of willing contractors.

Improving operational delivery of peatland restoration

  • Estimates for restoration costs from our analysis could be useful for costings of large-scale policy programmes; the spatial approach to estimating variation in unit costs allows extrapolation at larger scale, although further work is needed to understand complex issues.
  • Further research into the extent to which economies of scale are present would be helpful, as would steps to improve confidence in the accuracy of reported costs and associated site characteristics.
  • Regional differences imply that uniform national benchmarking rates might be inappropriate, with large residual uncertainty of unit costs potentially increasing the risk of falsely rejecting projects that may deliver restoration cost-effectively.
  • Using standardised costs to assess projects is also problematic because a large part of variation in costs remains unexplained. Either of the options below can improve this situation.
    • Give greater attention in the tendering process, in particular how that may be improved on both the demand and supply side. This would draw out true context-specific costs in a competitive market.
    • Seek greater transparency around individual cost elements for an individual project bid, including overhead charges and profit margins e.g. open-book tendering with agreed percentage markups.
  • Supply of restoration services might be strengthened and value for money in peatland restoration increased through consideration of the following:
    • Include contingency costings as part of the tendering process, to address contractors’ cost risks regarding e.g. inflation spikes in key inputs (e.g. fuel) or unforeseen site complexities.
    • Commit to long-term funding of a pipeline of restoration projects. This will provide reassurance to existing and potential contractors that their investment in staff and machinery is merited.
    • Ensure prompt payment upon project completion with provision for at least part payment when final inspection is delayed due, for example, to weather conditions.
    • Simplify tendering procedures to stimulate supplier interest in peatland restoration work through rationalisation of information required, improved guidance and support for those tendering the work to provide better feedback.
    • Continue with (well received) training support plus opportunities for mutual knowledge exchange between funders and contractors. A specific area for training is in data collection for contractors.

Strengthening future analysis

Challenges and limitations of the analysis presented in this report could be addressed by:

  • Exploring potential systemic differences across Peatland ACTION delivery partners by comparing the results derived from the NatureScot Peatland ACTION database with estimates generated by, for example the Cairngorms National Park and Forestry and Land Scotland.
  • Confirming that the process of recording spatial location and recording of restoration area based on site outlines is standardised and consistently allows linking area and location with records of restoration costs and activities over time. Verification of reported area estimates through digitization in GIS can reveal important discrepancies. Re-recording of samples of outlines for restored areas, known as restoration footprint, on the ground should be considered for comparison.

Glossary / Abbreviations table

Abbreviations

CCPClimate Change Plan
CEDACentre for Environmental Data Analysis
CEHCentre for Ecology & Hydrology
CNPACairngorms National Park Authority
FLSForestry and Land Scotland
GHGGreenhouse Gas
GISGeographic Information System
JHIThe James Hutton Institute
LULUCFLand Use, Land Use Change and Forestry
NNRNational Nature Reserves 
NSANational Scenic Areas
OSOrdnance Survey
PAPeatland ACTION
PCSPublic Contracts Scotland
SACSpecial Areas of Conservation
SEPAScottish Environment Protection Agency
SGScottish Government
SPASpecial Protection Area 
SRUCScotland’s Rural College
SSESSE plc (formerly Scottish and Southern Energy plc) is a multinational energy company
SSSISite(s) of Special Scientific Interest

Glossary

BiddingProcess thorough which contractors respond to the tender by offering a budget and scale of activities they are capable of delivering within the defined scope of the project.
ComplexityAggregate account of extent and effort required to restore a particular site. A combination of site’s location, topographic features, accessibility, peatland condition and land cover that determine the overall scales of restoration operations and thus represents a proxy for the resources (costs) required.
ContractorPrivate company directly engaged in restoration activities.
Cost DatabaseAlso: SRUC (peatland restoration) cost database; Peat restoration cost database collated by SRUC capturing main activities and costs during restoration collected as part of the NatureScot administered delivery of the Peatland ACTION Programme.
Cost-EffectivenessA ratio of unit costs of restoration and a metric used for measurement of restoration success such as area restored or GHG abated. High cost-effectiveness means low cost for high level of benefit delivered and thus is a common way to measure value for money.
Degraded PeatlandA peatland is considered degraded if it is a source, rather than a sink of GHGs. This is due to a combination of peat draining and surface damage due to use, extraction or propagation of plant species that hinder the natural process of growth of peat moss (sphagnum).
Feasibility studyProcess of determining whether it is practically possible to deliver sufficient levels of improvement in quality of a particular stretch of degraded peatland. Required prerequisite for any implementation activities.
HeterogeneityAccount of patchiness/variability of land cover on a particular peatland site. It is measured as a total length of outline of individual land cover features, i.e. water bodies, patches of forest or grasslands. Land cover heterogeneity is assumed to be linked with high site complexity from the perspective of peatland restoration.
MaintenanceAny work required on a site post-restoration such as repairs to installed features.
MonitoringRegular assessment of a post-restoration site to collect information on the current status of peatland recovery and any evidence of success of implemented measures. Includes inspection of installed features and sampling of peat condition.
NatureScotPreviously Scottish Natural Heritage; public body responsible for advising Scottish Ministers on all matters relating to the natural heritage.
Peatland CodeVoluntary standard for UK peatland projects wishing to market the climate benefit of restoration.
Peatland ConditionClassification of current state of degraded peatlands. Classes consist of a combination of drainage status and surface cover i.e. drained grassland. Peat condition classes are used to calculate annual emission from degraded peatlands.
Peatland RestorationA set of activities required to undertake to return a degraded peatland to its (near) natural state.
PeatlandLand is classified as peatland if within the measured boundary the peat soil profile is at least 50cm deep.
RemotenessRemoteness of a site is an aggregate measure of its distance from population centres, access infrastructure and topographic features such as elevation.
Restoration CostFor the purpose of this analysis, the costs of restoring a particular site represent all the labour, machinery, fuel, equipment, material and other resources used during the measure implementation phase.
Restoration measuresIndividual activities undertaken on a restoration site during the project implementation phase such as installation of peat dams, bunding, moss planting or shrub removal.
Restoration ProjectA complete set of activities funded within a single grant allocation. Each restoration project can consist of restoration of a single or several sites. The implementation of restoration activities can be undertaken in several subsequent or overlapping phases.
Restoration SiteA discrete patch of land on which the restoration activities take place. The area defined as a restoration site is thus equal to the area restored after the project implementation phase is concluded.
RewettingA collection of activities aimed at restoring the natural water content of required peatland. One of the key steps to reduce excess emissions from degraded peatlands.
TenderingProcess of publishing a call for contractors to apply for a delivery of a specific peatland restoration project and subsequently choosing a winning bid based on the set of defined criteria.

Background

A high proportion of Scottish peatlands are in a degraded state and the Scottish Government has been setting ambitious targets for peatland restoration[1]. These reflect various overlapping policy objectives, notably reductions in greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) but also biodiversity enhancement and water management. Primarily via the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme supported by Scottish Government and administered by Scottish Natural Heritage (now NatureScot), Forestry and Land Scotland, and the National Park authorities, in excess of 52,000 hectares have been restored since 2012.

In February 2020, the Scottish Government announced an increase in investment in peatland restoration of more than £250 million over 10 years, aiming to support the restoration of 250,000 hectares of degraded peat by 2030, as part of the Scottish Government’s Climate Change Plan for net zero. In the Update of the Climate Change Plan, the restoration target is upheld, and it is emphasised that “[t]o deliver on the 2032 emissions reduction envelope annual peatland restoration needs to be far higher than the current 20,000 hectare annual target”.[2]

Scottish Government funding for peatland restoration is managed via the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme. This has five delivery partners: NatureScot, Forestry and Land Scotland, Cairngorms National Park Authority, Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park Authority and Scottish Water. This research examined only NatureScot projects. Harmonising data from all delivery partners was an initial ambition but considered out of scope within the time and budget available in the project. Nevertheless, cost data collated from NatureScot PA administered projects has wide coverage, geographically and in terms of restoration activities and accounts for c.70% of PA restoration.

Over 10,000 ha of Scottish peatlands were restored under PA in 2023/24, an increase in annual restoration area of 40% compared to the previous year. Despite this increase, meeting the policy ambition for peatland restoration will require significant upscaling of restoration efforts over coming years at times of continued pressure on public budgets. Value-for-money and scale of policy ambition imply a need for targeting restoration efforts where it is most cost effective, taking single (GHG emission reduction) or multiple social and environmental outcomes into account. Determining such cost-effective pathways, requires an in-depth understanding of the costs that currently underpin peatland restoration in Scotland. However, whilst variation in restoration costs across different projects are reported (Glenk et al., 2022), the causes of such variation have yet to be investigated systematically. Furthermore, despite the key role that contractors have in peatland restoration delivery (and therefore associated costs), their perceptions of the tendering and restoration process has not yet been sufficiently studied.

This report examines variation of costs of implementing restoration,[3] factors affecting contractors ability and willingness to engage in restoration, and explores barriers to scaling restoration efforts related to costs and the supply of restoration services by contractors.

The project had three main aims:

1. Which factors affect restoration costs? (Section 4)

We take a broad perspective to offer an overview that considers environmental and site conditions, factors affecting bidding of contractors and actual restoration work. The synthesis is based on a rapid review of literature discussing bidding behaviour and cost of implementing nature restoration, combined with the joint expertise of the research team. Where possible, we discuss interactions between factors and how they have been evolving over time.

2. Which factors explain variation in restoration cost? (Section 5)

We provide a data driven quantification of relationships between restoration cost and environmental and site characteristics. The analysis draws on cost data collected via the NatureScot PA funded programme[4], which is matched with spatial information on environmental and site characteristics for statistical analysis. This provides insight into any systematic variation of restoration cost to support restoration budgeting and planning.

3. What are the opportunities and challenges for contractors in engaging with restoration? (Section 6)

We draw on interviews with contractors of restoration services selected to represent a mix of size and geographical spread. Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to provide perspectives on prospects and difficulties faced by contractors as crucial actors for scaling of restoration efforts.

Factors affecting restoration – an overview

A brief synthesis of related literature

To identify factors affecting restoration cost, we screened relevant literature related to costs of ecosystem restoration and nature-based solutions[5]; and the factors affecting bidding behaviour of contractors.

Cost of conservation efforts, including ecosystem restoration

There is consensus in conservation literature that costs should play an important role for conservation planning, management and evaluation; they affect ‘value for money’ considerations. The efficiency of conservation spending is enhanced if funding is allocated based on considerations of cost-effectiveness, i.e., the benefit achieved relative to cost (e.g., Babcock et al., 1997; Naidoo et al., 2006; Perhans et al., 2008; Burkhalter et al., 2016; Rodewald et al., 2019; Field and Elphick, 2019). How benefits are measured is of relevance, too: counting benefits simply in terms of area or number of conservation units is associated with less efficient allocation of resources compared to measures that better reflected actual intended outcomes (e.g., biodiversity) (Engert and Laurance., 2019).

The efficiency gains of considering costs depend on the accuracy of cost predictions. This requires the development of cost projections that reflect the (spatial) variability in cost of conservation action (Burkhalter et al., 2016; Van Deynze et al., 2022), also allowing the identification of potential economies of scale (Cho et al., 2017; Armsworth et al., 2018).

Ecosystem restoration projects of all types are generally considered to be high cost, often requiring significant up-front capital investment (Sewell et al., 2016). However, costs of restoration vary greatly across contexts and locations (de Groot et al., 2013; Sewell et al., 2016; Van Deynze et al., 2022). Factors quoted to influence cost variation include the baseline level of ecosystem degradation, local infrastructure availability, type and scale of restoration, population pressure and density, the legal framework, existing land use and tenure arrangements, land value, labour costs and method of measurement (Sewell et al. 2016,). We found studies referring to complexity of restoration works, managing and protecting safe access to sites, access to labour and supplies, and other project characteristics including land cover, slope, elevation, number of sites in a project and distance between sites (Van Deynze et al., 2022).

More specific peatland restoration cost estimates for the UK and Scotland also show great variability. For example, costs per hectare vary greatly by restoration technique used (Artz et al 2018; Okumah et al., 2019; Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022). A previous CXC study (Artz et al., 2019) investigated physical limitations to access to restoration sites. They focused on several factors – physical infrastructure (road network), snow days, rainfall, elevation, peat condition, drainage status and a NatureScot remoteness index. Further, Aitkenhead et al., (2021), in their mapping of peatland emission categories, provided evidence for strong regional variation in peatland conditions and levels of degradation. In an outline of a national peatland monitoring strategy, Artz et al. (2023) proposed features such as bare peat extent, topographic and hydrological connectivity, soil erosion levels, microclimatic proxies water table stabilisation such as rainfall or windspeed and changes to vegetation cover among others, as essential dimensions to monitor the potential success of restoration efforts. Previously, Artz et al., (2019) had also identified strong geographic divide in peatland conditions across Scotland and that high site fragmentation levels introduce substantial error into the estimation process.

Other studies confirm the relevance of factors including altitude and distance from roads (remoteness) (Okumah et al., 2019), and site condition (Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022), pre-restoration site use and land-cover.

The conservation and restoration literature emphasises the importance of reporting cost elements (e.g. fixed & variable, capital, labour cost) instead of simply total cost (Cook et al., 2017; Artz et al., 2018). Knowledge of cost elements, ideally collected in a standardised way (Iacona et al., 2018; Artz et al., 2018), facilitates the transfer of cost estimates across sites and contexts, enhances their potential to enter decision support tools, and improves understanding of the relationship between cost and conservation outcome as spending increases or decreases (Cook et al., 2017). Lack of standardising how costs are accounted for adds to an already large variation in reported cost across projects (Sewell et al., 2016; Glenk et al., 2020).

Synthesis of papers investigating contractors’ decisions to bid

Peatland restoration is primarily undertaken by private-sector contractors who are invited to tender competitively for work. However, little research appears to have been undertaken specifically in relation to peatland contractors’ business models and factors influencing their decisions to bid for restoration projects. Nonetheless, some possible insights are offered by findings for other land-based sectors (e.g. forestry, landscaping, and civil engineering).[6] Although the analogies are not perfect, they are sufficient to identify relevant types of issues.

Common factors identified in this broader literature fall into various risk categories: client-related, project-related, contractor-related, and other (Cohan, 2018; Oo et al., 2022; Olatunji et al., 2023). The latter relate to background market conditions and government policies which apply across all contractors and projects, for example, wage and price inflation or regulatory obligations. All other things being equal, uncertainty about relative costs and/or future regulatory requirements dampen contractors’ willingness to bid for projects and/or increase quoted bid prices (Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).

Client-related factors include financial and organisational reputation plus willingness to foster longer-term relationships. For example, promptness in paying, openness of administrative processes, and degree of mutual trust. All other things being equal, a reliable client with simple(r) bidding processes and a willingness to share project information plus commit to a pipeline of work is more likely to receive bids, and at lower prices (Spencer, 1989; Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).

Project-related factors essentially relate to the size and complexity of projects (and hence overlap with the site-specific factors noted above). For example, larger projects generally benefit from economies of scale and simpler projects have less risk of encountering unforeseen problems. Hence, all other things being equal, simpler and larger projects are more likely to attract bids, and at lower unit prices (Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Johansson et al., 2023; Kronholm et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).

Contractor-related factors relate to the capabilities and confidence of individual firms. For example, prior experience with similar projects, availability of relevant staff and machinery, and sufficient cash-flow. All other things being equal, a contractor is more likely to bid for a given project if they are familiar with the type of work required and either already have the necessary staff and machinery or are sufficiently confident to invest in additional capacity (e.g. perceive a good chance of follow-on work). Confidence to bid may also reflect the anticipated degree of competition from other contractors and perceived fairness of (client-related) bidding processes. For example, the likelihood of a rival bid by a competitor being viewed as strong and/or favoured may discourage bidding (Cohan, 2018; Spencer, 1989; Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Johansson et al., 2023; Kronholm et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).

Implications for costs

Given that all factors identified above are likely to vary across different projects, clients (e.g. funding bodies), contractors and time-periods, it would be expected that observed unit costs (e.g. per ha) will display significant variation. This is confirmed by previous analysis of peatland restoration costs across Scotland (Okumah et al., 2019; Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022). For example, Glenk et al. (2022) report overall median costs of £1025/ha across 158 completed projects but with a standard deviation of £4328/ha, and also show that medians for different types of projects vary between £939/ha and £1778/ha.

Reported costs for other types of ecosystem restoration also show significant (>40%) variation. This is largely attributed to differences in project scales and complexity, including administrative processes, but also to a lack of standardisation in cost reporting. Econometric analysis of the determinants of cost variation typically struggle to explain all such variation (King and Bohlen, 1995; Keating et al., 2015; Knight et al., 2021; Van Deynze et al., 2022).

Likely factors affecting peatland restoration cost

The findings from the available literature are consistent with anecdotal evidence gleaned previously by members of the research team and of the Steering Group. As such, it is possible to hypothesise the types of factors likely to affect peatland restoration costs, to guide (but not dictate) issues to explore through statistical analysis of secondary data and through discussions with contractors.

We identified a wide overview of potential factors affecting restoration costs across sites and at a given point in time (Appendix Table A4.2). There are potential relationships between factors and restoration costs, for example, costs per hectare are likely to fall as project size increases and overhead cost elements can be spread more thinly. However, costs per hectare are likely to increase with severity of baseline degradation (e.g. proportion of site with eroded or bare peat) as the restoration effort required increases. Similarly, more remote sites and sites with more complex mosaics of features may also be relatively more expensive per hectare.

The issue is complex and factors may confound each other. For example, economies of scale effects may not be immediately apparent if larger sites also happen to be more remote and/or more degraded.

The statistical analysis relied on the cost data already collated by researchers of SRUC into a suitable database from PA NatureScot data, although inconsistencies in reporting over projects and the study period (2018-2023) presented challenges. Specific metrics for characterising projects may include various biophysical indicators (e.g. area, location, topography) as well as baseline condition and access conditions affecting which type and density of restoration techniques is cost-effective.

We understand that PA delivery partners differ in their approach to profiling projects for tendering with potential implications for a full analysis of reported cost. For example, the Cairngorms National Park Authority (CNPA) has a model to translate complexity into labour and machinery days necessary for restoration, providing options for adjustments of typical rates in the process. This approach makes intuitive sense given that many site-specific factors affecting cost are related to complexity (Appendix Table A4.2). However, pre-characterization of complexity of restoration via aerial photography is time consuming and may be challenging to apply at scale. This may change in the future, for example employing machine learning mapping tools to assess drainage and erosion features that provide indication for restoration complexity (Macfarlane et al., 2024).

In addition, background changes over time may affect all projects, including advances in restoration techniques (Appendix Table A4.3). For example, inflation increasing the costs of key inputs (e.g. fuel) but also, potentially, innovation and experience reducing unit costs. Dynamics of supply and demand for restoration services may affect unit cost of restoration and also change over time. For example, contractors of restoration services may become more experienced and thus efficient over time. However, whether this impacts on unit costs depends, among other things, also on the level of competition that contractors face.

In addition to the statistical analysis of reported cost data, more qualitative insights can be gained through interviews with contractors undertaking restoration activities on-the-ground. This offers an opportunity to confirm the relevance of factors identified for statistical analysis. It also offers an opportunity to explore other factors not included in the cost database.

For example, contractors’ willingness to bid and quoted prices for particular projects may be affected by their capacity and experience (e.g. number of diggers, work on similar sites previously), but also by alternative income-generating opportunities (e.g. other civil-engineering work). Moreover, it may also be affected by (perceived) complexity and fairness of tendering processes, including the (perceived) likelihood of bidding successfully (i.e., whether tendering is worth the effort).

Such issues can be explored through discussion with contractors using semi-structured interviews. Whilst a range of different types of contractors (e.g. varying by size, location and experience) can be interviewed, results should not be treated as statistically representative but rather as illustrative cases of the types of factors influencing contractors’ engagement with peatland restoration.

Conclusion

Peatland restoration costs are influenced by a range of factors, including:

  • project-specific factors (e.g., site characteristics, project length),
  • contractor-specific factors (e.g. firm size and history), and
  • background commercial conditions (e.g. inflation, funding availability, tendering processes).

These factors vary across different projects, clients (e.g. funding bodies), contractors and time periods, leading to great variation in observed unit (e.g. per ha) costs. Lack of standardising how costs are accounted for further adds to this already large variation in reported cost across projects. Systematic analysis of the factors to identify variation and evidence collected directly from contractors are needed to gain in-depth understanding.

Explaining variation in restoration cost

In this section we use information entailed in the SRUC cost database, which is compiled from NatureScot Peatland ACTION grant application and final reporting forms (see Section 5.1). We combine data in the SRUC cost database with publicly available spatial data to determine how geography, climate, peat condition, land use and site designation (SSSI etc.) are associated with restoration costs. The main output of the work reported in this section is a statistical model which attempts to explain variation in the restoration cost per hectare across completed projects.

The model results can be used to understand systematic relationships between restoration costs and site characteristics (e.g. access, topography, land use) that vary spatially. Findings may provide answers to questions such as ‘typically, is restoring peatland under grassland or forested land more or less expensive?’; or ‘is there a trend for restoration to be more expensive in one region compared to another?’. Answers to such questions may provide insights on how peatland restoration in Scotland could be delivered more cost-effectively. The model may also be used for to derive estimates of costs associated with expanding restoration across Scotland, for example as part of a cost-benefit analysis. We also highlight gaps in knowledge and highlight areas for review and further research that could make this type of analysis more accurate.

Methodological approach: cost data analysis

The SRUC cost database (see Glenk et al., 2022 for an overview) contains detailed information on project costs and activities, and in its most recent form originates from 289 final project report forms of NatureScot PA administered restoration projects covering a period from April 2016 to March 2023. Due to issues with unreliable historic data contained in the forms (see 5.2.4), only 229 of the 289 final observations for a period between April 2017 to March 2023 were complete and sufficiently reliable to be used in the analysis. Full details of the methodology, including limitations of the SRUC database, are given in Appendix A5.

Cost of restoration of a particular peatland site is here defined as the sum of all expenses within the project implementation phase. This includes all the measure-related costs (labour, material, fuel, equipment/machinery), mobilisation costs, project management and monitoring costs (within implementation phase) and other necessary work not directly attributable to restoration measures, such as changes to access infrastructure, site boundaries/fences, location-specific biodiversity protection measures or livestock/wildlife management/exclusion. Cost estimates exclude costs associated with feasibility studies, bidding and grant application process, any pre-restoration site-specific expenses, post-restoration monitoring and maintenance or loss of income due to limited use of the site post-restoration. These non-implementation costs are excluded because they are not part of the contractor tendering process and relate to a different set of activities. In addition, many sites do not yet have a lengthy period of reporting of post-implementation costs.

A statistical model to infer the cost per hectare of a site in the SRUC cost database based on 37 explanatory variables was developed to determine which variables significantly impact on cost. Spatial variables were extracted from several maps based on the location of the restoration project under the assumption that the sites were perfect circles of an area equal to that reported in the SRUC cost database. Spatial variables used to infer cost include rainfall, peat condition, peat depth, pooled-biogeographical-zones. Various configurations of the model were tested (i.e., different explanatory variables, different units of measurement), but the model presented is the best in terms of statistical test performance (see Appendix A5 for more details). A full list of variables used in the model can be seen in the Appendix Table A5.1. and a more detailed description of the data extraction and statistical model can be found in Appendix A5.

Figure 5.1 displays the geographical distribution of projects considered in the analysis across what we refer to as ‘restoration zones’ (Appendix Table A5.4). It is important to note that Figure 5.1 is not a representative map of PA restoration activity. The eight restoration zones were created by pooling the original 21 ‘biogeographical zones’ for the ease of interpretation. The original biogeographical zones, also referred to as ‘Natural Heritage Zones’ represent discrete regions based on similarities in topography, climate and the composition of biological community. Sites within a restoration zone are expected to have similar environmental and geographical features and thus a similar foundation for peatland restoration.

Figure 5.1: Number of sites per restoration zone. FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.
Figure 5.1: Number of sites per restoration zone. FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.

Results of cost data analysis

Descriptive data overview

After removing entries with obvious reporting errors (totalling 60 entries), the average cost per hectare (2020-£/ha) of restoration is £1,550/ha. However, there is a large variation in unit cost. To illustrate this: the unit cost at the 5th percentile is £191/ha, while the unit cost at the 95th percentile is £4,483/ha, Appendix Table A5.6.

Therefore, using an overall average cost per hectare to estimate costs of future restoration projects is not advised and further information about the site is required to infer variation in cost per hectare. The average restoration cost per hectare in each restoration zone shows that, all else equal, restoration in the Flow Country was least costly while restoration in the Central Belt was most expensive (Figure 5.2).

On average, 22% of sites were classified as ‘Near Natural Bog’ in the UK LULUCF Inventory (Appendix Table A5.5), and the largest area of restored peatland was classified as ‘Near Natural Bog’ at 32% of the area restored, for the sites considered in this study (Appendix Table A5.5). However, according to information provided by the NatureScot Peatland ACTION team only 3.8% of restored peat bog is near natural bog. It is likely that the ‘circle method’ (Appendix Figure A5.1) for calculating the area of restored peatland and/or the inaccuracy of the peat condition map used in the inventory may cause errors in our calculations.

Size classInterval (ha)Average cost (2020£/ha)
1[0-10]2375.773
2[10-25]1478.852
3[25-40]1,344.1
4[40-85]1,487.4
5[85-578]933.5
Table 5.2: Sites categorised into area classes of equal number of observations (N=46 and N=45 for Size class 5) and their average restoration cost per hectare.

To analyse the relationship between site area on costs per hectare, the sites were distributed equally to size-classes based on spatial area. The average unit costs for sites in the smallest area category were approximately three times as high as the ones in the largest area category, Table 5.2, pointing to the possibility of economies of scale (see Appendix A5.3 for an explanation and illustrative example related to peatland restoration).

These averages, however, need to be interpreted with caution due to the nature of calculation of costs per hectare (total site costs divided by total site area) and confounding factors, i.e., other factors co-vary (in our data) with size. The suggestion that decreased unit cost associated with larger site size in the data is due entirely to economies of scale could therefore be misleading. For example, a high proportion of larger sites are grassland sites rather than bare peat sites, meaning that their lower per ha costs may partly reflect their scale but may also partly reflect the relative ease of restoring grassland rather than restoring bare peat.

This was evident in the cost database, where we find that the largest sites (N=6 representing 17% of the restored area; site area >380ha) had none of the complex restoration activities such as mulching, stabilisation, felling and sphagnum transplanting (one notion of site-complexity). Therefore, it was difficult to determine if a large site was cheaper per hectare due to economies of scale, or because it required less complex restoration activities; both explanations are likely responsible for the observed decrease in cost per hectare with increased site area.


Figure 5.2: Average restoration cost per hectare for each restoration zone. Zones: FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.
Figure 5.2: Average restoration cost per hectare for each restoration zone. Zones: FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.

Statistical model results: drivers of spatial variation in cost per hectare

The results provide a good overview of the spatial drivers of restoration cost but may mask any interactions between variables. The statistical model (log-linear) helps us unpick all the variables that are driving cost for a site and determine features that are making sites more or less expensive (Appendix Table A5.7). The model explained 52.0% of the variation in cost per hectare amongst the 229 sites used in this study. After accounting for the number of variables (37) used in the model relative to the number observations (Adjusted R-squared), the explained variation was 42.4%, which compares favourably to other studies (Van Deynze et al., 2022). The unexplained part is attributed partly to noise in the reported data (e.g. errors in forms and in data entry) and to unobserved influences on costs – both of which reflect some of the limitations of the data collection process. However, it should be noted that it is unrealistic to expect 100% explanatory power on any statistical model: neither is the underlying relationship between different factors often known sufficiently to specify it perfectly in modelling terms nor are all possible data available to populate a perfect model.

Figure 5.3 displays all the variables considered as having an influence on cost per hectare, and the amount that they are predicted by the statistical model to change costs per hectare[7]. Variables right of the red dashed line increase costs and those left of the dashed line decrease costs. Here we discuss variables which we are almost certain (‘significantly’) to affect cost per hectare according to the available data, i.e. those in green in Figure 5.3 as well as variables we initially expected to drive unit cost.

Year of funding

We expected that cost per hectare would vary across time (Appendix Table A4.3). However, the year in which the funding was granted is not statistically significantly explaining variation in costs. Since the costs are deflated, the data suggests that peatland restoration costs have changed over time in line with inflation. However, mostdata points were unreliable before 2017 and the reliability of data increased after 2019, which leaves only a six-year time period to be investigated here. This then limits conclusions in regards of time trends.

Nevertheless, those interested in time trends may inspect a descriptive analysis of area of restoration sites, restoration measures, land cover and regions over time for the study time period (2018-2023, Appendix 5.4).

Regions

For the pooled biogeographical zones, the lowest restoration unit costs, once all other factors such as forestry land use are controlled for, are reported for the Flow Country (which is used as a reference point in the statistical model and hence does not show up in Figure 5.3). Costs per hectare are significantly greater for sites in all other regions. Note that this applies after controlling for all other factors considered in the model. The restoration zones with the greatest restoration costs per hectare are:

  1. The Isles: On average, log-cost per hectare is 2.1 times greater to restore a site in this region than in Flow Country. The high costs may reflect a mix of greater costs (e.g. fuel and haulage costs) on islands. Furthermore, the limited supply of contractor services on specific islands and their need to travel long distances and potentially transport the heavy machinery by ferry are potentially important factors.
  2. Argyll: On average, log-cost per hectare is 1.4 times greater than for the Flow Country. The complexity of terrain and remoteness to some extent overlaps with The Isles, and thus similar challenges might be expected.
  3. Central & Northern Highlands: log-cost per hectare restored is 1.3 times higher than in the Flow Country. The hilly terrain adds complexity due to more difficult access and environmental conditions in which the restoration needs to take place.

The availability of contractors in different restoration zones may also explain the regional differences (see Section 6 and factors related to demand and supply of contractors in Appendix Table A4.3.) [8].

Peatland condition classification

The proportion of peatland in certain condition categories affects restoration costs. In general, sites with lots of peat classified as ‘grassland’ are cheaper to restore, Figure 5.3. We hypothesize that this is because the land is more homogenous and because the grass is protecting the underlying peat from erosion. Therefore, it is more likely that the restoration activities required will be cheaper, such as drain blocking. It may also be that grassland areas have more favourable access conditions that reduce costs.

In contrast, sites with large proportions classified as ‘eroded bog’ increase the restoration cost. This is likely due to the complexity and raised cost of restoration activities to restore eroded bogs, e.g., hag reprofiling and sphagnum moss transplants. The proportion of the site with peat classified as ‘forest’ has the greatest positive effect on cost per hectare amongst Inventory peatland condition categories. We expect that this is due to the cost of felling, and the associated removal of stumps and possibly mulching, before restoration activities can begin. This finding is in line with earlier analysis presented in Glenk et al., (2022).

Site designation

Each site designation is self-reported and model results can be interpreted as the effect of a particular reported site designation, keeping all other designations the same. If a site reports SSSI designation, the log-costs per hectare are 80% higher than without it, Figure 5.3. This could be tied to careful operation on-site and risk of downtime through presence of important wildlife. The national scenic area (NSA) designation has the opposite effect on costs. If a site falls into this category, the log-costs per hectare are 69% lower. This effect might be the result of better access to scenic areas and overall better pre-restoration site conditions and management. Further work is required to understand the influence of this factor.

Site use

Like site designation, site use is a self-reported category, and each site could have several reported uses. The model results for each site use are interpreted as the effect of a particular reported site use, keeping all other reported site uses the same. Forestry reported as a site use dramatically increases restoration costs per hectare. On a hectare basis, sites that are used for grazing are cheaper to restore than those that are not used for this purpose, Figure 5.3. This is in line with ‘forest’ and ‘grassland’ peat condition categories discussed above (5.2.2.3). Although the effect is less certain (i.e., not significant), costs per hectare of sites self-reported as ‘field sports’ (i.e., shooting grouse) tend to be lower. We expect this is due to the good access on such sites.

Average rainfall

In general, sites with a greater average yearly rainfall rate are associated with lower cost per hectare. This could be due to various reasons, such as comparatively higher water tables that might imply healthier peatland and thus less complex restoration activities.

Figure 5.3: Factors and how they affect the costs of restoration.

Statistical model results: summary

  • The statistical model allows us to explain c.52% of the variation on per hectare peatland restoration costs.
  • Site location within restoration zones and specific categories of peat condition, site use and site designation are significant predictors of variation of costs per hectare of peatland restoration.
  • Of these factors, the geographical area that the site is in is the largest driver of cost per hectare with significantly greater values on the Isles, and significantly lower values for the Flow Country, after accounting for other factors.
  • Forestry, both as a site use and a peat condition category, has a strong effect on overall costs due to complexity of activities related to forest removal[9].
  • High levels of peatland erosion are linked with greater per hectare restoration costs.
  • Presence of floodplains/surface water on site, NSA designation and grazing, or peat covered by grassland all significantly reduce site restoration costs per hectare.
  • On average, larger sites have lower unit costs (£/ha) than smaller sites. We attribute this to a combination of economies of scale and a tendency for larger sites to be associated with relatively less complex and thus cheaper restoration activities.

Main limitations of the analysis

While the explanatory power of our analysis lies within expectations for this type of study, it is important to note sources of ‘noise’ and data uncertainty. Apart from potential issues with data entry and collation into the SRUC cost database, a major source of uncertainty is related to large variation in detail and rigour of reporting of the restoration process via application and reporting forms. Several reports are missing crucial details making them invalid for further analysis. It is important to point out that such issues primarily arise for older sites in the SRUC cost database, and that reporting forms have been adapted several times over the study period to accommodate insights as the PA program evolved within NatureScot.

Each PA project that has been granted funding by NatureScot can be identified via a grant reference number. Thus, the sites that have been restored within the same restoration grant share the same reference number. However, throughout the duration of restoration, the definitions of sites often change, in part reflecting adjustments to initial restoration plans made throughout a project. Differences concern both the number of sites within a grant, and the area of identified sites can both increase or decrease based on what is currently considered feasible/priority. Therefore, the information detailed in project application forms can only be compared to final forms if these changes were sufficiently documented. Likewise, it was sometimes not possible to link past restoration grants to more recent grants on a specific area of peat. We recommend using the same grant reference codes for additional funding or encoding previous grant codes into new grant reference codes so that previous funding can easily be traced back to new funding for the same overall restoration area.

Inconsistencies of grant reference numbers and site IDs between the SRUC cost database and PA spatial data meant that it was impossible to easily link spatial site outlines to the cost data base. Consequently, we manually “triangulated” matches between sites in the SRUC cost database and sites in the spatial data for restoration from NatureScot PA, which was both time consuming and without guarantee of being free of error.

Due to unavailability of geospatial data for all sites in the SRUC cost database considered for analysis, we assumed that each site was a circle of the reported restoration area around a central point which reduces accuracy. According to NatureScot, spatial data has now a site ID field and the final report document has also this site ID field with cost associated, which should facilitate similar analysis of variation in restoration cost per hectare in the future. Furthermore, moving to digital reporting so that spatial information and cost data can be entered into the same data portal may reduce errors in site identification and matching of cost and spatial data. Due to a lack of a standardised methodology for the calculation of a total area of a restoration site, over time of study (2018-2023) and across restoration sites in the SRUC cost database, the account of area restored provided in the reporting form can be only treated as approximate.

Sites for which the reported areas were missing, unclear or otherwise impossible to work with were removed from the analysis. The format in which the type, unit and (unit or total) cost of restoration measures is reported also varies as reporting forms were updated over the years; and depended on preferences and reporting efforts invested by grantees. For example, the installation of wave dams has been reported either as the total number of individual dams, the total length of all the drains that were dammed, or the total area covered by the specific type of dams. Wave dams also feature only in later editions of application and reporting forms. Such issues with reporting complicate measure-specific analysis of restoration cost. For example, differences in units in which measures are reported make judgment on measure intensity in a restoration site challenging if not impossible. A more technical description of the limitations in the analysis can be found in the Appendix A5.1.5. An account of challenges regarding information used for collating an earlier version of the SRUC cost database is also included in Glenk et al. (2022).

Conclusions

  • For costings of large-scale policy programmes, and in the absence of more robust alternatives, our model might be used to provide upper and lower bounds for restoration costs. The use of mostly spatially explicit variables in the statistical model facilitates extrapolation at larger scale. Accepting important caveats regarding the analysis (related e.g. to consistency of recording of cost within SRUC cost database and the proximate approach to deriving spatial variables from reported area), information on variation in unit cost could be combined with spatially explicit restoration pathways to derive baseline estimates of expected costs of large-scale policy implementation and related uncertainty. Such estimates could for example be combined with benefit estimates of peatland restoration in a cost-benefit analysis.
  • Statistically speaking, costs of restoration have not changed over time. The absence of such an observed time trend in restoration unit costs may simplify the use of unit costs as predicted by the model to future years.
  • Prior to extrapolation of unit cost estimates for large scale policy appraisal, further research is needed to assess the extent to which economies of scale are present. This could be combined with further efforts to improve confidence in the accuracy of reported costs and associated site characteristics.
  • Because of the great degree of variation and the relatively large degree of unexplained variation in unit costs, the statistical model should not be used for appraisal of individual projects (as opposed to large scale policy programmes). However, there are potential implications of the unexplained variability for the practice of using standardised costs to assessing projects and benchmarking. Given the large degree of unexplained variability, greater flexibility in appraisals of cost should be offered. In this regard, for example, our model points to a need for accommodating for larger costs on the Isles.
  • There has been great progress in harmonising cost and area reporting for projects, especially since 2019. Based on challenges in linking the SRUC cost database with spatial data on NatureScot Peatland ACTION administered projects for the study period, a review of the methodology for recording of the following data may prove useful. This recognises that much of the points below may already be in hand:
    • Costs: clear, separate categories for measure-related expenses and project management; costs identifiable at a site level and over time.
    • Site outlines: precise recording of site location and dimensions. Guidance for recording outlines and areas (e.g. distance buffers around areas where restoration measures are implemented) to record area impacted by restoration has been developed. It might be worth to review that guidance is implemented consistently and enforced for all projects by Peatland ACTION delivery partners.
    • Applied measures: unified accounting of units (i.e. length vs. number of dams).
    • Common and unified project and site identification: ensure that the system in place allows tracking of sites throughout project lifetime and beyond.
  • Also, compare the statistical results derived from NatureScot Peatland ACTION projects within the SRUC cost database to the estimates generated for projects administered by other delivery partners.
    • For example, CNPA uses a bottom-up approach that classifies peatland restoration needs and associated costs by complexity mapping based on aerial photography. A more detailed analysis of costs of delivery by Forestry and Land Scotland could provide additional insights into the economics of forest to bog restoration.
  • Verify reported area estimates in spatial data provided by NatureScot Peatland ACTION. Re-recording of site outlines (area restored/restoration footprint) on the ground should be considered and could be incentivised and/or organised via Peatland ACTION officers.

Opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services

The rapid literature review (see 4.1.2) points to a knowledge gap about service providers implementing nature-based solutions. Our research partly addresses this gap with a focus on contractors of peatland restoration and their views and perceptions regarding business models, factors influencing decisions to tender and costing within tenders, and barriers and opportunities to scale business operations in the peatland restoration domain.

Methodological approach: contractor views

Eight interviews were conducted with contractors providing peatland restoration services in Scotland, primarily funded through NatureScot as the PA delivery partner (Table 6.1). Here, we define contractors as the company or individual enacting the peatland restoration. Details of the approach are given in Appendix B6, including the interview protocol (Table B6.2).

Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to identify commonalities and points of difference in contractor perspectives of the tender process and wider factors affecting the industry. Findings are presented here around nine main themes: factors affecting tendering, alterations to tendering, costs, importance of business diversity to create resilience, consistency of funding and workflow, geographical area of work, recruitment and skills, training and increasing the restoration area.

 Participants
SizeMediumLargeSmallMediumSmallLargeMediumNew Entrant
RegionMain-land NationalMain-land NationalMain-land NEMain-land NWIslandMain-land NationalMain-land NWMain-land NE
Number of Operators928585No data81
Number of Machines9251196No data62

Table 6.1: Study participant overview. To maintain anonymity, we remove identifiers and randomise order of appearance in this table

Results of interview analysis

Factors affecting tendering

A wide range of considerations affecting the decision to tender were mentioned by participants, including

  • Ease of tendering, which determined whether contractors would tender or not. This applied mainly to smaller contractors
  • Current workload
  • Capacity, although this is increased by machinery hire or sub-contracting
  • The accessibility of site
  • Whether the operations matched their machinery portfolio
  • One large contractor does their own formal value for money assessment to decide whether it is worth tendering

Experience of the tendering process was commonly raised as an important factor affecting the decision to tender, in line with findings from the literature (Section 4.1.2). Contractors further highlighted a number of issues with the tendering process that were leading to frustration and could pose a barrier to expanding the industry. Decision makers in administrations involved in implementing peatland restoration have some control over shaping the tendering process, thus offering potential for operational adjustments.

  • Transparency of the process: Contractors highlighted a need for substantiated and clear feedback.
  • Timeframes: knowing what is happening when and sufficiently in advance.
  • Content of tenders was too involved.
  • Public contracts tendering was perceived by smaller contractors as onerous and not always concomitant to the scale of project.
  • Tendering is a non-productive aspect of a business that does not favour micro and small businesses. Several contractors perceived that the complexity of tendering is a barrier to smaller contractors entering the industry.

The time spent on tendering ranged from one to five days. Most contractors indicated that they spent several days working on each tender highlighting that tendering is a significant cost to be absorbed by businesses. Where contractors were very keen on a project, they would visit the site, therefore increasing their investment in, and commitment to, the site.

Tendering success was highly variable with smaller contractors often doing jobs not requiring a full tender process. Several contractors reported low success rates with a perception of time being wasted. One large contractor reported that their success rate was around one third. Two further (well experienced) contractors related that they had not won any “Peatland ACTION” work in the last year although they did work for SSE and FLS and had won PA contracts in the past. Contrastingly, one island-based contractor related that their success rate was near 100%. For those reporting low levels of success, this was understandably leading to frustration.

“Do I want to put good money and time toward chasing peatland action work? Right now we will dabble where we think it’s appropriate, but I’d rather put time and effort into chasing work that will actually go somewhere.” (A4)

Contractors generally regarded the tendering process as overly complex and inefficient, requiring a level of information which could be out of proportion to the value of contracts. A particular problem raised was a lack of standardisation in both the information requested and the format required between different organisations, which increased the amount of time required to respond to each. Even those contractors who had built capacity in tendering through dedicated staff perceived that the tendering process was unnecessarily complex; one highlighted that lack of standardisation was a problem as it increased the risk that key information would be missed; another considered that complexity was a barrier to smaller contractors wishing to enter the industry . Adding to frustration around low tendering success, some contractors perceived that there was insufficient feedback provided on why tenders had been unsuccessful. While feedback on relative pricing was provided, other factors used to discriminate between tenders were rarely communicated.

“You don’t even get feedback that you can work off because everybody just goes, [the winning bidder’s] technical submission was better, and you go well, what was better about it? And they go, I’ll need to get back to you. It’s not like there’s a matrix and they go well, here’s where the other person’s scored higher.” (A5)

A perceived lack of transparency in how tenders were awarded was a key concern for one contractor in particular who considered that tendering had become “closed book” and that “it seems to be a small handful of main players who will all the contracts”. Providing an example of where a contract had been awarded to a company closely connected to the commissioning organisation they also voiced concern that contracts appeared to be being awarded without being listed on Public Contracts Scotland (PCS).[10] These points were raised as breaches in what they considered should be a fair and transparent process to ensure fair allocation of public funds.

Contractors further related that the planning and timeframes for tenders were too often uncertain, which could lead to a “feast or famine” outcome. It was further highlighted that the current funding year had been particularly unusual.

“Due to the way in which projects are being assessed and funded by Scottish Government and Peatland Action, there has been a glut of tenders recently, so I’ve probably done in the space of two months, probably submitted about 24 jobs. And you know never in the history of my working life [have I] ever seen anything quite like it, you know, in terms of a glut of workload, of a single thing.” (A8)

Some contractors also indicated that they had begun bidding strategically to account for the risk that projects ultimately would not go ahead due to funding constraints. One larger contractor related that they ran their own value for money assessment to determine whether it was worth tendering. Another mid-sized contractor similarly indicated that they were starting to consider expected cost per hectare as a factor in their decision to bid for work.

Contractor views on alterations to tendering

Framework agreements were discussed as a potential means to reduce the volume of information in tender submissions. Although easier for the commissioning organisation as they only deal with one contractor, it was considered that the approach favours contractors who have the resources to tender well. One participant raised concern that this would lead to the dominance of larger contractors, leaving the smaller, less lucrative and active part of the contract to be subcontracted to smaller contractors. Although the framework provides a simplified approach, they considered that work could be done at lower cost by directly contracting smaller contractors.

A common view amongst contractors was that restoration work should support the local economy.

“I think it’s only right if the Lewis people get the Lewis work and the Skye people get the Skye work providing they’re doing it at competitive rates” (A7)

Linked to this, one mid-sized contractor questioned whether smaller contracts could be tendered on a different basis, and offered to local contractors first as a means of developing local capacity.

“I know when we were starting up these small jobs were great for us and we even picked up a lot of like ten, twenty grand AECS schemes and they were brilliant for us and they helped us get our feet and learning how to tender for bigger work.” (A4)

A similar view was given by a larger contractor who questioned whether it may be possible to differentiate tenders and make it easier for smaller contractors to bid for the smaller jobs and allow the larger contractors to take larger jobs.

Wishing to highlight a positive example, one contractor pointed to Bidwells as an example of an efficient tender process that was easy to understand and provided a good mapping system. Another contractor similarly praised Bidwells’ efforts to streamline the tender process by maintaining key contractor information on file, reducing the volume of information that must be submitted with each tender.

Risk factors and costs

The key risk factors affecting cost quoted by participants were:

  • Difficulty and distance of site access: distance and accessibility affect costs in terms of additional travel time, machinery breakages and increased risk.
  • Winter risk, flooding and snow restrict access to sites, potentially stranding machines or requiring premature mobilisation from sites.
  • Activities: damming and ditch blocking were assessed as relatively straightforward to estimate, whereas hag- reprofiling was considered to be more variable.
  • Contractors further referred to rising costs of machinery, and wages as future drivers of costs.

Importance of business diversity to create resilience

To survive in what potentially is an uncertain environment of peatland restoration and funding, most businesses had a reasonably diversified business model, not relying too heavily on peatland restoration. Two contractors indicated that they were quite specialised, with peatland restoration accounting for more than 80% of their turnover. In some cases, they reviewed their exposure to risk and considered reducing reliance on peatland restoration. Reducing the exposure to risk from peatland contracts included working with utilities, civil engineering (dualling of the A9), estate access, hydro-schemes, footpaths, fencing, dykeing and tree planting. Many of these alternatives are easier to implement, provide more certain longer-term work, reduced risk, with less travelling and reduced ongoing costs.

Consistency of funding and workflow

Consistency of commitment to funding was important for all the contractors. Prior blips in funding reduced confidence in the industry and ultimately the amount of time committed to peatland restoration. Planning, timelines and long-term contracts could all be improved to provide a more continuous flow of work. Multiyear funding was appreciated but it was felt this needed to be more co-ordinated to create a rolling programme of work for both large and small sites.

Although progress has been made in some areas with more summer restoration, the summer gap and down time reduces the amount of restoration completed. Some contractors considered the summer gap as positive, as it gave operators a break and change of scene to alleviate the monotony of peatland restoration.

Improving the diversity of funding was considered a good idea to reduce reliance on Government funding. If Government funding was to be reduced in the future it was suggested to apply gradual tapering rather than the sudden drop that many contractors experienced when the renewable obligation was suddenly stopped for windfarm construction.

Although a few years away, an early indication of the Scottish Governments long term strategy for funding restoration post 2030 would be appreciated to signal long-term commitment to the sector.

Geographical area of work

Most contractors were willing to travel, with some Scotland based contractors working in Ireland and England. The reasons for the travel were partially to diversify the business and provide new experiences for the business and operators. Most businesses preferred to work in their local area, but inevitably not all operatives could find housing near the business base and had to travel anyway. In some cases, contractors may drive up to an hour from their home base, followed by another ½ hour transiting to the sites via an access track. Finding suitable accommodation for staff is an issue in some cases.

Recruitment and skills

Contractors highlighted the importance of rural skills for working on peatlands efficiently. A key requirement voiced by contractors was the ability to ‘read the landscape and the conditions’. Technical skills in operating diggers and machinery were important, but not as critical as knowing how to move the machine on soft ground which was harder to come by and essential to avoid accidents and bogging. Ideal candidates for recruitment were those with hill experience; “farm kids” (A1) or “ex shepherds, stalkers and gamekeepers [who have] been on the hill most of their lives” (A3).

Fortunately, in terms of operator skills it was considered that due to the video gaming industry there were plenty of competent young people who could quickly learn how to operate diggers, and this aspect is not a problem for the businesses. The key issue requiring training was once on site and reading the landscape, which requires time and perseverance.

Retention of staff, particularly younger members present problems with staff leaving for less repetitive jobs or easier working conditions in civil engineering. Businesses try to combat this by offering variability of work and location, or through benefits such as a four- day week.

It was acknowledged that a wider range of skills is now requested of operators, principally mapping and GIS skills. In the case of smaller businesses this presented problems adding to workloads and need for upskilling. One large contractor questioned whether placing additional demands on operators was the most effective way to monitor work, believing that measurement could be undertaken more efficiently by a dedicated third party. Other (typically mid-sized and larger) contractors indicated that they had invested in IT and mapping capabilities.

Peatland ACTION funded training and apprenticeships were being used and appreciated.

Increasing and using restoration capacity

In circumstances where contractors perceived there to be a funding cut, they were not considering increasing their capacity. It was accepted that over time the amount of available work would increase. Using current capacity more efficiently was the approach being taken. Most contractors did not see evidence of additional work coming forward.[11] The issue for increasing the area restored was not related to capacity.

Current capacity is underutilised due to:

  • Uncertainty of funding, leading to contractors looking for other work to reduce risk.
  • Poor work stream planning that leads to uncertainty and reduces contractor ability to plan and expand operations.
  • A hiatus in contract confirmation after end of March which leads to bunching of contracts, reducing capability to complete within a given timescale.
  • Summer working with long daylight would utilise the current capacity to restore substantially more hectares. Breeding birds are the main factor reducing or stopping restoration through the summer. Generally, restrictions on estates regards stalking seasons is now less of a problem as it is understood that by good planning both operations can coexist.
  • Some contractors were aware that the Peatland Code and collection of information was delaying contracts and made planning more difficult.

Conclusions

Combining the results from the data analysis and the interviews, we can draw the following conclusions on the questions posed by this research.

The interviews with contractors offer insight into the industry’s views and perceptions regarding the tendering process and further engagement with peatland restoration as a business opportunity. Below is a synthesis of findings and options that may help address identified issues.

  • Confidence in future funding is critical for contractors working in the industry. Unexpected reductions in funding reduce contractor confidence and may deter investment. Therefore, funding should ideally be consistent within years, based on a long-term commitment to peatland restoration post 2030 that reflects the importance of restoration to address the twin climate and biodiversity crises. Interest and trust between funder and contractors may also be strengthened if information on how peatland restoration is funded post 2030 involved contractors at a very early stage.
  • The tender process and its transparency were factors that concerned all contractors. Current tendering processes were considered to favour larger contractors with specific staff to respond to tenders. The amount of information required, whether the information was used and the ability to receive meaningful feedback were all factors affecting contractors’ willingness to tender. A review of tenders and information required and how that is achieved would encourage a wider range of contractors to engage and tender. Such a review may focus on simplification and proportionality. Consideration might be given to whether basic tendering information could be submitted on an annual (rather than project) basis to stop repetition of effort. A review might also include guidelines for providing substantiated post tender feedback, as several respondents were unclear on how to improve future tenders. Improved feedback could lead to less contractor comeback and a greater willingness to tender.
  • Underlying the contractor conversations was that they seek to provide good value for money whilst making a profit in a highly variable environment. All the contractors interviewed valued their reputation and wanted to produce quality restoration. Clearly, tendering requires a balance between bureaucracy and accountability. However, a degree of pragmatism is necessary in light of the urgency for action to counter the twin climate and biodiversity crises. Consequently, the amount of information required as part of the tendering process should ideally be concomitant to the scale of work.
  • Access to sites was seen as a key factor influencing the decision to tender (and also the cost of restoration). Poor and long-distance access increases both costs and risk. The purchase of specialised machinery to carry crews to the work site is required and the additional transit time reduces the length of the working day. In addition, poor and rough access results in machinery breakage and costly down time. To improve access conditions, in future any access granted under planning permission could allow for neighbours to use the access for the purposes of land management. There are cases of adjacent road standard tracks to sites that could not be used as they were on neighbouring land. Further considerations might include improving affordable rural housing to increase rural workers and reduce unsustainable travelling.
  • Concerns were raised about consistency of funding and projects across the year. Peatland restoration generally has a short window of operation in the autumn, winter and early spring. This is further shortened due to heavy snow. Historical and current precedents of cuts in funding have made contractors very wary. Contractors suggested that diversified funding may help this situation. In response to this, options to assist contractors should be explored to identify and pursue diversified funding sources to reduce risk and increase contractor confidence.
  • One opportunity to diversify funding sources lies in improved coordination of environmental projects. Currently there appears little or no coordination of environmental projects. With coordination, peatland restoration contracts could seamlessly run into river restoration contracts. Likewise, Scottish Water have many long-term infrastructure projects that could fill gaps in contractor work. Thus, a more continuous flow of conservation work could be achieved through improved planning and coordination of work across the land-based sector to better integrate peatland restoration contracts with, for example, river restoration and Scottish Water projects.
  • Anecdotal evidence suggests that birds are less disturbed by consistent on-site presence than is recorded in scientific literature. A review of bird disturbance policy based on scientific evidence may thus help reducing down time and reducing uncertainty when tendering. To further reduce perceived uncertainty for contractors, low altitude contracts might be retained to cover periods of long-lasting snow.
  • To stimulate investment, there is potential for interest free government backed loans for startups/early growth businesses. Consistency of projects would enable more assured payback of finance. In this regard, it might be worth to explore suitability of existing schemes and further opportunities to ease access to interest free government backed loans for startups/early growth.
  • Training and apprenticeships for delivery of restoration works are of high value to individuals and businesses interested in entering the market, and should continue to be financially supported.

Conclusions

The research findings presented in this report reflect a rapid synthesis of the literature and our research team’s own expertise plus statistical analysis of cost data compiled from NatureScot administered Peatland ACTION (PA) projects and qualitive interviews with peatland restoration contractors. We have identified a multitude of factors affecting peatland restoration costs and contractors’ decisions to tender for restoration work.

Whilst information on peatland restoration costs is available for NatureScot projects funded through the PA programme, the causes of apparent variation in costs have not yet been analysed systematically. Our statistical model, combining cost data with project site characteristics, is able to explain c.52% of observed variation. This is in-line with attempts to model cost variation in analogous sectors (e.g. other ecosystem restoration, landscaping).

Our analysis does not identify a time trend, but highlights that there are regional differences in cost, with higher costs to be expected for the Isles. Site features indicating greater complexity of restoration action, such as forest land cover and high levels of erosion, are associated with greater restoration cost. While restoration cost per hectare decreases as size of restored sites increases, our data does not allow us to fully and causally attribute this effect to economies of scale alone. This requires further investigation. 

Overall, our analysis points to a need to recognise that there is large degree of unexplained variation in unit costs while unit costs vary considerably across sites in our data. This has implications for the relevance of standardisation in assessing projects and developing benchmarking of costings. For example, regional differences imply that uniform national rates might be inappropriate, while large residual uncertainty regarding unit costs would increase the risk of falsely rejecting projects that in fact deliver restoration cost-effectively.

However, although unexplained variation in costs may reflect genuine unobserved causes, our analysis was also hampered by several potential data imperfections. For example, the precise shape and size of individual projects is subject to some uncertainty, which may lead to errors in characterising sites. Equally, across the study period (2018-2023), categorisation of different types of cost is not necessarily consistent across all projects nor are different phases of the same project necessarily recorded consistently across different funding periods. Efforts to improve data quality have already been instigated. Nevertheless, it might be worth to clarify inconsistencies in older data, and confirm that harmonised data collection (site specific data on activities, cost, location, area, consistently recorded over time) is in place to improve the accuracy of future analysis. 

Contractors are service providers who implement restoration work on the ground. The quality of their work is therefore key to restoration success. Despite their important role in the restoration process, there is a paucity of literature on motivations and barriers to contractors to tender for and enter ecosystem restoration work (including peatland restoration), and on factors that affect costs and long-term viability of restoration work to businesses. We interviewed contractors of different size and varying geographical range of operation. We identify recommendations that will affect cost and quality of delivery and thus enhance value for money of peatland restoration delivery in Scotland.

Specifically, we point to a need for a streamlined tendering process that is simplified and proportionate to scale of work, and that provides meaningful post-tender feedback. Fostering reliable and strong relationships with contractors is important, as is mitigation of short-term (e.g. mitigating risk of interruptions to work) and longer-term (e.g. related to funding situation) business risks. Cash flow availability might be improved through more efficient processing of payments to contractors, although delays may be caused by agents and not the funding institutions (PA delivery partners). Business risk may also be reduced through offering opportunities to diversify funding sources, for example via improved planning and coordination of work across the land-based sector. Training opportunities are appreciated, but barriers to entering peatland restoration as a service provider would benefit from enhanced support for start-up, both in terms of e.g. interest free capital provision and tailored advisory support.

All of the above aspects affect costs and quality and thus value for money of peatland restoration delivery. A revision of the modus to deliver peatland restoration using public funds across Scotland should be embedded in a long-term commitment to peatland restoration post 2030 to attract investment and offer business perspective. Such a commitment to consistency of funding is needed to reflect the importance of peatland restoration to a world experiencing twin climate and biodiversity crises.

Acknowledgements

We like to thank the study participants for offering their time and valuable insights. We also thank the members of the project steering group for input throughout the project. Further, we would like to acknowledge the Peatland ACTION Data & Evidence team and the Peatland ACTION Funding team at NatureScot for their active support of this work. The collation and preparation of peatland restoration cost data for use in the analysis presented in Section 5 of this report was support of the Scottish Government, as part of the Environment, Natural Resources and Agriculture (ENRA) Strategic Research Programme 2022-2027, project JHI-D3-2 CentrePeat; and the project Wet Horizons (Horizon Europe GAP-101056848).

References

AECOM. 2024a. Spon’s Civil Engineering and Highway Works Price Book 2024. CRC Press.

AECOM. 2024b. Spon’s External Works and Landscape Price Book 2024. CRC Press.

Aitkenhead, M., Castellazzi, M., McKeen, M., Hare, M., Artz, R., & Reed, M. (2021). Peatland restoration and potential emissions savings on agricultural land: an evidence assessment. The James Hutton Institute.

Armsworth, P. R., Jackson, H. B., Cho, S. H., Clark, M., Fargione, J. E., Iacona, G. D., & Sutton, N. A. (2018). Is conservation right to go big? Protected area size and conservation return-on-investment. Biological Conservation225, 229-236.

Artz, R., Faccioli, M., Roberts, M. & Anderson, R. (2018) Peatland restoration – a comparative analysis of the costs and merits of different restoration methods. Climate Exchange Report.

Artz, R., Ball, J., Gimona, A., Blake, D., McBride, A., & Heritage, S. N. (2019). Access to Peatland for Restoration–physical limitations. ClimateXChange Report, 8pp.

Artz, R., Johnson, S., Bruneau, P., Britton, A. J., Mitchell, R. J., Ross, L., … & Poggio, L. (2019). The potential for modelling peatland habitat condition in Scotland using long-term MODIS data. Science of the Total Environment, 660, 429-442.

Artz, R., Coyle, M., Donaldson-Selby, G., Cooksley, S., Gimona, A., Pakeman, R., & Hare, M. (2023). Scoping a national peatland monitoring framework.

Benjaminsson, F., Kronholm, T. and Erlandsson, E., (2019). A framework for characterizing business models applied by forestry service contractors. Scandinavian Journal of Forest Research, 34(8), pp.779-788.

Binshakir, O., AlGhanim, L., Fathaq, A., Al Harith, A.M., Ahmed, S. and El-Sayegh, S., (2023)(. Factors Affecting the Bidding Decision in Sustainable Construction. Sustainability, 15(19), p.14225.

Cho, S.-H., Kim, T., Larson, E.R., Armsworth, P.R., (2017). Economies of scale in forestland acquisition costs for nature conservation. Forest Policy Econ. 75, 73–82

Burkhalter, J. C., Lockwood, J. L., Maslo, B., Fenn, K. H., & Leu, K. (2016). Effects of cost metric on cost‐effectiveness of protected‐area network design in urban landscapes. Conservation Biology30(2), 403-412.

Babcock, B. A., Lakshminarayan, P. G., Wu, J., & Zilberman, D. (1997). Targeting tools for the purchase of environmental amenities. Land economics, 325-339.

Cohan, S., (2018). Business Principles for Landscape Contracting. Routledge.

Cook, C. N., Pullin, A. S., Sutherland, W. J., Stewart, G. B., & Carrasco, L. R. (2017). Considering cost alongside the effectiveness of management in evidence-based conservation: A systematic reporting protocol. Biological Conservation209, 508-516.

Engert, J.E., Laurance, S.G.W. (2023). Economics and optics influence funding for ecological restoration in a nation-wide program. Environmental Research Letters 18 (5), 054020.

Field, C.R., Elphick, C.S., (2019). Quantifying the return on investment of social and ecological data for conservation planning. Environmental Research Letters 14, 124081. IOP Publishing.

Glenk, K. Novo, P., Roberts, M., Sposato, M., Martin-Ortega, J., Shirkhorshidi, M., Potts, J. (2020). The costs of peatland restoration. Analysis of an evolving database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report

Glenk, K., Sposato, M., Novo, P., Martin-Ortega, J., Shirkhorshidi, M. (2021). The costs of peatland restoration – March 2021 update on database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report.

Glenk, K., Sposato, M., Novo, P., Martin-Ortega, J., Roberts, M., Gurd, J., Shirkhorshidi, M. (2022). The costs of peatland restoration revisited. March 2022 update on database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report.

de Groot, R., Blignaut, J., van der Ploeg, S., Aronson, J., Elmqvist, T., & Farley, J. (2013). Benefits of Investing in Ecosystem Restoration. Conservation Biology, 1286-1293

Iacona, G. D., Sutherland, W. J., Mappin, B., Adams, V. M., Armsworth, P. R., Coleshaw, T., & Possingham, H. P. (2018). Standardized reporting of the costs of management interventions for biodiversity conservation. Conservation Biology32(5), 979-988.

Johansson, M., Erlandsson, E., Kronholm, T. and Lindroos, O., (2023). The need for flexibility in forest harvesting services–a case study on contractors’ workflow variations. International Journal of Forest Engineering, 34(1), pp.13-25.

Keating, K., Pettit, A. and Rose, S. (2015). Cost estimation for habitat creation -summary of evidence. Environment Agency.

King, D. and Bohlen, C., (1995). The cost of wetland creation and restoration. Final report (No. DOE/MT/92006-9). Maryland University., Solomons, MD (United States).

Knight, M.L. and Overbeck, G.E., (2021). How much does it cost to restore a grassland? Restoration Ecology, 29(8), p.e13463.

Kronholm, T., Larsson, I. and Erlandsson, E., (2021). Characterization of forestry contractors’ business models and profitability in Northern Sweden. Scandinavian Journal of Forest Research, 36(6), pp.491-501.

Macfarlane, F., Robb, C., Coull, M., Mckeen, M., Wardell-Johnson, D., Miller, D., Parker, T., Artz, R., Matthews, K., Aitkenhead, M., (2024). A deep learning approach for high-resolution mapping of Scottish peatland degradation. European Journal of Soil Science, 75, 10.1111/ejss.13538.

Minasny, B., Adetsu, D. V., Aitkenhead, M., Artz, R. R., Baggaley, N., Barthelmes, A., … & Zak, D., (2024). Mapping and monitoring peatland conditions from global to field scale. Biogeochemistry, 167(4), 383-425.

Naidoo, R., Balmford, A., Ferraro, P. J., Polasky, S., Ricketts, T. H., & Rouget, M. (2006). Integrating economic costs into conservation planning. Trends in ecology & evolution21(12), 681-687.

Okumah, M., Walker, C., Martin-Ortega, J., Ferré, M., Glenk, K. & Novo, P. (2019). How much does peatland restoration cost? Insights from the UK. University of Leeds – SRUC Report.

Olatunji, O.A., Ramanayaka, C.D.E., Rotimi, F.E. and Rotimi, J.O.B., (2023). Analysis of contractors’ administrative characteristics in bid decision factors. Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management, 30(6), pp.2420-2435.

Oo, B.L., Lim, T.H.B. and Runeson, G., (2022). Critical factors affecting contractors’ decision to bid: a global perspective. Buildings, 12(3), p.379.

Perhans, K., Kindstrand, C., Boman, M., Djupström, L.B., Gustafsson, L., Mattsson, L., Schroeder, L.M., Weslien, J., Wikberg, S., (2008). Conservation goals and the relative importance of costs and benefits in reserve selection. Conservation Biology, 22, 1331–1339

Rodewald, A. D., Strimas-Mackey, M., Schuster, R., & Arcese, P. (2019). Tradeoffs in the value of biodiversity feature and cost data in conservation prioritization. Scientific reports9(1), 15921.

Sewell, A., Bouma, J., and van der Esch, S (2016) Investigating the challenges and opportunities for scaling up Ecosystem Restoration, The Hague: PBL Netherlands Environmental Assessment Agency

Spencer, J.A., (1989). Relationship between landscape architects and landscape contractors: real vs. ideal. The University of Arizona.

Van Deynze, B., Fonner, R., Feist, B. E., Jardine, S. L., & Holland, D. S., (2022). What influences spatial variability in restoration costs? Econometric cost models for inference and prediction in restoration planning. Biological Conservation, 274, 109710.

Zentner, J., Glaspy, J. and Schenk, D., (2003). Wetland and riparian woodland restoration costs. Ecological Restoration, 21(3), pp.166-173.

Appendices

Appendix A4 Factors affecting restoration – review and synthesis

Web search terms concerning cost-effectiveness of peatland restoration

(“restoration” OR ”nature-based solution*”) AND (“cost-effectiveness” OR “cost*”)

Web of Science Search 1: broad peatland terms, contactor terms narrowed

Peatland Terms

TS = (peat OR peatland OR bog OR restoration OR rewetting OR “ecosystem restoration” OR “nature- based” OR “nature based”) AND

Contractor Terms

TS = (contractor OR supplier OR worker OR workforce) AND NOT

AND NOT (Non- OECD Countries)

TS = (“Afghanistan” OR “Albania” OR “Algeria” OR “American Samoa” OR “Angola” OR “Argentina” OR “Armenia” OR “Azerbaijan” OR “Bangladesh” OR “Barbados” OR “Belarus” OR “Belize” OR “Benin” Or “Bhutan” OR “Bolivia” OR “Bosnia and Herzegovina” OR “Botswana” OR “Brazil” OR “Bulgaria” OR “Burkina Faso” OR “Burundi” OR “Cambodia” OR “Cameroon” OR “Cape Verde” OR “Central African Republic” OR “Chad” OR “Chile” OR “China” OR “Colombia” OR “Comoros Congo” OR “Democratic Republic Congo” OR “Republic Costa Rica” OR “Côte d’Ivoire” OR “Croatia” OR “Cuba” OR “Czech Republic” OR “Djibouti Dominica” OR “Dominican Republic” OR “Ecuador” OR “Egypt” OR “Arab Republic” OR “El Salvador” OR “Equatorial Guinea” OR “Eritrea” OR “Estonia” OR “Ethiopia” OR “Fiji” OR “Gabon” OR “Gambia” OR “Georgia” OR “Ghana” OR “Grenada” OR “Guatemala” OR “Guinea” OR “Guinea-Bissau” OR “Guyana” OR “Haiti” OR “Honduras” OR “Hungary” OR “India” OR “Indonesia” OR “Iran” OR “Islamic Republic” OR “Iraq” OR “Jamaica” OR “Jordan” OR “Kazakhstan” OR “Kenya” OR “Kiribati” OR “Korea Democratic Republic” OR “Kyrgyz Republic” OR “Lao PDR” OR “Latvia” OR “Lebanon” OR “Lesotho” OR “Liberia” OR “Libya” OR “Lithuania” OR “Macedonia FYR” OR “Madagascar” OR “Malawi” OR “Malaysia” OR “Maldives” OR “Mali” OR “Marshall Islands” OR “Mauritania” OR “Mauritius” OR “Mayotte” OR “Mexico” OR “Micronesia” OR “Moldova” OR “Mongolia” OR “Morocco” OR “Mozambique” OR “Myanmar” OR “Namibia” OR “Nepal” OR “Nicaragua” OR “Niger” OR “Nigeria” OR “Mariana Islands” OR “Oman” OR “Pakistan” OR “Palau” OR “Panama” OR “Papua New Guinea” OR “Paraguay” OR “Peru” OR “Philippines” OR “Poland” OR “Romania” OR Russia* OR “Rwanda” OR “Samoa” OR “Sao Tome and Principe” OR “Senegal” OR “Serbia” OR “Montenegro” OR “Seychelles” OR “Sierra Leone” OR “Slovak Republic” OR “Solomon Islands” OR “Somalia” OR “South Africa” OR “Sri Lanka” OR “St. Kitts and Nevis” OR “St. Lucia” OR “St. Vincent and the Grenadines” OR “Sudan” OR “Suriname” OR “Swaziland” OR “Syrian Arab” OR “Republic Tajikistan” OR “Tanzania” OR “Thailand” OR “Timor-Leste” OR “Togo” OR “Tonga” OR “Trinidad and Tobago” OR “Tunisia” OR “Turkey” OR “Turkmenistan” OR “Uganda” OR “Ukraine” OR “Uruguay” OR “Uzbekistan” OR “Vanuatu” OR “Venezuela” OR “Vietnam” OR “West Bank” OR “Gaza” OR “Yemen” OR “Republic Zambia” OR “Zimbabwe”)

Web of Science Search 2: broad contractor terms, peatland terms narrowed

Peatland Terms

TS = (peat OR peatland OR bog OR rewetting) AND

Contractor Terms

TS = (contractor OR supplier OR worker OR workforce OR skill* OR labour OR training) AND NOT

AND NOT (Non- OECD Countries)

TS = (“Afghanistan” OR “Albania” OR “Algeria” OR “American Samoa” OR “Angola” OR “Argentina” OR “Armenia” OR “Azerbaijan” OR “Bangladesh” OR “Barbados” OR “Belarus” OR “Belize” OR “Benin” Or “Bhutan” OR “Bolivia” OR “Bosnia and Herzegovina” OR “Botswana” OR “Brazil” OR “Bulgaria” OR “Burkina Faso” OR “Burundi” OR “Cambodia” OR “Cameroon” OR “Cape Verde” OR “Central African Republic” OR “Chad” OR “Chile” OR “China” OR “Colombia” OR “Comoros Congo” OR “Democratic Republic Congo” OR “Republic Costa Rica” OR “Côte d’Ivoire” OR “Croatia” OR “Cuba” OR “Czech Republic” OR “Djibouti Dominica” OR “Dominican Republic” OR “Ecuador” OR “Egypt” OR “Arab Republic” OR “El Salvador” OR “Equatorial Guinea” OR “Eritrea” OR “Estonia” OR “Ethiopia” OR “Fiji” OR “Gabon” OR “Gambia” OR “Georgia” OR “Ghana” OR “Grenada” OR “Guatemala” OR “Guinea” OR “Guinea-Bissau” OR “Guyana” OR “Haiti” OR “Honduras” OR “Hungary” OR “India” OR “Indonesia” OR “Iran” OR “Islamic Republic” OR “Iraq” OR “Jamaica” OR “Jordan” OR “Kazakhstan” OR “Kenya” OR “Kiribati” OR “Korea Democratic Republic” OR “Kyrgyz Republic” OR “Lao PDR” OR “Latvia” OR “Lebanon” OR “Lesotho” OR “Liberia” OR “Libya” OR “Lithuania” OR “Macedonia FYR” OR “Madagascar” OR “Malawi” OR “Malaysia” OR “Maldives” OR “Mali” OR “Marshall Islands” OR “Mauritania” OR “Mauritius” OR “Mayotte” OR “Mexico” OR “Micronesia” OR “Moldova” OR “Mongolia” OR “Morocco” OR “Mozambique” OR “Myanmar” OR “Namibia” OR “Nepal” OR “Nicaragua” OR “Niger” OR “Nigeria” OR “Mariana Islands” OR “Oman” OR “Pakistan” OR “Palau” OR “Panama” OR “Papua New Guinea” OR “Paraguay” OR “Peru” OR “Philippines” OR “Poland” OR “Romania” OR Russia* OR “Rwanda” OR “Samoa” OR “Sao Tome and Principe” OR “Senegal” OR “Serbia” OR “Montenegro” OR “Seychelles” OR “Sierra Leone” OR “Slovak Republic” OR “Solomon Islands” OR “Somalia” OR “South Africa” OR “Sri Lanka” OR “St. Kitts and Nevis” OR “St. Lucia” OR “St. Vincent and the Grenadines” OR “Sudan” OR “Suriname” OR “Swaziland” OR “Syrian Arab” OR “Republic Tajikistan” OR “Tanzania” OR “Thailand” OR “Timor-Leste” OR “Togo” OR “Tonga” OR “Trinidad and Tobago” OR “Tunisia” OR “Turkey” OR “Turkmenistan” OR “Uganda” OR “Ukraine” OR “Uruguay” OR “Uzbekistan” OR “Vanuatu” OR “Venezuela” OR “Vietnam” OR “West Bank” OR “Gaza” OR “Yemen” OR “Republic Zambia” OR “Zimbabwe”)

Table A4.1: Web of Science Search Terms. Results were supplemented by forward and backward tracing of citations plus the research team’s prior knowledge of relevant references.

#FactorsDescription
Tendering process 
1ClientType of client, payment attitude, history and reputation may impact cost and whether to bid for job
2Ease of procurement processInformation availability and data recording requirements and length of process may impact cost and whether to bid for job
3Expected competitionDepending on degree of (expected) competition and overall availability of (peatland or other substitute) work; can affect decision to opt out of tendering
4Additional benefits to contractorFor example advertisement through open day, enhancing reputation and bringing in additional work through networking; may impact cost and willingness to tender
5Amount of other (substitute) work availableMay affect keenness to tender but also how challenges regarding scheduling and timing of work are costed
General project characteristics 
5Project durationLonger project durations offer income stability and are thus considered better; increased flexibility in allocating work may reduce cost
6Scale of projectLarger projects offer greater, more reliable work and opportunities for reducing mobilisation costs if have machines and operators available
7Type and size of land ownership (including crofts and common grazing)Small land ownership may be associated with more costly implementation that are not easy to mitigate (e.g. access and need for taking apportionment to enable restoration on commons).  However, usually if such projects advance to tender stage, most problems have been sorted out Larger land ownership (e.g. estates) may initially offer opportunities for restoring some land at no or low opportunity cost (in terms of income forgone). Depending on type of business and business objectives, scaling of restoration within large land ownerships may be associated with increasing opportunity costs. This may, however, not affect costs of implementing restoration action.
8Current land use on peatland to be restored and surrounding holdingRestoration costs can be affected if land use is in conflict with peatland restoration and thus there is a need for mitigation (e.g. keeping grazing activity at minimum). In some cases (e.g. grouse shooting) mitigation depends on timing of work
9Stocking density of deer and livestock in areaSimilar to #8, mitigation through keeping grazing at minimum may come at extra cost. Regarding livestock, this also depends on need for fencing and the availability of existing facilities to keep livestock off restoring land
Site location dependent factors 
 facilities 
10Need for overnight accommodationCould instantly make tendering unviable if, for example, restoration is planned for an island location with an available onsite contractor; else can be mitigated easily in most cases and factored into higher costs
11Distance from operator baseThis may affect daily travel costs, and mobilisation cost; can be mitigated by longer daily hours (e.g. 10hr working days) though this may have cost implications (as #10 above)
12Need for on-site welfare facilitiesCosted in and usually quite consistent between contractors    
 access conditions 
13Challenges to access through presence of utilities, powerlines gas pipes and cablesMore difficult access due to presence of utilities, powerlines gas pipes and cables can be associated with higher cost. However, typically not a problem, can be easily mitigated
14Challenges to access through geographical location of siteIf a site is very narrow, steep and/or cut off by watercourses, this complicates access; more difficult access can be associated with higher cost.
15Challenges to access through site conditionAccess to work location on a site, in terms of the length of the daily drive in to the work location, can be affected by overall site condition; more difficult access can be associated with higher cost
16Site wetnessSpecial case of #15. If sites are very wet, this may imply a need for bog mats or more specialised LGP machines, adding to costs
17Potential flooding due to fordsAdds to risk of operation and may be added to tender cost
18Challenges to access due to adverse weather conditions (snow, storm)Adds to risk of operation and may be added to tender cost as contingency; length of snow free period may affect timing of operations and affect cost depending on availability of other work
19Presence of (ground nesting) breeding birds and protected speciesMay delay implementation and complicate scheduling of work; could be added to tender as contingency
20Challenges to access due to prevailing weather conditionsDepending on the conditions of a site, a contingency can be added to tender/costs to account for prevailing weather conditions (e.g. very wet conditions)
21Site use by public (e.g. for recreation)May affect access but typically not a problem
22Archaeological RestrictionsMay affect access but typically not a problem if considered at feasibility study or project approval stage
23Concerns about security of siteAdditional costs for security and potential loss
24Health and Safety risk of boggingThis could be considered an added risk with contingency added to tender. However, it is in practice not considered a problem
25Restrictions on Access: Stalking/ShootingSimilar to #8. Could affect timing of work and cost depending on availability of other work
26Site designationsCould affect access cost but typically not a problem as agreements regarding site designations are usually sorted before tender
 site characteristics 
27AltitudeHigh altitude sites tend to be less easily accessible. This can affect cost, through impact on general accessibility, daily travel costs (see #11), mobilisation costs, but also #18:  length of snow free periods
28SlopeRestoration of sites on steep slopes may affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain
29ExposureMay be linked to #18 (adverse weather conditions) and #20 (prevailing weather conditions)
Site peatland condition factors 
30Complexity – Degree of erosionMay affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain; bare peat areas may require stabilisation which can be very time consuming
31Complexity – Density of drains and gulliesMay affect cost through additional time for restoration for greater densities of drains and gullies
32Complexity – Depth of hagsRelates to #30; may affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain
33Availability of sphagnum for reseedingRelates to #30; and the availability of sphagnum areas that can be used for reseeding (available on site or need to import to site); easier accessibility of sphagnum for reseeding is associated with relatively lower cost
34Complexity – Slope and hydrological connectivity – required density of damsRelates to #28 and #31; greater slopes may require a greater density of dams. Can affect cost through increased need for material (dams) and/or work/time to install dams
35Vegetation cover – forestVegetation cover may have to be removed; for forests this implies harvesting of stands, and possibly removal of stumps and brush. Removal may come at a net cost. Biomass may be mulched which may add to costs
36Vegetation cover – shrubsSimilar to #35; depends on height/thickness/density of shrub; mulching may add costs

Table A4.2: Potential factors affecting cost per hectare of peatland restoration across sites and at a given point in time.

#FactorDescription
1Inflation e.g. rising wages and fuel pricesInflation increases nominal cost over time, that is, prices for goods and services paid in a market over time. However, theoretically inflation should per se not affect real costs over time if nominal prices are adjusted for inflation. In practice, companies might add a mark up to, for example, account for risks associated with inflation. Moreover, adjustments to costs and to funding are not necessarily simultaneous nor made on the same basis, meaning that they can become misaligned. Identifying the correct rate of adjustment may be challenging. Appropriate indices may be price indices for labour and energy use in agriculture and forestry, rather than more generic consumer price indices.
2Technological Innovation: new technologiesInnovation can lead to solutions that allow providing the same service at lower cost, or more of a service for a given budget. In the case of peatland restoration, there have been improvements over time through learning-by-doing and research into materials and approaches.  e.g. construction of dams, reprofiling techniques, revegetation methods
3Overall contractor skills and experiencePeatland restoration undertaken with the aid of heavy machinery differs markedly in the requirements for the machine operators compared to other jobs involving earth movement. Typical digger/excavator jobs involve excavation and harmonisation across a certain area with little restrictions to force applied when operating the machine. Restoration requires careful adjustments using bucket movements in all directions. It can be expected that skills and expertise gained by operators enable them to work a larger area in a given time. Such efficiency gains may be expected to reduce unit costs of restoration; however, expertise may equally attract a price premium especially if competition for skilled workers is high.
4Conditions in related market spaces e.g. dualling of A9Related markets offer opportunities for supplementing or substituting work on restoration projects. Work in related sectors, such as road construction or renewable energy site construction, vary across time and space and may thus affect the opportunity cost of contractors to tender for restoration with implications for cost.
5Overall demand for peatland restorationIncreasing demand for restoration will, all else equal, increase costs, at least in the short run.  However, an expected long-run increase in demand (via committed public budgets and/or private finance) may encourage an expanded supply of contracting services and exert downward pressure on costs.
6Overall contractor capacity i.e. competitionThe number of existing contractors actively tendering for the same jobs in restoration (and related markets) affects competition, with an expectation of greater competition driving costs down, all else equal.

Table A4.3: Factors affecting cost per hectare of peatland restoration over time

Appendix A5 Explaining variation in restoration costs

Appendix A5.1 Methodological approach (detailed) including data preparation and assumptions

Appendix A5.1.1 Factors included in analysis and spatial data sources

The analysis builds on the evidence review in Section 4 and previous work on understanding variation in site-specific restoration costs. For this study, the publicly available spatial data identified as potential predictors of variation in peatland restoration costs come from several sources listed in Appendix Table A5.1.

It is necessary to know location and dimensions (shape) of restored sites to be able to assign spatially explicit data to them. However, due to difficulty to reliably match many of the cost database sites with their Peatland ACTION polygon counterparts (5.2.4 ‘Main Limitations’), the site shape needed to be assumed. As all the sites selected for this analysis reported a UK National Grid location, representing a centroid for each site, and a restored site area (in hectares) was reported, we assumed that all sites were a circle of “restored area” centred at the grid location. This circle was then overlayed with the relevant spatial data and the data extracted. For example, to add the average number of ‘snow days’ expected on a site, we overlay the site circles on the HADUK grid of climate observations and extract the average snow days associated with the site. See Appendix A5.1.4 ‘Merging cost database with external data’ for full details of the methodology.

Appendix A5.1.2 Data modifications

For peatland conditions, land cover classes and biogeographical zones the variables taken from the original data sources were pooled into more general categories to increase the model’s ease of interpretation. For example, all land cover classes associated with forest were classified as one ‘forest’ category in the model, see Appendix table A5.2-A5.4 for more details.

For the costs to be comparable across all the sites, the total cost figure per site was divided by the total site area to arrive at a cost per hectare estimate. The costs have been deflated to 2020 levels using consumer price index (CPI) values from the Office of National Statistics.

Appendix A5.1.3 Multi-linear regression

We developed a multi-linear model which estimates cost per hectare of the final restored area, C, based on the spatial variables described in Table A5.1. The distribution of Cost was right-skewed due to the existence of some notably expensive sites (see Figure A5.2). In such cases it is recommended to transform the dependent variable, for example by taking its natural logarithm. We thus develop a model to predict the natural logarithm of cost per hectare C of the restoration project:

where the variables are continuous, for example ‘Average annual rainfall’ and the variables are dummy variables that take a value of one (else zero) if a condition applies, e.g. if Site Region ‘Argyll’ is associated with the site. Appendix Table A5.1 shows the list of continuous variables and dummy variables considered as well as their sources. Note that not all of the variables were included in the final statistical model (Table A5.7). Since the ‘Biogeographical zones’ are unique and cover every site (every site is in exactly one zone), we can remove one of these dummy variables from the regression and not lose any information. We choose to remove the ‘Flow Country’ and thus analysis of these results is relative to the cost of restoring sites in the Flow Country. Many prospective variables to be used in the log-linear model were likely to co-vary. To ensure there was acceptable levels of multi co-linearity in the variables used in the regression we ensured the variance inflation factors for each variable were less than 5, see Appendix Table A5.8 for the variance inflation factors of the variables used in the model. To account for the fact that multiple observations (sites) can be associated with the same grant, clustered errors for all observations derived from the same grant were calculated.

In the results, we present the coefficients associated with the variables () and dummy variables () on a graph as ‘log Cost multipliers’, along with the 25% confidence interval as error bars (Figure 5.3). For continuous variables this can be interpreted as: For every one-unit change in the variable, by what factor would you expect the log cost per hectare to change. For dummy variables, this can be interpreted as the site having this property will cause this multiplication of the log cost per hectare. Since log is monotonic, we can translate this to how the variable multiplies cost. Each variable has different units and scales, so it is difficult to compare one multiplier to another. A statistically normalised version of the plot can be seen in Figure A5.3, where magnitudes between multipliers can be compared.

Category

Class

Variable

Source

Meteorologi-cal

 

Average wind speed per year (m/s)

Had-UK-Grid

 

Average annual rainfall (mm)

Had-UK-Grid

 

Average daily temperature per year (C)

Had-UK-Grid

 

Minimum daily temperature per year (C)

Had-UK-Grid

Peat Quality

 

Ratio of site that is bare peat

NatureScot

 

Average peat depth(cm)

James Hutton Institute

Peat Condition areas

Forest (ha)

NAEI

Cropland (ha)

NAEI

Extraction (ha)

NAEI

Eroded (ha)

NAEI

Grassland (ha)

NAEI

Modified Bog (ha)

NAEI

Near Natural Bog (ha)

NAEI

Settlement (ha)

NAEI

Landscape

 

Land cover heterogeneity (m)

NatureScot

  

Ratio of site that is floodplain/surface water

Scottish Environment Protection Agency

  

Terrain ruggedness (index)

Ordnance Survey

  

Average slope (%)

Ordnance Survey

  

Remoteness/wilderness (index)

NatureScot

Site Characteristics

Site use (dummies)

Rough Grazing

SRUC cost database

Forestry

SRUC cost database

Field Sports

SRUC cost database

Deer Management

SRUC cost database

Biodiversity Conservation

SRUC cost database

Other

SRUC cost database

Site designation (dummies)

SSSI

SRUC cost database

SAC

SRUC cost database

SPA

SRUC cost database

NSA

SRUC cost database

NNR

SRUC cost database

Other

SRUC cost database

Biogeographical Zones

(dummies)

Argyll

NatureScot

Central Belt

NatureScot

Isles

NatureScot

Central Highlands

NatureScot

East Coast

NatureScot

Northern Highlands

NatureScot

Southwest

NatureScot

Flow Country

NatureScot

Table A5.1: List of variables and dummy variables used in the linear regression to estimate log cost per hectare. If the class of variables are dummy (i.e. binary) then this is indicated in the class column.

Appendix A5.1.4 Merging cost database with external data

The process of merging the SRUC cost database of NatureScot PA administered projects with other spatial data involved the following steps:  

  1. The site grid references in the cost database were converted to Easting-Northing coordinates (using standard UK coordinate reference system EPSG:27700) and converted to a GIS point shapefile (using QGIS software package version 3.16). 
  2. The circular polygon shapefiles with the centre point being the actual site centroids with a total area corresponding to the reported restored area (in NatureScot PA final reporting forms) were created within the GIS framework.  
  3. The maps containing spatial environmental information were overlaid over the circular polygon layer and cropped into the shape of the sites.  
  4. For the microclimatic variables (snow days, temperature, wind speed), topography (elevation, slope, ruggedness) and remoteness, an average value per site was calculated (for raster maps that means the total value of each variable for all raster cells in each site divided by the number of cells). For land cover categories, firstly the raster picture was converted into a vector polygon shapefile by smoothing the cell edges with a fineness down to 15 meters. A total area of each category per site vas calculated and recorded as a separate variable (for all the land cover types that a specific site did not contain the variable values were zero). The areas of each category were divided by the total site area to arrive to a ratio of the site that has the particular land cover. The total length of outlines of individual land cover features was calculated to account for terrain heterogeneity (assuming that the more patchy the site is the longer the outline of the individual features). Similarly for the peatland condition map, a total area of each site that is peatland was calculated, individual peatland condition categories were recorded and ratios per site calculated. The bare peat ratio and floodplain/surface water area ratio were calculated as a ratio of the peatland per site rather than the total area of the site. Similarly, average peat depth was considered only for peatland area of each site.  Finally, sites were assigned to a biogeographical region based on the centroids’ precise location. 
  5. The data was downloaded from the GIS software into a spreadsheet and merged back into the cost database using a unique site identifier (concatenated from a unique site ID and a report type). The further steps of analysis/ model and figure construction were completed in Excel, STATA and Python packages, respectively.  

Variable 

Inventory categories 

Forest

  Forest

Cropland

 Cropland

Eroded  

 Eroded

Modified 

 Modified bog

Near Natural

 Near natural bog

Other 

Other Peatland, Settlement 

Grassland 

Intensive Grassland, Extensive Grassland 

Extraction 

Industrial Extraction, Domestic Extraction 

Table A5.2: Inventory peatland condition classes pooled into larger categories  

Land Cover Categories 

Woodland 

Woodland fringes and clearings and tall forb stands, Broadleaved deciduous woodland, Highly artificial coniferous plantations,  Mixed deciduous and coniferous woodland, Lines of trees, small anthropogenic woodlands, early stage woodland and coppice, Coniferous Woodland   

Shrub 

Arctic, alpine and subalpine scrub, Temperate and mediterranean-montane scrub, Temperate shrub heathland, Riverine and fen scrubs  

Blanket Bogs 

Raised and blanket bogs 

Other 

Inland cliffs, rock pavements and outcrops, Arable land and market garden, Built-up, Bare field, Windthrow, Littoral sediment (predominantly saltmarsh), Coastal dunes and sandy shores, Coastal shingle, Rock cliffs, ledges and shores, Surface standing and running waters   

Mires & Fens 

Valley mires, poor fens and transition mires, Base-rich fens and calcareous spring mires 

Grassland 

Dry grasslands, Mesic grassland, Seasonally wet and wet grasslands, Alpine and subalpine grasslands 

Table A5.3: Land cover classes pooled into larger categories

Restoration Zones

Biogeographical Zones 

Argyll 

Argyll West and Islands 

Central Belt 

West Central Belt 

Isles  

Coll, Tiree and the Western Isles, Orkney and North Caithness, Shetland, Western Seaboard 

Central Highlands 

Central Highlands, Cairngorms Massif, East Lochaber, Loch Lomond, The Trossachs and Breadalbane 

East Coast  

North East Coastal Plain, North East Glens, Eastern Lowlands 

Northern Highlands 

North West Seaboard, Northern Highlands, Western Highlands 

Flow Country 

The Peatlands of Caithness and Sutherland 

Borders  

Western Southern Uplands and Inner Solway, Border Hills 

Table A5.4: Biogeographical zones pooled into larger Restoration zones

  1. Peatland Condition

Area (ha)

Percent of restored peat area

Cropland

5

0%

Other

9

0%

Grassland

108

1%

Extraction

328

3%

Forest

1711

17%

Modified Bog

1764

18%

Eroded

2860

29%

Near Natural Bog

3171

32%

All

9956

100%

  1. Site Designation

Count

Percent of sites

SPA

22

9%

SAC

27

11%

NSA

28

12%

NNR

39

16%

Other

54

23%

SSSI

56

23%

No Designation

103

43%

Multiple Designations

53

22%

  1. Site Use

Count

Percent of sites

Rough Grazing

76

32%

Forestry

20

8%

Field Sports

45

19%

Deer Management

110

46%

Biodiversity Conservation

92

38%

Other Use

22

9%

No use

26

11%

Multiple uses

104

44%

Table A5.5: Percentage of total area of restored sites falling into each: a) peatland condition category as defined by the Inventory peat condition map; b) Site designation, and c) Land use as reported on the final report forms for NatureScot Peatland Action.

Appendix A5.1.5 Main limitations

A major source of uncertainty is related to large variation in detail and rigor of reporting of the restoration process via application and reporting forms. Several reports are missing crucial details that make them invalid for further analysis limiting the power of studies such as this.

Each project that has been granted funding by NatureScot can be identified via a grant reference number. Thus, the sites that have been restored within the same restoration grant share the same reference number. However, throughout the duration of projects, the definitions of sites often change. This includes both the number of sites within a grant, and the area of identified sites can both increase or decrease based on what is currently considered feasible/priority. Therefore, the information entailed in project application forms can only be compared to final forms if these changes were sufficiently documented.

For deriving site area and overlay with GIS information, the circular site outline approach was chosen due to difficulty to reliably link a substantial number of the sites from the cost database with spatial data from Peatland ACTION that contains both centroids and site outlines. The grant reference numbers are often inconsistent between cost database and spatial information, and the number, area, account of applied measures and grant amounts often do not match between the information sources. Consequently, we had to manually “triangulate” matches between sites in the cost database and sites in the spatial data from Peatland ACTION, which was both time consuming and without guarantee of being free of error.

Due to a lack of a unified methodology for calculation of a total area of a restoration site, over time and across sites in the database, the account of area restored provided in the reporting form can be only treated as approximate. Sites for which the reported areas were missing, unclear or otherwise impossible to work with were removed from the analysis. As mentioned above, the site areas were in some cases also pooled together within the same project, and thus arriving at a reliable area estimate for the individual sites was difficult.

The format in which the type, unit and (unit or total) cost of restoration measures is reported also varies as application and reporting forms were updated over the years, and depending on reporting efforts invested by grantees. For example, the installation of wave dams has been reported either as the total number of individual dams, the total length of all the dams combined, or the total area covered by the specific type of dams. Wave dams also feature only in later editions of application and reporting forms. Such issues with reporting complicate measure-specific analysis of restoration cost. For example, differences in units in which measures are reported make judgment on measure intensity in a restoration site challenging if not impossible.

Figure A5.1: An example of populating the circular polygons with the cropped spatial features (In this case different colours represent individual land cover classes).  

Appendix A5.2 Supplementary results

Figure A5.2: Distribution of costs considered in the analysis after deflation to 2020 levels.  

Variable

Mean

Std. Dev.

5th percentile

95th percentile

Cost per hectare (£/ha)

1549.70

1500.49

190.54

4482.95

Ratio of bare peat

0.00

0.01

0

0.02

Ratio of floodplains/surface waters

0.00

0.01

0

0.01

Snow days per year

28.70

15.06

5.17

55.94

Average wind speed (m/s)

5.98

1.43

3.85

8.62

Annual rainfall (mm)

1679.70

543.40

978.93

2770.40

Average peat depth (cm)

83.11

37.15

25.00

151.18

Terrain ruggedness (index)

191.66

163.14

20.62

489.31

Site cover heterogeneity (m)

390.23

452.66

110.82

750.06

Peat condition (site ratio)

    

Forest

0.19

0.34

0

1.00

Eroded

0.20

0.32

0

0.89

Modified

0.11

0.19

0

0.55

Near Natural

0.22

0.34

0

0.98

Other

0.00

0.01

0

0.00

Grassland

0.01

0.05

0

0.08

Extraction

0.02

0.11

0

0.11

Table A5.6: Descriptive statistics of explanatory variable data and cost per hectare of sites, N=229.

In Figure A5.3, we plot the same figure as Figure 5.3 in the main text, but we divide the multiplier by the standard deviation of the variable so that the magnitude of the multipliers can be compared between variables.

Figure A5.3: Normalised Log of the Cost per hectare multipliers (i.e. coefficients in the regression) according to the multi-linear model. For continuous variables, (e.g. average rainfall) this can be interpreted as for every one standard deviation, the log of the cost per hectare increases by the multiplier represented by the dot. For dummy (binary) variables (e.g. region), can be interpreted as the site having that property will increase the log cost per hectare by the multiplier. Positive log of the cost multipliers (right of the red line) implies increasing the variable increases the cost and vice-versa for negative log cost multipliers. If the entry is green, then the multiplier is significant (p<0.05). In this case magnitude of multipliers can be compared.

 

Coefficient

Standard error

z-value

P>|z|

[0.025

0.975]

Proportion of bare peat

0.0681

0.054

1.266

0.205

-0.037

0.174

Prop. of floodplain/surf. waters

-0.0827

0.035

-2.339

0.019

-0.152

-0.013

Average Wind Speed

-0.0324

0.081

-0.402

0.687

-0.19

0.125

Average rainfall

-0.2711

0.106

-2.564

0.01

-0.478

-0.064

Average peat depth

-0.0594

0.064

-0.926

0.354

-0.185

0.066

Average ruggedness

0.0006

0.075

0.008

0.993

-0.146

0.147

Terrain heterogeneity

0.0334

0.032

1.058

0.29

-0.029

0.095

Site use forestry

-0.2395

0.096

-2.504

0.012

-0.427

-0.052

Site use grazing

0.1622

0.075

2.168

0.03

0.016

0.309

Site use field sports

-0.2271

0.288

-0.788

0.431

-0.792

0.338

Site use deer management

-0.0029

0.154

-0.019

0.985

-0.304

0.298

Site use biodiversity cons.

0.0456

0.168

0.272

0.786

-0.283

0.374

Site use other

-0.1757

0.201

-0.873

0.383

-0.57

0.219

SSSI

0.686

0.223

3.078

0.002

0.249

1.123

SAC

-0.2711

0.277

-0.979

0.328

-0.814

0.272

SPA

-0.1592

0.185

-0.86

0.39

-0.522

0.204

NSA

-0.6967

0.277

-2.517

0.012

-1.239

-0.154

NNR

0.3248

0.311

1.045

0.296

-0.284

0.934

Other designation

-0.1531

0.171

-0.894

0.371

-0.489

0.183

Prop. peat cond. forest

0.2808

0.085

3.306

0.001

0.114

0.447

Prop. peat condition eroded

0.2391

0.081

2.949

0.003

0.08

0.398

Prop. peat cond. modified bog

-0.0908

0.047

-1.949

0.051

-0.182

0.001

Prop. peat cond. near natural

-0.0213

0.088

-0.242

0.809

-0.194

0.151

Prop. peat condition other

0.0083

0.042

0.2

0.841

-0.073

0.09

Prop. peat condition grassland

-0.1133

0.054

-2.09

0.037

-0.22

-0.007

Prop. peat condition extraction

-0.1224

0.07

-1.742

0.081

-0.26

0.015

Zone Argyll

1.158

0.431

2.689

0.007

0.314

2.002

Zone Central Belt

0.7648

0.422

1.811

0.07

-0.063

1.593

Zone Isles

2.0428

0.352

5.797

0

1.352

2.733

Zone Central Highlands

1.4913

0.426

3.503

0

0.657

2.326

Zone East Coast

0.9365

0.373

2.514

0.012

0.206

1.667

Zone Northern Highlands

1.1248

0.413

2.725

0.006

0.316

1.934

Zone South West

0.8308

0.327

2.54

0.011

0.19

1.472

Year 2018/2019

-0.043

0.232

-0.185

0.853

-0.499

0.413

Year 2019/2020

0.1503

0.203

0.74

0.459

-0.248

0.548

Year 2020/2021

-0.0105

0.192

-0.055

0.956

-0.387

0.366

Year 2021/2022

0.1056

0.258

0.409

0.683

-0.4

0.612

Year 2022/2023

0.0486

0.385

0.126

0.9

-0.707

0.804

       

Table A5.7: Ordinary least squared regression of log of the cost per hectare.

Variable

VIF

constant

123.1919

Proportion of bare peat

1.249553

Proportion of flood plain

1.186187

Average wind speed

2.363117

Average rainfall

4.79262

Average peat depth

1.935288

Average ruggedness

3.198891

Terrain heterogeneity

1.708854

Site use forestry

1.568768

Site use field sports

3.643887

Site use deer management

2.73706

Site use biodiversity conservation

1.934092

Site use other

1.549223

SSSI

2.682824

SAC

2.018384

SPA

1.462261

NSA

2.738603

NNR

3.915651

Other designation

1.476853

Proportion peat condition forest

4.666531

Proportion peat condition eroded

3.073554

Proportion peat condition modified bog

1.589749

Proportion peat condition near natural

3.936502

Proportion peat condition other

1.356258

Proportion peat condition grassland

1.679904

Proportion peat condition extraction

1.691232

Zone Argyll

3.050752

Zone Central Belt

2.479631

Zone Isles

2.778177

Zone Central Highlands

4.194155

Zone East Coast

1.638507

Zone Northern Highlands

4.0296

Zone Southwest

3.898588

Year 2018/2019

2.705031

Year 2019/2020

2.128802

Year 2020/2021

1.909482

Year 2021/2022

2.277006

Year 2022/2023

2.325957

Table A5.8: Variance inflation factors (VIF) of the variables used in the log-linear model demonstrating the level of multi-collinearity. Variables were only included in the main model if the VIF<5.

Appendix A5.3 Additional information on economies of scale in peatland restoration with illustrative examples

Economies of scale arise at least partly from a contractor being able to spread fixed overhead costs for a project across a larger area. The literature review and interviews with contactors suggest that two main overhead costs are relevant: project tendering costs (i.e. the time and effort expended on submitting a bid) and project mobilization costs (i.e. the initial costs of getting equipment and materials on-site). Hence, whilst information on overhead costs was not sought explicitly through this research, some initial indicative analysis is possible.

To a first approximation, the costs of compiling and submitting a tender for a project are unrelated to its size since the effort required is determined by the tendering process rather than site size per se (although site complexity may increase required tendering effort). Similarly, again to a first approximation, haulage costs for equipment and materials relate primarily to the charge for moving a transporter carrying such items rather than carrying individual items themselves per se, implying that mobilization costs are likely to increase in a lumpy manner depending on how many haulage events are required rather than linearly with site size (e.g. if two diggers can be hauled on one transporter, mobilization costs will be the same for a small site requiring one digger and a larger site requiring two; only if more than two diggers are required will the larger site see an increase in mobilization costs – with scale still diluting the additional costs).

Contractor interviewees suggested that tendering takes two to three (eight hour) days. If contractors value their managerial time at £30/hour this equates to £480 to £720. If they value their time at £50/hour it equates to £800 to £1200. Online haulage costs suggest generic (i.e. not peatland) individual digger transportation costs mostly lie in the £400 to £500 range, depending on digger size and the distance moved (UShip, 2024; WHC, 2024). Taken together, these imply project overhead costs of c.£900 to £1700. For a five-hectare site these equate to unit costs of c.£180/ha to c.£340/ha. For a 20-hectare site they equate to c.£45/ha to £85/ha. This highlights the potential magnitude of economies of scale effects. A better understanding could be established with further investigation, including how contractors value their managerial time, the effort devoted to tendering and actual mobilizations costs (including for multiple diggers and for items other than diggers).

Appendix A5.4 Additional analysis regarding temporal trends

Area

Year

Sites

Area (ha)

Std. dev.

2017/18

45

42.7

36.4

2018/19

57

64.4

97.3

2019/20

45

54.2

54.5

2020/21

48

65.7

114.8

2021/22

31

73

112.1

2022/23

3

72

66.7

Table A5.9: Summary statistics outlining the average areas (ha) of restored sites per each funding year.

Types of restoration measures

Year

A only

B only

C only

A & B

A & C

B & C

A,B & C

All

2017/18

1

3

3

10

6

3

9

45

2018/19

8

2

15

16

7

1

8

57

2019/20

10

2

9

9

7

0

8

45

2020/21

10

11

3

16

2

4

2

48

2021/22

6

6

0

13

1

2

3

31

2022/23

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

3

Total

35

34

30

67

23

10

30

229

Table A5.10: Number of sites restored using a measure category (A – dams & blocking, B – surface measures (bunding, mulching, replanting), C – forest & scrub removal) per funding year.

Land cover

Year

Shrub

Mires & Fens

Raised & Blanked Bogs

Woodland

Grassland

Other

2017/18

357.2

2.4

1147.8

22.3

324.7

73.1

2018/19

195.0

60.7

1689.2

204.0

1265.6

162.3

2019/20

311.1

6.7

1354.9

101.8

357.3

289.6

2020/21

467.2

6.7

1569.1

53.8

668.4

238.6

2021/22

232.5

1.2

1644.7

15.7

121.5

48.4

2022/23

96.0

0.4

221.9

1.5

37.7

0.5

Table A5.11: Area (ha) of each pre-restoration land cover category restored per each year.

Regions

Year

Flow Country

Argyll

Central Belt

Isles

Central Highlands

East Coast

Northern Highlands

South-west

All

2017/18

10

0

4

3

17

3

3

5

45

2018/19

7

9

10

1

3

5

10

12

57

2019/20

14

10

2

5

5

1

6

2

45

2020/21

10

0

0

1

13

0

6

18

48

2021/22

2

1

0

7

11

0

7

3

31

2022/23

0

0

0

0

0

0

3

0

3

All

43

20

16

17

49

9

35

40

229

Table A5.10: Number of sites restored in each restoration zone per funding year.

Appendix B6 Opportunities and challenges for contractors

Appendix B6.1 Detailed methodological approach

Eight interviews were conducted with contractors providing peatland restoration services in Scotland. Interviews were conducted using an interview script (Appendix Table B6.1) to guide the conversation, yet allowing some flexibility for the discussion to move into other topics that were important to the participants. A semi- structured approach was selected because this is considered most appropriate where the topic of research is novel or under researched, as is the case for research concerning the experience of peatland restoration contractors.

Participants were selected for interview by purposive sampling, from a publicly available list of contractors willing to offer peatland restoration services (7), and from a list of new entrants to peatland restoration that was provided by NatureScot (1). A sampling frame was used to guide recruitment to ensure perspectives were obtained from contractors of different sizes and across geographic areas (Table 6.1).

Interviews were scheduled for thirty minutes, though ranged from 15 minutes to one hour and were conducted as video conference calls using Microsoft Teams (N=7), and by phone (N=1). Most interviews were conducted by interviewer 1 and 2 together (N=6), with interviewer 1 leading the interview. Two more were conducted by interviewer 2 alone.

An initial draft interview script was presented to the project steering group and revised to incorporate their feedback. With the consent of participants, interviews were recorded and later transcribed for analysis. Pre-approval for the overall approach and research instruments was received from the SRUC Ethics committee (Ref. 149 / 89056833).

Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to identify commonalities and points of difference in contractor perspectives of the tender process and wider factors affecting the industry.

Pre-populated brief of contractor

Add here information collated e.g. from online sources on the contractor, if any

This may include – type of services offered, information on location, range of operation, experience & examples of past work, references, availability of machinery and staff capacity.

  • Contractor name:
  • Contact(s):
  • Website:
  • Useful info:

Type contractor (can be filled and/or revised after interview)

  • Experienced & active contractors focusing on restoration
  • Experienced & active contractors with wide range of business (e.g. forestry, estate management & road construction/maintenance)
  • Occasional contractors focusing on other business & who do not systematically look for restoration opportunities

Adjustments to questions needed if contractor falls into the following categories:

  • Tendering but unsuccessful
  • Not (yet) tendering

Introduction (to be tailored and aligned with contact emails and information provided therein)

We’re conducting research on behalf of the Scottish Government and its Centre of Expertise on Climate Change, looking at peatland restoration undertaken by contractors.

We’re interested in your views on peatland restoration – your experience as a contractor with the tendering process, how you approach costing bids for restoration work, and what influences restoration costs.

Your input will help with further development of funding schemes for restoration, for example by helping delivery partners and funders in having a better idea of the information that should be considered as relevant and make tendering easier for you.

Any information you provide will only be reported in anonymized form.

On this basis is this acceptable?

If not provided consent in email response, ask verbally for consent.

Table B6.1: Interview script.

Main questions

Instructions and Prompts

For context only: what we aim to learn from questions

Part 1 – business characterization

  

Q.1 Can you please briefly explain your role in the business?

 

Helps contextualizing response

Q.2 How long have you been operating as a peatland restoration contractor?

From what background did your peat restoration business start?

What prompted the move into peatland work? Was there anything that facilitated the process?

This is to get some sense of the contractors level of experience with delivering peatland projects, but also a sense how peatland restoration is seen as a business opportunity

Q.3 Is peatland restoration the main focus of the business?

1 Could you estimate the percentage that restoration is to your turnover?

2 What other services does business offer?

3 How many tenders per year and success rate?

4 Total Number of Ha restored per year

5 Do you work on restoration all year round? If not what do you do in the off season?

Get an idea of relative importance of peatland restoration relative to other activities and scale of operation.

Q.4 What is your capacity for peatland restoration?

Geographically, where do you operate i.e. offer restoration services?

How many staff? How many of those are Operators?

Machinery capacity: number of diggers and drivers?

Could you do more Ha than currently?

What stops you from doing more Ha?

Similar to Q.3 Get an idea of the scale and place of operation.

Part 2 – Tendering for projects

  

Q.5 Where do you usually find out about new peatland restoration tenders?

How long do you usually spend on a tender?

Transition to topic of tendering

Q.6 What influences your decisions about whether or not to submit a bid?

Top three most important aspects affecting your decision to tender?

For prompting, notes and coding – see list of related points below.

Contractor business perspective

  • What is our capacity to do this work?
  • Do we have other more profitable work?
  • Does the project fit into the calendar?
  • Will this job fit in with other jobs in the area?
  • Is the work within our competence/machine capability?
  • How flexible is the contract?
  • Hassle factor and contingency required?
  • Can we make a reasonable profit?
  • Level of competition from other contractors?

Overarching constraints

  • Distance – site too far/out of business range
  • No capacity in project timeframe

Client

  • Client reputation & payment attitude
  • Good communication

Tendering process

  • How complicated is the tendering process?
  • Opportunity for site visit. If not may need to add contingency
  • How much documentation is required? How much info (maps etc) is available
  • Are there other benefits of this contract….getting further contracts
  • Return date of tender

Project characteristics

  • Duration of project…longer the better
  • Scale of the project….bigger better usually
  • Start date…too soon to fit in with other work?
  • How close is the finishing date
  • Is this an easy project or complex – how is complexity assessed?
  • Site condition/intensity of work
  • Access issues that can be mitigated or not

Obtain insights on tendering decisions –, i.e., key facilitating factors and barriers to preparing and submitting a tender. Response to Q.6 may lead naturally into Q.7 (appraisal of the tender information to arrive at a bid)

Q.7 What makes for a good profitable project as opposed to a relatively difficult one?

Aspects may already emerge from elaboration on reasons for whether to tender (list above in Q.6).

How do you arrive at estimates of staff and machinery days?

Do you appraise complexity of a job for that, and if so, what are indicators for complexity you look for?

Anything you specifically look out for that has significant cost implications?

This is about appraisal of the tender information to arrive at a bid – i.e. factors affecting contractor cost calculations.

Q.8 How could the tendering process be improved?

Would you prefer if the tenders were based on a number of digger days or specific lengths of ditches for example?

Opportunities for improving tendering process to facilitate (additional) restoration

Part 3 – outlook and trajectory for peatland business

  

Q.9 Have you taken on additional staff to deliver peat restoration, or invested in machinery over past 2 years?

If yes to additional staff:

Did you require additional training and if so how was this delivered?

Have you taken advantage of any publicly-funded training courses?

Would simulator training help encourage you to take on a member of staff?

If yes to machinery:

Have you found the additional investment worthwhile to your operation?

What innovations will help you in the future?

What are the future drivers of costs?

Learn about past investment as indicator of expected direction of business and willingness to expand

Q.10 Do you expect (the peatland restoration side of your) business to grow? In next 1-2 years or 3 to 5 years?

If yes, why?

If no, what makes you think so?

Opportunities and barriers to growth

Q.11 What would encourage you to (further) expand capacity, or to bid for more projects?

E.g.

  • Changes in funding models, if there was bundling of projects?
  • Framework tenders, improving certainty over further income from restoration projects over several years?
  • Support e.g. interest free government loans for machinery
  • Certification indicating e.g. trained supplier of restoration services
  • Consistency of funding
  • … [input from steering group?]

Mitigating barriers to growth and new models to encourage scaling of capacity

Q.12 What do you think keeps other contractors from bidding for restoration projects?

 

Perceptions of other contractors – “themes” emerging across contractors

Q.13 Are you able to suggest to us other contractors who could in theory deliver restoration but don’t bid? Do you know of anyone who we could or should talk to? (and why should we talk to them)?

 

Help with identifying further interviewees (may or may not follow recommendations)

Wrap up

  

Any questions to us?

  

Note if they would like to see published CxC report

  

Thanks and close

  

Table B6.2: Final interview schedule for interviews with (potential) contractors of peatland restoration services.

© The University of Edinburgh, 2025
Prepared by SRUC on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5570

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).

ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ
+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk
www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

  1. Restoration and rewetting are used interchangeably in this report. In doing so, we do not imply that it is likely that peatlands will be restored to their historic undisturbed state, but emphasise the aim of restoring the functioning of the area as a wetland. This is done through raising water tables, i.e. rewetting.

  2. Although the 2032 emission targets have now been acknowledged as unachievable, the peatland restoration target remains in place.

  3. Unless noted otherwise, we will refer to restoration costs as the capital requirements to implement restoration on site. This does not include certain transaction (program administration and monitoring) costs borne by funders, the opportunity costs of restoration related to income forgone (see Moxey et al. 2016), or any private financial benefits of restoration e.g. related to carbon scheme participation or transfer payments. Such costs can make up a considerable amount of total cost of investing in nature based solutions (Kang et al. 2023).

  4. Forestry and Land Scotland and the Cairngorms National Park Authority also hold data on restoration costs (as do Loch Lomond and Trossachs National Park), but these databases were beyond the scope of this project.

  5. For further insights, the search goes beyond peatland and peatland restoration only, including habitat (e.g. wetlands, grassland) restoration more generally but also other land-based sectors requiring similar contracted land management services (e.g. forestry, landscape gardening civil engineering).

  6. For example, Spencer (1989), Cohan (2018), Benjaminsson et al. (2019), Kronholm et al. (2021), Oo et al. (2022), Binshakir et al. (2023), Johansson et al. (2023), Olatunji et al. (2023).

  7. We note that the magnitudes of the factors cannot be compared (see Appendix Figure A5.3 for a version of the Figure where magnitudes can be compared).

  8. Potentially contributing to relatively lower restoration costs, earlier projects especially in the Flow Country may have been subject to sequencing of restoration measures at the same site over several years; with yearly progress entered as new projects into the SRUC cost database. The extent to which such sequencing might have taken place is, however, unclear.

  9. Note that the analysis only includes forest-to-bog restoration by NatureScot PA projects (and not forest-to-bog restoration through, for example, FLS).

  10. At the time of interviewing, interviewees may not have been aware that listing on PCS had recently been made compulsory rather than simply preferable.

  11. It should be noted, however, that interviews were mostly undertaken before an announcement was made regarding funding for an additional 7000ha.

Degraded peatlands are one of the largest sources of greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland. The Scottish Government has a budget of £250m to spend towards peatland restoration efforts through the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme up to 2030.

This research explored the evidence for peatland restoration costs in Scotland and examined emerging trends. It also investigated opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services.

The researchers undertook a literature review, cost data analysis and contractor interviews.

Findings

  • Observed peatland restoration costs per hectare vary significantly. Factors affecting cost include site characteristics, funding availability and environmental designation status.
  • Approximately half of the variation in unit costs between sites could not be explained by the statistical analysis.
  • There is some evidence that larger projects have lower unit costs.
  • Supply of restoration services might be strengthened and value for money in peatland restoration increased through consideration of the following:
    • Include contingency costings as part of the tendering process, to address contractors’ cost risks.
    • Commit to long-term funding of a pipeline of restoration projects.
    • Ensure prompt payment upon project completion with provision for at least part payment if final inspection is delayed.
    • Simplify tendering procedures to stimulate supplier interest in peatland restoration work.
    • Continue with training support plus opportunities for knowledge exchange between funders and contractors.

For further details, please read the report.

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.

Image credit: Scottish Natural Heritage

Why it is important

The Scottish Government is committed to support the transition to net zero, whilst restoring and regenerating biodiversity. Organic farming practices have the potential to deliver to both agendas. Therefore, in the 2021-2022 Programme for Government, the Scottish Government committed to doubling the land area devoted to organic farming in Scotland by 2026 and supporting the growth of organic food production.

Given these aims, Government asked ClimateXChange to commission a robust evidence review to help understand how organic farming practices contribute to climate change mitigation and adaptation.

Findings from the study demonstrate the environmental benefits of different organic farming practices and how they could help farmers adapt to a changing climate. This has informed Scottish Government’s decision-making about agricultural policy.

Furthermore, the report clarifies the definition of organic farming, addressing terminology challenges identified in previous work.

How ClimateXChange supported policymakers

Organic farming has become a widely used term, applied across a range of circumstances. ClimateXChange supported the project team in designing the research and subsequent report to clearly set out important distinctions. As a result, this report presents a clear summary of what constitutes organic farming practices, which is different from organic farming business certification.

The study included a rapid evidence assessment of academic and grey literature, followed by two stakeholder workshops to test the emerging findings and gather opinions from those directly involved in this sector. Published literature is – by definition – dated, given the time required for research, reporting, publication and dissemination. Stakeholder engagement ensured that the research captured up-to-date Scotland-specific practice and experience.

The project team had considerable expertise in organic farming research. They synthesised complex academic knowledge and mapped the state of knowledge and key evidence gaps that could be explored further. ClimateXChange brought expertise in knowledge exchange to communicate the results effectively with a wider policy audience who were not experts on the topic.

Impact

The findings shaped the development of the Scottish Government’s agriculture reform work, informing decisions on what organic farming practices to support. Furthermore, the report also informed the revised draft of Scotland’s Organic Action Plan. This has been presented to teams across Government as well as to ministers and will update the shared agenda for the sector, with actions to be taken forward by all parties.  

The Organic Action Plan is due to be published in June 2025 and will be used to support the growth of the organic sector in Scotland, through encouraging market growth and increasing the area of farmland under organic management.

The report contributed not only with knowledge but also to building relationships between the Scottish Government and the Scottish Organic Stakeholders Group.

“Thanks to the report, we learned about the benefits of organic farming on important aspects such as biodiversity, soil health and food waste reduction. This knowledge has been valuable in informing our work on the Organic Action Plan. It also helped set organic farming in the context of the wider agriculture support framework.”

– Callum Neil, Agri-Environment Senior Policy Adviser and Organic Action Plan Lead
Scottish Government

“The report was really helpful, particularly for our agricultural reform work, highlighting that organic farming is not a uniform set of practices. This provides a more holistic approach that farmers and crofters can take in selecting from a list of measures they can adopt to increase the sustainability of agriculture.”

– Stephanie Davies, Senior Agri-Environment Policy Adviser
Scottish Government

Related reports

Organic farming, net zero impacts and the impact of a changing climate

The potential for an agroecological approach in Scotland: Policy brief

Related links

Agricultural Reform Route Map

Biodiversity: delivery plan 2024 to 2030

The planning system in Scotland provides opportunities to adapt to current and future risks from climate change, and the potential to promote nature recovery and restoration.

Development planning, which outlines how places should change and where development should and should not happen, requires planning authorities to publish local development plans. These should account for and address current and future climate risks, and enable places to adapt accordingly. Accurate data, identifing geographic features such as rivers and utilities, is vital for the creation of effective plans with a sound evidence base to evaluate climate risks.

This project explored the geospatial resources that are available to planning authorities, with a view to improving access to geospatial data on climate risk. The research involved an evidence review and stakeholder engagement with planning authorities at various stages of evidence report development.

The report identifies existing data, data gaps, barriers and resources needed for evidence-based planning and delivery.

Findings

  • A wide range of data is required to assess climate vulnerabilities and impacts, some of which require substantial climate and data expertise to interpret.
  • Most required data is free for planning authorities.
  • Planning authorities tend to rely on datasets familiar to them – such as Flood Maps (SEPA), Dynamic Coast, Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD), and OS MasterMap to assess climate risks like flooding, coastal erosion, and social vulnerability.
  • There are additional datasets and tools which would benefit from further adoption by planning authorities, especially the Local Authority Climate Service.
  • Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water, infrastructure and landslides.
  • Planning authority use of spatial data is limited, despite support for it in the Local Development Planning Guidance.
  • Planning authorities find it challenging and time-consuming to gather data from multiple providers.
  • There is value in carrying out Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) to better direct the use of data but there is no consistent approach or simple tool available for planning authorities to use.
  • Collaboration across planning authorities allows knowledge and resources sharing, which leads to more consistent and effective outcomes.

Briefing note

The briefing note provides guidance on more usable and interpretable data that can be used for assessing climate risks and vulnerabilities.

If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.